Home

Dell Vizioncore Configuration manual

1. 60 Hello World stringProp String This is a non identity string property intProp Integer 31 countMetric 41 timeMetric second 51 rateMetric count second 51 fancyMetric 4 kilobyte 51 intWithUnit Integer minute 61 stringObs StringObservation obs END_SAMPLE_PERIOD END TABLE Example Type 2 Script The following is an example of a Type II script abc Working with vF oglight Tooling 467 Retrieving Data with Queries and Scripts echo off if not SECHOS echo SECHO if not SOS Windows_NT goto EXI if Ssample_freqs set sample_freq 60 echo LOG Start collecting data for NT at Ssample_freqs seconds Loop echo LOG New sample is available echo TABLE NT echo START_SAMPLE_PERIOD echo Foold String id Bar echo stringProp String This is a non echo intProp Integer 30 echo countMetric 40 echo timeMetric second 50 echo rateMetric count second 50 echo fancyMetric 4 kilobyte 50 echo intWithUnit Integer minute 60 echo stringObs StringObservation obs echo END_SAMPLE PERIOD echo START_SAMPLE_PERIOD echo Foold String id Another Bar echo stringProp String This is a non echo intProp Integer 31 echo countMetric 41 echo timeMetric second 51 echo rateMetric count second 51 echo fancyMetric 4 kilobyte 51 echo intWithUnit
2. Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 233 Working with Rules errs T prees oh w afas Contis 8 Astane a 3 veu 5 Simple rule i en mn OO O OO OOO a O a S Detre CGraitiira Ama A Actions Multiple severity rule Note The appearance of the Edit Rule area depends on the severity levels of the newly copied rule as indicated in the above illustration For more information about rule severity levels see Adding severity level variables on page 256 3 If required edit the newly copied rule For more information see Defining Rules on page 248 Deleting rules Use the Delete Selected button on the Manage Rules dashboard to delete a rule as outlined below 234 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide To delete a rule Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Rules dashboard on page 225 In the Manage Rules dashboard select the row containing the rule that you want to delete Click the Delete Selected button at the bottom The Delete Rule Confirmation dialog box appears Delete Rule Confirmation x Are you sure you want to delete the Following rules Agenthsgs In the Delete Rule Confirmation dialog box click OK The Delete Rule Confirmation dialog box closes Observe the Manage Registry Variables dashboard The newly deleted rule no longer shows in the list Disabling or enabling rules In some ca
3. 2007 2008 2003 _OK Cancel Tip The Day box accepts the values between 1 and 31 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 31 negative values are not accepted The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 24 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted To have the schedule item recurring at the recurrence pattern specified in step 4 without an end date in the Range of Occurrence area select the No End option The Range of Occurrence area refreshes no longer showing the controls for specifying the end date Range of Occurrence No End CEnd By Date 6 Save the changes to the schedule item New schedules In the lower right corner click Add Existing schedules In the lower right corner click Save Using Schedules 433 Creating Schedules The Schedule Items table refreshes showing the newly added schedule item Create Schedule Ang 14 2008 110401 AM EDT Edit Schedule My Schedule Changes have been saved Schedule Name My Schedule Save View Schedule Save Desc ription Comments schedule Items Next Scheaaed Tine Recurrence Pattern Range of Occurrence Detais Time Range Thu Aug 14 2008 235900 EOT Daly End By Aug 15 2008 0000 Every 1 days
4. Permission granted Permission denied Permissions not assigned Z Not assigned To add permissions for a derived metric Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard on page 333 1 Inthe Manage Derived Metrics dashboard in the row containing the rule whose permissions you want to edit click the Edit Permissions for Derived Metric button F The Edit Permissions for Derived Metric area appears in the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard Working with Data 337 Working with Derived Metrics Manage Derived Merrie Age D8 2008 21295 OM EDT Ede Permesions for Derved Metre uszaton Derived Metric Name utizeton Permissions Read Write Control Roles 2 To add permissions to a derived metric complete the following steps a Click the role or user to which you want to assign permissions Tip The Not Assigned icons in the Permissions columns indicate that the role has no permissions assigned to it The Add Role Permission or Add User Permission dialog box appears 338 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Add Role Permission Role Name Advanced Operator VRead Vr ite v iControl Add User Permission User Name demo VRead Vr ite iControl b In the dialog box that appears use the Read Write and Control check boxes to assign permissions as required and click Save The dialog box closes and the selected ent
5. 2 Inthe Copy Registry Variable dialog box click OK The Copy Registry Variable dialog box closes and another dialog box appears asking you to specify the name of the destination variable Copy Registry Variable x Please select a new registry variable name 3 Type the name of the variable and click OK Note You must use a unique name The dialog box closes and the Edit Registry Variable pane appears in the display area Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 193 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables tit By patry vietable Tere O Rogtiti y V as tal te Para Cartridges iune 1 Pegntsy Vah Type besi riptin amesent Cheat Del aa Oriel Vor Primme arahan reese see Se terduste hian Fea aud eek Act Vah Add Feagnitry vatsa Copy Regrry vonatie Go t Fegesty vinatia i 4 If required edit the newly copied variable mos erat Comets The vanatie For more information see Editing Registry Variables on page 200 Deleting registry variables Use the Delete Selected button on the Manage Registry Variables dashboard to delete a registry variable as outlined below When a registry variable is deleted all references to that variable in rule conditions and expressions become invalid This may cause the rule to fail to evaluate If this occurs you must manually modify the rule condition or expression To delete a registry variable This procedure continues fro
6. For examples on how to add actions to a rule severity level see Example Configuring Rule Action Parameters on page 314 and Example Implementing Command Actions in Rules on page 322 vFoglight action types There are two types of actions in vFoglight Entering It causes the action to be performed when a simple rule or a severity level in a multiple severity rule enters the state in which the condition for that rule or severity level is met It is a best practice that Entering actions be used by default Exiting It causes the action to be performed when a simple rule or a severity level in a multiple severity rule exits the state in which the condition for that rule or severity level is met Use of the Exiting action should be restricted to cases where an action specific to the state is needed For example if an Entering action starts a script then the Exiting action may stop the script vFoglight actions The actions available in vFoglight are as follows BSM Actions They send alarm data to vFoglight Service Discovery Dashboards SNMP Trap Actions They cause alarms to be forwarded as SNMP traps to a management system that supports SNMP such as Tivoli NetView Micromuse NetCool or HP Vantage Point when the rule fires Various parameters can be set for sending the SNMP trap including the community the trap type and the host and port for the monitoring service Email Actions They cause email messag
7. lt property name TransactionRate type Metric is containment true gt lt property name TransactionTag type String is identity true gt lt property name TransactionThroughput type Metric is containment true gt lt property name TransactionThroughputRate type Metric is containment true gt lt type gt Important Topology types can only be removed by uninstalling the cartridge that contains the types that you want to delete To add topology types Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Data gt Add Topology Type The Add Topology Type dashboard appears in the display area 330 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Abd Topology Type Out 22 2008 126760 PM EDT o Topology Types Topology destes the loge al and physical relationstos between data nodes ina model Ths dashed allows to add a new Topology Type Imocet From Fie Import Using Glo C Server Fin on Local Compter A m Fie Location on Server _ _ S Inport From Text lt IDOCTYPE types SYSTEM didRopclogy types aud gt types gt lt types gt Volldete Import 3 To add one or more topology types that are defined in an XML file accessible by you
8. Ensure that the File on Local Computer option is selected Click Browse and navigate to the CAR file using the file browser that appears The File on Local Computer box refreshes showing the full path to the CAR file or e Ifthe CAR file resides on the computer hosting the vFoglight Management Server specify its path and name Select the File on Server option and in the box to its right type the path and file name The path should be relative to the vFoglight Management Server installation directory 156 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide For example if the name of the CAR file is Virtual VMware car and it resides in the lt vfoglight_home gt cartridge directory on the vFoglight Management Server computer in the File on Server box type the following cartridge Virtual VMware 5_2_3 car 2 Optional To enable the cartridge immediately after its installation select the Enable on install check box Alternatively you can enable the cartridge at a later time To do that ensure that the Enable on install check box is cleared and follow the instructions in Enabling Cartridges on page 157 after the cartridge installation 3 Click Install Cartridge A status bar appears in the Cartridge Inventory dashboard indicating the installation progress Cartridge Inventory Please wait while installing If the installation succeeds a message appears in the upper left corner of the Install Cartridge are
9. Note This procedure continues from Creating Users on page 111 1 In the Manage Users dashboard select the row containing the user account whose password you want to change 2 Click the Change Password button at the bottom of the Manage Users dashboard The Change Password dialog box appears Change Password Password Confirm Password 3 Specify the new password a In the Change Password dialog box type the new password into each of the the Password and Confirm Password boxes Note The Password box is encrypted For example test 456 As you type the password into the Password and Confirm Password boxes asterisk characters appear 4 Managing Users and Security 115 Managing Users b Click OK The Change Password dialog box closes and vFoglight updates the user password in the database Forcing Password Changes When you create a user account for a user that has no access to the Manage Users dashboard use the Force Password Change button to ensure that the user changes their password the first time they attempt to log into vFoglight To force a password change for a user Note This procedure continues from Creating Users on page 111 1 Select the row containing the user whose password change you want to initiate the next time they attempt to log in Click the Force Password Change button at the bottom of the Manage Users dashboard The Confirm Force Password Chan
10. To delete an internal role Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Roles Dashboard on page 129 1 In the Manage Roles dashboard select the row containing the role that you want to delete 2 Click the Delete button at the bottom of the Manage Roles dashboard A message box appears asking you to confirm the delete operation Confirm Delete x p Are you sure you want to run the Delete action on the selected rows Cancel 3 Inthe message box click OK The message box closes 4 Observe the Manage Roles dashboard The role that you deleted no longer appears in the list Managing Users and Security 135 Configuring Password Settings Configuring Password Settings vFoglight automatically times out after 60 minutes of inactivity The following are the default restrictions that apply to passwords for administrators and for other types of internal users For more information about the types of users in vFoglight see Managing Users on page 107 An internal user s password expires after ninety 90 days An administrator s password expires after forty five 45 days The one exception is the password for the default user foglight which does not expire A user is locked out of the system after they enter an incorrect password for five 5 consecutive login attempts A user who fails five consecutive login attempts is locked out of the system for fifteen 15 minutes vFoglight
11. Uploading Agent Scripts and Building Agent Packages on page 452 Uploading Agent Scripts and Building Agent Packages Once you finish your script and get started with the Build Script Agent dashboard you can upload your script to the vFoglight Management Server and build the agent package To upload an agent script Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Build Script Agent Dashboard on page 451 1 Ensure that your agent script is valid and complete For information about the script syntax see Looking at the Script Syntax on page 449 2 Locate your agent script In the Build Script Agent dashboard click Browse Navigate to your script using the file browser that appears When you close the file browser and return to the Build Script Agent dashboard the Upload Script box refreshes showing the path and name of the script file while the Script Version boxes show the version number Upload Script C Quest_Software Foglight MyScriptAgent te Browse Script Version fi 5 2 z jo Working with vF oglight Tooling 453 Building Script Agents 3 Ensure that the version number of the script agent that you are about to upload is correct To change the version number use the Script Version boxes as required 4 Upload the script and build the agent Click Submit The Build Script Agent dialog box appears asking you to confirm the build operation Cartridge Cartridge Name a ae lala Versio
12. 1 In the Manage Rules dashboard in the row containing the rule whose permissions you want to edit click the Edit Permissions for Rule button i The Edit Permissions for Rules area appears in the Manage Rules dashboard Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 229 Working with Rules Manage Rules Ape 24 2008 1201S PM COT Edt Permissions for Ride Catalyst Memory Usege Checking Rule Name Catalyst Memory Usage hedra Permissions Read Wine Comrol Roles 2 To add permissions to a rule complete the following steps a Click the role or user to which you want to assign permissions Tip The Not Assigned icons in the Permissions columns indicate that the role has no permissions assigned to it The Add Role Permission or Add User Permission dialog box appears 230 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Add Role Permission Role Name Advanced Operator VRead vr ite vcontrol Add User Permission User Name demo VRead Mr ite MEontrol b Inthe dialog box that appears use the Read Write and Control check boxes to assign permissions as required and click Save The dialog box closes and the selected entry refreshes showing three check marks in the Permission columns one for each of the read write and control permissions Permission granted ow ff oo Permission denied 3 To edit or delete permissions for a rule complete the following steps a Click th
13. 478 479 Manage Derived Metrics 39 248 333 334 335 336 339 341 342 343 accessing 333 Add Role Permission dialog box 337 Add User Permission dialog box 337 adding calculations to derived metrics 344 Copy Derivation dialog box 339 340 copying derived metrics 339 creating derived metrics 342 defining derived metrics 344 Delete Derivation dialog box 341 deleting derived metrics 341 Edit Derived Metric view 342 Edit Role Permission dialog box 338 Edit User Permission dialog box 338 editing derived metric definitions 341 editing derived metric permissions 335 getting started with defining derived metrics 344 setting derived metric value types 350 triggering derived metrics 348 viewing derived metric definitions 341 Manage Retention Policies 39 372 378 379 380 381 382 386 387 388 390 accessing 378 Add Retention Policy dialog box 388 389 creating retention policies 388 deleting retention policies 381 Edit Retention Policy Period dialog box 386 387 388 390 editing retention policies 386 Manage Thresholds 40 353 354 355 356 359 360 361 362 372 accessing 353 Add Role Permission dialog box 357 Add User Permission dialog box 357 adding bounds to metric threshold levels 364 creating thresholds 361 defining thresholds 362 Delete Threshold dialog box 359 360 deleting thresholds 359 Edit Role Permission dialog box 358 Edit Threshold view 360 Edit User Permission dialog box 358 editing threshold definitions 360
14. Ace Calesinticn una court w second Value Type Meme v Comment s Seve Copy Oerned Metre Go to Cerrved Metres int Coiote 2 Observe the metric definitions 3 Edit the derived metric as required For complete instructions see Adding calculations to derived metrics on page 344 Creating Derived Metrics vFoglight allows you to create derived metrics using the Create Derived Metric dashboard You can access this dashboard from the navigation panel or through the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard Working with Data 343 Working with Derived Metrics When you create a derived metric vFoglight changes the topology type to which the derived metric is scoped by associating a new metric property to that topology type To create a derived metric Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow iF on the left 2 Open the Create Derived Metric dashboard by completing one of the following steps e On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Data gt Manage Derived Metrics In the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard that appears in the display area click the Add Derived Metric button in the lower left corner or e On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Data gt Create Derived Me
15. Adding or Removing Schedule Items on page 410 Creating Schedules vFoglight allows you to create schedules using the Create Schedule dashboard You can access this dashboard from the navigation panel or through the Manage Schedules dashboard When you create a schedule you can use it in rule derived metric and agent definitions as required 408 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Creating a schedule involves several steps Once you get started with schedule creation you need to define the start date and recurrence pattern For instructions see the following sections e Accessing the Create Schedule Dashboard on page 408 e Getting Started with Schedule Definitions on page 409 e Adding or Removing Schedule Items on page 410 e Defining Schedule Items on page 415 Accessing the Create Schedule Dashboard To access the Create Schedule dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow i on the left 2 Open the Create Schedule dashboard by completing one of the following steps e On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Schedules gt Manage Schedules In the Manage Schedules dashboard that appears in the display area click the Add Schedule button in the lower left corner or e On the
16. Scoping variables to topology types or object instances The way you define registry variables can help you to reduce the number of rules that need to be created and managed by allowing you to create a single rule that can be applied to several topology types or objects If you want to scope the registry variable to topology types or objects and add schedule specific values to it add one or more values to the Registry Values table To scope the registry value to a topology type or object Note This procedure continues from Using performance calendars on page 204 1 Click Add Registry Value at the bottom The Create Registry Value Step 1 view appears in the display area Manage Registry Variables Jul 18 2008 12 58 36 PM EDT Select Topology and Default Value Add Performance Calendars Create Registry Value for Test2 Step 1 Select Topology and Default Value Registry Variable Test2 Name Registry Value Integer Type ee Select Type x vee Object All Objects Default Static value C Registry Reference Value ns Adaf Cancel Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 207 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables Click Topology Type and select a type from the list that appears Optional Narrow down your scope to a particular object Click Topology Object and select an object from the list that appears Specify the default value that you want the variable to use when scopin
17. Specifying a Rule Condition or Derived Metric Expression on page 481 Caution If you change the metrics registry variables or topology object properties that are referenced in the condition ensure that the new items are available for the topology type or object s to which the rule is scoped Important To separate multiple lines in conditional expressions use a semicolon followed by a carriage return In conditional expressions consisting of a single line using a semicolon to end the line is optional For example Multi line expressions Example A Correct println event dump event get report name MyReport Incorrect printin event dump event get report name MyReport Note The first line is missing a semicolon which causes the expression to result in an error Single line expressions Example B Correct println event dump Example C Correct 266 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide println event dump Note Using a semicolon to end the line in a single line expression is optional therefore both expressions are valid 3 Multiple severity rules Activate the condition by selecting the Activate check box You must activate the condition for a severity level in a multiple severity rule before you can save it If the Activate check box is cleared when you click Save the condition that you specified will be discarded as will any expressions or actions that you
18. To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Users amp Security gt Configure Password Settings The Configure Password Settings dashboard appears in the display area showing a list of password settings Configure Password Settings Apr 17 2008 9 28 32 PM EDT Configure Password Settings Days before user password expires 90 Days before administrator password expires 45 Bad logins before user account is locked out 5 Seconds after which lockout expires 0 for no expiration Minimum password length 7 Number of old passwords that willbe remembered 12 Number of days before password expiry to warn user User password complexity level 2 Administrator password complexity level 3 User cache expiry in minutes login is fast until cache expires From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures e Editing Password Settings on page 137 Managing Users and Security 137 Configuring Password Settings Editing Password Settings Use the Configure Password Settings dashboard to edit any policies that you want to change To edit password settings Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Configure Password Settings Dashboard on page 136 1 Inthe Configure Password Settings dashboard click the Edit button in the lower left corner The Configure Password Setting
19. When an agent connects to the vFoglight Management Server it is provided with sets of properties that it uses to configure its correct running state vFoglight stores agent properties in the vFoglight Management Server Any passwords that are defined in agent properties and stored in the database are encrypted This feature is useful in situations when a database password is defined in agent properties you have different types of databases and their administrators in your environment such as the vFoglight database and a production database Having a database password encrypted prevents those database administrators that do not interface with vFoglight from accessing the vFoglight database Default versions of these properties are installed with the cartridge in which the agents are included You can edit the default properties create sets of properties that apply only to a specific agent instance and create edited clones of property sets that are used by a subset of the agents of a certain type There are two types of agent properties e Primary They are included in the agent component and their settings can be specific to the agent type or the agent instance Each agent comes with a set type specific properties You can edit them for a particular agent instance leave them unchanged or apply their settings to all agent instances of the same type If you do not change agent properties for an instance vFoglight uses the default properties
20. on page 174 Use the Clone button on the Agent pane to clone lists that are assigned to secondary agent properties as outlined below To clone a secondary property Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Agent Properties Dashboard on page 168 1 Inthe Agent Properties dashboard in the Agent pane locate the secondary property that you want to clone 2 Click the Clone button to the right of the box that contains the property value 174 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide A dialog box appears Clone name AppMonitor_PurgeDays_ 3 In the dialog box in the Clone name box specify the name of the cloned list either by editing the value that appears As you edit the list name a Clone button appears in the dialog box to the left of the Cancel button Clone name Jonitor_PurgeDays_List2 Cine cancel 4 Click the Clone button that appears to the left of the Cancel button in the dialog box The dialog box closes and the secondary property refreshes with its value set to the newly cloned list The property name and list name appear red in the Agent pane to indicate the change Purge Data after Ap pMonitor_ Puri 5 Save your changes to the agent properties In the Agent pane in the lower right corner click the Save button The Agent pane refreshes Editing lists in secondary properties Editing a list involves changing the value of its entries adding new entries or deleting
21. s condition s if you change its scope the metrics registry variables and topology object properties specified in the existing condition s may not be available for the new topology type or object s To get started with specifying a rule scope Note This procedure continues from Triggering rules on page 251 254 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e Inthe Rule Definition tab use the Rule Scope area to scope the rule to one or more topology objects For detail instructions see Setting the Scope for a Rule or Derived Metric on page 474 From here you can proceed to Defining Conditions Alarms and Actions on page 254 Defining Conditions Alarms and Actions Simple rules have a single condition only and can be in one of three states Fire Undefined or Normal If the condition is met the state of the rule is set to Fire and any actions that are associated with this state are performed If the condition is not met the rule remains in the Normal state If the rule s condition cannot be evaluated because data is missing or unavailable the state of the rule is set to Undefined The condition for a simple rule is regularly evaluated against monitoring data Therefore the state of the rule can change if the data changes Multiple severity rules can have up to five severity levels Undefined Fatal Critical Warning or Normal When you create a multiple severity rule you must speci
22. sssesssiessssrrrrerssssrsrrersesrrsrressnrnns 392 328 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide About Data Management in vFoglight vFoglight models retain collected data and transform it into nodes adding configuration data to each node as properties and attaching metric data to appropriate nodes as metrics Each metric is associated with a topology type or with a specific topology object In some cases you will need to create custom topology types that suit your monitoring needs For more information see Adding Topology Types on page 329 There are two types of metrics in vFoglight e Raw metrics They include the metrics collected directly from monitored hosts e Derived metrics They are calculated from one or more raw or derived metrics Derived metrics are scoped to a topology type or its objects You can create and manage derived metrics using the Administration module Derived metrics are useful in situations when you need to reuse metric expressions in rules For more information on how to manage and create derived metrics see Working with Derived Metrics on page 332 In vFoglight retention policies allow you to define time periods where monitoring data can be sampled aggregated or purged from your system Topology objects inherit retention policies from its topology type vFoglight allows you to alter retention policies for one or more topology types as required For more information see Managing Rete
23. 2007 2008 2003 Ok Cancel 3 Specify the duration of the schedule item Using Schedules 435 Creating Schedules e If you want the schedule to occur for a part of the day complete one of the following steps e Specify the start time and end time of the schedule item or e Use the Start Time hh mm boxes to specify the hour and minute of the start time Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 23 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted e Select the End Time hh mm option and specify the hour and minute of the end time Note Tip The Duration hh mm boxes appear disabled when you specify the End Time hh mm option Start Date 14 August a End Timefhh mm 0 0 z Start Tima hh mm 14 30 l Whole Day Duration ih mm The end time should occur after the start time The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 24 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 24 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted e Specify the start time and duration of the schedule item 436 vF og
24. Message Status Installation on tor01 2991 prod quest corp 69a1 a259 55c9 4e1 3 After a few moments in the Deploy Agent Package dialog box in the Status column of the Progress table a green check mark appears indicating a success of the deployment operation Working with vF oglight Tooling 457 Building Script Agents Deploy Agent Package Task Deploying package MyScriptAgent 1 2 0 Progress Message Status Installation on tor01 2991 prod quest corp 69a1 4259 55c9 4e1 f ZF ke 5 Click OK to close the Deploy Agent Package dialog box From here you can proceed to Creating and Activating Script Agent Instances on page 457 Creating and Activating Script Agent Instances Once you have successfully deployed the package containing the script agent you can create one or more instances of your custom script agent Instance creation is identical to the process you use to create agent instances of any other type However you need to ensure that the agent type you choose matches the one you build and deploy Use the Agent Status area in the Build Script Agent dashboard to create one or more instances of your script agent Alternatively you can create agent instances using the command line To create and activate a script agent instance Note This procedure continues from Deploying Script Agent Packages on page 454 458 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 1 Inthe Build Script Ag
25. Note 1 This procedure continues from Accessing the Script Editor Dashboard on page 468 Select a topology type whose objects you want to query In the Script Editor dashboard click Query and select a topology type from the list that appears For example to select all objects of the Host topology type select Host List all instances of the selected topology type Click List Instances The Instances area refreshes showing all instances of the selected topology type and also any objects whose type is inherited from the selected topology type For example if you selected the Host topology type the Instances area lists all object instances of that type showing the following information for each topology object e Topology object ID e Topology type e Instance name Working with vF oglight Tooling 471 Retrieving Data with Queries and Scripts Query List instances Host Do Query Instances 76797 669 ce32 47 b4 9fc4 bed3d35efd42 Host tord1 3008 prod quest corp ee123035 d9fl 4a17 93c8 686694c59f6a Host toro12991 prod quest corp Topology object ID Topology type Instance name 3 View information about one of the listed topology objects In the Instances box click a topology object ID The Object ID Object Type Hierarchy and Object Properties boxes refresh showing the information about the selected topology object instance Object ID 75797889 cei2 47be Met bodidiseld4e Object Type Hierarchy Ho
26. Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Retention Policies Dashboard on page 378 1 In the Manage Retention Policies dashboard in the row containing the topology type whose retention policies you want to delete select the check box on the left of the Topology Type Property Name column 2 Click the Delete Selected button at the bottom Your Web browser displays a dialog box that allows you to proceed or with or cancel the delete operation The page at http locathost 8080 says Are you sure you want to delete retention policies of selected topology property Le Note The appearance of the above dialog may be different depending on the type and version of your Web browser 3 Confirm the delete operation 4 Observe the Manage Retention Policies dashboard The newly deleted retention policies no longer appears in the list Working with Data 383 Managing Retention Policies Viewing the Hierarchy of Topology Types in the Database Schema Before you get started with editing retention policies you need to identify the correct topology type whose retention policies you want to edit When you set a retention policy for a topology type the ancestors of that topology type inherit the newly set retention policy It is therefore important to identify the ancestors of the topology type before editing its retention policies The Manage Retention Policies dashboard lists all of the avail
27. Working with Thresholds Threshold Sub Level Unknown Stopped Starting Stopping Running Collecting data Running but not collecting data Fire Clear Acknowledge Undefined Normal Fire Warning Critical Fatal vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Threshold Level Threshold Sub Level CatalystServiceState Stopped Stopping Starting Started Failed Destroyed Created Unregistered Registered ThresholdSeverity Normal Critical Fatal You can have one or more threshold bounds in a threshold level There are three different types of threshold bounds e Metric Threshold Bound Severity level is bound to another metric e Registry Variable Threshold Bound Severity level is bound to a registry variable e Constant Threshold Bound Severity level is bound to a fixed value The vFoglight Management Server evaluates threshold bounds in the order that they are listed starting with the first one Changing their order affects the output of actions that are associated with those threshold levels For example if a threshold level includes several threshold bounds that reference standard vFoglight severity levels in the ascending order such as Normal Warning Critical and Fatal and you change their order in the list to Normal Critical Warning and Fatal the Warning the bound that is associated with the Warning level evaluates to True only after the evaluation of the Critical level Working with Data 367 Working
28. creating 504 agent logs retrieving 505 Agent Operation dialog box 461 462 463 agent packages deploying 503 agent properties cloning lists in secondary properties 173 editing lists in secondary properties 174 primary type specific agent properties 172 type specific agent properties 171 removing cloned lists from secondary properties 177 Agent Properties dashboard 44 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 175 177 501 accessing 168 cloning lists in secondary properties 173 editing lists in secondary properties 174 editing primary type specific properties 172 editing type specific properties 171 removing cloned lists from secondary properties 177 Agent Properties node in navigation panel 168 Agent Status dashboard 38 45 161 461 502 Agent Operation dialog box 461 462 463 Create Agent dialog box 459 Create Agent Results dialog box 459 460 agents instances creating 457 managing blackouts 179 packages deploying 454 uploading 452 properties accessing Agent Properties dashboard 168 editing 464 managing 167 uploading 452 Agents dashboards 165 about 166 Agent Adapters 502 Agent Blackouts 179 180 182 Selected Agents dialog box 181 182 AgentHosts 44 Agent Properties 44 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 175 177 accessing 168 cloning lists in secondary properties 173 editing lists in secondary properties 174 editing primary type specific properties 172 editing type specific properties 171 removing cloned lists from second
29. defined by the foglight ha jndi rmi port parameter HA JNDI JNP Port Port for the bootstrap JNP service when vFoglight is running in HA mode This setting is defined by the foglight ha jndi jnp port parameter For more information about High Availability mode see the Installation and Setup Guide HA JRMP Invoker Port Port for the RMI JRMP invoker when vFoglight is running in HA mode This setting is defined by the foglight ha jrmp invoker port parameter 64 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide HA Pooled Invoker Port Pooled invoker port when vFoglight is running in HA mode This setting is defined by the foglight ha pooled invoker port parameter HA JNDI UDPGroup Port Port for the UDP group when vFoglight is running in HA mode This setting is defined by the foglight ha jndi udpgroup port parameter HTTP Port HTTP 1 1 connector used for HTTP connections This setting is defined by the foglight http port parameter HTTPS SSL Port HTTP 1 1 connector used for HTTPS connections This setting is defined by the foglight https port parameter Note The vFoglight Management Server uses the HTTP port for local access even if you are accessing the browser interface through an HTTPS connection If that is the case both ports are open the HTTPS port for external requests coming from the browser interface and the HTTP port for local requests For example the reporting service accesses the vFoglight Management Server throu
30. e HostTopCPUProcessObservation e HostTopIOProcessObservation e HostTopMemoryProcessObservation e Metric e RequestTraces e SPIDefaultObservation e StringListObservation e StringObservation Caution The derived metric data types that you define at metric creation time cannot be changed 6 Optional Add comments about the newly created derived metric From here you can proceed to Triggering derived metrics on page 348 Triggering derived metrics An instance of a derived metric is created when its definition is triggered A derived metric is configured to have one of the following triggers Working with Data 349 Working with Derived Metrics e Schedule Driven Derived Metric A schedule driven derived metric is evaluated based on a schedule created in the Administration Module See Chapter 8 Using Schedules on page 395 for information about schedules There are three trigger timing options for schedule driven derived metrics e Enter and Exit Causes the derived metric to be evaluated when the period defined by the schedule begins and ends e Enter only Causes the derived metric to be evaluated when the period defined by the schedule begins e Exit only Causes the derived metric to be evaluated when the period defined by the schedule ends e Time Driven Derived Metrics A time driven trigger causes the derived metric to be evaluated once per pre defined interval e Data Driven Derived Metrics If a derived m
31. existing ones This feature is useful in situations when you clone a list and need to use its modified clones in certain agent configurations Managing Agents 175 Managing Agent Properties by Type Use this type of approach when you want to use different lists at different times or to assign different versions of the same list to agent instances of the same agent type Use the Edit button on the Agent pane to edit lists that are assigned to secondary agent properties as outlined below Caution Changes made to lists can affect multiple agents To edit a list for a secondary property Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Agent Properties Dashboard on page 168 1 Inthe Agent Properties dashboard in the Agent pane locate the secondary property that you want to edit 2 Click the Edit button to the right of the box that contains the property value Caution Secondary agent properties can apply to multiple agents If you want to edit a cloned list that is instance specific ensure that you select that list in the property box before clicking the Edit button The List pane refreshes showing the contents of the selected list AppMonitor_PurgeDays_List2 Purge Days AgentMsgs 3 AppAyailability 14 ApplicationTotals 190 ProcessDetail 14 ProcessTotals 14 3 To edit an entry in the list complete the following steps a Double click the row containing that entry A dialog box appears 176 vF
32. lt types gt tags For example lt DOCTYPE types SYSTEM dtd topology types dtd gt lt types gt lt type name MyHost extends Host gt lt property name MyAlarmTotalCount type Integer is containment true gt lt property name MyDomainName type String is containment true gt lt type gt lt type name MyAgent extends Agent gt lt property name AgentName type String is containment true gt lt property name MyAnnotations type String is containment true gt lt type gt lt types gt Validate the topology definition by clicking Validate The Alert message box appears indicating that the topology definition is valid Alert x Successful The XML topology type is valid and can be imported Note The validation process is limited Your XML may appear to be valid and still fail on import 6 Close Click Import Topology 332 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide The Alert message box appears this time indicating that the topology import was successful Alert x Successful Topology Type Successfully Imported affecting 2 types Working with Derived Metrics vFoglight transforms collected data into nodes It adds configuration and metric data to each node as properties and metrics respectively A metric is a specific value that is measured over time Each metric is associated with a topology type or with a specific topology object There are
33. retention policies and other vFoglight entities The following concepts and terms relate to cartridge management in vFoglight e Cartridge A unit that is distributed separately from the vFoglight Management Server Cartridges contain components that extend the functionality of vFoglight such as agents rules and views e Cartridge installation The act of installing a cartridge on the machine hosting the vFoglight Management Server Cartridge installation makes the Management Server aware of the cartridge Note Installing a cartridge does not make it available for use by vFoglight but simply prepares it to be enabled e Enabled cartridge A cartridge whose components are part of the Management Server and available for use by vFoglight e Cartridge component A cartridge contains one or more components such as dashboards and agent installers See About Cartridge Components on page 148 for more information About Cartridge Components A cartridge may include one or more components Examples of cartridge components are described below e Agent installers packages A cartridge may include one or more vFoglight Agent installers An agent monitors a specific part of your environment such as a VirtualCenter application or server Managing Cartridges 149 Installing and Managing Cartridges See Managing Agents on page 165 for more information about agents e Agent adapters Agent adapters are components that allow ag
34. see Using Functions with Conditions and Expressions on page 491 488 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide To insert a Groovy function into a rule condition or derived metric expression Note This procedure continues from Editing conditions and expressions on page 482 1 In the display area place the cursor in the Condition box rules or Expression box derived metrics where you want to insert the function 2 Inthe Condition Editor rules or Expression Editor derived metrics dialog box click the Function tab The Function tab opens in the dialog box Expression Editor amp Registry Variable s3 Metric Property 45 Function Function Name Please Select Function x Usage Example Insert Close 3 Choose the Groovy function that you want to add to your condition or expression Click Function Name and select a function from the list The Function tab refreshes allowing you to specify the arguments for the selected function and shows usage examples Using the Query Language 489 Using the Query Language in Rule Conditions or Derived Metric Expressions Expression Editor 4 Registry Variable s3 Metric Property 5 Function Function Name avg iv Arg 1 Usage Example avg queueSize for 5 minutes a returns the average of queueSize metrics of the scoping object over 3 last 5 minutes avg queueSize from JZEEExecuteQueue where name like Nexus 4 re
35. showing 1 9 of 9 Roles as of May 30 2008 13 25 35 Fiter by rume Grep Tye ome a Crome Administrator Foglight Administrators Advancad Operator Cartridge Developer Console User Dashboard Designer Dashboard User General Access Operator Security Creole Role Foglight Administrators Cartridge Developers Cartridge Developers Foglight Administrat Foglight Administrators Foglight Administrators Fogtight Administrators Foglight Administrators Fogtight Operators Foglight Security Administrators 4 OM EOT Bafresh L Clear Filters Twe Built in Built in Built in ors Foglight Operators Built in Built in Guilt in builtin Built in Built in Select AM Teledt Heme 3 To sort the list by name groups or type click the Name Groups or Type column headings as required 4 To filter the list of roles use one or more of the following boxes at the top of the Manage Roles list e Name Type the role name for which you want to filter e Groups Type the group name for which you want to filter 130 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e Type Type the type name for which you want to filter For example to list only the roles whose name starts with Dashboard in the Name box type Dashboard The Manage Roles list refreshes showing the list of roles whose name matches the filter pattern Manage Bales May 30 2008 10504 0M EDT Manage Roles showing 1 2 of 2 Roles as of May 30 20
36. the right Entering e Exiting See vFoglight action types on page 278 for more information 3 Specify the action Click Action and select an action from the list that appears See vFoglight actions on page 278 for more information 4 Optional Add information about the selected action In the Description box type the action description 5 Click Add The Action tab shows a list of parameters associated with the newly selected action 288 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide From here you can edit the action parameters as required For details see About action parameters on page 288 About action parameters Each rule action has a set of parameters associated with it Some action parameters are mandatory while others are optional When you add an action to a rule you must configure the action s mandatory parameters in order for it to be executed when the rule reaches the severity level for which the action is defined When specifying an action parameter you can make use of vFoglight registry variables rule level variables or specify a custom value The data type of the specified value must match the action parameter s data type Note To successfully configure an action you must ensure that all of the actions s mandatory parameters are specified The following table lists rule actions and their parameters Parameter Required Description BSM Actions Alarm system eve
37. vFoglight Memory Usage Check Rule Purpose This rule checks the memory that is available to vFoglight Scope CatalystServer jvm vFoglight Topology Size Limit Reached Purpose Checks if any attempts to create topology objects are failing because the topology size limit has been reached This number is defined by the foglight limit instances registry variable whose global default value is set to 10000 You can change this value as required For more information see Editing Registry Variables on page 200 Scope CatalystTopologySizeConstraintService Remote Agent Manager State Rule Purpose This rule checks whether all instances of the vFoglight Agent Manager are connected to the vFoglight Management Server Scope RemoteClient Rule Definition Conditions State An instance of the vFoglight Agent Manager is disconnected Warning Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 311 Working with Rules ServiceLevelE valuation FMSServiceSLP Rule Purpose vFoglight monitors each service either implicit or user defined for service level compliance The ServiceLevelEvaluation FMSServiceSLP rule checks the availability of each service and raises an alarm if the availability is lower than the a predefined threshold during a period of one hour Scope FSMServiceLevelPolicy Rule Definition Conditions State An average availability during one hour period is below 95 Warning An average availability during one
38. your user account must belong to a group with the Administration role For more information about users groups and roles see Managing Users and Security on page 105 ADOULMF OGM Candes ioiii aaa 148 Installing and Managing Cartridges s s ssssssssserssssrrrrenssssrntrensnsnrinrennnsnnnnrennnnnnintnnnnnnnrnrrennnannnnne 149 Downloading Agent COMPONeNtS cccesscsssssessssssstsssssssssssssssessessessnsrsssnsssssnesseeerssesarsessansessenses 161 148 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide About vFoglight Cartridges A cartridge is a unit that is distributed separately from the vFoglight Management Server but can be added to the Management Server A cartridge contains components that extend the functionality of vFoglight such as agent installers communication capabilities modifications to the way that data is transformed or handled model definitions rules reports and views An installation of the vFoglight Management Server includes a collection of core cartridges including the Monitoring Policy Service Model and other core cartridges Core cartridges are installed with the server and are enabled on its startup Along with the core cartridges your configuration can include other cartridges that are installed additionally on the server and are designed to monitor specific types of environments such as the OS cartridge Both core and installed cartridges can contain a set of rules registry variables tables
39. 134 140 accessing 108 adding users to groups 112 Change Password dialog box 114 115 changing user passwords 114 Confirm Delete dialog box 117 118 Confirm Force Password Change dialog box 115 Confirm Unlock dialog box 116 Create User dialog box 111 112 524 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide creating users 111 Edit Groups dialog box 113 114 forcing password changes 115 unlocking passwords 115 Manage Users node in navigation panel 109 models about 30 modules in navigation panel Administration 10 29 31 32 33 34 37 38 39 43 50 53 54 67 69 76 83 88 105 109 118 119 128 129 136 140 149 150 161 162 168 179 184 185 196 209 217 224 226 247 248 283 311 316 328 329 332 333 343 344 353 354 361 362 379 396 397 408 451 468 484 497 vFoglight 384 Navigation view 44 nodes in navigation panel Add Topology Type 329 Administration 43 Agent Blackouts 179 Agent Properties 168 Agents 10 11 33 168 179 Build ScriptAgent 451 Cartridge Inventory 150 Cartridges 10 11 33 150 162 Check Registry Value 209 Components for Download 162 Configure Directory Services 140 Configure Password Settings 136 Connection Status 54 Create Derived Metric 343 Create Registry Variable 196 283 Create Rule 247 311 316 Create Schedule 408 Create Threshold 362 Data 10 33 329 333 343 354 361 362 379 Manage Derived Metrics 248 333 343 Manage Groups 119 anage Licenses 69 a
40. 2355 howis from 2353 Delete Selected Add Schedule tem Copy Schedule Go to Schedule List Delete This Schedule 7 Add one or more schedule items if required For details see Adding or Removing Schedule Items on page 410 To define a schedule item that occurs monthly Note This procedure continues from Adding or Removing Schedule Items on page 410 1 In the Recurrence Pattern area select the Monthly option The view refreshes showing a set of controls that allow you to define a schedule item that occurs that occurs on a monthly basis 434 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Schedule Name My Schedule Description Comments Start Date 14 August yi2008 End Time hh mm oo oo 3 Duration hh mm po E Start Time hh mm joo o0 I Whole Day Recurrence Pattern Cc Once Periodical C Daily By Date Weekly CBy Week Day i4 of every fi month s Monthly C Yearly 2 Specify the start date of the recurrence pattern Use the Start Date boxes to specify the day month and year of the start date Alternatively click the Calendar button on the right and use the calendar controls that appear to specify the start date Tip The Day box accepts the values between 1 and 31 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 31 negative values are not accepted August 2008 29 30 31 tj 12 13 14 49 20 24 28 27 28 2 3 4
41. 238 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 3 Click OK The Rule Confirmation dialog box closes and the Manage Rules dashboard refreshes 4 Inthe Manage Rules dashboard observe the row containing the rule whose alarms you resumed The absence of the warning icon indicates that the alarms for the rule are no longer suspended If a warning icon appears in the row containing the rule with newly resumed alarms place the mouse pointer over the icon The tool tip that appears no longer indicates that the rule s alarms are suspended Note The warning icon indicates different types of states a rule may be in For example it appears when a rule is disabled or when its alarms or actions are suspended Placing the mouse pointer over the icon shows more details about the rule state Suspending or resuming actions You can configure a rule to stop performing actions for a specified length of time beginning immediately It can be useful to suspend alarms in many situations such as when one or more servers are being brought offline for system maintenance To suspend actions for a rule Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Rules dashboard on page 225 1 Inthe Manage Rules dashboard select the row containing the rule whose actions you want to suspend 2 Click the Suspend Actions button at the bottom The Temporarily Suspend Rule Actions dialog box appears Temporarily Suspend Rule Actio
42. 7320 Switchboard 069 9792 7000 Greece Web Address Support euro dell com International Access Code 00 Technical Support Gold Service Technical Support 00800 44 14 95 18 00800 44 14 00 83 Switchboard 2108129810 Country Code 49 Gold Service Switchboard 2108129811 Sales 2108129800 Fax 2108129812 Grenada Web Address www dell com gd E Mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales la techsuppo dell com toll free 1 866 540 3355 Guatemala Web Address www dell com gt E Mail Address la techsupport dell com Technical Support Customer Service Sales 1 800 999 0136 Guyana E Mail Address Ta techsupport dell com Technical Support Customer Service Sales toll free 1 877 270 4609 Hong Kong Web Address support ap dell com International Access Code 001 Country Code 852 Technical Support E mail Address Technical Support Dimension and Inspiron Technical Support OptiPlex Latitude and Dell Precision Technical Support Servers and Storage Technical Support Projectors PDAs Switches Routers etc Customer Service Large Corporate Accounts Global Customer Programs Medium Business Division Home and Small Business Division support dell com cn email 00852 2969 3188 00852 2969 3191 00852 2969 3196 00852 3416 0906 00852 3416 0910 00852 3416 0907 00852 3416 0908 00852 3416 0912 00852 2969 3105 India Dell Support Website Portable and Desktop Support Desktop Sup
43. A pred A trg A tege A tego A tror tege A o A A t WA A Add Venti Nate al hetast ene 3 To sort the list of variables by their name or type click the Variable Name or Type column headings as required 4 Optional Filter the list of variables To show only the variables whose name matches a text pattern type that pattern into the Variable Name box at the top of the list The Manage Registry Variables dashboard refreshes showing only the variables whose name matches the text pattern To show only the variables that are associated with specific topology types click By Topology at the top of the list and select the topology type for which you want to filter from the list that appears The Manage Registry Variables dashboard refreshes showing only the variables that have one or more values scoped to the selected topology type To show only the variables that have a global default value set click By Global Default and select Defined from the list that appears The Manage Registry Variables dashboard refreshes showing only the variables that have a global default value To show only the variables that do not have a global default value set click By Global Default and select Undefined from the list that appears Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 187 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables The Manage Registry Variables dashboard refreshes showing only the variables that do not have a global default v
44. Accessing the vFoglight Configuration Dashboard on page 67 From the Federation view you can drill down to the vFoglight Server Topology view by clicking Federation Mode or Number of Children to see additional details about the federation status Administration Home gt Foglight Server Topology tor012991 prod quest corp og Type Child Standalone Status 4 Connected Version S 2i Last Disconnect Time nja HTTP Link http tor012991 prod quest corp 8080 HTTPs Link https tor012991 prod quest corp 8443 Server The Server view displays the following settings 58 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Version The version number of the vFoglight Management Server whose configuration items you are viewing Build The build version of the vFoglight Management Server whose configuration items you are viewing vFoglight Home The installation directory of the vFoglight Management Server on the computer on which it is installed JBoss Server Directory The installation directory of the JBoss application server that is running vFoglight Management Server on the computer on which the vFoglight Management Server is installed Server Version Leh a Build 523 2008081 1 0040 Foglight Home C Quest_Software Foglight JBoss Server Directory C Quest_Software Foglight server deFault For information on how to view the information on the vFoglight Configuration dashboard see Accessing the vFoglight Configu
45. Administration and Configuration Guide Copy Derivation Are you sure you want to create a copy of the selected Derived Metric You will be directed to create derivation page with selected values 2 Inthe Copy Derivation dialog box click OK The Copy Derivation dialog box closes and the Create Derived Metric view appears in the display area Manage Derived Metris s Moy 27 D008 RITI AM EDT Create Derived Metric o Derived Metric Name Copy of avedability Derived Metric Calculations Derived Metric Scope fepression Trigger Type Description C BoscionficsnansclineSLP 8 arveragelinsponse Timed Tene Oriverd 00 01 00 regstry Daseinef actor mastina Tes 7051 Add Caiculaton Delete Selected Unit Court il IY Vatue Type Matic wx Comments Produces an availability metric on the Baseline Response Time SLP object that treate the target object Af unavailable if the average response time exceeds the scaled baseline response time Ada Go to Derved Metics Lat 3 Provide a unique name for the destination metric In the Create Derived Metric view in the Derived Metric Name box type the name of the derived metric 4 If required edit the settings of the newly copied derived metric For more information see Defining Derived Metrics on page 344 Working with Data 341 Working with Derived Metrics Deleting derived metrics Use the Delete Selected button on the Manage Derived Metrics
46. Cartridge Inventory 149 Add Topology Type node in navigation panel 329 Components for Download 161 Add User Permission dialog box 189 229 337 357 Data dashboards 327 332 353 400 about 328 Administration dashboard 39 43 44 45 46 47 48 adding topology types 329 49 50 managing derived metrics 333 Audited Activities view 50 managing retention policies 372 Current Statistics view 45 46 47 managing thresholds 353 downloading agent components 161 Currently Licensed Capabilities view 48 getting started 32 Federation view 49 License Information view 48 installing and managing cartridges 149 Navigation view 44 managing agent blackouts 179 Administration module 10 29 31 32 33 34 37 38 managing agent properties 167 39 43 50 53 54 67 69 76 83 88 105 109 118 managing agents 165 119 128 129 136 140 149 150 161 162 168 about 166 179 184 185 196 209 217 224 226 247 248 managing cartridges 147 283 311 316 328 329 332 333 343 344 353 about 148 354 361 362 379 396 397 408 451 468 484 cartridge components 148 497 managing derived metrics 333 about 29 managing groups 118 models and scope 30 managing registry variables 185 Agents dashboards 165 managing retention policies 372 about T66 managing roles 127 135 139 Agent Blackouts 179 managing rules 225 510 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide managing schedules 397 managing thresholds 353 managing users 1
47. Day Using Schedules 437 Creating Schedules 4 Specify the recurrence pattern To have the schedule occurring on a specified day of the month at the rate of one or more months in the Recurrence Pattern area ensure that the By Date option is selected and then specify the day of the month and the rate at which it occurs Tip The Day box accepts the values between 1 and 31 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 31 negative values are not accepted The every box accepts any positive values For example to have the schedule occurring on the fifth day of every second month in the Day box type 5 and in the every box type 2 as illustrated bellow ae reas Day 5 of every 2 month s To have the schedule occurring on one or more days of the week at a rate of one or more months in the Recurrence Pattern area select the By Week option The Recurrence Pattern area refreshes showing a set of the controls that allow you to specify the pattern Recurrence Pattern Monday Gonca Tuesday Periodical Daily CBy Date CoE thrscay of every 7 month s CWeekly By Week Ee reads ay Monthly Y CY earl F Saturday FM Sunday Specify the week of the month the day of the week and the rate at which it occurs Tip The every box accepts any positive values For example to have the schedule occurring on the second Tuesday of every third month click First and se
48. Exiting Actes Condition ls To view a rule summary Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Rules dashboard on page 225 1 In the Manage Rules dashboard click the Rule Name column of the row containing the rule that you want to enable or disable The Edit Rule view appears in the display area Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 243 Working with Rules es ee a EOIS Rute Type Sigle Mate Simple rule hare Senmory a te iaramn j Saem aam A acae setm vases Condmiom Alarm amp Actiont Bua jic OU ut Bate Io sarye ireen Ae Multiple severity rule Note The appearance of the Edit Rule view depends on the severity levels of the newly copied rule as indicated in the above illustration For more information about rule severity levels see Defining rule types on page 250 Open the Rule Summary pane by clicking the Roll Down button E on the Rule Summary bar The Rule Summary pane expands in the display area 244 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Caruldge Name OS Windows System Rule Type Multiple Seventy Rule Rule Triggering Dats Orven Rule Scope Windows_System_System_Table Rule Alarms Active Rule Actions Active Rule Status Actwe ls Alarm amp Action Behaviors Fite action if 2 consecutive evaluations ace Irue Alarm Description Help n POPU _Uiization gt r
49. For complete information about any agent properties that appear in the Agent pane refer to your cartridge documentation Editing Type Specific Agent Properties The Agent pane of the Agent Properties dashboard contains simple primary properties and list based properties Application Process List AppListFile v List property Sample Frequency seconds 300 Use Quick Check True False Primary properties Quick Check Time 60 For more information on agent properties in vFoglight see Managing Agent Properties by Type on page 167 172 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide You can edit a primary property simply by specifying the desired value or option for the selected agent type Editing list based properties is somewhat different in that it allows you to either edit an existing list or copy a list and make edits to it For instructions on how to edit agent properties see the following sections Editing primary type specific properties Use the Agent pane of the Agent Properties dashboard to edit primary type specific properties as outlined below To edit a primary type specific property Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Agent Properties Dashboard on page 168 1 Inthe Agent Properties dashboard in the Agent pane locate the primary property that you want to edit Note Use caution when modifying type specific agent properties as these settings can apply
50. If you place your script elsewhere in the file system include the script path SNMP Trap Actions CommunityString Yes SNMP community string TargetAddress Yes Trap target address TargetPort Yes Trap target port The following rules apply to the command syntax for Command and Remote Command actions e The executable command must point to a path which can be understood and executed by the native operating system such as a a Windows batch file or a binary executable file For example Correct C hello bat perl C hello pl my_domain my_server my_group my_user_account hello bat 292 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Incorrect P hello bat where P is a mapped drive Only those commands that point to a specific batch file on a physical drive produce a command output in the Command Prompt window That is because command actions invoked by a script do not read back from the stream nor print the command output to the console waiting for the command to finish In the above examples only C hello bat generates a command line output e The executable command should be separated from the arguments by one or more space characters and the arguments should similarly be separated by one or more space characters e Ifthe executable or an argument contains one or more space characters it should be quoted with double quotation marks Command actions do not recognize single quotation marks Do not use a back
51. Integer minute 61 echo stringObs StringObservation obs echo END_SAMPLE_PERIOD echo END_TABLE bin rapssleep sample_freq goto Loop EXIT identity string property Hello World identity string property abc Retrieving Data with Queries and Scripts vFoglight query language allows you to drill down through the topology model in your monitoring environment and retrieve data objects as required The query language allows you to select one or more topology objects and run scripts against them to 468 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide retrieve desired results For more information about the query language and its syntax see Using the Query Language on page 473 You may be required to run scripts at the request of Vizioncore Support or for other maintenance functions You can also test sample scripts from this window This tool has no restrictions but is recommended for advanced users Use the Script Editor dashboard to display the instances of particular topology types in your monitoring environment and drill down through their objects to see detailed information on each type For instructions see the following sections e Accessing the Script Editor Dashboard on page 468 e Selecting Topology Objects on page 469 e Retrieving Data on page 472 Accessing the Script Editor Dashboard The Script Editor dashboard allows you to select topology
52. MySQL database Tip To restore the database after backing it up with the mysql command use MySQL To restore the database after backing it up with InnoDB HotBackup and applying the logs shut down the vFoglight Management Server copy the backup files to lt vfoglight_home gt mysqji data and start the vFoglight Management Server e Perform a full system backup including the file system and the Windows Registry but excluding the MySQL data and transaction logs e Issue a mysqldump command to export the MySQL database to a remote drive or a backup tape Tip This option does not require backing up the vFoglight installation directory To restore vFoglight after choosing this backup method you need to complete the following actions 1 Install the vFoglight Management Server and any cartridges that existed in the previous installation 2 Shut down vFoglight 3 Delete the MySQL data files 4 Start MySQL and import the exported dump file 5 Shut down MySQL 6 Start vFoglight Alternatively instead of steps 3 through 6 use the InnoDB HotBackup tool to back up the embedded MySQL database vFoglight Management Server on Windows with MySQL on a remote computer Option 1 e Issue a mysqldump command to export the MySQL database Tip To restore the database after choosing this backup method use MySQL e Stop the vFoglight Management Server e Use backup tools from your Windows environment to back up the vFoglight installa
53. Period dialog box appears Edit Retention Policy Period Topology Type TopologyObject Property Name After Roll up to 4 Edit the existing data sampling period In the Edit Retention Policy Period dialog box in the After column specify the duration and the measurement unit of the data sampling period For example 16 min 388 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 5 Edit the existing roll up period or configure the retention policy to purge the data In the Roll up to column specify the duration and the measurement unit of the roll up period For example 1 hour If you want the data to purge after the retention period click the box on the right and select purge from the list that appears 6 Click Save The Edit Retention Policy Period dialog box closes and a message appears in the upper left indicating the success of the edit operation Manage Retention Policies Filtered by Cartridge Core By Cartridge Showing topologies 131 140 of 140 lt lt First lt lt Prev4567691011121314 The requested operation was successful Filter 7 Observe the Manage Retention Policies dashboard The newly edited retention and roll up periods appear in the list Creating Retention Policies You can create new retention policies for the topology types listed in the table on the Manage Retention Policies dashboard To create a retention policy Note This procedure continues from Accessing
54. Permission dialog box 229 adding actions to rules 286 adding severity level variables to rules 256 Alarm Message Editor dialog box 266 267 275 associating rules with schedules 299 Condition Editor dialog box 318 319 482 483 484 485 487 488 490 copying rule actions 297 copying rule conditions 276 copying rules 231 copying severity level variables 297 creating rules 246 defining alarm and action behavior 302 defining rule actions 278 defining rule conditions 263 267 defining rule scope 253 254 defining rule triggers 251 defining rule types 250 defining rule level variables 303 defining rules 248 Delete Rule Confirmation dialog box 234 235 236 deleting rules 233 disabling rules 234 Edit Role Permission dialog box 230 EditRule view 241 242 243 244 245 323 Edit User Permission dialog box 230 editing rule definitions 245 editing rule permissions 228 enabling rules 234 getting started with defining rules 249 resuming rule actions 238 Index 527 resuming rule alarms 236 Rule Confirmation dialog box 231 232 237 238 239 240 Scoping Query Editor dialog box 475 476 477 478 479 setting expression scope in rule conditions 262 suspending rule actions 238 suspending rule alarms 236 Temporarily Suspend Rule Actions dialog box 238 239 Temporarily Suspend Rule Alarms dialog box 236 237 using trigger specific variables in rule condition expressions 292 viewing rule definitions 245 viewing rule schedul
55. Permission dialog box 400 Add User Permission dialog box 400 Business Hours dialog box 405 406 Copy Schedule dialog box 402 copying schedules 402 deleting schedules 404 Edit Role Permission dialog box 401 Edit Schedule view 403 405 407 413 414 Edit User Permission dialog box 401 editing schedule definitions 406 editing schedule permissions 399 Index 523 Schedule Delete Confirmation dialog box 404 viewing schedule definitions 405 406 Manage Schedules node in navigation panel 397 408 Manage Support Bundles dashboard 40 42 75 76 77 79 accessing 76 server support bundles creating 77 retrieving 79 viewing content 80 Support Bundle Inventory view 78 79 Manage Support Bundles node in navigation panel 76 Manage Thresholds 353 Manage Thresholds dashboard 40 353 354 355 356 359 360 361 362 372 accessing 353 Add Role Permission dialog box 357 Add User Permission dialog box 357 adding bounds to metric threshold levels 364 creating thresholds 361 defining thresholds 362 Delete Threshold dialog box 359 360 deleting thresholds 359 Edit Role Permission dialog box 358 Edit Threshold view 360 Edit User Permission dialog box 358 editing threshold definitions 360 editing threshold permissions 355 selecting metrics and levels in thresholds 363 viewing threshold definitions 360 Manage Thresholds node in navigation panel 354 361 Manage Users dashboard 41 107 108 109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 123 126
56. Printers and Projectors for Relationship customers Consumer Home and Home Office Support for Dell products Customer Service Employee Purchase Program EPP Customers Financial Services Web Address Financial Services lease loans Financial Services Dell Preferred Accounts DPA Business Customer Service Employee Purchase Program EPP Customer s Support for printers projectors PDAs and MP3 players Public government education and healthcare Customer Service and Support Employee Purchase Program EPP Customers Dell Sales Dell Outlet Store Dell refurbished computers Software and Peripherals Sales Spare Parts Sales Extended Service and Warranty Sales Fax Dell Services for the Deaf Hard of Hearing or Speech Impaired toll free 1 800 433 9014 toll free 1 800 247 9362 toll free 1 877 459 7298 toll free 1 800 624 9896 toll free 1 800 624 9897 toll free 1 800 695 8133 www dellfinancialservices com toll free 1 877 577 3355 toll free 1 800 283 2210 toll free 1 800 624 9897 toll free 1 800 695 8133 toll free 1 877 459 7298 toll free 1 800 456 3355 toll free 1 800 695 8133 toll free 1 800 289 3355 or toll free 1 800 879 3355 toll free 1 888 798 7561 toll free 1 800 671 3355 toll free 1 800 357 3355 toll free 1 800 247 4618 toll free 1 800 727 8320 toll free 1 877 DELLTTY 1 877 335 5889 U S Virgin Islands Web Address E mail Address Technical Support Customer
57. Processor type Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 321 Working with Rules a Scoping Topology Instances B Processor sid tor012991 prod quest corp 0 aa tor012991 prod quest corp 1 Child Topology aggregateAlarmState percentidleTime Other Topology percentSystemTime Agent percentUserTime AgentHealthState utilization AgentState AgaregateModelinstance AggregateModelRoot AlarmChangeType AlarmRuleBased view m g Inthe Metrics area select percentUserTime and click Insert The Condition box in the display area refreshes showing the newly selected metric Condition cs Es a ea percentUserTime h Edit the condition as follows percentUserTime gt 0 9 i Click the Validate button above the Condition box A success message appears above the Condition box 4 Refine the newly created condition by adding a time constraint to it and a Groovy function that retrieves a maximal value of the metric over a 24 hour period 322 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Edit the condition as follows max percentUserTime for 24h gt 0 9 5 Click Finish To scope a rule to the Host type Note The information in this procedure assumes that you have a good understanding of the rule creation workflow For step by step instructions on how to scope a rule to a topology type or use the Condition Editor see the above procedure To scope a rule to the Processor type
58. Registry Variable The Create Registry Variable dashboard refreshes showing the Edit Registry Variable view Create Begetry Vartable Sep 2h 2008 ponds pmt EDT Edit Registry Variable mal connection timeout O Registry Variable Mame mai connection timeout Castridge Mame No Cartridge Registry Value Type Integer Desc riptionA omments Sea Static Valse C Registry Reference Global Defaut eee Seve Defa Vakse Performance Calendars O Sereas Nana vaa Schedute Name Fezan E Static Vue C Retererce m FS nC Delore Selecta 286 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e Specify the length of the time out In the Edit Registry Variable view in the Global Default area ensure that the Static Value option is selected and type the number of seconds in the box f Save your changes On the right of the Global Default area click Save A message appears in the upper left corner indicating success Create Registry Yariable Edit Registry Variable mail connection timeout Registry variable updated successfully g Return to the list of registry variables in the Manage Registry Variables dashboard by clicking the Go to Registry Variable List button at the bottom The Manage Registry Variables dashboard refreshes and the row containing the newly edited variable appears selected in the list Variable Name a Type Global Default Scoped Default For complete information on how to edit a re
59. Removing Schedule Items on page 410 1 In the Recurrence Pattern area select the Yearly option The view refreshes showing a set of controls that allow you to define a schedule item that occurs on a yearly basis Schedule Name My Schedule Description Comments Start Date 14 August i208 End Time hh mm oo Am p Duration hh mm foo foo Start Time hh mm foo oo I Whole Day Recurrence Pattern C Once Periodical C Daily By Date fia CWeekly CBy Week Every adgust 14 CMonthly Yearly 2 Specify the start date of the recurrence pattern Use the Start Date boxes to specify the day month and year of the start date Alternatively click the Calendar button on the right and use the calendar controls that appear to specify the start date Tip The Day box accepts the values between 1 and 31 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 31 negative values are not accepted 4 27 3 10 17 24 314 3 Specify the duration of the schedule item 28 4 41 18 25 4 August 2008 n Mon Tue Wed Thu ee Aamo ood 5 7 12 jae 21 26 28 2 4 2007 2008 2003 OK Cancel Fri Using Schedules Creating Schedules 441 442 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e Ifyou want the schedule to occur for a part of the day complete one of the following steps e Specify the start time and end time of the schedule item e Use the Start Time
60. Rule The Create Rule dashboard appears in the display area with the Rule Definition tab open Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 317 Working with Rules c Inthe Create Rule dashboard in the Rule Definition tab in the Rule Name box type the rule name For example Processor Load d Under Rule Type select the Simple Rule option e Under Rule Triggering select the Data Driven option 2 Scope the rule to the Processor topology type a In the Rule Definition tab in the Rule Scope pane ensure that the No Scoping Query check box is clear b Click Topology Type and select Core gt Processor from the list that appears c Click the Append button A to the right of the Topology Type box The box immediately below the Topology Type box showing the newly selected Processor type d Validate the topology scope by clicking the Validate Rule Scope button to the right of the Property box A confirmation message appears above the Topology Type box while the name of the Processor type appears in the box at the bottom 318 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 3 Write a condition that triggers the rule each time the utilization of a Processor type reaches 90 using the Processor s percentUserTime metric a Inthe Create Rule dashboard open the Conditions and Actions tab Pere ss oe i em i ee b Expand the condition editing pane by clicking the Fire bar Se
61. Rule Alarms dialog box 236 237 textconventions 14 thresholds adding bounds to metric threshold levels 364 creating 361 defining 362 managing 353 accessing Manage Thresholds dashboard 353 deleting thresholds 359 editing permissions 355 editing threshold definitions 360 viewing threshold definitions 360 selecting metrics and levels 363 timestamps collecting data with older timestamps 392 Tooling dashboards 447 about 448 Build ScriptAgent 41 449 451 452 453 454 455 457 458 464 466 accessing 451 Build Script Agent dialog box 453 454 building agent packages 452 Create Agent dialog box 458 creating agent instances 457 Deploy Agent Package dialog box 455 456 457 deploying agent packages 454 editing agent properties 464 uploading agent scripts 452 530 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Script Editor 41 468 469 470 472 accessing 468 retrieving data from topology objects 472 selecting topology objects 469 Tooling node in navigation panel 10 11 33 447 451 468 topology retrieving data 467 472 accessing Script Editor dashboard 468 selecting objects 469 topology types adding 329 U Unlicensed Server View 37 upgrading vFoglight 101 about 89 users adding users to groups 112 changing passwords 114 creating 111 editing users in groups 123 forcing password changes 115 managing 107 accessing Manage Users dashboard 108 unlocking passwords 115 Users amp Security dashboards 105 about 106 Conf
62. Schedule Description Comments Start Date 14 August vifeo End Time hh mm foo am c Start Time hh mm joo oo I Whole Day Duration hh mm oo 400 Recurrence Pattern COnce C Periodical Daily CWeekly Every fi day s Monthly Yearly 2 Specify the start date of the recurrence pattern Use the Start Date boxes to specify the day month and year of the start date Alternatively click the Calendar button on the right and use the calendar controls that appear to specify the start date Tip The Day box accepts the values between 1 and 31 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 31 negative values are not accepted August 2008 29 30 34 5 6 7 142 14 19 20 21 26 27 28 2 3 4 2007 2008 2003 OK Cancel 3 Specify the duration of the schedule item e If you want the schedule to occur for a part of the day complete one of the following steps 424 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e Specify the start time and end time of the schedule item e Use the Start Time hh mm boxes to specify the hour and minute of the start time Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 23 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values a
63. Server for instructions see Backing Up vFoglight on page 89 If you are using an external database and intend to upgrade vFoglight after backing it up you should shut down the vFoglight Management Server but leave the database running Doing so allows the installer to successfully upgrade the database Note If you encounter any errors during the upgrade process you can stop the procedure and restore the previous vFoglight installation see Restoring vFoglight on page 102 provided that it has been correctly backed up 102 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Restoring vFoglight Restoring a physical backup means reconstructing it and making it available to users This section outlines how to restore an old vFoglight installation Note In order to restore a previous vFoglight installation you must have a backed up copy of that version For information about how to back up a vFoglight system see Backing Up vFoglight on page 89 To restore a previous vFoglight installation 1 Restore the database used by the old vFoglight Management Server from the database export file e If your system contains an Oracle database see To restore an Oracle database from the database export file on page 102 for instructions e If your system contains a MySQL database see To restore a MySQL database from the database export file on page 103 for instructions 2 Restore the old vF
64. The Administration dashboard contains the following views e Navigation Contains links to Administration dashboards Entry Dashboard Use it to or View Explore Cartridges Inventory Cartridge Install list and manage cartridges Inventory For more information see Installing and Managing Cartridges on page 149 Component Components List and download agent installers Download for Download For more information see Downloading Agent Components on page 161 Data Data Data View the vFoglight topology Management Management Derived Manage List edit or delete derived metrics Metrics Derived For more information see Managing Derived Metrics Metrics on page 333 Retention Manage List edit or delete retention policies Policies Retention For more information see Editing Retention Policies Policies on page 386 40 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Registry Variables Rules Setup and Support Audit Information Connection Status vFoglight Configuration Licenses Support Bundles Rules and Notifications Manage Registry Variables Manage Rules View Audit Information Connection Status vFoglight Configuration Manage Licenses Manage Support Bundles Entry Dashboard Use it to or View Thresholds Manage List add edit or delete thresholds Thresholds For more information see Managing Thresholds on page 353 Topology AddTopology Add topol
65. The following threshold was successfully added to the system Topology Type application opology Metric modelAlarmWarningCount Threshold Levels AgentState Threshold Bounds 372 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Observe the Manage Thresholds dashboard The newly added threshold appears in the list Managing Retention Policies Topology is a representation of and a way of understanding the logical and physical relationship between items in your monitored environment At run time vFoglight dynamically builds topology models using the monitoring data about your system that is collected by vFoglight agents A model is a set of objects and relationships designed to represent a monitored resource and its parts vFoglight models retain collected data and transform it into nodes adding configuration data to each node as properties and attaching metric data to appropriate nodes as metrics Topology models provide the context for the metrics sent by the agents to the vFoglight Management Server Retention policies allow you to define time periods where monitoring data can be sampled aggregated or purged from your system All topology objects in vFoglight form a hierarchy whose root is the super type TopologyOb ject Retention policies are inherited from the object s type These policies may be overwritten in which case the modification applies to all child types in the hierarchy In addition to retention
66. To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Cartridges gt Cartridge Inventory The Cartridge Inventory dashboard appears in the display area showing a list of all existing cartridges Managing Cartridges 151 Installing and Managing Cartridges Cartridge Inventory Sep 25 2008 10 19 48 AM EDT Install Cartridge File on Local Computer Browse File on Server Enable on install Install Cartridge Showing 1 12 of 12 Cartridges as of Sep 24 2008 11 10 35 Refresh Installed Cartridges Clear Filters f B Eolas 5 2 4 B OS ApacheSvr 5 2 4 B OS Apphonitor 5 2 4 B OS Common 5 2 4 B OS HostModel Windows 5 2 4 B OS LogFilter 5 2 4 B OS NetMonitor 5 2 4 B OS OnlineHelp 5 2 4 B OS SNMP 5 2 4 B OS WebMonitor 5 2 4 OS WWindows System 5 2 4 Uninstall Selected Enable Selected Disable Selected 3 View information about one or more cartridges e Move the mouse pointer over the Cartridge Name column in the row containing the cartridge about which you want to view information A dwell appears showing the cartridge information 152 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide or Cartridge Name Virtual ViMware Version 5 2 3 Build ID 1014 Creation Date Thu Oct 09 2008 12 57 34 CDT Author Quest Software St Louis Type N A Status Enabled To view cart
67. To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow i on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Setup amp Support gt Manage Support Bundles The Manage Support Bundles dashboard appears in the display area showing the list of existing support bundles Manage Leppert Randos doe th di PM EDT Create Support Bunde O Gete Dune Rn bn r a aie ae de 0 Filer by Name Deseription Created Created Ry Nome a Description Crested Crested Oy bunde foigh 402_12 01 13 Bursie created on Wed Age OZ 120114 EDT 2008 by fogight Age 02 2008 1 loat X 4 x Select All Select Nene 3 To sort the list by name description creation date or user name click the Name Description Created or Created By column headings as required 4 To filter the list of support bundles in the area that shows the list of installed licenses use the Name Description Created or Created By boxes as required To clear the filters click Clear Filters From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures Setting Up vFoglight 71 Managing Support Bundles e Creating Server Support Bundles on page 77 e Retrieving Server Support Bundles on page 79 e Viewing the Content of Server Support Bundles on page 80 Creating Server Support Bundles A server support bundle contains diagnostic data gathered from the vFoglight Management Server vFoglight saves this data in a ZIP file When
68. Viewing Awdit Mromatoi aaniu aaan 82 Backing Up Upgrading and Restoring vFOglight aneucnsoisaniineanna 89 54 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide About vFoglight Setup The Administration module includes a number of features that allow you to gather data about vFoglight while it is running such as audit logs and diagnostic data that can be sent to Vizioncore Support Additionally it includes a set of dashboards that you can use to view vFoglight connection status port numbers database properties or manage licenses and server support bundles Viewing Connection Status The Connection Status dashboard provides a list of vFoglight Agent Manager instances connected to the vFoglight Management Server It displays the host s IP address login time request name and request time following information for each vFoglight Agent Manager To view the connection status Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Setup amp Support gt Connection Status The Connection Status dashboard appears in the display area showing a list of vFoglight Agent Manager instances connected to the vFoglight Management Server Setting Up vFoglight 55 Viewing Connection Status Conn
69. a condition 484 metrics to a derived metric expression 484 permissions for accessing registry variables 188 permissions for derived metrics 336 permissions for rules 228 permissions for schedules 399 permissions for thresholds 356 registry variables to a condition 483 schedule items to a newly created schedule that al ready contains schedule items 411 schedule items to a newly created schedule that has no other schedule items 411 schedule items to an existing schedule 413 schedules to performance calendars 205 severity level variables to rules 257 topology object properties to a condition 484 topology object properties to a derived metric expression 484 topology types 329 users to groups 113 123 assign data driven triggers to derived metrics 350 data driven triggers to rules 252 event driven triggers to rules 252 roles to groups 124 schedule driven triggers to derived metrics 349 time driven triggers to derived metrics 350 time driven triggers to rules 252 associate rules with schedules 300 back up embedded vF oglight MySQL database with InnoDB Hot Backup 95 vFoglight installation directory 92 vFoglight MySQL database 94 vFoglight Oracle database 92 back up vF oglight on Windows 91 bind threshold levels to constant values 369 threshold levels to metrics 367 threshold levels to registry variables 368 build agent packages 452 change users passwords 114 clone secondary properties 173 copy derived metrics 339 re
70. a rule condition use the following syntax byte a_pdf_object server get ReportingService getReportData event get report reportId Where a_pdf_object is the name of the report file that you want to retrieve Important To separate multiple lines in conditional expressions use a semicolon followed by a carriage return In conditional expressions consisting of a single line using a semicolon to end the line is optional For example Multi line expressions Example A Correct 274 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide println event dump event get report name MyReport Incorrect println event dump event get report name MyReport Note The first line is missing a semicolon which causes the expression to result in an error Single line expressions Example B Correct println event dump Example C Correct println event dump Note Using a semicolon to end the line in a single line expression is optional therefore both expressions are valid 3 Multiple severity rules Activate the condition by selecting the Activate check box You must activate the condition for a severity level in a multiple severity rule before you can save it If the Activate check box is cleared when you click Save the condition that you specified will be discarded as will any expressions or actions that you set in the sub tabs of the tab for that severity level Caution Do not
71. a vFoglight registry variable 324 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide For example the expression f4registry OraDBAWarning retrieves the value of the OraDBAWarning registry variable 4 Open the Action tab and add an entering command action 5 Define the action parameters as follows e COMMAND_LINE Specify the absolute path and name of the shell script that you want the command action to call ENVIRONMENT_VARIABLES Type a list of the variables that you defined in step 3 using the following syntax to specify a variable output_data variable Tip Use the exclamation mark to separate variables For example Condon Severtylevel Verses Action Action ComenanciAc bor Action Type Entering Description Pisdvarl Pelyva Pavar eE Cie Rye S ai aT a option see 6 Save your changes 7 Create the shell script ensuring that its name and location match the one you set in the COMMAND_ACTION action parameter see step 5 8 Add a line to the shell script using the following command syntax output_file_path_and_name For example bin echo S P1 P2 S P3 P4 S P5 gt opt quest out txt Tip Alternatively to issue the command directly without referencing it in a script as instructed in step 7 use the COMMAND_ACTION s value to specify the command Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 325 Working with Rules When the rule meets the condition t
72. all agent instances Age Blackouts dal Li 2003 407 35 AM EDT Agent Blackouts 3 Showing 1 4 of 4 blackouts as of Jul 11 2008 09 07 43 Refresh 2 Fitter by Hostname Agent Mame pS Type Schedule Name Gear Fillers ma Mertname Agent Mame Type Schedule tame 17 tor012991 prod quest corp My Windows Windows_ None 19 tor012991 prod quest corp My Log ilter LogFilter None 20 tor012991 prod quest corp My ApacheSy ApacheSvi None 21 tor012991 prod quest corp My AppMonit AppMonitk None xj Black tfselect an Select Hone 180 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 3 To sort the list by their ID host name instance name agent type or schedule name click the ID Hostname Agent Name Type or Schedule Name column headings as required 4 To filter the list of agents by the host name instance name agent type or schedule name use the Hostname Agent Name Type or Schedule Name boxes at the top of the Agent Blackouts list For example to list only the hosts whose agent type contains Windows in the Type box type Windows The Agent Blackouts list refreshes showing the agent instances whose name matches the filter pattern Agen Blackouts da LE 2008 9 07 35 AM EDT Agent Blackouts o Showing 1 1 of 1 blackouts as of Jul 11 2008 09 07 43 Refresh 17 tor0 12991 prod quest corp My_Windews_ Windows_ None Age Blackout fseect at Select ame To clear the filters click Clear Filters The Agent Blac
73. allows you to manage vFoglight cartridges on the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Cartridges gt Cartridge Inventory The Cartridge Inventory dashboard appears in the display area Cartridge Inventory Dec 31 2008 2 22 36 PM CST Install Cartridge o File on Local Computer Browse C File on Server M Enable on install Install Cartridge Showing 1 1 of 1 Cartridges as of Dec 31 2008 14 23 06 Refresh Ss B Virtual Veware 5 2 3 pal Uninstall Selected Enable Selected Disable Selected You have successfully logged into vFoglight and located the dashboards that are available in the Administration module From here you can proceed to Viewing the Administration Dashboard on page 39 About the Administration Module 39 Viewing the Administration Dashboard Viewing the Administration Dashboard The Administration dashboard contains links to administration dashboards that are grouped in a logical way along with some high level information about your environment That information includes the number of cartridges rules and users a list of licensed capabilities that reflect the features defined in your vFoglight license and a list of audit activities such as login entries or agent related operations You can use this dashboard as a central point for all of your administration tasks From here you can navigate to any of the dashboards that come with the Administration module
74. at the time when the rule fires Using the controls on the Severity Level Variables tab of the Fire tab you create an expression called threadsNum whose value is threads_started You then create a message called ProblemSynopsis The value that you set for this message is Threads started count is too high threadsNum In this message the at sign is used to reference the threadsNum expression When the message shown above is included in the email threadsNum will be replaced by the number of threads that were started at the time when the rule fired e There is a registry variable called CPUFatal whose value is 90 for the topology object to which the rule you are editing is scoped You want to reference this variable in the alarm message for the rule s Fatal severity level so you create an expression called CPU whose definition is registry CPUFatal You then reference this expression in the rule s alarm message CPU usage is at CPUS Specifying a Rule Condition or Derived Metric Expression vFoglight provides controls above the Condition field for a rule or the Expression field for a derived metric that allow you to insert elements into the condition or 482 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide expression that are either part of the query language or have been formatted to use the query language syntax The process of writing expressions is described in the following sections e Inserting operat
75. calculations to derived metrics on page 344 4 In the Expression area under Trigger Type select the Schedule Driven option The Expression area refreshes showing a set of controls on the right Flags Driven hh mm ss 00 00 00 Trigger Type Time Driven eas a A ata Driven C Enable Trigger without Data Specify the recurrence interval for the trigger in the hh mm ss format To enable the trigger without data select the Enable Trigger without Data check box Save your changes To assign a data driven trigger Note This procedure continues from Adding calculations to derived metrics on page 344 1 2 In the Expression area under Trigger Type select the Data Driven option Save your changes From here you can proceed to Setting the value type on page 350 Setting the value type Once you define the scope and trigger of the derived metric you can specify the value type for the derived metric The value type for a derived metric dictates the appearance of the derived metric You can set the derived type to a metric and specify its unit of measurement or to an observation Working with Data 351 Working with Derived Metrics To set the value type for a derived metric Note This procedure continues from Triggering derived metrics on page 348 1 In the area immediately below the Derived Metric Calculations list click Value Type and select Metric from the list that app
76. ctor Cartri Internal Foghght Administr stars Foghght Securty Administr abar Advarced Operator Cons internal teereees Cartridge Developers Foghght Adeintitret Administrar Advarced Operotor Cortrt BR Ir ean ao ta Cartridge Developers Fogight Administra Administrator Advarced Operator Cartri Internal nn hememened Cartridge Developers Fot Adres ot Adrina Adverced Operoter Cartri Oarent User Cartridge Developers Foghght Administra Administrator Advanced Operator Cartri Internal Select AN Select Nome 3 To sort the list by name group role or type click the Name Groups Roles Read Only or Type column headings as required 4 To filter the list of users use one or more of the following boxes at the top of the Manage Users list e Name Type the user name for which you want to filter e Groups Type the group name for which you want to filter e Roles Type the role name for which you want to filter For example to list only the users whose name starts with demo in the Name box type demo The Manage Users list refreshes showing the list of users whose name matches the filter pattern 110 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Manege Users Ape 16 D008 Sos OM EDT Honage Users showing 1 3 of 3 Users as of tor 16 2008 15 19 25 EEEE Foghght Adminetroters Fogight Securt Adearestrator Advanced Operator Cox internal domol dome2 oveecere Cartridge Developers Foghght Adminis Admu
77. dashboard to delete a derived metric as outlined below To delete a derived metric Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard on page 333 1 In the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard select the row containing the derived metric that you want to delete 2 Click the Delete Selected button at the bottom The Delete Derivation dialog box appears Delete Derivation x Are you sure you want to delete the Following derived metric s disks ytesKnttenCopy 3 In the Delete Derivation dialog box click OK The Delete Derivation dialog box closes 4 Observe the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard The newly deleted derived metrics no longer shows in the list Viewing and editing derived metrics To view or edit derived metric Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard on page 333 342 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 1 Inthe Manage Derived Metrics dashboard click the Derived Metric Name column of the row containing the derived metrics whose definitions you want to view The Edit Derived Metric view appears in the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard Manege Gerrved Monies re Derived Metre Serre wir Cartratge Same Cartradge Wer shor Derived Metre Cakubatscnn rived Metric Scope ressor Tegge Type UNE Logicas aegis voine Vetes trom Srcoge detad lepetogyT yperdame Testi _Votemes S lt gt
78. do not require a system restart The vFoglight Configuration dashboard contains the following views e Federation e Server e Federation Configuration e Database e JVM e OS e WCF e Mail Global Settings e Ports Federation vFoglight federation allows for partitioning a monitoring environment into logical units where each unit is served by a separate instance of the vFoglight Management Server federated server while the operation of those servers is managed by a central vFoglight Management Server federation server The federated servers can be used to collect data from different types of environments while the federation server can access Setting Up vFoglight 57 Viewing vFoglight Configuration the data from one or more federated servers For information on how to set up a federated environment see the Installation and Setup Guide The Federation view displays the following settings e Federation Mode The Federation Mode setting indicates if the vFoglight Management Server whose configuration items you are viewing runs in federation mode e Number of Children The number of children of the vFoglight Management Server whose configuration items you are viewing If the server does not run in federation mode or has no children the number is zero 0 Federation Eh Federation Mode Child Standalone T Number of Children 0 For information on how to view the information on the vFoglight Configuration dashboard see
79. editing threshold permissions 355 selecting metrics and levels in thresholds 363 viewing threshold definitions 360 managing derived metrics 333 managing retention policies 372 managing thresholds 353 Data Management view 39 Data node in navigation panel 10 33 329 333 343 354 361 362 379 database changing database credentials 138 Database view 59 68 Delete Derivation dialog box 341 Delete Rule Confirmation dialog box 234 235 236 Delete Threshold dialog box 359 360 deleting internal users 117 Deploy Agent Package dialog box 455 456 457 Derived Metric Scope field editing 474 derived metrics creating 342 defining 344 adding calculations 344 getting started 344 setting value types 350 triggering 348 example optimizing performance 353 examples creating and managing multiple rules with the same scope 351 using a single derivation with multiple scoping or mul tiple derivations 352 managing 333 accessing Manage Derived Metrics dashboard 333 copying derived metrics 339 deleting derived metrics 341 editing derived metric definitions 341 editing permissions 335 viewing derived metric definitions 341 dialog boxes Action Parameter Editor 295 296 297 Add Retention Policy 388 389 Add Role Permission 189 229 337 357 400 Add User Permission 189 229 337 357 400 Agent Operation 461 462 463 Alarm Message Editor 266 267 275 Build Script Agent 453 454 Index 517 Business Hours 405 406 Cartridge Confirmati
80. hh mm boxes to specify the hour and minute of the start time Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 23 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted e Select the End Time hh mm option and specify the hour and minute of the end time Note The Duration hh mm boxes appear disabled when you specify the End Time hh mm option Start Date 14 2003 ill End Timefhh 0 0 z Start Tima hh mm 14 30 a PF Whole Day Durationjhh mm The end time should occur after the start time Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 24 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 24 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted or e Specify the start time and duration of the schedule item or Using Schedules 443 Creating Schedules e Use the Start Time hh mm boxes to specify the hour and minute of the start time Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 23 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values bet
81. hour period is below 85 Critical An average availability during one hour period is below 70 Fatal Example Creating a Multiple Severity Rule Scoped to an EJ B Instance This section provides an example of a multiple severity rule and describes the process of creating it There is a specific EJB instance called EJB_Instance1 in the application MyApplication that you want to monitor you would like to be alerted when the number of rollbacks per minute exceeds a certain threshold To configure vFoglight to monitor EJB_Instance1 you launch the vFoglight Administration Module and create a multiple severity rule that is scoped to this specific topology object and that has conditions set for the Fatal Critical and Warning levels Launching the Create Rule dashboard To begin the process of creating the rule in vFoglight in the Administration module open the Create Rule dashboard by choosing Rules amp Notifications gt Create Rule from the navigation panel 312 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Setting basic rule properties In the Rule Definition area of the Create Rule dashboard you name the rule EJB_Instancel Rollbacks and add comments about the purpose of this rule You select Multiple Severity Rule as the Rule Type Since you want this rule to be evaluated every time that metrics associated with EJB_Instance are sent to the vFoglight Management Server you leave the Trigger Type at its default setting Da
82. it associate values with specific topology types or objects or configure performance calendars for each value For an example of how to define a simple rule see Example Creating a Simple Rule on page 313 For instructions see the following sections e Getting started with rule definitions on page 249 Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 249 Working with Rules e Defining rule types on page 250 e Triggering rules on page 251 e Defining the rule scope on page 253 Getting started with rule definitions Once you create a rule you can add comments to it and edit its settings as required To get started with rule definitions Note This procedure continues from Copying rules on page 231 Viewing and editing rule definitions on page 245 or Creating Rules on page 246 1 Provide a descriptive name for the rule In the Rule Definition tab in the Rule Name box type the rule name Important The following rule names are reserved and should not be used foglight_rule_name foglight_rule_comments foglight_rule_domain_query foglight_rule_id foglight_monitored_host_name foglight_monitoring_agent_name foglight_rule_alarm_link foglight_scoping_id Note The foglight_monitored_host_name and foglight_monitoring_agent_name variables are only available for rules with scoping queries 2 Optional Describe the rule In the Description Comments box ty
83. module Administration Dashboard on page 39 About the Administration Module 33 Getting Started with the Administration Module Node Task See Agents Manage agents and hosts Chapter 5 Managing Agents on page 165 Cartridges Manage cartridges and download Chapter 4 Managing agent packages Data Work with topology types metrics thresholds and retention policies Rules amp Notifications Create and manage rules and registry variables Schedules Create and manage schedules Setup amp Support Manage vFoglight licenses and support bundles and view audit and configuration items Tooling Build script agents Users amp Security Manage users groups and roles Cartridges on page 147 Chapter 7 Working with Data on page 327 Chapter 6 Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry on page 183 Chapter 8 Using Schedules on page 395 Chapter 2 Setting Up vFoglight on page 53 Chapter 9 Working with vFoglight Tooling on page 447 Chapter 3 Managing Users and Security on page 105 For a complete list of administration tasks and the dashboards that you can use to carry out each task see Looking at Administration Tasks on page 50 Before you get started with the Administration module you need to ensure that your vFoglight Management Server is up and running adjust browser settings and log into vFoglight as described below To get started with the Admi
84. object instance of the selected topology type to which the SYSADMIN variable is scoped a Inthe View Registry Variable view click the link that appears on the right of Topology Object The Topology Object list appears showing the object instances of the selected topology type 212 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Topology Object a tor012991 prod quest corp s tor013008 prod quest corp b Inthe Topology Object list select an object instance 7 Specify the date and time range during which you want to see the registry values In the View Registry Variable view on the right of Date Time Range drag the edges of the Zonar to set the range For more information about the Zonar see the vFoglight User Guide The Registry Value table refreshes showing different registry values for different date and time periods Registry Value Period Begin Time Period End Time Registry Value a 10 15 08 3 05 PM 10 18 08 12 00 AM mary abe com 10 18 08 12 00 AM 10 20 08 12 00 4M kevin abc com 10 20 08 12 00 AM 10 21 08 3 43 PM mary abec com 8 Optional Reduce the number of columns that appear in the audit log table a In the audit log table in the Operation Name Name column click the Show Hide columns button Show Hide columns Period Begin Time Period End Time Registry Yalue E 10 14 08 5 06 PM 10 18 08 12 00 AM mary abe com The Show columns dialog box appears Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 213 Workin
85. objects that exist in your monitoring environment and retrieve information about those objects To access the Script Editor dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Tooling gt Script Editor The Script Editor dashboard appears in the display area Working with vF oglight Tooling 469 Retrieving Data with Queries and Scripts Script Editor Jd 18 2003 2 13 43 PM EDT Query and Scripting Service Tool Query AI Host Listinstances Do Query Instances Object ID Object Type Hierarchy Object Properties Script Q Pun Result From here you can go to Selecting Topology Objects on page 469 Selecting Topology Objects Once you access the Script Editor dashboard you can use it to select the objects of a particular topology type and view the data that they contain When you select topology objects use the Query button to display the following information about a selected topology type e Instances e Instance names e Object IDs 470 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Object type hierarchies Object properties including e Unique ID e Object ID e ID e Version e Effective start date To select topology objects
86. of processes running on your system If the fms exe process is not running the vFoglight Management Server is stopped Back up the entire vFoglight installation directory For detailed instructions see To back up the vFoglight installation directory on page 92 4 Back up the entire database used by the vFoglight Management Server 92 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e If your system uses an Oracle database refer to To back up an Oracle database used by the vFoglight Management Server on page 92 for instructions e If your system uses a MySQL database refer to To back up a MySQL database using MySQL commands on page 94 for instructions The vFoglight backup on a Windows system is now complete To back up the vFoglight installation directory 1 Browse to the directory one level above the vFoglight installation directory usually this is C Program Files vizioncore 2 Right click the vFoglight installation directory Select Send To Compressed A zip archive of the vFoglight installation directory will be created This may take several minutes Note The archive must include the config cartridge support licence and scripts directories and all their content 3 Move the vFoglight zip file to the desired location The backup of the vFoglight installation directory is now complete To back up an Oracle database used by the vFoglight Management Server 1 Log in to the Oracle ser
87. oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Foglight Table JEventLog Sample Frequency 200 Cancel Note The appearance of the dialog box depends on the nature and complexity of the list entry Note All text boxes have a limit of 64 characters Edit the entry in the dialog box and click the OK button that appears As you edit the list entry its name and value appear red in the dialog box to indicate the change Sample Frequency 350 To save your changes click the Save button that appears in the dialog box The dialog box closes and the List pane refreshes showing the newly edited value 4 To add a row to the list complete the following steps a In the List pane click the Add new row button in the lower right corner A dialog box appears Foglight Table f Sample Frequency fo Save Cancel Note The appearance of the dialog box depends on the nature and complexity of the list entry Edit the entry in the dialog box As you edit the list entry its name and value appear red in the dialog box to indicate the change Managing Agents 177 Managing Agent Properties by Type Sample Frequency 350 c To save your changes click the Save button that appears in the dialog box The dialog box closes and the List pane refreshes showing the newly added entry 5 To delete one or more rows from the list complete the following steps a In the List pane select the rows containing the entries that y
88. on how to add groups see Creating Groups on page 122 3 In the Edit Groups dialog box select the users to which you want to assign the role by clicking the appropriate symbol to the left of the group name The group is added to this role The group has no access to the role e O There is no change in group assignment For example to assign the role to the Foglight Administrators and Foglight Security Administrators groups ensure that the green plus sign appears to the left of the Foglight Administrators and Foglight Security Administrators entries and that the red minus sign appears to the left of the other groups in the Edit Groups dialog box 4 Click Save The Edit Groups dialog box closes and the Manage Roles dashboard refreshes to show the groups to which you assigned the role Deleting Internal Roles Use the Delete button on the Manage Roles dashboard to delete roles from vFoglight 134 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide You can only delete those roles that you add to vFoglight after the installation Their type appears as Internal on the Manage Users dashboard You cannot delete any of the groups accounts that are included with vFoglight Their type appears as Built In Type Internal Roles that you create Built In __________ Roles that come with vF oglight For more information about the types of roles that exist in vFoglight see Managing Roles on page 127
89. on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Rules amp Notifications gt Manage Registry Variables The Manage Registry Variables dashboard appears in the display area 218 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Meses egay Tonite Cor I7 Fe hee ae EDT mewing 17 af at registry variates ar of May 24 2008 Tae ara T 5 so me ao so 20 MPA TOROTTIN prod quent NA agagacacoacagcadcan ooebonooocoeooooe 3 On the Manage Registry Variables dashboard locate the row containing the SYSADMIN variable Tip You can filter the list of variables using filters At the top of the Manage Registry Variables dashboard in the Filter By Variable Name box type SYSADMIN The Manage Registry Variables dashboard refreshes showing only the SYSADMIN variable Manage Registry Variabbes Sap 19 2008 120008 AM EDT showing 1 1 of 1 registry variables as of Sep 19 2008 10 25 30 Petree 4 Open the SYSADMIN variable for editing Click the Variable Name column of the row containing SYSADMIN entry The Manage Registry Variables dashboard refreshes showing the Edit Registry Variable view Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 219 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables manopo Stegistey Variables Sap 1 2008 120958 AN EOT Edit Registry Variable Srsapaen o Registry Variable Mame SYSADMIN Cartridge Mame Core MonitoringPoticy Reentry Value Type S
90. one that stores the backup files For example e lt vfoglight_home gt backup config e lt vfoglight_home gt backup data Where vfoglight_home contains the path to the vFoglight installation directory For example its default location on Windows is C Vizioncore vFoglight 2 Create two configuration files for the InnoDB Hot Backup tool each containing the information about e the data that is to be backed up my cnf e the backup location backup cnf Open a text editor and create the two configuration files using the following syntax my cnf datadir vfoglight_home mysql data innodb_data_home_dir vfoglight_home mysql data innodb_data_file_path ibdatal1 10M autoextend 96 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide innodb_log_group_home_dir vfoglight_home mysql data set variable innodb_log files_in_group 2 set variable innodb_log file size 64 backup cnf datadir path_to_backup_data innodb_data_home_dir path_to_backup_data innodb_data_file_path ibdatal1 10M autoextend innodb_log_group_home_dir path_to_backup_data set variable innodb_log files_in_group 2 set variable innodb_log file _size 64 Where e vfoglight_home contains the path to the vFoglight installation directory e path_to_backup_data contains the path to the directory that is to contain the backup files as defined in step 1 For example C Vizioncore vFoglight backup data Important Use the back slash character
91. reminds a user fifteen 15 days before their password expires The password must e Beat least seven 7 characters long e Contain both alphabetic and numeric characters The password cannot e Be the same as the user name e Bea dictionary word e Be just the repetition of a single character e Be longer than 255 characters Note The recommended length of a password is sixteen 16 characters or fewer e Be the same as any of the user s last twelve 12 passwords Use the Configure Password Settings dashboard to view and edit these settings as required For instructions see the following sections Accessing the Configure Password Settings Dashboard on page 136 Editing Password Settings on page 137 Changing Database Credentials on page 138 You can configure many of these settings on the Configure Password Settings dashboard For instructions see Editing Password Settings on page 137 136 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Accessing the Configure Password Settings Dashboard The Configure Password Settings dashboard contains settings for password policies that apply to administrators and internal users are set The default settings for these policies are described in Configuring Password Settings on page 135 To view password settings Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open
92. report user String The name of the vFoglight user who created the report To define a condition for an event driven rule Note This procedure continues from Adding severity level variables on page 256 1 On the Conditions and Actions tab simple rules or Conditions Alarms amp Actions tab multiple severity rules open the Conditions tab The Condition tab opens in the display area 272 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Cony varmblestectiore from Severity Level Variatins Action Condition SOCIOL Biv Simple rule 4 Copy condtionatann fron 9 Copy variatlestactions from onditton Ti Severity Level Variables T Action F Activate Condition D Alarm Message PPE PTD AM a Multiple severity rule Important The appearance of the Condition tab depends on the rule type In addition to the condition editor multiple severity rules also include an alarm editor that allows you to compose an alarm message associated with each severity state Warning Critical and or Fatal Unlike simple rules that can have only one condition associated with their Fire state multiple severity rules can have a conditional expression associated with each severity Warning Critical and or Fatal along with an alarm message associated with that conditional expression This is because simple rules do not generate alarms They fire when the con
93. security concepts in vFoglight see Chapter 3 Managing Users and Security on page 105 vFoglight employs the following behavior when it comes to threshold permissions e Ifno one has a permission to the threshold everyone has a permission e If one has a permission to the threshold others with undefined permission do not have any permission e Final permission is based on a combination of the role user and threshold defined on the server side Use the Edit Permissions for Threshold button F on the Manage Thresholds dashboard to navigate to the Edit Permissions for Threshold area that allows you to add or edit permissions to roles and users as outlined below The Edit Permissions for Threshold area contains two tables that show the permissions for each vFoglight user or role 356 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Permission granted Permission denied Permissions not assigned Not assigned To add permissions for a threshold Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Thresholds dashboard on page 353 1 In the Manage Thresholds dashboard in the row containing the variable whose permissions you want to edit click the Edit Permissions for Threshold button E The Edit Permissions for Threshold area appears in the Manage Thresholds dashboard Working with Data 357 Working with Thresholds Manage Thresholds Agr 23 2008 129541 AM EDT Edt Permissions for T
94. specified by the parameter e histogram keeps a histogram to measure the distribution of metric values for example for a set of topology objects or for a single object over a specified period of time e isNotNull Determines whether a given data object is set to null e last Returns a com quest nitro service scripting ObservedDataQueryResult object which contains the latest metrics for the scoping object if there are any observations made during a given period e max Calculates a maximum from metric values e metricDifference Returns the difference percentile between two given metric values e min calculates a minimum from metric values 494 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide period calculates the total length of a period of time from a series of metrics and returns a value in seconds positive_delta Returns the difference between the maximal values of the most recent two metric values for a scoping object positive_delta_rate Returns the difference between the maximal values of the most recent two metric values for a scoping object divided by the time period in seconds of the more recent metric value rate calculates the rate of a metric value per second returnIncludeOrExcludeGivenABoolean Determines whether to include or exclude the object given a boolean value returnObjectsSatisfyingNameFilter Returns a given number of objects whose name matches a string pattern specified by the paramete
95. started with editing registry variables 200 Registry Variable Confirmation dialog box 194 scoping registry variables to topology 206 specifying registry variable values 201 using performance calendars in registry variables 204 viewing variable definitions 194 Manage Registry Variables node in navigation panel 185 196 217 484 Manage Retention Policies dashboard 39 372 378 379 380 381 382 386 387 388 390 accessing 378 Add Retention Policy dialog box 388 389 creating retention policies 388 deleting retention policies 381 Edit Retention Policy Period dialog box 386 387 388 390 editing retention policies 386 Manage Retention Policies node in navigation panel 379 accessing 129 Create Role dialog box 131 132 creating roles 131 deleting internal roles 133 Edit Groups dialog box 132 133 editing role groups 132 Manage Roles node in navigation panel 129 Manage Rules dashboard 40 46 47 225 226 227 228 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 242 244 245 246 247 313 490 accessing 225 Action Parameter E ditor dialog box 295 296 297 action types 278 actions 278 Add Role Permission dialog box 229 Add User Permission dialog box 229 adding actions to rules 286 adding severity level variables to rules 256 Alarm Message Editor dialog box 266 267 275 associating rules with schedules 299 Condition Editor dialog box 318 319 482 483 484 485 487 488 490 copying rule a
96. support bundles Contain a number of files including a diagnostic snapshot of the vFoglight Management Server log files and a list of cartridges installed on the vFoglight Management Server computer vFoglight saves each server support bundle as a ZIP file in the lt vfoglight_home gt support lt user_name gt directory on the machine hosting the vFoglight Management Server You can create a server support bundle using the Manage Support Bundles dashboard or the support bundle command that comes with the fglcmd interface For information about managing server support bundles using the Manage Support Bundles dashboard see the following sections e Accessing the Manage Support Bundles Dashboard on page 76 e Creating Server Support Bundles on page 77 e Retrieving Server Support Bundles on page 79 e Viewing the Content of Server Support Bundles on page 80 For information about the support bundle command see the Command Line Reference Guide 76 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Accessing the Manage Support Bundles Dashboard Using the Administration module you can gather diagnostic data from the vFoglight Management Server and save it in a support bundle for analysis by Vizioncore Support To access the Manage Support Bundles dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open
97. that come with that agent type e Secondary They are in list form The value of each secondary property can be set to one or more lists You will recognize a list based property by the Edit and Clone buttons that appear next to it Application Process List AppListFile v List property Lists that come with an agent type are type specific and as such global in nature which means that any changes to them affect all instances of that agent type To override this behavior you can create an instance specific list by cloning a global list and assigning the cloned list to one or more agent instances Any changes to this list affect only those agent instances to which the list is assigned Examples of situations in which you may want to clone a list include the following scenarios 168 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e You want a set of default agent properties to use different lists at different times For example you may want to create a clone of a list and configure it to have different settings during testing e You want to use lists with different settings in different agent instances You can view and edit type specific agent properties using the Agent Properties dashboard For complete information refer to the following sections Note If you remove an agent after deploying it its properties will be unavailable in the Agent Properties dashboard Accessing the Agent Properties Dashboard Use the Ag
98. that lists all of the groups that have been created in the Administration Module or imported from an LDAP compatible directory service supported by vFoglight the users that belong to these groups and the roles that have been assigned to each group This page also contains controls for managing group settings creating new groups and deleting non default groups To access the Manage Groups dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Users amp Security gt Manage Groups The Manage Groups dashboard appears in the display area showing a list of all existing groups 120 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Manage Groupt May 30 2008 190862 PM EOT Manage Groups Showing 1 4 of 4 Groups as of May 30 2008 13 08 52 Pefrech ee A ee OT Cartridge Developers fogtight operator Cartridge Developer Console User Bult in s Foglight Administrators foglight operator Administrator Advanced Operator Conso Guilt in Foglight Operators foglight operator Console User Operator Guilt in 7 Foglight Security Admini fogtight operator Security Guilt In 3 To sort the list by name users role or type click the Name Users Roles or Type column
99. the Agent Status dashboard For more information about agent management in the Administration module see Managing Agents on page 165 Use the Components for Download dashboard to view information about existing components and to download them For more information on how to use the Cartridge Inventory dashboard refer to the following sections e Accessing the Cartridge Inventory Dashboard on page 150 e Downloading Components on page 163 Accessing the Components for Download Dashboard The Components for Download dashboard allows you to view information about existing components and to download them 162 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide To download agent components Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Cartridges gt Components for Download The Components for Download dashboard appears in the display area showing a list of agent components that are available for download Components for Download Jon L 2009 ILDOA PM CST Components for Download Showing 1 1 of 1 files as of Jan 02 2009 12 08 46 Refeesh Filter by Kame Cartridge Name Component Name os aachitecture taller Type Marial Instabers v Clear Filters Name a Cart
100. the Manage Retention Policies Dashboard on page 378 1 Inthe Manage Retention Policies dashboard click the topology type to which you want to assign a retention policy The Add Retention Policy dialog box appears Working with Data 389 Managing Retention Policies Add Retention Policy Topology Type AggregateModelRoat Property Name After Roll up to Add a data sampling period In the Add Retention Policy dialog box in the After column specify the duration and the measurement unit of the data sampling period For example 20 min Add a roll up period or configure the retention policy to purge the data In the Roll up to column specify the duration and the measurement unit of the roll up period For example 1 hour If you want the data to purge after the retention period click the box on the right and select purge from the list that appears To add another retention period click the plus button 5 Another row appears in the table allowing you to specify another set of data sampling and retention periods After Roll up to s m y 3 7 390 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Specify the data sampling and roll up or purging parameters periods for the newly added retention period using the controls in the After and Roll up to columns To delete a retention period from the table use the red Delete button 5 Click Save The Edit Retention Policy Period di
101. the log table Viewing Log Entries The log entries that appear on the View Audit Information dashboard allow you to review information such as the users who have been authenticated upon logging in to the vFoglight changes made in the Administration module with regard to user management such as changes to settings for users groups and roles or changes made to configuration items such as rules schedules or registry variables To view an audit log entry Note This procedure continues from Accessing the View Audit Information Dashboard on page 83 1 Inthe View Audit Information dashboard locate the row in the log table containing the entry whose details you want to view 2 Observe the following columns for the selected entry e Time Range Displays the date and time at which the specified action occurred e User Name Displays the user name for the user who caused the action to be performed e Service Name Displays the name of the vFoglight service that performed the action e Operation Name Name Displays the operation that was performed by vFoglight If applicable the name of the item that was changed is also displayed in this column Setting Up vF oglight 89 Backing Up Upgrading and Restoring vFoglight Backing Up Upgrading and Restoring vFoglight Backup and restore processes are important aspects of database administration This section provides suggested end to end backup upgrade and resto
102. the roll up interval defined in the Level 2 policy for 14 days Level 3 gt Level 2 Any roll up The age date for the Level 3 policy setting and lt greater than must be less than or equal to 14 14 days Level 2 days Data is persisted at this roll up interval indefinitely A purge policy defines a minimum length of time that data must persist before it is truncated Purge gt Level 3 Purge Data is never purged from the Policy setting system before the age value of the purge policy Data may however be retained for longer than the setting as the system waits to find an acceptable time to purge data Two level policy including a purge Level 1 lt 15 minutes lt 15 minutes Data is persisted at the roll up interval defined in the Level 1 policy for either three or 14 days depending on the age of the Level 2 setting If the age of the Level 2 setting is less than or equal to three days then the data is persisted for three days If the age of the Level 2 setting is between three and 14 days the data is persisted for 14 days 378 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Level 2 Acceptable age values lt 14 days Acceptable roll up values Any roll up greater than Level 1 Explanation The age date for the Level 2 policy must be less than or equal to 14 days Data is persisted at this roll up interval indefinitely A purge policy defines a minimum length of time that data mu
103. the set of topology objects to which it applies A rule or derived metric must be scoped to a topology type and can optionally be scoped to specific instances of that type topology objects If a rule or derived metric is not scoped to specific objects it applies to all objects of that type You specify the scope for a rule or derived metric using the query language The expression that sets the rule or derived metric scope is called a scoping query Setting the Scope for a Rule or Derived Metric vFoglight provides controls that allow you to insert the topology type specific topology objects properties of the topology type and syntactic elements of the scoping query into the scoping expression You can use the controls described below to build the scoping query You can also specify all or part of the rule or derived metric scope manually See Specifying the scoping query manually on page 479 for examples of the syntax that must be used in a scoping query Note The Rule Scope and Derived Metric Scope fields are case sensitive Inserting topology types A tule or derived metric can be scoped to a topology type To insert the topology type into a scoping query 1 Click Topology Type and select a topology type from the list that appears 2 Click the Append button A to the right of the Topology Type box The name of the newly selected topology type appears in the box immediately below the Topology Type box 3 Complete one
104. two types of metrics in vFoglight e Raw Metrics Raw metrics are collected directly from your monitored environment by the agents and sent to the vFoglight Management Server e Derived Metrics Derived metrics are calculated from one or more raw or derived metrics They are scoped to a topology type and can optionally be scoped to specific objects of that type Many derived metrics come included with vFoglight and its cartridges If required you can create derived metrics and add them to your environment There are many reasons why it can be useful to create derived metrics For example creating derived metrics can make creating and managing rules simpler by allowing you to reuse metric expressions metrics and functions performed on metrics For more examples see the following sections e Example Creating and Managing Multiple Rules with the Same Scope on page 351 e Example Using a Single Derivation with Multiple Scoping or Multiple Derivations on page 352 e Example Optimizing Performance on page 353 You create new derived metrics and manage the existing ones using the dashboards that come with the Administration module For complete information see the following sections e Managing Derived Metrics on page 333 Working with Data 333 Working with Derived Metrics e Creating Derived Metrics on page 342 e Defining Derived Metrics on page 344 Managing Derived Metrics The Manage Deriv
105. types or objects In addition these values can be configured to change at certain times e Metrics A metric is a specified value that is measured over time In vFoglight each metric is associated with a topology type or with a specific topology object There are two types of metrics in vFoglight e Raw Metrics Raw metrics are collected by the agents directly from your monitored environment and sent to the vFoglight Management Server e Derived Metrics Derived metrics are calculated from one or more raw or derived metrics They are scoped to a topology type and can optionally be scoped to specific objects of that type Many derived metrics will automatically be included with vFoglight and its cartridges and additional derived metrics can be created from the vFoglight Administration Module Note Derived metrics are listed on the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard in the Administration module Data gt Manage Derived Metrics However no distinction is made between raw metrics and derived metrics in other locations in vFoglight or in the vFoglight Administration Module e Topology Object Properties Topology object properties describe a topology object These properties are collected by vFoglight from your monitored environment generally from the configuration data for the object Both simple rules and multiple severity rules include a scope conditions expressions messages and actions Once you create a rule you can assign values to
106. uncompressed backups see step 4 on page 96 InnoDB Hot Backup version 3 0 0 Copyright 2002 2005 Innobase Oy License A11983 is granted to Vizioncore Inc This program is legally licensed to Vizioncore to be used in connection with a product of Vizioncore only Type ibbackup license for detailed license terms help for help Contents of C Vizioncore vFoglight backup config backup cnf innodb_data_home_dir got value C Vizioncore vFoglight backup data innodb_data_file_path got value ibdatal 10M autoextend datadir got value C Vizioncore vFoglight backup data innodb_log_group_home_dir got value C Vizioncore vFoglight backup data innodb_log_files_in_group got value 2 innodb_log_file_size got value 134217728 081024 10 56 21 ibbackup ibbackup_logfile s creation parameters ibbackup start lsn 0 43520 end lsn 0 43655 ibbackup start checkpoint 0 43655 InnoDB Doing recovery scanned up to log sequence number 0 43655 InnoDB Starting an apply batch of log records to the database InnoDB Progress in percents 012345 6789101112 100 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 Setting log file size to 0 134217728 InnoDB Progress in MB 10
107. vFoglight Your embedded MySQL database is successfully backed up For instructions on how to restore the database MySQL database using these files see To restore an embedded MySQL database previously backed up using the InnoDB tools on page 104 For complete information about the InnoDB Hot Backup tool visit the following URL http www innodb com hot backup Upgrading vFoglight The vFoglight Management Server installer checks for an existing version 5 x installation of the Management Server in the target directory If an existing 5 x installation is found in the directory you are prompted to choose whether you want to install a new version of the vFoglight Management Server or to upgrade that instance of the Management Server If you would like to install a new instance of the same version you must select the New Install option in the installer and choose a different and empty installation folder You cannot re install the Management Server into the same directory as an existing installation of the same version When running in the upgrade mode the installer upgrades all files in the target directory and upgrades the database All product files in the target directory are overwritten however any customizations already made are retained Caution Before upgrading vFoglight to a newer version it is necessary to back up the previous vFoglight installation directory and the database used by the existing vFoglight Management
108. vFoglight environment Registry Variable a AvailabilityCritical amp AvailabilityFatal AvailabilityTarget AvailabilityWarning BaselineFactor BSM URL CapacityCritical CapacityFatal CapacityWarning CATALYST_URL CollisionRateCritical CollisionRate Warning CPUCritical CPUFatal CPUWaitCritical CPUWaitWarning CPUWarning DBADMIN DBSMon CriticalDatabaseUsagePct DBSMon CriticalFreeTablespacesize Note The list does not include the registry variables that contain password values Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 211 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables b Inthe Registry Variable list scroll down until you find SYSADMIN and select that entry 5 Select the topology type to which the SYSADMIN variable is scoped a Inthe View Registry Variable view click the link that appears on the right of Topology Type Name The Topology Type list appears showing all topology types that exist in your vFoglight environment Topology Type a Agent AgentHealthState AgentState AggregateModelInstance AggregateModelRoot AIX_Host AlarmChangeType AlarmRuleBasedview AlarmSeverity ApacheSyr_RegCodes ApacheSvr_ReqTypes ApacheSvr_Stats ApacheSvr_Transactions ApacheSvrAgent ApacheSyvrAgent_F4Table ApplicationTier ApplicationTopology ApplicationTopologyModel AppMonitor_AgentMsgs AppMonitor_AppAvailability b In the Topology Type list scroll down until you find Host and select that entry 6 Select the
109. value File system scope get filesystemName is now full 496 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide If you want to reference the topology object from within a string or embedded query you must prefix the scope variable with the dollar sign For example File system Sscope is now full or Filesystem where name S scope get filesystemName How do export metrics from the command line The fglcmd tool includes a command that allows you to export metric observations to a file using a metric query The met ricexport command can be used to export metrics to a CSV or XML file For example the following command exports the values of the Process metric collected in the past two hours to a CSV file C Vizioncore vFoglight bin gt fglemd usr foglight pwd foglight cmd util metricexport output_format csv metric_query Processes from Windows_System_System_Table for 2 hours f my_metric_query csv For complete details on how to configure fglcma and about the ut il metricexport command see the Command Line Reference Guide Appendix vFoglight Client Reference While the new versions of vFoglight use the vFoglight Agent Manager to communicate with vFoglight agents previous versions used the vFoglight Client The Administration module and vFoglight command line interface support both technologies however some dashboards in the browser interface as well as vFoglight commands c
110. value of the mail user vFoglight registry variable Setting Up vFoglight 63 Viewing vFoglight Configuration Mail Global Settings Connection Timeout Not Globally Configured From Not Globally Configured SMTP Host Not Globally Configured SMTP Port Not Globally Configured Recipient Not Globally Configured Socket Timeout Not Globally Configured User Not Globally Configured For information on how to view the information on the vFoglight Configuration dashboard see Accessing the vFoglight Configuration Dashboard on page 67 Ports This view contains information about port settings The port settings are defined in the file lt vfoglight_home gt config foglight config For more information about this file see the Installation and Setup Guide For details on default port assignments see Default port assignments on page 65 The Ports view displays the following settings Cluster Mcast Port Cluster Multi cast port used when vFoglight is running in High Availability HA mode This setting is defined by the foglight cluster mcast_port parameter HA JNDI RMI Port Port for the Remote Method Invocation RMI naming service when vFoglight is running in HA mode It can be used to observe the network traffic between the vFoglight Management Server and other computers on the same network If it finds another JBoss server it checks the partition name to see if the JBoss server is a primary or a secondary server This setting is
111. want to copy will be carried over to the destination severity For example if you edit an action for the Warning condition of a rule without saving it and then proceed to copy that action in the Critical pane the unsaved edits of the Warning action will be carried over to the Critical severity Copying severity level actions and variables can be useful in situations when those definitions are identical or in some cases are similar Instead of writing and validating them for each severity level you can copy existing ones and modify them as required To copy variables and actions from an existing severity level Note This procedure continues from Defining the rule scope on page 253 1 On the Conditions Alarms amp Actions tab open the Conditions tab The Condition tab opens in the display area 1 Copy condtonatann from Copy variablesJections from Condition Severity Level Variables T Action F Activate Condition D Alarm Message BROOD AA fi 2 Choose the severity level from which you want to copy the conditional expression Caution You can only copy the conditions from those severity levels that are already defined Attempting to copy a condition for a rule that has no conditions defined results in error a Click the Copy variables actions button above the Condition tab A list appears showing those severity levels for which the conditions have been defined For example if you are defining a condi
112. with Thresholds To bind a threshold level to a metric Note This procedure continues from Selecting metrics and threshold levels on page 363 or Viewing and editing thresholds on page 360 1 Select the severity type of the threshold level Click Level and select a threshold level from the list that appears 2 Select the Metric Threshold Bound option The display area refreshes showing a set of controls that allow you to define the metric to which you want to bind the severity level metric Threshold Bound Bound Type Registry variable Threshold Bound O constant Threshold Bound Metric Select Metric v Number of Standard Deviation inclusive 3 Click Metric and select a metric from the list that appears 4 Optional Specify the standard deviation from the value that the selected metric contains In the Number of Standard Deviation box type the standard deviation 5 If you want vFoglight to acknowledge that the threshold is reached when the threshold level exceeds the value of the binding metric ensure that the Inclusive check box is cleared If you want vFoglight to acknowledge that the threshold is reached when the threshold level reaches the value of the binding metric check the Inclusive check box 6 Click the Add button on the right of the Bound Type options The newly created metric threshold bound appears in the Threshold Bounds table 368 vF oglight Administration and Config
113. you click Create Bundle on the Manage Support Bundles dashboard the vFoglight Management Server creates the ZIP file in the lt vfoglight_home gt support lt user_name gt directory on the computer hosting the vFoglight Management Server Alternatively you can delete a license using the support bundle command that comes with the fg1cmd interface For details see the Command Line Reference Guide Depending on the type of browser you are running and its settings you might be able to retrieve a copy of an existing server support bundle as a file download For more information see Retrieving Server Support Bundles on page 79 To create a server support bundle Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Support Bundles Dashboard on page 76 1 Optional Specify the description of the support bundle In the Manage Support Bundles dashboard in the Create Support Bundle area type the description in the Description box For example My support bundle 2 Click Create Bundle A status bar appears above the Create Bundle button indicating that the bundle creation is in progress Create Bundle When vFoglight finishes generating the support bundle your Web browser displays a dialog box that allows you to open or save the support bundle 78 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide You have chosen to open J support_bundle_foglight_2008 04 11_13 57 04 zip which is a WinZip File From http
114. 0 Setting log file size to 0 134217728 InnoDB Progress in MB 100 ibbackup We were able to parse ibbackup_logfile up to ibbackup lsn 0 43655 ibbackup The first data file is C Vizioncore vFoglight backup data ibdatal ibbackup and the new created log files are at C Vizioncore vFoglight backup data 081024 10 56 35 ibbackup Full backup prepared for recovery successfully 7 View and observe the contents of the backup directory by issuing the following command Note The example bellow illustrates the process of backing up a MySQL database on Windows which uses the back slash character as a directory separator and the dir command to list files C Vizioncore vFoglight mysql bin gt dir C Vizioncore vFoglight backup data Volume in drive C is System Volume Serial Number is BCD1 A216 Directory of C Vizioncore vFoglight backup data 10 24 2008 10 56 AM lt DIR gt 10 24 2008 10 56 AM lt DIR gt 10 24 2008 10 55 AM 5 632 ibbackup_logfile 10 24 2008 10 55 AM 10 485 760 ibdatal 10 24 2008 10 56 AM 64 ib logfile0 10 24 2008 10 56 AM 64 ib_logfilel 4 File s 278 922 240 bytes 2 Dir s 48 747 614 208 bytes free In addition to the files ibbackup_logfile and ibdata1 that were created at backup time see step 5 the backup directory now includes two additional log files ib_logfileO and ib_logfile1 which means that the logs have been applied successfully Setting Up vFoglight 101 Backing Up Upgrading and Restoring
115. 07 managing users and security 105 about 106 retrieving data 467 Rules amp Notifications dashboards 183 184 223 about 184 managing registry variables 185 managing rules 225 Schedules dashboards 395 about 396 managing schedules 397 setting up vFoglight 53 about 54 managing licenses 69 managing support bundles 75 viewing audit information 82 viewing connection status 54 viewing vF oglight configuration 56 Setup amp Support dashboards 53 about 54 Connection Status 54 Manage Licenses 69 Manage Support Bundles 75 vF oglight Configuration 56 View Audit Information 82 tasks 50 Tooling dashboards 447 about 448 Build Script Agent 448 Script Editor 467 Users amp Security dashboards 105 about 106 Configure Directory Services 139 Configure Password Settings 135 Manage Groups 118 Manage Roles 127 Manage Users 107 using schedules 395 about 396 viewing the home page 39 working with data 327 about 328 adding topology types 329 collecting data with older timestamps 392 working with derived metrics 332 working with registry 183 184 about 184 working with rules 183 223 about 184 working with thresholds 353 working with vF oglight tooling 447 about 448 Administration node in navigation panel 43 Agent Adapters dashboard 502 Agent Blackouts dashboard 179 180 182 Selected Agents dialog box 181 182 Agent Blackouts node in navigation panel 179 agent components downloading 161 161 Agent Hosts dashboard 44 agent instances
116. 08 13 28 35 ee ee ET Dashboard Designer Foglight Administrators Builtin Dashboard User Foglight Administrators Guilt in To clear the filters click Clear Filters The Manage Roles list refreshes showing the list of all groups Managing Users and Security 131 Managing Roles Manage Males May 30 2008 105040 EDT Manage Roles showing 1 9 of 9 Roles as of May 30 2008 13 26 35 tatresh gag he Ft Administrator Foglight Administrators builtin amp Advancad Operator Foglight Administrators Built in Cartridge Developer Cartridge Developers Built in Console User Cartridge Developers Foglight Administrators Foglight Operators Guilt in Dashboard Designer Foglight Administrators Bullt In Dashboard User Foglight Administrators Built tn General Access Foglight Administrators Guilt in Operator Foglight Administrators Foglight Operators Sulit In Security Foglight Security Administrators Built in bad Create Roi O Osse Ed Group M From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures e Creating Roles on page 131 e Editing Groups for a Role on page 132 e Deleting Internal Roles on page 133 Creating Roles Use the Create Role button on the Manage Roles dashboard to add a role to vFoglight as outlined below To create a role Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Roles Dashboard on page 129 1 In the Manage Roles dashboard click the Create Role bu
117. 1 cd to the directory where you want to install vFoglight 2 Ifthe backup of the old installation is not compressed continue with step If the backup is a ZIP file first unzip it gunzip lt path_to_zipfile gt lt old_installation_zipfile gt tar gz The old vFoglight installation directory is now restored To restore an embedded MySQL database previously backed up using the InnoDB tools 1 Stop the vFoglight Management Server 2 Copy the backup data that was created with the InnoDB tool including the data files and the log files to the directory lt vfoglight_home gt mysql data The backup data and log files use the following naming convention e ibdata lt 1 n gt The name of the first data file is ibdatal of the second ibdata2 and so on The number of data files depends on the size of the backed up database e ib_logfile lt 0 n gt The name of the first log file is ib_logfileO of the second ib_logfile1 and so on The number of log files depends on the size of the backed up database and the size of the log file specified in the backup configuration file backup cnf For complete information about the process of backing up an embedded MySQL database using InnoDB see To back up an embedded MySQL database using the InnoDB Hot Backup tool on page 95 3 Start the vFoglight Management Server Your database files are now successfully restored to their original location Managing Users and Security This chapter introduc
118. 1 prod quest corp cf238d96 3a56 45d6 a33e b88bb7d4ff55 Installer ID tor012991 prod quest corp cf238d96 3a56 45d6 a33 b88bb7d4ff55 FG1AM tor012991 prod quest corp cf238d96 3a56 45d6 a33e b88bb7d4ff55 installer Agent Package ID OSCartridge WindowsxXP 5 2 4 OSCartridge Agent WindowsXP windows 5 1 ia32 x86_64 Agent Package Cartridge Name OSCartridge WindowsxXP Agent Package Cartridge Version 5 2 4 Agent Package OS windows 508 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Agent Package OS Version 5 1 Agent Package OS Architecture i1a32 x86_64 C Vizioncore vFoglight bin gt fglemd usr foglight pwd foglight cmd agent packages clientid MyHost SPI MyHost 0 Installer ID MyHost SPI MyHost 0 SpiInstaller admin Agent Package ID C lt foglight_home gt dist tmp cartridge exploded OSCartridge usrnsupported WindowsXP 5_1 HEAD_3 20 090208_0630 TI nstallers 5_1 HEAD_3 20 090208_0630 OSCartridge Agent WindowsXP Zip Agent Package Cartridge Name OSCartridge usrnsupported WwindowsxXP Agent Package Cartridge Version 5 2 4 HEAD_3 20 090208_0630 Index A Agent Properties 167 about vFoglight 10 building script agents 448 Action Parameter Editor dialog box 295 296 297 script syntax 449 Add Retention Policy dialog box 388 389 Cartridges dashboards 147 Add Role Permission dialog box 189 229 337 357 about 148 400 cartridge components 148 Add Topology Type dashboard 40 42 329 330 331
119. 102 about 89 retention policies creating 388 editing 386 examples addressing data storage concerns 390 managing 372 accessing Manage Retention Policies dashboard 378 deleting retention policies 381 mechanisms 373 roles assigning roles to groups 124 creating 131 deleting internal roles 133 editing role groups 132 managing 127 Index 525 accessing Manage Roles dashboard 129 Rule Confirmation dialog box 231 232 237 238 239 240 Rule Scope field editing 474 rules actions defining behavior 302 adding severity level variables 256 alarms defining behavior 302 associating with schedules 299 conditions action types 278 actions 278 adding actions to rules 286 copying 276 copying actions 297 defining 263 267 defining actions 278 setting expression scope 262 using trigger specific variables in expressions 292 writing 261 copying severity level variables 297 creating 246 defining 248 conditions alarms and actions 254 getting started 249 rule scope 253 rule triggers 251 rule types 250 disabling 234 enabling 234 examples creating a multiple severity rule scoped to an EJ B instance 311 creating a simple rule 313 creating multiple severity rules with a topology scope 314 526 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide managing 225 accessing Manage Rules dashboard 225 copying rules 231 editing rule permissions 228 editing rules 245 resuming rule actions 238 resuming rule alarms 236 rules 233 sus
120. 2 agents as of Sep 29 2008 10 41 22 tokeo e GB _ t0r012991 prod 0 sm SPiNetwork 5 24 x _ _tor12991 prod Windows Syster SPI Windows Syster 5 2 4 x Agent Adapters dashboard Agent Adapters May 12 2008 11 07 22 AM EDT Agent Adapters showing 1 2 of 2 adapters as of May 12 2008 10 32 36 Refresh e sr OK SPI AgentAdapter 5 2 2 e XML HTTP OK undefined undefined Appendix vFoglight Client Reference 503 Command Line Interface Command Line Interface This section contains fglemd examples and their command line output that appears when the agent instances in your monitoring environment use the vFoglight Client for communication with the vFoglight Management Server It includes the following sections e Deploying agent packages on page 503 e Creating agent instances on page 504 e Retrieving agent logs on page 505 e vFoglight Client IDs on page 506 e Installer IDs on page 507 For more information about fglemd and the command line output that is generated in environments that use the vFoglight Agent Manager for managing agent instances see the Command Line Reference Guide Deploying agent packages Important The procedure below assumes that the have access to and have configured the fglcmd package on the computer you are using to deploy agent packages For complete instructions see the Command Line Reference Guide To deploy an age
121. 2008 01 16_114450_001 log 3 Review the above output and record the log file that you want to retrieve 4 Transfer that log file into a local directory using the following command syntax fglcmd usr username pwd password cmd agent getlog log path_and_name_of_log_file f path_and_name_of_destination_file If successful this command does not generate any output Note If you pull agent logs into the lt vfoglight_home gt logs directory they will be packaged as part of the server support bundle For more information about server support bundles see Chapter 2 Managing Support Bundles on page 75 vFoglight Client IDs Some commands for example agent create require a vFoglight Agent Manager ID as a parameter vFoglight Agent Manager IDs identify agent management processes on remote machines For agents managed by the vFoglight Agent Manager vFoglight Agent Manager IDs identify instances of the vFoglight Agent Manager Since it is possible to have several process managers on a monitored host vFoglight Agent Manager IDs are more complex than host names The vFoglight Agent Manager IDs use the following syntax lt hostname gt SPI HostName 0 MS lt hostname gt SP1I HostName 0 vFoglight Agent Manager IDs for running agent managers can be obtained by executing the agent packages command C Vizioncore vFoglight bin gt fglemd usr foglight pwd foglight cmd agent types host MyHost Client ID MyHost SPI M
122. 3 In the severity level area open the Severity Level Variables tab and add severity level variables that contain the information that you want to print to an output file For example Severity Level Variables Severity Level Variables Name Expression Message Type Subject Oracle var1 has invalid objects Message Text Oracle var1 var2 has var3 inv Message vari queryResult Instance from Oracle Expression var2 scope get Owner Expression var3 Num_Objects Expression var4 f4 registry OraDBAWarning Expression vars scope get agent host name Expression The above example shows seven different severity level variables e Subject Text Define the text that appears in the alarm message e varl Retrieves the result of a query For example the expression queryResult Instance from OracleHost_Processes returns the value of the Instance field of the OracleHost_Processes table e var2 var5 Retrieve the value of a topology property that exists in the rule scope using the scope variable and its get function For example the expression scope get agent host name obtains the name of a monitored host that is being monitored by an agent object instance that exists in the rule scope e var3 Retrieves the value of a property of the scoped topology type For example the expression Num_Objects retrieves the value of the Num_Objects property of the scoped topology type e var4 Retrieves the value of
123. 3355 EI Salvador Web Address www dell com sv E Mail Address la techsupport dell com Technical Support Customer Service Sales 800 6132 Finland Helsinki International Access Web Address E Mail Address Technical Support support euro dell com fi_support dell com 0207 533 555 Code 990 Customer Service 0207 533 538 Country Code 358 City Code 9 Switchboard 0207 533 533 Sales under 500 employees 0207 533 540 Fax 0207 533 530 Sales over 500 employees 0207 533 533 Fax 0207 533 530 France Paris Web Address Support euro dell com Montpellier Home and Small Business International Access Technical Support 0825 387 270 Code 00 Customer Service 0825 832 833 Country Code 33 Switchboard 0825 004 700 City Codes 1 4 Switchboard calls from outside of France Sales Fax Fax calls from outside of France Corporate 04 99 75 40 00 0825 004 700 0825 004 701 04 99 75 40 01 0825 004 719 nana ee 0825 338 339 Switchboard 55 94 71 00 01 55 9471 00 Sales Germany Frankfurt Web Address support euro dell com International Access E mail Address tech support central europe dell com Code 00 Technical Support 069 9792 7200 Country Code 49 Home Small Business Customer Service Global Segment Customer Service 0180 5 224400 069 9792 7320 City Code 69 Preferred Accounts Customer Service 069 9792 7320 Large Accounts Customer Service 069 9792 7320 Public Accounts Customer Service 069 9792
124. 373 Managing Retention Policies e About Retention Policy Mechanisms on page 373 e Accessing the Manage Retention Policies Dashboard on page 378 e Deleting Retention Policies on page 381 e Viewing the Hierarchy of Topology Types in the Database Schema on page 383 e Editing Retention Policies on page 386 e Creating Retention Policies on page 388 About Retention Policy Mechanisms While it is theoretically possible to create any retention policy that you desire in vFoglight the design of the system constrains the easy to accomplish retention policies to a narrow range of options Specifically the database design of vFoglight provides a structure that is capable of holding data in three different buckets called generations that are defined in lt vfoglight_home gt config storage config xml Each generation has a predefined period of time in which it retains data Without modification to the generations there are specific rules that must be followed when assigning retention policies to ensure that you get the results you are expecting This section provides information on the key mechanisms involved in retention policies and rules for defining retention policies that work effectively with the default database configuration For complete information see the following sections e About database generations on page 373 e How vFoglight populates database generations on page 374 e How retenti
125. Administration gt Data gt Create Threshold The Create Threshold dashboard appears in the display area Create Threshold Apr 29 2008 11 22 01 AM EDT Select Metric Select Threshold Level Add Bounds Threshold Added Step 1 Create Threshold Select Metric Topology Type Select Topology Type Iw Metric Select Metric v From here you can proceed to Defining Thresholds on page 362 Defining Thresholds Defining thresholds involves several steps Once you get started with threshold creation you need to select the topology type and the metrics using that type for which you want to define thresholds Furthermore you need to specify threshold levels and bounds and finally view the threshold summary For instructions see the following sections e Selecting metrics and threshold levels on page 363 e Adding bounds to metric threshold levels on page 364 Working with Data 363 Working with Thresholds Selecting metrics and threshold levels To select a metric and its threshold level Note This procedure continues from Creating Thresholds on page 361 1 Choose the topology type of the metric whose thresholds you want to set In the Create Threshold dashboard in the Step 1 Create Threshold Select Metric area click Topology Type and select the topology type from the list that appears 2 Choose the metric whose thresholds you want to set Click Metric and sele
126. Administration and Configuration Guide After a few moments in the Agent Operation dialog box in the Status column of the Progress table a green check mark appears indicating a success of the operation Working with vF oglight Tooling 463 Building Script Agents Agent Operation Task Agent Operation Pro Progress Message statis P EEr Activating MyScript4gentMyScriptAgent_on_tor01 2991 prodau ap b Inthe Agent Operation dialog box click OK The Agent Operation dialog box closes and the Agent Status area refreshes showing the Activated icon and Collecting Data icon j in the row containing the script agent indicating that the agent is active and collecting data eo ia l Mattnaene Agent Mame Mamenace Type Version tage m oa tor012991 prod quest c MyScriptAgont MySerip SP MyScripthgent 1 2 0 x Note It may take some time for the Activated and Collecting Data 41 icons to appear even if activation of the agent was successful The Activated icon appears when the Management Server has confirmed that the agent has started and is running If the activation command was executed successfully but the agent fails after starting the Activated icon will not appear 464 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Editing Script Agent Properties In some cases you might need to edit the properties of the newly created script agent For example Type 1 script agents control their standby periods
127. Bundles we 19 Vie WING AUGIE NTOMNAUON ss cetsciss Hectic dastas acdttaaatunatied aie Aaitaiiad ciate dctuabiset ince ata ahawanusanaudnaets 82 Accessing the View Audit Information Dashboard sssssssesssssssessssssessssssessessesssssseessesssesresssesssesseenesssasesssees 83 Filtering Audit Eog S meins ts iannau ta ied wash aan adadend 87 Viewing Log Entries c scsssssssssscssssscssssesesssssesssessscssessssssssssssssssssesusesessnsesneesuesnsesnssseessessessesssesseessessessusaseesseees 88 Backing Up Upgrading and Restoring VFOglight sc esecseestesseesteseestesseessessesseeseesusssessisseessieesnaeseeesnesees 89 Backing Wp VE OOGM ts ctincties Risa ccetcutint int a aa cai alan nattamuettanatencite 89 Upgrading vF ogli hits sssistwsstiis cxcesttccscncdnsaceisdiatinntidaamiaiaania iin adda daniiaaiienianiaetn 101 Restoring vFoglight Managing Users and SeCUrity issssssssssssscesescsseescscessoeeceeieencesneeeeaceeieeniesieeiieecesieeninseeaiteceeieeiesieiieieny 105 ADOUES CCUM INVE OGliQN br ssccsscczesnsmearctntcetsncateecan A a e hanna anm a NANA AE A 106 Managing USers a Stwavcanwitka datadivh wana andi damned aad ad wh aka enon 107 Accessing the Manage Users Dashboard cesssssecssessscecsseesstessceesneessteessseesucssieesseesusessteenieesnessseeaneesntensneesy 108 Creating UserSinda tanned hed athe ie ia wd ent ee iret caddie MA ea nt Adding Users to Groups Changing Passwords casa ean een ean ta so lec ean ad well newer
128. City Code 20 Home Small Business Customer Service Relational Customer Service Home Small Business Sales Relational Sales Home Small Business Sales Fax Relational Sales Fax 020 674 42 00 020 674 43 25 020 674 55 00 020 674 50 00 020 674 47 75 020 674 47 50 Switchboard 020 674 50 00 Switchboard Fax 020 674 47 50 New Zealand Web Address Support ap dell com International Access Code 00 Country Code 64 E mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales Support ap dell com contactus 0800 441 567 Nicaragua Web Address E mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales www dell com ni la techsupport dell com 001 800 220 1377 Norway Lysaker Web Address Support euro dell com er Technical Support 671 16882 International Access Code 00 Relational Customer Service 671 17575 c Home Small Business Customer Service 231 62298 ountry Code 47 Switchboard 671 16800 Fax Switchboard 671 16865 Panama Web Address www dell com pa E mail Address la techsupport dell com Technical Support Customer Service Sales 011 800 507 1264 Peru Web Address www dell com pe E mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales la techsupport dell com 0800 50 669 Poland Warsaw International Access Web Address E mail Address support euro dell com pl support tech dell com Customer Service Phone 57 95 700 Code 011 Customer Service 57 95 999 C
129. Currently Licensed Capabilities view lists license related features indicating which features are included in your license An icon appears to the right of each capability indicating if the capability is licensed or not 6 Inthe Administration dashboard observe the License Information view The License Information view lists the numbers of installed and expired licenses and the licenses that are to expire within the next 30 days To find out more about your vFoglight licenses click an entry in the License Information view The Manage Licenses dashboard appears in the display area About the Administration Module Viewing the Administration Dashboard Aeri ger oman Ramage La oases ad Hh Doon Ava Om OT install License Fieoakoca Compa S I E C Feos lll instali License Licensed Capability Semmary canis P cnadled D Performance instalation E High Avattabitity W cadea Calendars P enabied mh meee W coated LDAP tetegration Y castia Request Trace Amitysis Y cradled Data Archiving Trending Enabled Cartridge Liceme Hame Al cartridges ace licensed Showing 1 1 of 1 licenses as of Jud 16 2008 13 59 30 Clear Fitecs 123 4567890 Aug 15 2008 DOBO To return to the Administration dashboard click Administration in the breadcrumb trail In the Administration dashboard observe the Federation view 49 The Federation view shows the federation mode of the vFoglight Management Server and
130. DAP context for user searching Role attribute ID Is Role attribute a DN User alias attribute ID User attribute ID to search for groups Match on User DN JAAS LoginModule Name Name of JAAS security domain Parent group attribute ID Group attribute for nested group searching Maximum level of group nesting LDAP search timeout milliseconds Mode of group searching Account is anonymous May 30 2008 1 32 46 PM EDT Idap ldapsvr mycompany com 389 Idap backupldapsvr mycompany com 389 CN OU Employees DC mycompany DC com OQU Groups DC mycompany DC com QU Dynamic Groups DC mycompany DC com ou Employees DC mycompany DC com name false sAMAccountName member true com questnitro service security auth spi NitroExter fgl web console memberOf member 15 10000 direct From here you can proceed to Editing Directory Settings on page 142 141 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Editing Directory Settings Default settings for these LDAP directory servers are different The table below shows examples of these settings for different types of LDAP directory servers Use the following settings as guidelines they should be substituted with the most appropriate values Refer to the documentation for your specific LDAP server for more information about settings and values Examples Setting Active Directory Sun Java Systems Directory Server OpenLDAP Novell eD
131. Day box accepts the values between 1 and 31 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 31 negative values are not accepted For example to have the schedule occurring on the sixth day of every April month click the Month box and select April from the list that appears and in the Day box type 6 as illustrated bellow ea ce CBy Week Every April 6 e To have the schedule occurring on a particular day of the week in the Recurrence Pattern area select the By Week option The Recurrence Pattern area refreshes showing a set of the controls that allow you to specify the pattern Recurrence Pattern Monday GOnce 3 M Tuesday C Periodical Daily CBy Date mhe E Thursday o CWeekly By Week Frida Y g CMonthly Y GY earl M Saturday Y M Sunday Specify the week of the month the day of the week and the month on which the schedule occurs For example to have the schedule occurring every third Thursday in November click First and select Third from the list that appears Then select the Thursday check box click the Month box on the right and select November from the list that appears as illustrated below Using Schedules 445 Creating Schedules Monday Tuesday CBy Date Wednesday Meck TheLThird SI Thursday off November By Week Friday Saturday Sunday 5 Specify the date and time after which the schedule item ends using the controls in the Range of Occurrence area Range
132. Expressions Expression Editor Registry Variable gt MetriciProperty 85 Function Choose Metric or Property CollectionModelRootSummary gt CollectionModelRootSummary a gt Instances Properties aggregateAlarms aggregateChangeCount aggregateState alarmAggregateCriticalCount aggregateAlarmState alarmAggregateF atalCount modelAlarmCriticalCount alarmAggregateTotalCount modelAlarmFatalCount alarmAggregateVVarningCount modelAlarmvYarningCount alarmCriticalCount modelChangeCountDelta alarmFetalCourt alarmTotalCount alarmVVarningCount alarms annotations changeCount In the Properties pane select the property that you want to add to the condition rules or expression derived metrics a Choose a property from the list 5 Click the Insert button The dialog box closes and the Condition rules or Expression derived metrics box refreshes showing the newly selected instance or metric From here you can proceed to Validating conditions or expressions on page 490 Inserting Groovy functions The Function tab in the Condition Editor rules and Expression Editor derived metrics dialog box includes controls for inserting Groovy functions into rule conditions or derived metric expressions It lists the functions that you can use in conditions and expressions The functions that you see on this tab are defined in the vFoglight database For a full list of functions and their descriptions
133. F fie on Local Computer Some To on Serves neat cease L Cartridge hmteitstion P intis ES iagh a vaiatiiity v Pertormence Cateedars Y Coutiquration Masegemeet Y po O LDAP tetegration v Request Troco Ansipi Y BD Osta Archiving Trendig Y Cartridge likeme Neme Ali cartridges ove iketsod kagi AA E E ETTET ATUN insatonednetaatatcte late Piee Da eat ee tee ater l be ime Cant Fines hd ee tenia tame e trasar Aug 27 008 zsa gg 2j iwtect a tatect meme 3 To sort the list by license serial number or expiry date click Serial Number or Expiry Date as required 4 To filter the list of licenses in the area that shows the list of installed licenses use the Filter by Serial Number Expire After and Expire Before boxes as required To clear the filters click Clear Filters From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures e Installing Licenses on page 70 e Viewing License Capabilities on page 72 e Deleting Licenses on page 74 Installing Licenses The Install License area in the Manage Licenses dashboard allows you to install licenses on the vFoglight Management Server You can use it to install a license file that is accessible from the local machine or the vFoglight Management Server machine Setting Up vFoglight 71 Managing Licenses Alternatively you can install a license using the command line using the license import command that comes with the fg1cmd interface For details see th
134. F oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e Registry Variable A variable stored in the vFoglight registry that can be used in rule conditions actions and expressions The value of a registry variable can be configured to change over time Variables can be scoped to specific topology types or objects e Metric A metric is a value measured over time There are two types of metrics in vFoglight raw and derived Every metric is scoped to a topology type and may be scoped to one or more specific topology objects of that type e Raw Metric A raw metric is simply collected from your monitored environment That is it is not calculated from other metrics e Derived Metric A derived metric is calculated from one or more raw or derived metrics Derived metrics can be created in the vFoglight Administration Module e Topology Object Property Data collected from your monitored environment that describes a topology object You can create new rules define existing or newly created rules and manage rules using the dashboards that come with the Administration module vFoglight comes with a set of core rules Each cartridge has their own collection of rules For information about core vFoglight rules see Core vFoglight Rules on page 305 For details about cartridge based rules see your cartridge documentation For information about rule related operations that you can perform in the Administration module see the following sectio
135. Guide 13 vFoglight Documentation Suite e Installation and Setup Guide set all in PDF format e Installation and Setup Guide Installing on Windows with an Embedded MySQL Database e Installation and Setup Guide Installing on Windows with an External MySQL Database e Installation and Setup Guide Installing on Windows with an External Oracle Database e Administration and Configuration Guide PDF and online help e vFoglight User Guide PDF and online help e Advanced Configuration Guide set e Command Line Reference Guide PDF and online help e Web Component Guide PDF and online help e Web Component Tutorial PDF and online help e Web Component Reference online help Cartridge Documentation Sets When you deploy a cartridge the documentation set for the cartridge is installed The online help for the cartridge is integrated automatically with the core vFoglight help When you open the help the name of the cartridge is displayed in a top level entry within the table of contents Some cartridges include additional PDF guides which may be one or more of the following a Getting Started Guide an Installation Guide a User Guide and a Reference Guide Feedback on the Documentation We are interested in receiving feedback from you about our documentation For example did you notice any errors in the documentation Were any features undocumented Do you have any suggestions on how we can improve the documentation All c
136. Metric a ServicelevePokc Fatal 0 0 c Critical A w Refresh Clear filters Tepelegy Type Summary AyobabatyF otek Select All Select Nene 3 To sort the list of thresholds by the metric in which they are defined or the topology type that is used to define the metric click the Metric or Topology Type column headings as required 4 Optional Filter the list of thresholds using the topology type as the filter In the Topology Type box at the top type the name of the topology type The Manage Thresholds dashboard refreshes showing only the thresholds that are defined for the specified topology type To clear the filter click Clear Filters The Manage Thresholds dashboard refreshes showing the list of all thresholds Working with Data 355 Working with Thresholds Manage Threchalds AEC Showing 1 2 of 2 thresholds as of Ape 28 2008 10 56 57 aero Filler by Topology Type Clear Filters Metric a Topology Type Summary unalog ahity ServceLevePoicy Faro 0 X c a ADF re t Ad Threshold Select All Select None From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures e Editing threshold permissions on page 355 e Deleting thresholds on page 359 e Viewing and editing thresholds on page 360 Editing threshold permissions vFoglight allows you to control access to thresholds For each threshold you can grant or deny read write or control access to roles or users For more information about
137. Pegsty vaatis Go m hegatry Yanatia Lat Daisne Tan v anaiie 2 Observe the variable definitions 3 Edit the variable if required For complete instructions see Specifying values on page 201 Creating Registry Variables vFoglight allows you to create registry variables using the Create Registry Variable dashboard You can access this dashboard from the navigation panel or through the Manage Registry Variables dashboard To create a registry variable Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow iF on the left 196 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 2 Open the Create Registry Variable dashboard by completing one of the following steps e On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Rules amp Notifications gt Manage Registry Variables In the Manage Registry Variables dashboard that appears in the display area click the Add Variable button in the lower left corner or e On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Rules amp Notifications gt Create Registry Variable The Create Registry Variable dashboard appears in the display area Create Registry Yariable Apr 23 2008 11 13 55 PM EDT Create Registry Variable Registry Variable Added Step 1 Create Registry Variable R
138. Queries and Scripts on page 467 Building Script Agents Custom script agents interact with the vFoglight Agent Manager through the vFoglight collector executable You can use any scripting language to write your scripts Script based custom agents output to standard output st dout and the vFoglight collector reads the data and retransmits it to the vFoglight Agent Manager There are two types of Script Agents e Type l scripts The vFoglight collector calls these scripts every time they need to collect data In Type 1 scripts the collector executes the script then stands by for a time period specified in the agent properties When the standby period ends the collector becomes active and reruns the script Type scripts are useful for collecting data that does not require calculations from multiple collection periods For a sample of a Type script see Example Type Script on page 466 Working with vF oglight Tooling 449 Building Script Agents e Type 2 scripts These scripts control their own collection frequency cycle In Type 2 scripts the vFoglight collector executes the script and remains open The script controls the standby period instead of the agent properties Type 2 scripts perform data calculations before the data enters the database and measure changes between collection periods For a sample of a Type 2 script see Example Type 2 Script on page 466 Building a script agent involves several steps F
139. Scheded Tine Recurrence Patam Range of Occurrence Detads Thu Aug 14 2008 235900 EDT Onty Tine Range End By Aug 15 20080000 Every 1 day s 23 56 hour s from 23 59 Delete Selected Add Schedule tem Copy Schedule Go to Schedule List Delete This Schedule 7 Add one or more schedule items if required For details see Adding or Removing Schedule Items on page 410 To define a schedule item that occurs weekly Note This procedure continues from Adding or Removing Schedule Items on page 410 428 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 1 Inthe Recurrence Pattern area select the Weekly option The view refreshes showing a set of controls that allow you to define a schedule item that occurs on a weekly basis Schedule Name My Schedule Description Comments Start Date j4 August gt J z008 End Time hh mm f0 0 s Start Time hh mm jo o I Whole Day Duration hh mm fi 3 p Recurrence Pattern COnce SE A Every fi week s on ai Weekly Monday Tuesday Wednesday Jv Thursday C Monthly Friday Saturday M Sunday Yearly 2 Specify the start date of the recurrence pattern Use the Start Date boxes to specify the day month and year of the start date Alternatively click the Calendar button on the right and use the calendar controls that appear to specify the start date Tip The Day box accepts the values between 1 and 31 Any positive values outside that rang
140. Schedule Name and Description 408 Step 2 Registry Variable Added 284 285 Step 3 Create Schedule Schedule Added 411 Support Bundle Inventory 78 79 Unlicensed Server View 37 vFoglight Server Topology 57 View Cartridge Details 152 View Registry Variable 209 210 211 212 WCF 61 Ww WCF view 61
141. Service Sales www dell com vi la techsupport dell com toll free 1 877 702 4360 Venezuela Web Address E mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales www dell com ve la techsupport dell com 0800 100 4752 1 About the Administration Module The Administration module allows you to manage vFoglight in a way that best implements your business logic It offers a set of dashboards that allow you to manage vFoglight cartridges agents data rules and security This chapter contains the following section About Models and Scope in WFOQUQIE ccc csccesssciiee tee esccterdussene detente 30 Getting Started with the Administration Module ssssssssssssssessrssessrssssssssesssssesersssssressssnsessenses 32 Viewing the Administration DaShb0ard cssscssssesssessssssssrssessssssssssssssrssesssssrssssasrsssnsesensees 39 Looking at Administaton TASKS cicirine i aae 50 30 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide About Models and Scope in vFoglight A model is a principle for organizing monitoring data that vFoglight gathers from host systems vFoglight models have a tree like structure that contains nodes Each node in the model can have properties metrics alarms and other nodes associated with it vFoglight adds these entities to the nodes in the data model as it collects them vFoglight can create different types of models Collection models include raw data Virtual models are built o
142. Suspending or resuming alarms on page 236 Suspending or resuming actions on page 238 Viewing rule schedules on page 240 Viewing a rule summary on page 241 228 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e Viewing and editing rule definitions on page 245 Editing rule permissions vFoglight allows you to control access to rules For each rule you can grant or deny read write or control access to roles or users For more information about security concepts in vFoglight see Chapter 3 Managing Users and Security on page 105 vFoglight employs the following behavior when it comes to rule permissions e If no one has a permission to the rule everyone has a permission e If one has a permission to the rule others with undefined permission do not have any permission e Final permission is based on a combination of the role user and rule defined on the server side Use the Edit Permissions button IF on the Manage Rules dashboard to navigate to the Edit Permissions for Rule area that allows you to add or edit permissions to roles and users as outlined below The Edit Permissions for Rules area contains two tables that show the permissions for each vFoglight user or role Permission granted Permission denied Permissions not assigned Not assigned To add permissions for a rule Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Rules dashboard on page 225
143. System_Table Properties w is equalto Vv Properties w is equalto v To specify a comparison expression complete the following steps a In the Filter tab click Properties and select a property b Click is equal to on the right and select a logical operator from the list that appears is equal to is not equal to is like or is not like c In the box to the right of the one containing the newly selected logical operator type the property value that you want to use in the filter If you do not want to add more comparison expressions to the filter click and on the right and select the blank entry If you want to add more expressions to the filter repeat step 2 and set the logical operators at the end of each line as required Note If you need to define more than three expressions in the filter you can add them after closing the Scoping Query Editor dialog box Click Insert Query Using the Query Language 479 Using the Query Language to Set the Rule or Derived Metric Scope The Scoping Query Editor dialog box closes and the scoping query or scoping query segment appears in the box immediately below the Topology Type and Property boxes 6 Validate the scope by clicking the Validate Scope button on the right If the scope is valid a confirmation message appears above the Topology Type box while the name of the newly edited expression appears at the bottom with the topology type instance refer
144. T SAMPLE PERIOD field_name type id obs unit value The following table describes the script elements some of which appears in the above block Script Element Definition END_SAMPLE_PERIOD Sends the current collection sample to the database and completes the transaction END_TABLE Closes the table field_name Contains the name of the field under which to store the observation id Indicates that the property should be treated as an identity LOG message Sends a status message to vFoglight Agent Manager logs with message specifying the message LOG severity messag Sends an error message to vFoglight Agent Manager logs with message specifying the message and severity Set to one of the following values FATAL WARNING or CRITICAL NEXT_SAMPLE Sends multiple rows of field data in a single transaction obs Indicates that the specified topology type is an observation such as St ringObservation SLEEP sample_freq In Type 2 scripts this element ends the script and instructs the collector to wait for the specified time before executing the script again Note In NT operating systems use the rapssleep command as those systems do not have a sleep facility rapssleep sample_ freq Working with vF oglight Tooling 451 Building Script Agents Script Element Definition START_SAMPLE_ PERIOD Starts the data collection for the specified tabl
145. Tag and Follow Toad T O A D Toad World VANALYZER VAUTOMATOR vCONTROL vCONVERTER vEssentials VFOGLIGHT vOPTIMIZER vRanger Pro vReplicator Vintela Virtual DBA VizionCore Xaffire and XRT are trademarks and registered trademarks of Quest Software Inc in the United States of America and other countries Other trademarks and registered trademarks used in this guide are property of their respective owners Disclaimer The information in this document is provided in connection with Quest products No license express or implied by estoppel or otherwise to any intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Quest products EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN QUEST S TERMS AND CONDITIONS AS SPECIFIED IN THE LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR THIS PRODUCT QUEST ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL QUEST BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL PUNITIVE SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF INFORMATION ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT EVEN IF QUEST HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Quest makes no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of
146. The Schedule Delete Confirmation dialog box closes 4 Observe the Manage Schedules dashboard The newly deleted schedule no longer appears in the list Using Schedules 405 Managing Schedules Viewing Schedule Definitions To view schedule definitions Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Schedules Dashboard on page 397 1 Inthe Manage Schedules dashboard click the Schedule Name column of the row containing the schedule whose definitions you want to view The Edit Schedule view appears in the Manage Schedules dashboard Manage Scheduler Age 0 2000 1 25 14 AM DOT Eda Schedule Business hours Schedule Name Business hours seve vew schede 9AM to SPM Monday to Friday Saree Description Comments Selected schedule 5 ret user edRable type You can onb update the description Ga to Schodde List Delete This Schecide 2 View the definitions of the selected schedule In the Edit Schedule view click the View Schedule button in the upper right corner The Business Hours dialog box appears 406 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Sohedule for A 4 gt April 30 2008 my 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 R 10 u 2 n 1 5 kac v7 2 I azam a 7a na vji 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 1 2007 2000 2000 3 Observe the schedule definitions for a selected date In the Business Hours dialog box use the calendar in the upper left corner to select a date On the right the s
147. The Schedule Items table refreshes showing the newly added schedule item Create Schedule Ang 14 2008 LLG AM EDT Edit Schedule My Schedule Changes have been saved Schedule Name My Schedule Save View Schedule Save Desc ription Comments schedule Items Next Scheaaed Tene Recurrence Pattern Range of Occurrence Letads Tene Range Thu Aug 14 2008 235900 BOT Only End By Aug 15 20080000 Every 1 days 2355 howis trom 23 59 Delete Selected Add Schedule Item Copy Schedule Go to Schedule List Delete This Schedule 7 Add one or more schedule items if required For details see Adding or Removing Schedule Items on page 410 9 Working with vFoglight Tooling This chapter introduces you to the Tooling dashboards and provides information on how to build script agents and use the query tool It contains the following sections Note In order to complete each of the procedures in this chapter your user account must belong to a group with the Administration role For more information about users groups and roles see Managing Users and Security on page 105 This chapter contains the following sections About MT GMA IE LOUIE enieciscniiaii aaa a 448 Baking SEn RQ GIS ciiirt anara naaadik aeaii eaen kinan a AAFAA 448 Retrieving Data with Queries and Scripts scsssssessssssssessesesssessessessrsssssnsssssnssseserssesarsrssasessenses 467 448 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide About vFogl
148. This procedure continues from Viewing a rule summary on page 241 1 In the Manage Rules dashboard select the row containing the disabled rule that you want to enable Note A Rule is currently disabled icon appears in the row containing a rule that has been disabled Tip To select multiple rules press the CTRL or SHIFT key while selecting the rows containing the rules that you want to enable 2 Click the Enable Rules button at the bottom The Delete Rule Confirmation dialog box appears 236 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Delete Rule Confirmation re you sure you want to enable Following rules Agent Health State 3 In Delete Rule Confirmation dialog box click OK The Delete Rule Confirmation dialog box closes and the Manage Rules dashboard refreshes no longer showing the Rule is currently disabled icon in the row containing the newly enabled rule Suspending or resuming alarms You can configure a rule to stop generating alarms for a specified length of time beginning immediately It can be useful to suspend alarms in many situations such as when one or more servers are being brought offline for system maintenance Note vFoglight stops both generating and clearing alarms for a rule during the period when its alarms are suspended To suspend alarms for a rule Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Rules dashboard on page 225 1 In the Manage Rules da
149. U ID is a property that describes a CPU node while CPU Utilization is a metric that can change between sampling periods If the CPU ID changes vFoglight adds a new node to the collection model with the new CPU ID and associates any collected metrics such as CPU Utilization with the newly created node In vFoglight the Data dashboards illustrate the collection model and the data nodes that vFoglight creates as it collects performance metrics from monitored hosts The Data dashboard shows how nodes are organized and helps you identify paths to underlying objects that you can use in vFoglight queries and dashboards Similar to directory paths a path in the topology model traverses the collection model through a series of nodes properties metrics and events that are separated by forward slashes For example a path that retrieves the current average CPU utilization for a host can look like the following HostModel hosts lt host_name gt cpus processors lt processor gt utilization current average For complete information about the Data dashboard see the vFoglight User Guide For details on how to create dashboards see the Web Component Tutorial vFoglight allows you to create rules and apply them to the data that you collect from multiple sources in your monitoring environment Rules are scope specific which means that they are associated with one or more topology types against which they run vFoglight uses cartridges to collect data
150. VFoglight 5 2 4 Administration and Configuration Guide 2008 Quest Software Inc ALL RIGHTS RESERVED This guide contains proprietary information protected by copyright The software described in this guide is furnished under a software license or nondisclosure agreement This software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the applicable agreement No part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use without the written permission of Quest Software Inc If you have any questions regarding your potential use of this material contact Quest Software World Headquarters LEGAL Dept 5 Polaris Way Aliso Viejo CA 92656 www quest com email legal quest com Refer to our Web site for regional and international office information Trademarks Quest Quest Software the Quest Software logo Aelita Akonix Akonix L7 Enterprise Akonix L7 Enforcer AppAssure Benchmark Factory Big Brother DataFactory DeployDirector ERDisk Foglight Funnel Web I Watch Imceda InLook IntelliProfile InTrust Invertus IT Dad I Watch JClass Jint JProbe LeccoTech LiteSpeed LiveReorg MessageStats NBSpool NetBase Npulse NetPro PassGo PerformaSure Quest Central SharePlex Sitraka SmartAlarm Spotlight SQL LiteSpeed SQL Navigator SQL Watch SQLab Stat StealthCollect
151. _sql_script gt oracle_create_db sql Import the database export file into the Oracle database using the following syntax cd SORACLE_HOME bin imp lt db_usr gt lt db_pwd gt lt ORACLE_SID gt file lt export_filename gt dbdump full yes Note The dbdump is the backup file you must create in order to restore your Oracle database see To back up an Oracle database used by the vFoglight Management Server on page 92 The Oracle database is now restored To restore a MySQL database from the database export file 1 2 Log into the MySQL server machine Delete the database you are going to restore so that all the tables in the database are deleted i e drop the database a Log into the MySQL database and execute the following command mysql u root b Execute the following SQL statement DROP DATABASE lt database name gt After running mysql u root execute the following SQL statement CREATE DATABASE lt database name gt After running mysql u root run the SQL script created by the backup Use the following syntax 104 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide SOURCE lt path to sql file gt Note The sql is the backup file you must create in order to restore your MySQL database see To back up a MySQL database using MySQL commands on page 94 The MySQL database is now restored To restore the previous vFoglight installation directory
152. a Cartridge Inventory Install Cartridge Cartridge has been installed successfully 4 Important In the list of installed cartridges in the upper right corner click Refresh e a The list refreshes showing the newly installed cartridge Note You can only install those cartridges that are listed in your vFoglight license Trying to install a non licensed cartridge results in error For information on how to find out whether your license includes a particular cartridge see Chapter 2 Viewing License Capabilities on page 72 5 Observe the list of installed cartridges Managing Cartridges 157 Installing and Managing Cartridges The Status column contain icons that indicate if a cartridge is enabled jg enabled pending dependency gy partially enabled 4 or disabled If you chose not to enable the cartridge immediately after the installation in step 2 you can do that at a later time For instructions see Enabling Cartridges on page 157 From here you can proceed to Enabling Cartridges on page 157 Enabling Cartridges Enabling a cartridge completes the process of adding it to the vFoglight Management Server by making the cartridge s components available for use by the Management Server A cartridge can be in one of the following states Enabled Enabled pending dependency Disabled Partially enabled Use the Enable Selected button on the Cartridge Inventory dashboard to enable one or more cartridg
153. a sa Sme Description Commmats Net Sched ed Tine Recsrerce Pien Range of Occurence Detati Tne Range Vied Aag 13 2008 15 NPS EDT Oce Erd By Aug 16 2005 0000 Aug 13 OOE DOO NA Copy Schedule Goto Schedule List Delete This Schedule The Edit Schedule gt Add Schedule Item view appears allowing you to define another schedule item Using Schedules Creating Schedules Create tihedube dung 14 2008 SORAL AM EDT Edit Schedsle rA6d Schedule item My Schede 3 O Schedule Name My Schedule 3 Description Comments Stant Date 7 op SO A Stant Time hh enm D0 Do Recurrence Panem Once CPenodca COaly C Weekly C Monthly Yearly Range of Occurrence CNoEnd End Date f ge ae G End By Date End Timefhh mm w w Save Bock Got Schedule List For complete information on how to define a schedule item see Defining Schedule Items on page 415 To add a schedule item to an existing schedule 413 Note This procedure continues from Viewing and Editing Schedules on page 406 1 In the Edit Schedule view click Add Schedule Item in the lower right corner Edit Schedule My Schedue 3 O Schedule Name fyssan Sa aw Sea Seve Description Comments Schobse Items Net Schedaes Tine Recrrerce Pattern Ranga of Coaarence Dotate Tne Range Wed Aag 13 OOS 1S WS EDT Ores End Oy Aug 14 2008 00 00 Aug 1 AOS G0GD4ag 14 S000 A 414 vF oglight Administration an
154. a server support bundle Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Support Bundles Dashboard on page 76 1 Inthe Manage Support Bundles dashboard in the Support Bundle Inventory view locate the support bundle that you want to retrieve 2 Click the Name column of the row containing the support bundle Your Web browser shows a dialog box that allows you to open or save the support bundle Opening support_bundle_foglight_2008 04 11_ 13 5 You have chosen to open yD support_bundle_foglight_2008 04 11_13 57 04 zip which is a WinZip File From http localhost 8080 What should Firefox do with this File Open with WinZip default v Save to Disk C Do this automatically For files like this From now on Note The appearance of the above dialog may be different depending on the type and version of your Web browser 3 Save the file to disk 80 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Viewing the Content of Server Support Bundles Server support bundles contain diagnostic data gathered from the vFoglight Management Server To view the content of a server support bundle Note This procedure continues from Retrieving Server Support Bundles on page 79 1 Locate the server support bundle whose content you want to view by completing one of the following steps e Ifyou have access to the computer that is hosting the vFoglight Management Server
155. abase name parameter 60 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide User The database user name This setting is defined by the foglight database user parameter Location Indicates if the database is embedded or external This setting is defined by the foglight database embedded parameter Database Host localhost Port 13306 Type mysql Hibernate Dialect com quest nitro hibernate MySQLDialect Database Name Foglight User Foglight Location Embedded For information on how to view the information on the vFoglight Configuration dashboard see Accessing the vFoglight Configuration Dashboard on page 67 JVM The JVM view displays the following settings Name The name of the Java Virtual Machine JVM of the computer in which the vFoglight Management Server is running Version The version number of the JVM Vendor The name of the JVM vendor Architecture bit The bit architecture of the JVM JI M Name Java HotSpot TM Server YM Version 1 6 0_04 10 0 b19 Vendor Sun Microsystems Inc Architecture bit 32 bit For information on how to view the information on the vFoglight Configuration dashboard see Accessing the vFoglight Configuration Dashboard on page 67 Setting Up vFoglight 61 Viewing vFoglight Configuration OS The OS view displays the following settings e Type The name and version of the operating system on which the vFoglight Management Server is running e Patch The p
156. able topology types that exists in the database schema and their properties but does not provide information on their position in the schema such as their ancestors descendants or object instances To identify the ancestors of a particular topology type use the Schema Browser dashboard In addition to topology type ancestors the Schema Browser dashboard can show the properties descendants and instances for each topology type For complete information about the Schema Browser dashboard see the vFoglight User Guide Aw k p 0 o f F a R Alam RuleBated view r AlarmSeverty r Application Tier st J a List of topology types in the Manage Retention Policies Dashboard 384 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide lt PREERREP EP 5 TEETE k Ancestors of a topology type in the Schema Browser To view the hierarchy of a topology type 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose vFoglight gt Schema gt Schema Browser The Schema Browser dashboard appears in the display area and the Schema Selector appears in the navigation panes Working with Data 385 Managing Retention Policies Meme Browser jeket a type to rape Abra apeiro e Ales ager 2 ate taney sce Aggy ORG AI Hest timh roe hih f
157. above example illustrates the process of backing up a MySQL database on Windows which uses the back slash character as a directory separator and the dir command to list files The backup directory contains one data file ibdatal and a log file ibbackup_logfile The backup process copies different database pages at different times The log file ibbackup_logfile specifies the order in which the pages are backed up Applying the log file to the backup data associates each database page with a sequence in the log file and creates one or more log files for each data file allowing you to successfully restore the database from the backup data when required 6 Apply the log file to the backup data by issuing the following command Note The example below illustrates the process of backing up a MySQL database on Windows which uses the back slash character as a directory separator C Vizioncore vFoglight mysql bin gt ibbackup apply log C Vizioncore vFoglight backup config backup cnf txt Setting Up vF oglight 99 Backing Up Upgrading and Restoring vFoglight The code line above illustrate the process of applying logs to an uncompressed backup If you are applying logs to a compressed backup use the uncompress option For example C Vizioncore vFoglight mysql bin gt ibbackup apply log uncompress C Vizioncore vFoglight backup config backup cnf For more information about the command line options for creating compressed and
158. add the same schedule as both an effective schedule and a blackout schedule If you do so the schedule will only count as a blackout schedule because blackout schedules take precedence over effective schedules 302 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide From here you can proceed to Defining Alarm and Action Behavior on page 302 Defining Alarm and Action Behavior vFoglight allows you to configure a rule so that its actions and alarms multiple severity rules only do not fire repeatedly Defining the behavior of rule alarms and actions can help you avoid being overwhelmed with alerts when a rule condition is met many times within a short period To define alarm and action behavior Note This procedure continues from Associating Rules with Schedules on page 299 1 Open the Behavior tab The Behavior tab opens in the display area yppa rane a ec a l C l Define Aciton Behaviors Paa Ihave te tee fies action t D sometre ratunattons sre tree Foe mre A etn se eeteent tens me trem Wan ot kemst ee meres ia j ates eit o sarme Simple rule Define Alarm Action Behaviors Hem Piae toot Type tie mtn f cones stire eewhaetmeme se thee Fie atime tt ssi vastastes are tee War at bai bh ne se f ahisi 1104 sssbaatmn Multiple severity rule 2 Configure the desired options for the behavior of rule alarms and actions and select the check boxes that correspond with these options Working
159. alog box closes and a message appears in the upper left indicating the success of the edit operation Manage Retention Policies Filtered by Cartridge Core The requested operation was successful 6 Observe the Manage Retention Policies dashboard The newly edited data sampling and roll up periods appear in the list o AggregateModelRoot Example Addressing Data Storage Concerns If you have data storage concerns you may want to increase the default aggregation periods or purge times For example the following settings will create a large data set after 15 minutes roll up to 15 minutes after 1 year purg The following example uses a one day granularity and therefore a smaller data set is retained after 15 minutes roll up to 15 minutes after 1 week roll up to 1 day Working with Data 391 Managing Retention Policies after 1 year purg Note Ifthe roll up period is less than one day the roll up period must be a multiple of the previous roll up period value Note You cannot define two identical data sampling periods for the same topology type or property 392 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Enabling the Collection of Data with Older Timestamps By default the vFoglight Management Server accepts only the data that is collected within one hour from the moment it is received The one hour window allows the server to accept the data that agents collect during
160. alue e To show only the variables that come with a specific cartridge in the By Cartridge box type the cartridge name The Manage Registry Variables dashboard refreshes showing only the variables that come with the cartridge whose name that matches the expression e To clear the filters click Clear Filters The Manage Registry Variables dashboard refreshes showing the list of all variables Manage Bogivtey Voriallins Vey IP aE INI ATT O crowing 17 ot 49 registry vartablas an of May 26 2008 11 49 20 ree EMRIT Deure i59 WA eane aeee ns Dadis 7 0 wia aa istana Deuts 59 wA oa eenlgatyeanes Dowie 50 wA 86 cae String wth ca taaire ator Doubier 20 wa aa CAL String Atte FTORDIT9N peod quest IMIA Sa Pitys Integer w WA 5 a Pista integer WA a Pours integer WA 6 exten inte ger s Wa Soa martens integer 4 wa 8 a onder timege nia 83a can string wa wa 8a CeenLiftkawlabaatbeehst integer Wa aa Canltetaeet iege WA aa S et at imme EE E E N From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures e Editing permissions of registry variables on page 188 e Copying registry variables on page 191 e Deleting registry variables on page 193 188 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e Viewing and editing variable definitions on page 194 Editing permissions of registry variables vFoglight allows you to control access to registry variables For each variabl
161. ame and Description Details of Schedule Schedule Added Step 2 Create Schedule Details of Schedule Schedule Name Test3 Description Comments Start Date 30 April vw 2008 Start Time hh mm i Whole Day Recurrence Pattern Once OPeriodical ODaily OWeekly OMonthly OYearly Range of Occurrence No End End Date 1 May wje End By Date End Time hh mm From here you can proceed to Adding or Removing Schedule Items on page 410 Adding or Removing Schedule Items A schedule can contain one or more items each describing a recurrence pattern For example if you wanted a schedule to run indefinitely from 10 00 am to 11 00 am daily and on the first day of the month from 8 00 am to 6 00 pm but also every Saturday from 11 00 am to 4 00 pm in May add a schedule item for each of these time spans to the schedule Using Schedules 411 Creating Schedules When you create a schedule you have to specify at least one schedule item and its recurrence pattern You can edit the schedule at a later time by adding or removing schedule items as required To add a schedule item to a newly created schedule that has no other schedule items Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with Schedule Definitions on page 409 In the Create Schedule dashboard in the Step 2 Create Schedule Details of Schedule view specify the start date end date and duration
162. an provide slightly different type of data in monitoring environments that still use the vFoglight Client for agent communication This appendix shows examples of dashboards and command line output in an environment that uses the vFoglight Client This appendix contains the following sections Starting the VF OGUGMECHONE c cccsiscssescscsescscsveciscnsssscsacsvsssssnsssssssisssasescissescasvansesneassuvassenssevenst 498 Viewing the Content of a vF oglight Client Support BUNGIC ccesscsssssesstssessessrssessrsssssseessnees 498 Browser IMterface darraite anaiena 501 Command Line IMENI E nan A E A A AN 503 498 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Starting the vFoglight Client To start the vFoglight Client e To start the vFoglight Client you run the spid executable that is located in the vFoglight Client installation directory Alternatively to start the Client on Windows platforms choose Start gt Programs gt Vizioncore gt vFoglight SPID 5 2 4 gt Start SPID For more information refer to the Installation and Setup Guide Note For information on how to start the vFoglight Agent Manager see Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 Viewing the Content of a vFoglight Client Support Bundle When you create a client support bundle using the support_bundle command vFoglight saves this data in a ZIP file in the lt vfoglight_home gt support lt user_name gt directory on the c
163. anagement Server Each cartridge that you install on the vFoglight Management Server includes one or more agent types When you install a cartridge and deploy its agent package that include those types to one or more monitored hosts you can create agent instances and initiate their data collection Agents collect data from your monitored environment and send it to the Management Server Agents can monitor the availability and performance of network services operating systems log files file systems disk space and utilization top processes custom applications application servers and Web servers vFoglight also includes internal agents that monitor vFoglight components and services Note In vFoglight the vFoglight Agent Manager is used to manage agent instances and their communication with the vFoglight Management Server Some monitoring environments use the vFoglight Client which is an older version of the agent manager While vFoglight supports both types of agent managers some commands and dashboards may display slightly different type of information This chapter contains samples of command line output and screen captures that illustrate a monitoring environment that uses the vFoglight Agent Manager For information on those interfaces in environments that use the vFoglight Client see Appendix vFoglight Client Reference on page 497 Managing Agents 167 Managing Agent Properties by Type Managing Agent Properties by Type
164. ances topology objects of that type The expression that sets the rule or derived metric scope is called a scoping query For more information about the query language see Using the Query Language on page 473 To retrieve data Note This procedure continues from Selecting Topology Objects on page 469 1 Using the Groovy language write a script to retrieve information about the selected object For information about the Groovy language see Using the Query Language on page 473 In the Script Editor dashboard in the Script box type your script 2 Run your script Click Run The Result area refreshes showing the data retrieved as a result of your script 10 Using the Query Language A query language is used in vFoglight to set the scope for rules and derived metrics to create rule conditions and expressions to reference expressions in messages and to create derived metric expressions This appendix contains the following sections Using the Query Language to Set the Rule or Derived Metric SCOPG nsss 474 Using the Query Language in Rule Conditions or Derived Metric Expressions sessies 480 Using the Query Language FAQ ciconia e aiiiar aaka a iaaea Eai 495 474 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Using the Query Language to Set the Rule or Derived Metric Scope The scope of a rule defines the set of topology objects against which it will run The scope of a derived metric defines
165. and Security on page 105 Task See Install list and manage cartridges Installing and Managing Cartridges on page 149 Task Add topology types Add derived metrics Add thresholds List edit or delete derived metrics List edit or delete retention policies List add edit or delete thresholds Add registry variables Add rules List edit or delete registry variables List edit or delete rules Add schedules List edit or delete schedules Check connection status View port assignments List add or delete licenses List add or delete support bundles View audit information Upload scripts for building agents Edit and run queries and scripts View or edit directory services About the Administration Module 51 Looking at Administration Tasks See Adding Topology Types on page 329 Working with Derived Metrics on page 332 Working with Thresholds on page 353 Working with Derived Metrics on page 332 Managing Retention Policies on page 372 Working with Thresholds on page 353 Creating Registry Variables on page 195 Creating Rules on page 246 Managing Registry Variables on page 185 Managing Rules on page 225 Creating Schedules on page 407 Managing Schedules on page 397 Viewing Connection Status on page 54 Viewing vFoglight Configuration on page 56 Managing Licenses on page 69 Managing Supp
166. and change audit logs that you can view using the View Audit Information dashboard Audit logs allow you to review information about users who have been authenticated upon logging in to the Administration Module changes made in the Administration Module with regard to user management or changes made to configuration items such as rules or registry variables Setting Up vFoglight 83 Viewing Audit Information The View Audit Information dashboard allows you to select the time period for which you want to view administration logs Each log includes information such as the name of the user who made the change the date and time at which the change was made the action performed and if applicable the name of the item that was changed for example the name of the rule For complete information about viewing audit information see to the following sections e Accessing the View Audit Information Dashboard on page 83 e Filtering Audit Logs on page 87 e Viewing Log Entries on page 88 Accessing the View Audit Information Dashboard Use the View Audit Information dashboard to select a time period for which you want to view security and change audit logs and display logs It allows you to review security and change audit logs and to filter the list of logs to show information for a specific span of time Optionally you can show or hide the columns that appear in the audit log table or print the table contents to a file as requ
167. and virtual machines With vFoglight administrators can quickly determine the root cause of an incident or problem track virtual machine VM movements and understand their impact and identify contention for resources between virtual machines About this Guide This Administration and Configuration Guide provides conceptual information about vFoglight administration components configuration instructions and instructions on how to use the dashboards in the Administration module This guide is intended for vFoglight System Administrators to administer and configure vFoglight The Administration and Configuration Guide is organized as follows Chapter 1 About the Administration Module Discusses core vFoglight concepts introduces the Administration module a getting started approach and lists common administration tasks It also lists the nodes that appear in the Administration module and describes the type of tasks you can perform using the dashboards that appear under each node Agents Cartridges Data Rules amp Notifications Schedules Setup amp Support Tooling and Users amp Security Read this chapter to learn about vFoglight models and scope access the vFoglight Administration module and find out what type of administration tasks you can perform in vFoglight Chapter 2 Setting Up vFoglight Includes information about vFoglight licenses and support bundles audit logs and configuration items and how to use them Read
168. anel 140 Configure Password Services dashboard 43 Configure Password Settings dashboard 116 135 136 137 138 accessing 136 editing password settings 137 Configure Password Settings node in navigation panel 136 Confirm Delete dialog box 117 118 Confirm Force Password Change dialog box 115 Confirm Unlock dialog box 116 connection status viewing 54 Connection Status dashboard 54 Connection Status node in navigation panel 54 contacting Vizioncore 14 Copy Derivation dialog box 339 340 Copy Registry Variable dialog box 191 192 Copy Schedule dialog box 402 Create Agent dialog box 458 459 Create Agent Results dialog box 459 460 Create Derived Metric dashboard 42 340 342 343 344 adding calculations to derived metrics 344 defining derived metrics 344 Expression Editor dialog box 482 483 484 485 487 488 491 getting started with defining derived metrics 344 Scoping Query Editor dialog box 475 476 477 478 479 setting derived metric value types 350 triggering derived metrics 348 Create Derived Metric node in navigation panel 343 Create Group dialog box 122 Create Registry Value Step 1 view 206 219 220 Create Registry Value Step 2 view 207 220 Create Registry Variable dashboard 42 195 196 283 creating derived metrics 342 creating registry variables 195 scoping registry variables to topology 206 specifying registry variable values 201 Step 1 Create Registry Variable view 283 Step 2 Registry Variabl
169. ar to the Console User role but with additional access to any additional dashboards associated with the user This role also includes permission to create new dashboards new reports and to edit the dashboard environment General Access This role is for pre 5 2 cartridges installed on a version 5 2 or later vVFoglight Management Server The role will be added to the appropriate views so that dashboards from the cartridge will appear in the vFoglight interface Note The General Access role is not assigned to users and cannot be used to log in Operator This is the base level role for monitoring in vFoglight Users assigned this role have access to the core dashboard set such as Hosts Alarms Services and Report Manager with the ability to create new dashboards This role also has access to any non core cartridge dashboard such as the OS Cartridge This is the recommended default for new users Security This role provides access to all dashboards under Users and Security in the Administration Module e Internal Users with the Security role can create Internal roles New roles do not have any permission They depend on how they are grouped with built in roles to determine their behavior For example a new role can be created and applied to a group along with the Console User role to create a locked down user group This means users in this group would only have access to the dashboards specifically made available to the new role and
170. ard from the navigation panel or through the Manage Rules dashboard Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 247 Working with Rules To create a rule Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow iF on the left 2 Open the Create Rule dashboard by completing one of the following steps e On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Rules amp Notifications gt Manage Rules In the Manage Registry Variables dashboard that appears in the display area click the Add Rule button in the lower left corner or e On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Rules amp Notifications gt Create Rule The rule definitions appears in the display area with the Rule Definition tab open te fone ns 248 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide From here you can proceed to Defining Rules on page 248 Defining Rules Rule definitions can consist of any if the following components e Registry Variables A registry variable can be used in rule conditions expressions and actions Registry variables are stored in the vFoglight registry A registry variable can have a global value that is available to all topology types and objects It can also have multiple additional values associated with specific topology
171. are able to log in to the web console Roles are assigned to a user through groups when a user belongs to a group the roles that are assigned to that group are also assigned to the user A user can belong to one or more groups If you belong to a group that includes the Security role the Manage Roles dashboard allows you to create and manage roles and assign roles to groups For more information on how to use the Manage Groups dashboard see the following sections e Accessing the Manage Roles Dashboard on page 129 e Creating Roles on page 131 e Editing Groups for a Role on page 132 e Deleting Internal Roles on page 133 Accessing the Manage Roles Dashboard Managing Users and Security 129 Managing Roles The Manage Roles dashboard contains a table that lists roles their type and the groups that are assigned to each role It also allows you to create and manage roles and to assign roles to groups To access the Manage Roles dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Users amp Security gt Manage Roles The Manage Roles dashboard appears in the display area showing a list of all existing roles Manage Roles Manage Rous
172. ariables and Severity Level Variables listings Editing action parameters To edit an action parameter Note This procedure continues from Adding actions to rules on page 286 1 In the Action tab in the Actions pane click the Action Name column of the row containing the action whose parameter you want to edit The action definitions appear in the display area Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 295 Working with Rules Action Commancaction Action Type Entering Description Action Perameters ner eiaa vae Requred Type Vaea Parameter Descripton COMMAND LNE Undefined mendetory Shing 6Befauk Ereoutabie command and w gurerts ONAROMENT VARIES Undefined cetenal String Galauk Ducianaon mae paparated environment virisbiat ia varlatutat var znana Note The above screen capture shows a list of parameters for a command action Each action has a different set of parameters associated with it For more information see the table listing preceding this procedure Observe the Type column of the row containing the parameter that you want to edit Caution The Type column shows the parameter s data type When changing the parameter value ensure that the value you specify matches that data type Each action comes with its own set of action parameters For more information see About action parameters on page 288 In the Action Parameters pane in the row containing the parameter that you want to edit clic
173. ary properties 177 Agent Status 38 45 461 502 Agent Operation dialog box 461 462 463 Create Agent dialog box 459 Index 511 Create Agent Results dialog box 459 460 Agents node in navigation panel 10 11 33 168 179 Alarm Message Editor dialog box 266 267 275 audit information viewing 82 accessing View Audit Information dashboard 83 audit logs filtering 87 viewing 88 Audited Activities view 50 B backing up vFoglight 89 about 89 Build Script Agent dashboard 41 449 451 452 453 454 455 457 458 464 466 accessing 451 Build Script Agent dialog box 453 454 building agent packages 452 Create Agent dialog box 458 creating agentinstances 457 Deploy Agent Package dialog box 455 456 457 deploying agent packages 454 editing agent properties 464 uploading agent scripts 452 Build Script Agent dialog box 453 454 Build Script Agent node in navigation panel 451 Business Hours dialog box 405 406 C Cartridge Confirmation dialog box 159 160 161 Cartridge Inventory dashboard 39 45 46 149 150 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 accessing 150 Cartridge Confirmation dialog box 159 160 161 disabling cartridges 158 enabling cartridges 157 installing cartridges 155 uninstalling cartridges 159 View Cartridge Details view 152 512 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Cartridge Inventory node in navigation panel 150 cartridges agent components downloading 161 163 components 148 disabl
174. as gt o date 1 Mestre o rane Arahaba 5 lt aeta gt Peed one Eandis 2 Assign effective schedules a In the list that appears in the upper left corner select one or more schedules that you want to assign as effective schedules The list shows all schedules that exist in vFoglight For information on how to add or remove schedules see Chapter 8 Using Schedules on page 395 b Click Add on the right of the list Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 301 Working with Rules The Effective Schedules list on the right refreshes showing the newly added schedules Effective Schedules End of Day First day of week 3 Assign blackout schedules a In the list that appears in the lower left corner select one or more schedules that you want to assign as blackout schedules Note The list shows all schedules that exist in vFoglight For information on how to add or remove schedules see Chapter 8 Using Schedules on page 395 b Click Add on the right of the list The Blackout Schedules list on the right refreshes showing the newly added schedules Blackout Schedules Daily Database Maintenance Daily Off Hours Note Adding the Always entry to the list of blackout schedules does not create a black out for the rule It has no effect on the rule s blackout schedule The same set of schedules are listed as Available Schedules for use as effective schedules and blackout schedules Do not
175. as a directory separator on Windows platforms When you are done save the files in the config directory that you have created in step 1 Open a Command Prompt window and navigate to the directory in which vFoglight stores the MySQL executable files lt vfoglight_home gt Foglight mysql bin Complete one of the following steps depending on the type of backup you want to create e To create an uncompressed backup issue the following command C Vizioncore vFoglight mysql bin gt ibbackup backup config my cnf backup config backup cnf InnoDB Hot Backup version 3 0 0 Copyright 2002 2005 Innobase Oy License A11983 is granted to Vizioncore Inc This program is legally licensed to Vizioncore to be used in connection with a product of Vizioncore only Type ibbackup license for detailed license terms help for help Setting Up vFoglight 97 Backing Up Upgrading and Restoring vFoglight Contents of backup config my cnf innodb_data_home_dir got value Contents of backup config backup cnf innodb_data_home_dir got value ibbackup Found checkpoint at lsn 0 282033535 ibbackup Starting log scan from Lsn 0 282033152 ibbackup Progress in MB 100 200 080922 15 29 54 ibbackup Full backup completed or e To create a compressed backup issue the following command C Vizioncore vFoglight mysql bin gt ibbackup compress backup config my cnf backup config backup cnf InnoDB Hot Bac
176. at the CATALYST_URL registry variable contains the correct computer name and port number For example http MyHost MyDomain com 8080 For information on how to look up vFoglight registry variables see Chapter 6 Managing Registry Variables on page 185 The Mail Global Settings view displays the following settings Connection Timeout The default connection timeout for sending emails to specified email recipients From The default email address used by vFoglight from which emails are sent when required This setting is defined by the global value of the mail from vFoglight registry variable SMTP Host The default email host name used by vFoglight from which emails are sent when required This setting is defined by the global value of the mail host vFoglight registry variable SMTP Port The default port number of the email server used by vFoglight from which emails are sent when required This setting is defined by the global value of the mail port vFoglight registry variable Recipient The default email address used by vFoglight to which emails are sent when required This setting is defined by the global value of the mail recipient vFoglight registry variable Socket Timeout The default socket timeout for sending emails to specified email recipients User The default user name for logging into the email server that is used by vFoglight to which emails are sent when required This setting is defined by the global
177. atch level of the operating system on which the vFoglight Management Server is running os Type Windows XP x86 5 1 ia32 Patch Service Pack 2 For information on how to view the information on the vFoglight Configuration dashboard see Accessing the vFoglight Configuration Dashboard on page 67 WCF The WCE view displays the following settings e Version The version number of the Web Component Framework WCF that is included with vFoglight e Build The build version of the Web Component Framework WCF that is included with vFoglight WCF Version 2 8 0 Build 280 20080810 2330 For information on how to view the information on the vFoglight Configuration dashboard see Accessing the vFoglight Configuration Dashboard on page 67 Mail Global Settings This view contains email settings that are used by vFoglight when sending messages to specified recipients For example you can configure vFoglight to generate and sent reports to a specified mail recipient or email warning messages to vFoglight 62 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide administrators when certain thresholds are reached For more information see Viewing email settings and configuring email actions on page 279 Important In some situations you need to create or receive email alerts that contain a URL to the browser interface To ensure the URL points to the computer on which the vFoglight Management Server is running ensure th
178. ate Condition o Alum Message SRO Be A Multiple severity rule Important The appearance of the Condition tab depends on the rule type In addition to the condition editor multiple severity rules also include an alarm editor that allows you to compose an alarm message associated with each severity state Warning Critical and or Fatal Unlike simple rules that can have only one condition associated with their Fire state multiple severity rules can have a conditional expression associated with each severity Warning Critical and or Fatal along with an alarm message associated with that conditional expression This is because simple rules do not generate alarms They fire when the condition for their Fire state is met On the other hand multiple severity rules generate alarms each time they enter a severity state For complete information about the differences between simple rules and multiple severity rules see Defining rule types on page 250 2 Write the conditional expression Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 265 Working with Rules In the Condition tab use the Condition area to write the conditional expression You can type the condition directly into the Condition box or use the operator controls and the Condition Editor to add logical operators registry variables metrics or Groovy functions For complete information about inserting operators or using the Condition editor see
179. ation viewing 56 vFoglight Configuration dashboard 40 47 56 57 58 59 60 61 63 65 67 68 280 accessing 67 Database view 59 68 Federation Configuration view 58 Federation view 56 57 JVM view 60 Mail Global Settings view 61 62 280 OS view 61 Ports view 63 65 Server view 57 viewing accessing vF oglight Configuration dashboard 67 WCF view 61 vFoglight Configuration node in navigation panel 67 vFoglight module 384 vFoglight Server Topology view 57 View Audit Information dashboard 40 82 83 85 87 88 accessing 83 audit logs filtering 87 viewing 88 Show columns dialog box 84 85 86 View Audit Information node in navigation panel 83 View Cartridge Details view 152 View Registry Variable view 209 210 211 212 views Audited Activities 50 Create Registry Value Step 1 206 219 220 Create Registry Value Step 2 207 220 Current Statistics 45 46 47 Currently Licensed Capabilities 48 Data Management 39 Database 59 68 Edit Derived Metric 342 Edit Registry Variable 194 200 218 219 281 282 285 286 Edit Rule 241 242 243 244 245 323 Index 531 Edit Schedule 403 405 407 412 413 414 Edit Schedule Add Schedule Item 412 Edit Threshold 360 Federation 49 56 57 Federation Configuration 58 JVM 60 License Information 48 Mail Global Settings 61 62 280 Navigation 44 os 61 Ports 63 65 Server 57 Server Licensing Error 37 Step 1 Create Registry Variable 283 Step 1 Create Schedule
180. avigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Setup amp Support gt vFoglight Configuration The vFoglight Configuration dashboard appears in the display area showing the vFoglight configuration items 68 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Baht 4 Foge Home r werods Bows Se werogs Set suit federation Configuration UR tax Adan Update Delay miis tearre Caset m qat nitro hibernate MLA Dandet above Name fogight ner toge pad Mail Global Settings Tear Not Goday Configued s 3 In the vFoglight Configuration dashboard locate the view that contains information about a set of configuration items as required For example to find out what is the name of the database host scroll down to the Database view and inspect the Host setting For complete information about each view that appears in the vFoglight Configuration dashboard see the following sections Federation on page 56 Server on page 57 Federation Configuration on page 58 Database on page 59 JVM on page 60 Setting Up vFoglight 69 Managing Licenses e OS on page 61 e WCF on page 61 e Mail Global Settings on page 61 e Ports on page 63 Managing Licenses You can manage vFoglight licenses using any of the following interfaces e Manage License
181. board appears in the display area 46 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Adere Home Carertdge leveatery Jd th 008 bA PM EDT install Cartridge fieentaatompance SS CS lt Ss Ss sS S TCCCSSCSSSC j C Fikes l F Enable on install natal Showing 1 10 of 11 Cartridges as of dul 16 2008 10 44 36 _ E Ss retin Char Fiters B Clohpacheter 5 2 3 Z Bo Qaggioritor 5 2 3 B Gomme 5 2 3 B OG or takogee Winsome 5 2 3 a Cheat wise 5 2 3 B Os etibor tor 5 2 9 a Ortner 5 2 3 o ene 5 2 3 a Cemertaneretor 5 2 3 a C6 wndomet Syrten 5 2 3 zl For complete information about the Cartridge Inventory dashboard see Chapter 4 Installing and Managing Cartridges on page 149 To return to the Administration dashboard click Administration in the breadcrumb trail To find out more about the rules that exist in your environment in the Current Statistic view click Rules The Manage Rules dashboard appears in the display area About the Administration Module 47 Viewing the Administration Dashboard Ader nen Home gt Memege Pales Ad AK 2008 Lote OM EDT Showing 1 14 of 42 Rules as of Jul 16 2008 12 34 16 uka Clear Fitters Agent reann stato Agent apean I 0 Core Monitoringroticy ete a Agente AppMonitor_AgentMsgs OS AppMonitor eseteaa O eont DSM Integy ation x xeno Sacacity Windows System _fileSys_Table OS Windows_ System setesa Cataty
182. by selecting one of the following Type options on the right e Expression e Message 5 Name the severity level variable In the Name box type the name of the variable Important The following names are reserved and should not be used foglight_severity_level foglight_severity_level_nam 6 Specify the variable value Expressions can contain registry variable or functions while messages are text strings that can make use of the existing severity level variables For example Severity Level Variables Name Value Type varl scope get agent host name Expression Text varl CPU Utilization Message In the Expression Message box type the value of the variable Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 261 Working with Rules 7 Click Add The Severity Level Variables pane refreshes showing the newly added variable Severity Level ariables Name Expression Message Type vari scope get agenthost name Expression Delete Selected To delete a severity level variable from the list select the row containing that variable in the Severity Level Variables pane and click Delete Selected From here you can proceed to Writing conditions on page 261 Writing conditions A condition is the part of a rule that is evaluated against monitoring data When it evaluates to True the rule is said to fire causing any actions that are associated with the rule or severity level to be performed When you create a si
183. can contain one or more users Roles are assigned to users through groups You can assign roles and add users to groups For more information see Managing Groups on page 118 Roles The default roles included with vFoglight dictate what actions users can perform with regard to one or more vFoglight features or components vFoglight System Administrators can also create custom roles Roles are assigned to groups Users in a group have the roles that are assigned to that group For more information see Managing Roles on page 127 The following diagram illustrates the interrelationship of users groups and roles Managing Users and Security 107 Managing Users y will Managing Users There are three types of users in vFoglight Internal Internal users include the users that are created after the installation When you create an internal user in vFoglight you assign a user name and password to that user There are restrictions surrounding password formatting See Configuring Password Settings on page 135 for details Built In Built in users include the users that come with vFoglight There is currently one default account that is included with vFoglight Unless you specify a different user name at installation time that user name is foglight This account has full access to all of vFoglight features Note Built in groups cannot be deleted External After being validated by vFoglight external users are mappe
184. cannot edit the name of a registry variable after it has been created This is because registry variables are referred to by name in rule conditions and expressions changing their names would invalidate these references Additionally you cannot edit the value type of a registry variable after it has been created To get started with editing variable definitions Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Registry Variables dashboard on page 185 or Creating Registry Variables on page 195 1 Inthe Manage Registry Variables dashboard click the Variable Name column of the row containing the variable whose definitions you want to view The Edit Registry Variable view appears in the display area Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 201 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables Rieenitty Vat tathe Mame Cartridge ee fight y Vaive Type Dea ptn A eea Gibal Default on ave Dela Vober Priemer Caterers ream Nene Se the dute Pharo Fie dap of eons X Agu Ditatic vake OPegutry Peference V alae ogy Tyee aE mame cages onna Add Regatry vaise Copy Pegerty vanana Go Pegaty Yanatia List Detete Tha Venable Note The name and value type of a registry variable cannot be changed after the variable creation Registry variables are referred to by their names in rule conditions and expressions and changing them would invalidate these references However you can copy a registry variable and g
185. ccessful this command does not generate any output Retrieving agent logs Important The procedure below assumes that the have access to and have configured the fglcmd package on the computer you are using to retrieve agent logs For complete instructions see the Command Line Reference Guide To retrieve an agent log using the command line 1 Open a Command Prompt window and navigate to the directory on your computer that contains the uncompressed fglemd package For example lt vfoglight_home gt bin Note For complete information on how to get started with fglemd see the Command Line Reference Guide 2 List the agent log files using the following command syntax fglcmd usr username pwd password cmd agent logs host myhost An output similar to the following appears listing all log files that exist on the specified host Client ID tor013008 prod quest corp SPI tor013008 prod quest corp 0 Client Name SPI tor013008 prod quest corp 0 506 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Host Name tor013008 prod quest corp 50 log files found OSCartridge 5 2 0 logs AIX_Console_My_AIX_Console_Agent _2008 01 21_095227_001 log OSCartridge 5 2 0 logs AIX_MPStat_My_AIX_MPStat_Agent 2008 01 21_094945 _001 log OSCartridge 5 2 0 logs AIX_System_My_AIX_System_Agent 2008 01 21_095149_001 log OSCartridge 5 2 0 logs ApacheSvr_ApacheSvr_ 2008 01 16_102536_001 log OSCartridge 5 2 0 logs ApacheSvr_My_ApacheSvr_Agent_
186. ccsectetiesciasccnccetienn dettanitiidasdtunttanttdnruani tien adtamvddn a A a aA 396 Managing Sched le Siirron EE A EE E 397 Accessing the Manage Schedules Dashboard sssssinniissisisssirinnninni 397 Editing Sched le Permission Sisse sues senzcsssessccnes seater sunycast seas cvssecsagpestrsyuseay ccvvnssststauss aseeuat ueses sasbisiedstssdctvenst 399 Copying Schedules Deleting Schedules Viewing Schedule Definitions Viewing and iE diting S cheduleSs 5i3 stianuees wed alia diets dere keane Meee aides 406 CreatingSchedules ssi Mahala anal ania ia eine adn ean honda oni 407 Accessing the Create Schedule DaShboard cescescssestessesesstesesessiesseesneseesesniesneesessteeeesieaesees 408 Getting Started with Schedule Definitions c ssssssssessesssessesssssssesnsssssnessesssessesseessessessesssssssssscssesssaesesssseey 409 Adding or Removing Schedule Items v scscsessssssesssesssssecsesseesessessesssessssssesssssssssussssssssesnessesnsesneeseessesresssesees 410 Defininig Schedule Hem vis ccisai decd daveane dite sadienal dada hanes a Gaede daentcuaie 415 Working with vFoglight Tooling AB OUEVE OONIGKIE TONG sis ci scczess actus veaucacscascecacsscovccs tach cotussrvessassaectstadecsetsajceduScyestybaxuesasavessdbssquiesivevsssignvacsiasivessaciyestad BiUIIGIPG S CRDUA COMES Aaiun h a A a a E aN Lookirig dt the Script Synta sninn iuhan niara N A A N nia 449 Accessing the Build Script Agent Dashboard ssessssesstessecseeste
187. ch is a Microsoft Office Excel Comma Separated Values File From http localhost 38080 What should Firefox do with this file Microsoft Office Excel default S Save to Disk T Do this automatically For files like this from now on Cancel Note The appearance of the above dialog box may be different depending on the type and version of your Web browser From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures e Filtering Audit Logs on page 87 e Viewing Log Entries on page 88 Filtering Audit Logs When you first access the View Audit Information dashboard it displays log entries from within the past four hours You can filter the list of log entries to show information for a specific period of time To filter audit logs Note This procedure continues from Accessing the View Audit Information Dashboard on page 83 e Inthe View Audit Information dashboard use the Zonar to specify the period of time whose log entries you want to list 88 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Yiew Audit Information Tuesday October 21 2008 9 26 AM 1 26 PM 4 0 hours ppe 10 21 08 1 26 48 AM 10 21 08 12640 PM To specify the period start and end times click and drag the edges of the grey area in the Zonar For complete information on how to use the Zonar in vFoglight see the vFoglight User Guide The log entries for the selected time period appear in
188. chedule Name Value First day of week 45 d Click Done In the Edit Registry Variable pane the Registry Value table refreshes showing the newly added registry value scoped to a topology type or object as specified Registry Yalues Topology Type Topology Object Name Scoped Default Agent 65 Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 209 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables Viewing Registry Values A registry variable can have a global value that is available to all topology types and objects It can also have multiple additional values associated with specific topology types or objects or calendar dates To find out what is the value of a registry variable for a particular topology type or object and if applicable during a specific time period use the Check Registry Value dashboard To view the values of a registry variable 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Rules amp Notifications gt Check Registry Value The Check Registry Value dashboard appears in the display area showing the View Registry Variable view View Registry Yalue G Oct 5 2008 Oct 7 2008 1 7 days x Variable Name Please select a variable v Topology Type Name Host Topology Object tor013008 prod quest corp pr iode dadada O e E Date Time Range Registry Value Period B
189. chedule for the selected date refreshes showing the schedule s effective hours in blue When you finish observing schedule definitions close the Business Hours dialog box Viewing and Editing Schedules You can edit the existing schedules by adding or removing recurrence patterns to it as required For example if you have a schedule that runs indefinitely from 10 00 am to 11 00 am daily and on the first day of the month from 8 00 am to 6 00 pm but you want Using Schedules 407 Creating Schedules to edit it to also run every Saturday from 11 00 am to 4 00 pm in May add a schedule item for each of these time spans to the schedule To view and edit a schedule Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Schedules Dashboard on page 397 1 In the Manage Schedules dashboard click the schedule that you want to edit The Edit Schedule view appears in the Manage Schedules dashboard Create Schedule An 14 ots AMG Edit Schedule My Schedule 3 Schedule Mame Seve View Schedule Seve Description Comenents Schedule Items Ned Scheduled Tine Recurence Patien Range of Ocowrence Octats Tere Rarge Thu Aug 14 2000 0S S02 22EDT Once End Dy Aug 15 20000000 Aug 14 2008 00 00 4ug 15 2000 0000 MiA Oelate Selacted Add Schedule Itemj Copy Schedule Go to Schadula List Oeteta This Schadula 2 Observe the schedule definitions 3 Edit the schedule definitions as required For complete instructions see
190. chedule schedule Added Step 3 Create Schedule Schedule Added The following schedule was successfully added to the system Schedule Name My Schedule Description Comments Schedule items ht Screckted Teme Reasrence Pattern Range of Ocowrence Cutts Time Range Wied Aug 13 2008 18500060T Once End By Aug 13 2008 17 18 Aug 13 2009 1650 Aup 13 2008 1716 NA Edt Schedde Go to Schedule List Ect Schedde Go to Scheduie List Using Schedules 419 Creating Schedules 5 Add one or more schedule items if required For details see Adding or Removing Schedule Items on page 410 To define a schedule item that occurs periodically Note This procedure continues from Adding or Removing Schedule Items on page 410 1 In the Recurrence Pattern area select the Periodical option The view refreshes showing a set of controls that allow you to define a schedule item that occurs periodically Schedule Name My Schedule Description Comments Start Date j4 August Jfz008 Start Time hh mm joo foo Duration hh mm foo oo Recurrence Pattern C Once Periodical X o_o CWeekly Every hh mm 0 10 hours Monthly C Yearly 2 Specify the start date and time and the duration of the recurrence pattern using the controls that appear above the Recurrence Pattern area a Use the Start Date boxes to specify the day month and year of the start date Alternatively click the Calendar button on the right and
191. cility for script actions For a list of parameters that are supported in each action type refer to About action parameters on page 288 Viewing email settings and configuring email actions The report engine uses email actions to send reports to email recipients or email alarm related messages to vFoglight administrators when certain thresholds are reached When you add a scheduled report and specify its email recipients using the Report Manager dashboard vFoglight uses the default mail parameters set by the vFoglight registry with the mail prefix to send the report to the specified recipients at a rate set in the associated schedule Alternatively you may need to edit the default email related settings that control mail connection and mail socket by creating two new registry variables mail connection timeout and mail socket timeout and assigning them the appropriate value in seconds For complete information about creating reports and the Report Manager dashboard see the vFoglight User Guide For information on where to find the global settings that vFoglight uses for sending emails see Mail Global Settings on page 61 In some situations you may need to filter the reports before sending them to email recipients You can do that by editing the Fire condition of the rule Email Reports Sample as required For instructions on how to write rule conditions see Writing conditions on page 261 280 vF oglight Admi
192. clear the Activate check box if you want to temporarily disable a multiple severity rule To temporarily deactivate the alarms and actions for an entire rule follow the instructions in Suspending or resuming alarms on page 236 You can also configure the behavior of the alarms and actions for the rule See Defining Alarm and Action Behavior on page 302 for more information 4 Multiple severity rules Define the alarm message associated with the newly defined condition In the Alarm box type the alarm message Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 275 Working with Rules 5 Multiple severity rules Optional To reference a rule level variable or a system variable in the alarm message in the Alarm Message box click the location to which you want to add the variable and then click the Alarm Message Editor button above the Alarm Message box The Alarm Message Editor dialog box appears Alarm Message Editor EA Rule Yariables 4 System Variables Name Expression Message Agentld scope get agentIDi E AgentName scope get name E HealthStateName scope get heatthStatev gettin E Insert Close e To add arule level variable in the Alarm Message Editor dialog box on the Rule Variables tab select the rule level variable and click Insert The Rule Variables tab lists all of the rule level variables including expressions and messages e To add a system variable on the System Variables tab se
193. conditional expression and alarm message in the Condition and Alarm Message boxes condition Severity Lever variables gt Action F Activate Condition D Alarm Message SISO lv A CPO_Otiiication gt 4eegietey cPUWarning CPU Utilisation to at vart and the number of 66 Faun Queue Length gt p 39 in the run queue is vard A CPU fAregistry RunQueweBarning Bottleneck is being detected on vari Check the top processes using the Top CPU Table to c mine which processes are the greatest ibutors to CPU Loads or follow the Togiight online help to sind out if the system is CPU constrained 3 Optional Edit the conditional expression and the alarm message if required For instructions see one of the following sections e Defining conditions for data driven and time driven rules on page 263 e Defining conditions for event driven rules on page 267 4 Save your changes to the rule condition by clicking the Save button above the Condition tab From here you can proceed to Defining actions on page 278 278 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Defining actions An action is a particular operation that is performed when a rule enters or exits a state for example when a rule condition is met Multiple actions can be associated with simple rules as well as with each severity level in a multiple severity rule Actions can be added to a rule after it is created
194. ct the metric from the list that appears 3 Click Next The Step 2 Create Threshold Select Threshold Level area appears in the Create Threshold dashboard Create Threshold Apr 29 2008 11 28 23 AM EDT Select Metric Select Threshold Level Add Bounds Threshold Added Step 2 Create Threshold Select Threshold Level Topology Type Host Metric numProcesses Threshold Levels Select Threshold Levels v In the Step 2 Create Threshold Select Threshold Level area click Threshold Levels and choose one of the following predefined threshold levels e AgentHealthState e AgentState e AlarmChangeType e AlarmSeverity e CatalystServiceState 364 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e ThresholdSeverity 4 Click Next The Step 3 Create Threshold Add Bounds area appears in the Create Threshold dashboard Topetegy Type Moet Thewthetd Levels Ageetitete Vee stretd Darant Lovet ohect Lave Bound Type A bogivtry va tada PN Value From here you can proceed to Adding bounds to metric threshold levels on page 364 Adding bounds to metric threshold levels A metric threshold level can have a number of different levels one or more of sub levels as listed in the following table Threshold Level Threshold Sub Level AgentHealthState OK Running Unexpectedly Broken Agent Info Not Present Threshold Level AgentState AlarmChangeType AlarmSeverity Working with Data 365
195. ctions 297 copying rule conditions 276 copying rules 231 copying severity level variables 297 creating rules 246 defining alarm and action behavior 302 defining rule actions 278 defining rule conditions 263 267 defining rule conditions alarms and actions 254 defining rule scope 253 defining rule triggers 251 defining rule types 250 defining rule level variables 303 defining rules 248 Delete Rule Confirmation dialog box 234 235 236 deleting rules 233 disabling rules 234 Edit Role Permission dialog box 230 Edit Rule view 241 242 243 244 245 323 Edit User Permission dialog box 230 editing rule definitions 245 editing rule permissions 228 enabling rules 234 getting started with defining rules 249 resuming rule actions 238 resuming rule alarms 236 Rule Confirmation dialog box 231 232 237 238 239 240 Scoping Query Editor dialog box 475 476 477 478 479 setting expression scope in rule conditions 262 suspending rule actions 238 suspending rule alarms 236 Temporarily Suspend Rule Actions dialog box 238 239 Temporarily Suspend Rule Alarms dialog box 236 237 using trigger specific variables in rule condition expressions 292 viewing rule definitions 245 viewing rule schedules 240 viewing rule summary 241 writing rule conditions 261 Manage Rules node in navigation panel 226 247 Manage Schedules dashboard 41 182 397 399 402 403 404 405 407 408 accessing 397 Add Role
196. d command line output in environments that use the vFoglight Client for agent communication and management 12 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide vFoglight Documentation Suite The vFoglight documentation suite is made up of the core documentation set plus the documentation set for each vFoglight cartridge that you deploy Documentation is provided in a combination of online help PDF and HTML e Online Help You can open the online help by selecting the Help tab from vFoglight s action panel 8 fopigtt G Sin Our Serera Design Helo More e Wekome to Foghgt 5 2 4 User Gude e Administration and Cort igu ation Guide S Command Line Reference Guide i Web Component Gude e web Component Tutoria J eh Component Reference e PDF The Getting Started Guide What s New Guide System Requirements and Platform Support Guide Installation and Setup Guide set Administration and Configuration Guide vFoglight User Guide Command Line Reference Guide Web Component Guide and Web Component Tutorial are provided as PDF files The PDF guides are included in the zip file downloaded from Vizioncore Adobe Reader is required HTML Release Notes are provided in HTML Core Documentation Set The core documentation set consists of the following files e Release Notes HTML e Getting Started Guide PDF e What s New Guide PDF e System Requirements and Platform Support Guide PDF Introduction to this
197. d Configuration Guide To delete a schedule item Note This procedure continues from Viewing and Editing Schedules on page 406 or Defining Schedule Items on page 415 1 In the Edit Schedule view select the row containing the schedule item that you want to delete and click Delete Selected Edit Schedule My Schedule 3 Schedule Mame My Schedule 3 Save View Schedde Son Descriptions omments Schodde Items Next Schedsed Tee Feowrence Patien Hange of Occurence Ceta Te Kenge wa Daty Ord By Aug tS 20000000 Ewery 1 dyis 0000 hears from 0000 Tha Aug 14 2009 100029 EDT Once End By Aug 15 2008 00 00 Aug 14 2008 0000 Aug 15 2008 0000 NA The Schedule Confirmation dialog box appears asking you to confirm the delete operation Schedule Confirmation Are you sure you want to delete the selected items From this pchedule 2 Inthe Schedule Confirmation dialog box click OK The Edit Schedule view refreshes no longer showing the newly deleted schedule item in the list Defining Schedule Items There are six types of patterns that you can define in a schedule item as listed below Pattern Allows you to create pattern that Using Schedules 415 Creating Schedules For instructions see Once Periodical Daily Weekly Monthly Starts at a specified date and time for a specified duration and ends at a defined end date and time Starts at a specified time and dat
198. d Schedule 3 To sort the list of variables by their name or next scheduled time click the Schedule Name or Next Scheduled Time column headings as required From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures e Editing Schedule Permissions on page 399 e Copying Schedules on page 402 e Deleting Schedules on page 404 Using Schedules 399 Managing Schedules e Viewing Schedule Definitions on page 405 e Viewing and Editing Schedules on page 406 Editing Schedule Permissions vFoglight allows you to control access to a schedule For each schedule you can grant or deny read write or control access to roles or users For more information about security concepts in vFoglight see Chapter 3 Managing Users and Security on page 105 vFoglight employs the following behavior when it comes to schedule permissions e Ifno one has a permission to the schedule everyone has a permission e If one has a permission to the schedule others with undefined permission do not have any permission e Final permission is based on a combination of the role user and schedule defined on the server side Use the Edit Permissions button F on the Manage Schedules dashboard to navigate to the Edit Permissions for Schedule area that allows you to add or edit permissions to roles and users as outlined below The Edit Permissions for Schedule area contains two tables that s
199. d from one of the LDAP compatible directory services supported by vFoglight Active Directory Sun Java Systems Directory Server and OpenLDAP For more information about configuring vFoglight to use an external directory service see Configuring Directory Services on page 139 108 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Roles are assigned to a user through groups when a user belongs to a group the roles that are assigned to that group are also assigned to the user A user can belong to one or more groups For more information about groups see Managing Roles on page 127 If you belong to a group that includes the Security role the Manage Users dashboard allows you to manage user accounts add users to groups and manage user passwords For more information on how to use the Manage Users dashboard see the following sections e Accessing the Manage Users Dashboard on page 108 e Creating Users on page 111 e Adding Users to Groups on page 112 e Changing Passwords on page 114 e Forcing Password Changes on page 115 e Unlocking Passwords on page 115 e Deleting Internal Users on page 117 Accessing the Manage Users Dashboard The Manage Users dashboard contains a table that lists all of the users that have been created in the Administration Module or imported from an LDAP compatible directory service supported by vFoglight the groups to which these users belong and the r
200. dServices Returns a list of impacted services getInstalledAgentList Returns a list of installed agents for the given vFoglight Agent Manager ID Using the Query Language 493 Using the Query Language in Rule Conditions or Derived Metric Expressions e getMonitoredComponentRuleInfoList Returns a list of rules that are scoped to a monitored component e getObservationTrend Returns an observation trend e getPropertyOb ject Returns the value of property for the topology object with the given ID e getPropertyValueAtGivenTimesOfGivenTopologyObjects Returns the values of a given property for a list of TopologyObjects at a given list of times e getPropertyValuesOfTopologyObjectAtGivenTimes Returns the values of a given property for a list of TopologyObjects at a given time e getRuleAlarmSeveritiesConfigured Returns the existing alarm severities that are configured for a rule e getRuleBasedView Returns a rule based view e getRuleBasedViewInput Returns a rule based view input e getRuleBasedViewName Returns a rule based view name e getRuleComment Returns a rule comment e getRuleInfoUsingId Returns a rule comment given an ID e getSeverityConditions Returns a list of severity conditions for a rule e getTopologyPropertyValue Returns the value of a topology property for a scoping object at a given date and time e help Returns a list of supporting information such as scripts or methods as
201. derived metric From here you can proceed to Adding calculations to derived metrics on page 344 Adding calculations to derived metrics The scope of a derived metric defines the set of topology objects against which vFoglight calculates it A derived metric is scoped to a topology type and can optionally be scoped to specific topology objects of that type If a derived metric is not scoped to specific objects it applies to all instances of that type You specify the derived metric scope using the query language You can change the scope of a derived metric the topology type or one or more specific topology objects of that type to which it applies after its creation Working with Data 345 Working with Derived Metrics The vFoglight Management Server processes the derived metric calculation in the order they are listed starting with the first one Changing their order affects the behavior of the actions that are associated with the derived metric For example if there are two calculations whose conditions evaluate to True the first calculation listed takes precedence causing one or more actions that are associated with that metric to be generated before the next one For detail information on how to scope a rule or derived metric to one or more topology objects see Using the Query Language on page 473 To get started with adding calculations to a derived metric Note This procedure continues from Getting started w
202. dition for their Fire state is met On the other hand multiple severity rules generate alarms each time they enter a severity state For complete information about the differences between simple rules and multiple severity rules see Defining rule types on page 250 2 Write the conditional expression Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 273 Working with Rules In the Condition tab use the Condition area to write the conditional expression using the following syntax some_value equals event get report property Where e report indicates that you want to use the ReportGeneratedEvent in the conditional expression e property is the name of the event property that you want to use in the comparison For a complete list of event properties and the information they contain see AlarmSystemEvent on page 267 or ReportGeneratedEvent on page 269 e some value contains the value that is to be compared with the specified property value Caution The data type of the value you specify here must match the data type of the property with which you compare this value For example to write a condition that triggers an event driven rule to fire when vFoglight generates a report whose name is System Resources write the following expression event get report name System Resources Report attachments are not stored in ReportGeneratedEvent object properties To retrieve a report attachment in
203. dministrator Obvelete Ovelete b To edit the permissions ensure that the Edit option is selected and use the Read Write and Control check boxes as required c To delete the permissions select the Delete option d Click Save The dialog box closes and the selected entry refreshes showing the newly edited permissions Deleting thresholds Use the Delete Selected button on the Manage Thresholds dashboard to delete a threshold as outlined below Note When a threshold is deleted all references to that threshold in rule conditions or derived metric expressions become invalid This may cause a rule to fail to evaluate If this occurs you must manually modify the rule condition or expression To delete a threshold Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Thresholds dashboard on page 353 1 In the Manage Thresholds dashboard select the row containing the threshold that you want to delete 2 Click the Delete Selected button at the bottom The Delete Threshold dialog box appears 360 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Delete Threshold x Are you sure you want to delete thresholds defined For the following metric f topology type freaMemory NM 3 In the Delete Threshold dialog box click OK The Delete Threshold dialog box closes 4 Observe the Manage Thresholds dashboard The newly deleted threshold no longer appears in the list Viewing and editing thresh
204. dules For more information see Associating Rules with Schedules on page 299 Viewing a rule summary The Edit Rule view includes a summary pane that allows you to quickly review a rule s settings and drill down to the appropriate tab if required The Rule Summary pane includes the following information The rule name The name of the cartridge the rule belongs to if applicable The rule type The type of the rule trigger The rule scope if applicable Whether or not the rule alarms are active Whether or not the rule actions are active Whether or not the rule is active The rule s alarm and action behavior The rule s alarm description 242 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e Conditional expressions alarm messages and actions for each severity level Rute Summary Caruldge Name OS Windows System Rule Type Multiple Severty Rule Rule Triggering Date Drven Rule Scope Windows System System Table Rule Alarms Active Rule Actions Active Rule Status Actwe Ls Alarm amp Action Behaviors Fire action f 2 consecutive evaluations ace true Alarm Description Help CPU_Uiization gt Gregistey CPU ata 2 Rus Or feegistry RusQuevef atai OPU Utilization is at Gvae2 and the sumber of AA A CPU Bottleneck is being detected on Alarm Message using the Top_CPU_Table to determine which contributors to CPU Loads or follow the Foghgh system is CPU constraned Emteting Action EmatAchon
205. e Default port assignments on page 65 Where localhost is the name of the machine that is running the vFoglight Management Server The vFoglight login page appears in the Web browser About the Administration Module 35 Getting Started with the Administration Module User Password Login Change Password vizioncore 5 Provide the user name and password you obtained in step 2 a In the vFoglight login page in the User box type your vFoglight user name b In the Password box type your vFoglight password c Click Login Depending on the availability of a valid vFoglight license and your user permissions one of the following pages appears in the display area e If your vFoglight Management Server has a valid license the Welcome page appears in the Web browser 36 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide BE oglight Resources Pansls Colansbie panak are locat nthe left and right Fogight page You expand tha panels by havering over the vertica bar cortanngthe arrow csi enpi the left right contains that are dons that can be performed Adi ashboard as wel as access tothe cnire helo The Homes module h th The vmexplorer julpages Ing pant for most vFogight users Tha ymExplorer pr Jes Information and alerts electing Make this my Home Page from the a berting the desired dashboard ard th panel moniy revist by selecting Bookmark
206. e Command Line Reference Guide To install a license Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Licenses Dashboard on page 69 1 To navigate to the license file that you can access with your local machine complete one of the following steps in the Install License area of the Manage License dashboard or Ensure that the File on Local Computer box is selected Then click Browse and navigate to the license file in the file browser that appears The file browser closes and the File on Local Computer box refreshes to show the absolute path and name of the license file Select the File on Local Computer option and in the box to the right type the absolute path and name of the license file Use the back slash character as a directory separator on Windows platforms Windows example C temp foglight license 2 To navigate to the license file that is accessible by the machine on which the vFoglight Management Server is running complete the following steps a b Select the File on Server box In the File on Server box type the path and name of the license file Use either an absolute path or a path relative to the installation directory of the vFoglight Management Server Note Use the back slash character V as a directory separator For example both of the following file paths point to the same license file C Vizioncore vFoglight license foglight license license foglight license 3 Cl
207. e actions set for the specific rule level at which the message is defined For example if an expression is defined for the Fatal level of a multiple severity rule it can only be referenced by the actions that are set for that severity level Note In addition to rule level expressions and severity level expressions vFoglight also includes pre defined system expressions For example there is a pre defined expression that refers Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 263 Working with Rules to each severity level System expressions are listed in the vFoglight Administration Module Defining conditions for data driven and time driven rules When you write conditions for data driven or time driven rules you can make use of variables topology object metrics and Groovy functions To define a condition for a data driven or time driven rule Note This procedure continues from Adding severity level variables on page 256 1 Inthe Conditions and Actions tab simple rules or Conditions Alarms amp Actions tab multiple severity rules open the Conditions tab The Condition tab opens in the display area 264 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide D omy varmtinsmectors trom Condition Severity Level Variables Action Condition SPECEEPLELC A Simple rule LO Coty condor tom Copy warablegtactions trom ondition Severity Level variables Action F Activ
208. e password changes 115 get started with adding calculations to derived metrics 345 with Administration module 33 with derived metric definitions 344 with editing registry variables 200 with rule definitions 249 with schedule definitions 409 with specifying rule scope 253 insert a Groovy function into a derived metric expression 487 operators into a condition 482 operators into a derived metric expression 482 insert a Groovy function into a condition 487 install cartridges 155 licenses 71 manage agent blackouts 179 remove cartridges 160 restore embedded vFoglight MySQL database with InnoDB Hot Backup 104 MySQL database from database export file 103 Oracle database from database export file 102 previous vF oglight installation 102 previous vF oglight installation directory 104 resume rule actions 239 rule alarms 237 retrieve agent logs 505 data from topology 472 server support bundles 79 save changes to threshold levels 370 scope registry values to topology 206 select metrics and levels in thresholds 363 topology objects 470 set derived metric value type to an observation 351 derived metric value types 351 the scope fora derived metric 474 the scope fora rule 474 specify registry variable values 202 topology type properties in the Scoping Query Editor 478 suspend rule actions 238 rule alarms 236 unlock passwords 116 upload agent scripts 452 view Administration dashboard 43 audit logs 88 client suppor
209. e 118 Alternatively you can delete groups using the security deletegroup command that comes with the fglemd interface For more information see the Command Line Reference Guide To delete an internal group Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Groups Dashboard on page 119 1 In the Manage Groups dashboard select the row containing the group that you want to delete 2 Click the Delete button at the bottom of the Manage Groups dashboard A message box appears asking you to confirm the delete operation Confirm Delete x p Are you sure you want to run the Delete action on the selected rows Cancel 3 In the message box click OK Managing Users and Security 127 Managing Roles The message box closes and vFoglight deletes the user account 4 Observe the Manage Groups dashboard The user account that you deleted no longer appears in the list Managing Roles Roles are assigned to groups A role that is assigned to a group is also assigned to each member of that group There are two types of roles in vFoglight Built In They dictate what actions users can perform That is when a role is assigned to a group it enables the members of that group to use specific features or components for which access is controlled Built In roles are also used in vFoglight to determine which dashboards appear and are accessible to each user See the vFoglight User Guide for information about t
210. e 184 For details on severity level variables see Adding severity level variables on page 256 304 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide To define a rule level variable Note This procedure continues from Defining Alarm and Action Behavior on page 302 1 Open the Rule Variables tab The Rule Variables tab opens in the display area 2 Define the type of the rule level variable by selecting one of the following Type options on the right e Expression e Message 3 Name the severity level variable In the Name box type the name of the variable Important The following names are reserved and should not be used foglight_severity_level foglight_severity_level_nam Note You cannot give the same name to more than one expression or message in the same scope If you give the same name to two expressions or messages in different scopes only the severity scoped one will appear in the Rule Variables table 4 Specify the variable value Expressions can contain registry variables or functions while messages are text strings that can make use of the existing severity level variables Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 305 Working with Rules For example Severity Level Variables Name Value Type varl scope get agent host name Expression Text varl CPU Utilization Message In the Expression Message box type the value of the variable 5 Click Add The Rule Variables pane refres
211. e Added view 284 285 using performance calendars in registry variables 204 Create Registry Variable node in navigation panel 196 283 Create Role dialog box 131 132 Create Rule dashboard 42 246 247 311 312 316 317 318 Action Parameter Editor dialog box 295 296 297 action types 278 actions 278 adding actions to rules 286 adding severity level variables to rules 256 Alarm Message Editor dialog box 266 267 275 associating rules with schedules 299 Condition Editor dialog box 318 319 482 483 484 485 487 488 490 copying rule actions 297 copying rule conditions 276 copying severity level variables 297 creating rules 246 defining alarm and action behavior 302 defining rule actions 278 defining rule conditions 263 267 Index 513 defining rule conditions alarms and actions 254 defining rule scope 253 defining rule triggers 251 defining rule types 250 defining rule level variables 303 defining rules 248 getting started with defining rules 249 Scoping Query Editor dialog box 475 476 477 478 479 setting expression scope in rule conditions 262 using trigger specific variables in rule condition expressions 292 writing rule conditions 261 Create Rule node in navigation panel 247 311 316 Create Schedule dashboard 42 407 408 409 410 411 accessing 408 adding schedule items 410 creating schedules 407 deleting schedule items 410 Edit Schedule Add Schedule Item view 412 Edit Schedule view 412 getting started
212. e Core vFoglight topologies e All topology types that belong to the same cartridge containing the rule or derived metric whose condition or expression you are editing If the rule or derived metric does not belong to a cartridge this area includes all topology types without a cartridge association Using the Query Language 485 Using the Query Language in Rule Conditions or Derived Metric Expressions e Parent types of the scoping topology type that descend from TopologyObject To insert a metric or property into a rule condition or derived metric expression Note This procedure continues from Editing conditions and expressions on page 482 1 In the display area place the cursor in the Condition box rules or Expression box derived metrics where you want to insert the metric 2 Inthe Condition Editor rules or Expression Editor derived metrics dialog box click the Metric Property tab The Metric Property tab shows lists three groups of topology types Scoping Topology Child Topology and Other Topology Expression Editor 4 Registry Variable s3 Metric Property Choose Metric or Property a gt Scoping Topology CollectionModelRootSummary Child Topology Other Topology Agent AgentHeatthState AgentState AggregateModelinstance AggregateModelRoot AlarmChangeType AlarmRuleBasedview AlarmSeverity 3 Choose a topology type and display its metrics and instances Select a topology type from o
213. e and inserts field data using the line of code that immediately follows this command TABLE table_name Opens the table with table_name specifying the name of the table If an identity field is declared append it to the table name type Specifies the topology type if it is not a metric unit Contains the name of the measurement unit to use for metrics If a unit is not specified vFoglight uses count as the unit by default When you finish writing the agent script you can proceed to Accessing the Build Script Agent Dashboard on page 451 Accessing the Build Script Agent Dashboard When you finish your script navigate to the Build Script Agent dashboard The Build Script Agent dashboard allows you to upload an agent script to the vFoglight Management Server To access the Build Script Agent dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Tooling gt Build Script Agent The Build Script Agent dashboard appears in the display area 452 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Build Script Agent May 2 2008 10 46 38 PM EDT Build Script Agent Upload Script Script ersion From here you can go to
214. e are automatically adjusted to 31 negative values are not accepted August 2008 29 30 31 5 6 7 12 13 14 19 20 21 26 27 28 2 3 4 2007 2008 2003 Ok Cancel 3 Specify the duration of the schedule item Using Schedules 429 Creating Schedules e If you want the schedule to occur for a part of the day complete one of the following steps e Specify the start time and end time of the schedule item or e Use the Start Time hh mm boxes to specify the hour and minute of the start time Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 23 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted e Select the End Time hh mm option and specify the hour and minute of the end time Note Tip The Duration hh mm boxes appear disabled when you specify the End Time hh mm option Start Date 14 August a End Timefhh mm 0 0 z Start Tima hh mm 14 30 l Whole Day Duration ih mm The end time should occur after the start time The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 24 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 24 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values out
215. e existing ones using the dashboards that come with the Administration module For complete information see the following sections e Managing Thresholds on page 353 e Creating Thresholds on page 361 e Defining Thresholds on page 362 Managing Thresholds The Manage Threshold dashboard allows you to create new registry variables assign values to registry variables and manage registry variables For complete information see the following sections e Accessing the Manage Thresholds dashboard on page 353 e Editing threshold permissions on page 355 e Deleting thresholds on page 359 e Viewing and editing thresholds on page 360 Accessing the Manage Thresholds dashboard The Manage Thresholds dashboard includes a list of the thresholds that exist in your monitoring environment and includes mechanisms for adding and deleting thresholds 354 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide To access the Manage Thresholds dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Data gt Manage Thresholds The Manage Thresholds dashboard appears in the display area Manage Threcheldr moi 2 of Zthweshokds a Filler by Tepelegy Type
216. e following table lists all of the rule level variables and indicates their availability in different trigger types Variable Description Trigger Type Time Data Even t event System event Yes No No event_foglight_rule_alarm_link Link for the alarm Yes No No causing the event event_foglight_rule_comments The comments for the Yes No No rule causing the event event_foglight_rule_id The ID of the rule Yes No No causing the event event_foglight_rule_name The name of the rule Yes No No causing the event event_foglight_severity_level The severity level 0 Yes No No 4 causing the event event_foglight_severity level name Name of the severity Yes No No level causing the event event_scope Event scope Yes No No foglight_rule_alarm_link Link for the alarm Yes Yes Yes foglight_rule_comments Comments for the rule Yes Yes Yes foglight_rule_domain_query Rule domain query Yes Yes Yes foglight_rule_id Rule ID Yes Yes Yes 294 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Variable Description Trigger Type Time Data Even t foglight_rule_name Rule name Yes Yes Yes foglight_scoping_id ID of the topology Yes Yes Yes object For more information on rule trigger types see Triggering rules on page 251 Note vFoglight prevents you from creating a rule variable with the same name as a system variable However the variable name can change if you change the trigger type In this instance a warning icon will appear in the Rule V
217. e for a certain duration repeats at specified time periods with or without a defined end date and time Starts at a specified time and date runs for a whole day or a fraction of a day repeats at a regular interval of days with or without a defined end date and time Starts at a specified time and date runs for a whole day or a fraction of a day repeats at a regular interval of weeks on one or more days of the week with or without a defined end date and time Starts at a specified time and date runs for a whole day or a fraction of a day repeats at a regular interval of months on one or more days of the week with or without a defined end date and time To define a schedule item that occurs once on page 416 To define a schedule item that occurs periodically on page 419 To define a schedule item that occurs periodically on page 419 To define a schedule item that occurs weekly on page 427 To define a schedule item that occurs monthly on page 433 416 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Pattern Allows you to create pattern For instructions see that Yearly Starts at a specified time and To define a schedule item that date runs for a whole day or a occurs yearly on page 440 fraction of a day repeats at a regular interval of years on one or more days of the week each month with or without a defined end date and time To define a schedule item that
218. e list pane allows you to delete any license currently enabled on vFoglight Alternatively you can delete a license using the license remove command that comes with the fg1cmd interface For details see the Command Line Reference Guide To delete a license Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Licenses Dashboard on page 69 1 Inthe Manage Licenses dashboard in the area that lists installed licenses select a row containing the license that you want to delete 2 Click Delete Selected The License Confirmation dialog box appears License Confirmation x Are you sure you want to delete following licenses 423 456 7890 3 To proceed with license deletion in the License Confirmation dialog box click Yes Setting Up vFoglight 75 Managing Support Bundles The License Confirmation dialog box closes The list of installed licenses refreshes and a message indicating that the delete process was successful appears above the list Selected licenses were successfully deleted Showing 0 of O licenses as of Apr 07 2008 15 26 58 Refresh Z Filter by Serial Number Expire After v Expire Before v Clear Filters Serial Number a Expiry Date Capabilities Managing Support Bundles vFoglight allows you to gather diagnostic data from the vFoglight Management Server or the vFoglight Agent Manager and save it in a support bundle There are two types of support bundles that you can create in vFoglight Server
219. e performance of a monitoring component Upload scripts for building agents For more information see Building Script Agents on page 448 Allows you to query the vFoglight database For more information see Retrieving Data with Queries and Scripts on page 467 List add edit or delete groups For more information see Managing Groups on page 118 List add edit or delete roles For more information see Managing Roles on page 127 List add edit or delete users For more information see Managing Users on page 107 42 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Entry Dashboard Use it to or View Topology Add Topology Add topology types Type Type For more information see Adding Topology Types on page 329 Derived Metric Create Add derived metrics Derived Metric For more information see Creating Derived Metrics on page 342 Threshold Create Add thresholds Threshold For more information see Creating Thresholds on page 361 Registry Create Add registry variables Variable Registry For more information see Creating Registry Variable Variables on page 195 Rule Create Rule Add rules For more information see Creating Rules on page 246 Schedule Create Add schedules Schedule For more information see Creating Schedules on page 407 Support Manage Create a server support bundle When you Bundle Support click Support Bundle a message bo
220. e properties for this agent only The boxes in the agent properties area become enabled for editing MyScriptagent Properties Platforms_supported WinNT4 0 Windows2000 Windows2003 WindowsXP Linux2 4 Linux2 agentName Collector cmdLine MyScriptAgenttt purgeDays freo purgeTime Days sample_freq 60 4 In the agent properties area edit the script agent properties as required 466 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 5 Save your changes Click Save Example Type 1 Script The following is an example of a Type I script echo off not SECHO echo ECHO not SOS Windows_NT goto EXI if if LE ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec ec Ssample_freqs No NO NO NO NO No NO No No No NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO The Build Script Agent dashboard refreshes showing a list of all agent instances set sample_freq 60 LOG Start collecting data for NT at sample_freq t seconds TABLE NT START_SAMPLE_PERIOD Foold String id Bar stringProp String This is a non identity string property intProp Integer 30 countMetric 40 timeMetric second 50 rateMetric count second 50 fancyMetric 4 kilobyte 50 intWithUnit Integer minute stringObs StringObservation obs END_SAMPLE PERIOD START_SAMPLE_PERIOD Foold String id Another Bar
221. e role or user whose permissions you want to edit Tip Three check marks in the Permissions columns indicate that the role already has permissions assigned to it The Edit Role Permission or Edit User Permission dialog box appears Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 231 Working with Rules Edit Role Permission Edit User Permission Role Name Administrator User Name administrator Obvelete ODelete b To edit the permissions ensure that the Edit option is selected and use the Read Write and Control check boxes as required c To delete the permissions select the Delete option d Click Save The dialog box closes and the selected entry refreshes showing the newly edited permissions Copying rules Use the Copy Rule button on the Manage Rules dashboard to copy a rule as outlined below To copy a rule Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Rules dashboard on page 225 1 In the Manage Rules dashboard in the row containing the rule that you want to copy click the Copy Rule button The Rule Confirmation dialog box appears 232 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Rule Confirmation x Are you sure you want to save a copy of the selected rule Console 2 Inthe Rule Confirmation dialog box click OK The Rule Confirmation dialog box closes and the Edit Rule area appears in the Manage Rules dashboard allowing you to edit the newly copied rule
222. e syntax lt TopologyType gt where name lt Object gt 480 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide where TopologyType is the name of the topology type of which Object is an instance and Object is the specific instance to which you do not want the rule or derived metric to be scoped e You can cause the rule or derived metric to be scoped to all topology objects of a specific type except those that have names like that of a certain instance by using the syntax lt TopologyType gt where name like lt Object gt where TopologyType is the name of the topology type of which the instances with names like Object are instances In the example shown above the wildcards cause the rule or derived metric to be scoped to all topology objects of the specified type with names that do not include what you specify in place of Object e You can cause the rule or derived metric to be scoped to all topology objects of a specific type except two named instances by using the syntax lt TopologyType gt where name lt Object1 gt or name lt Object2 gt where TopologyType is the name of the topology type of which Object1 and Object 2 are instances Object1 and Object2 are the instances to which the rule or derived metric will not be scoped Using the Query Language in Rule Conditions or Derived Metric Expressions A condition is the part of a rule that is evaluated against monitoring data When creating a
223. e the current vFoglight database key from vFoglight s key store gt bin keyman delappkey dbpwd foglight db username 2 Create a new key store entry for the updated password gt bin keyman addappkey dbpwd foglight db username updated password FoglighT db UseR PassworD KeyToken 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 3 Edit the foglight config file and update the following line with the generated token foglight database password 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 For more information about changing database credentials using the command line see the Command Line Reference Guide Configuring Directory Services vFoglight supports the following Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP version 3 compatible directory services e Active Directory e Sun Java Systems Directory Server e OpenLDAP e Novell eDirectory The Configure Directory Services dashboard allows you to access user login information that is stored in an external directory Once you set up the Configure Directory Services dashboard your vFoglight users can sign in to vFoglight using the credentials from the external directory When you configure the LDAP directory service vFoglight creates a user account each time an LDAP user successfully logs into vFoglight for the first time If an LDAP user is removed from the LDAP directory service their user account remains active in vFoglight and can only be removed by a vFoglight administrato
224. e you can grant or deny read write or control access to roles or users For more information about security concepts in vFoglight see Chapter 3 Managing Users and Security on page 105 vFoglight employs the following behavior when it comes to permissions for registry variables e If no one has a permission to the registry variable everyone has a permission e Ifone has a permission to the registry variable others with undefined permission do not have any permission e Final permission is based on a combination of the role user and registry variable defined on the server side Use the Edit Permissions button F on the Manage Registry Variables dashboard to navigate to the Edit Permissions for Registry Variable area that allows you to add or edit permissions to roles and users as outlined below The Edit Permissions for Registry Variable area contains two tables that show the permissions for each vFoglight user or role Permission granted Permission denied Permissions not assigned Z Not assigned To add permissions for a registry variable Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Registry Variables dashboard on page 185 1 Inthe Manage Registry Variables dashboard in the row containing the variable whose permissions you want to edit click the Edit Permissions for Registry Variable button 19 The Edit Permissions for Registry Variable area appears in the display area Wor
225. eaning 0 012 198 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Registry Value Description Example Type Timestamp Contains a date and time For 2008 08 10 example valid values include 06 23 15 16 0 12 06 2006 06 21 15 30 21 0 June 7 2006 3 08 21 PM Invalid date or time formats cannot be saved to the database and any attempts to save them result in an error If the time is not provided or the values are invalid vFoglight treats the time as midnight Prior to saving the value of a Timestamp variable vFoglight converts it to the following format yyyy mm dd hh mm ss ds Once the value is converted vFoglight stores it in the database Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 199 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables Registry Value Description Example Type PasswordValue A password value Prior to storing the demo123 value of the Password Value data type in the registry vFoglight encrypts it and saves the encrypted value in the database This is useful in cases where you need to secure password values when passing it to command or remote command actions For example you create a registry variable of the Password Value type MyPassword and set its value to demo123 vFoglight encrypts the registry value then stores it encrypted in the database for example 43 119 184 240 170 150 124 218 30 112 216 76 197 233 188 206 In a function call registry MyPassword vFoglight retrieves the regist
226. ears 2 Select the units of measurement Use one or both of the Unit boxes on the left of Unit Type as required For example percent or count second Note You cannot change the value type of a derived metric unless you also change the name of the derived metric You can change the unit of measurement for a derived metric but only to a compatible unit For example you could change the unit from megabyte to kilobyte but you could not change it from megabyte to percent without also changing the name of the derived metric To set the value type to an observation Note This procedure continues from Triggering derived metrics on page 348 1 Inthe area immediately below the Derived Metric Calculations list ensure that both of the Unit boxes are blank 2 Specify the observation that you want to use as the value type for the derived metric Click Value Type on the right and select an observation from the list that appears 3 Optional Add comments about the value type Type your comments in the Comments box 4 Save your changes Click Add when creating a new derived metric or Save when editing an existing metric Example Creating and Managing Multiple Rules with the Same Scope If you need to create multiple rules that are scoped to the same topology type and that use the same metric expressions in their conditions you can make the process of 352 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide creating
227. ecific platforms lt CARTRIDGE gt _file_manifest txt A file manifest for every cartridge deployed to this SPID installation osfiles OPTIONAL may be present for specific platforms Various OS configuration files like etc hosts depending on the OS platform Note For information about the content of vFoglight Agent Manager support bundles see Viewing Audit Information on page 82 Appendix vFoglight Client Reference 501 Browser Interface Browser Interface This section contains sample screen captures that appear in monitoring environments that use the vFoglight Client for agent communication with the vFoglight Management Server It includes screen captures for the following dashboards e Agent Properties dashboard on page 501 e Agent Status dashboard on page 502 e Agent Adapters dashboard on page 502 Agent Properties dashboard Agent Properties Apr 18 2008 7660 PM EDT Agent Properties f SPI Adapter pane Types pane Agent pane List pane Note For a sample screen capture of this dashboard in a monitoring environment that uses the vFoglight Agent Manager see Accessing the Agent Properties Dashboard on page 168 502 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Agent Status dashboard The Agent Status dashboard shows an entry for the SPINetwork agent that comes with the vFoglight Client Agom Sever Sep TA 2008 109700 AM COT Agent Status showing 1 2 of
228. econds between major topology refresh operations A major topology refresh operation involves re fetching all relevant topology objects from all federated servers and merging them into the local topology model This setting is defined by the TopologyRefreshPeriod parameter Federation Configuration Connection URLs nj Max Alarm Update Delay millis 50 000 Max System Time Difference millis 60 000 Topology Queries TopologyObject Topology Refresh Period millis 1 800 000 For information on how to view the information on the vFoglight Configuration dashboard see Accessing the vFoglight Configuration Dashboard on page 67 Database This view contains information about database settings The database settings are defined in the file lt vfoglight_home gt config foglight config For more information about this file see the Installation and Setup Guide The Database view displays the following settings Host The name of the database host This setting is defined by the foglight database host parameter Port The port number used by the database This setting is defined by the foglight database port parameter Type The type of the database Possible values are mysql or oracle This setting is defined by the foglight database type parameter Hibernate Dialect The name of the component that defines the database hibernate dialect Database Name The name of the database This setting is defined by the foglight dat
229. ection Stotur Ape 2000 10 see7 AM EDT AA mas 127 001 Aer 01 2000 14 59 22 _Kenstleledmnisucporticcenectonstatus action Age O1 2000 1 32 12 56 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Viewing vFoglight Configuration The vFoglight Configuration dashboard provides information about vFoglight configuration items The configuration settings that appear in this dashboard reflect the settings that you specify at or after the installation while others can be set at run time For example the database settings whose values appear in the vFoglight Configuration dashboard are typically set after the installation in the file lt vfoglight_home gt config foglight config Any changes to the parameters in this file take effect only after a restart of the vFoglight Management Server Other types of settings reflect the version and in some cases the patch level of the components that come with vFoglight such as the vFoglight Management Server WCF JVM or refer to the OS of the computer on which the vFoglight Management Server is installed and its patch level These settings cannot be changed unless you choose to upgrade to a higher version of vFoglight if one is available There are also some settings that can be defined using vFoglight registry variables For example the values that reflect global mail settings which vFoglight uses for sending emails as required are specified in the vFoglight registry Changes to these settings
230. ectory Services Dashboard Managing Cartridges wscssssssssssscesscsscescessescesceeceecescessoeeceeneensesneeieeaceeceenieseeaceeaeenneseeiteaceeieeninsieaieeateaiisnins About VR Olight Cartridges anunn AAR TA AAAA Aa A About Cartridge Components i mircsnenurnananiani i a ARA i UA Ei Installing and Managing Cartridges csccssssssesessesssssssesssessesneesessesesssessesssessesssessssssscsusssessusssessssessesesnesneesnesneesnss Accessing the Cartridge Inventory Dashboard l stalling C artmidge Semanan N E TA A a a Enabling CartiidgeS issii nnna cadre Mandira ken a oe alata ian Disabling Cariddes aci 20 waiMiaidiialclawiai alae AGS Gari Mun Gah dada anh Wining falling Ga rtidGes enana Ae AA AANA AAR A a TA AOA A Ni ai daii Downloading Agent C omp he nenion iiini i AREER EA Accessing the Components for Download Dashboard ssssssssnniniisnnnni 161 Downloading COMPONENTS 31 28 ca Aue at An tA Mae Me ed et Mi aes ea 163 Managing Agents A OUEVE olit AJEN oraninin des dusagacsessayeuduscuvendsastvi lasses sobs AAE TS Tdi 166 Managing Agent Properties by Typ cesssesssssscsseesscsnsessesseesnsessteesuecsnessceesneesseereesuessnesssesneesineeatesnteesineeaaesssnss 167 Accessing the Agent Properties Dashboard ssssccccccrerenncncrinnnnniennnnnniinnniiniis 168 Editing Type S pecific AGENUPMOPGrles vi cisrsteien tien taienanacdsasemindenstaanmnanendiraieniudlanianattinate 171 Assigning Blackouts to Agent INStances ssssssssscssssscsessecse
231. ed To open the Scoping Query Editor dialog box Note This procedure continues from Inserting topology types on page 474 1 Click the Scoping Query Editor button q gt The Scoping Query Editor dialog box appears Scoping Query Editor Windows_System_System_Table Topology Type Vindows_System_Systerm_Table Topology Instances tor012991 prod quest corp 6 MyVVindowsSystemAgent Vindows_System System_Table Insert Query Close Using the Query Language 477 Using the Query Language to Set the Rule or Derived Metric Scope From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures e Inserting topology object instances on page 477 e Filtering through topology type properties on page 477 Inserting topology object instances When you specify a topology type you can select an object instance of that type and insert it into the scoping query using the Scoping Query Editor dialog box To insert a topology object into the scoping query Note This procedure continues from Restricting the scope to topology objects on page 476 1 Inthe Scoping Query Editor dialog box ensure that the Instances tab is open 2 Select a topology object instance In the Topology Instances box select the object instance 3 In the display area in the box immediately below the Topology Type and Property boxes place the cursor where you want to insert the new segment of the scoping query If that box
232. ed as follows transactionRollbackRate gt 10 You repeat this process for the Critical and Warning levels specifying the conditions for these levels as t ransactionRollbackRate gt 8 and transactionRollbackRate gt 6 respectively You click Finish when you have specified the conditions for all three severity levels You review the settings for the rule on the Rule Added area and then click the Go to Rule List button The new rule is listed on the Manage Rules dashboard Example Creating a Simple Rule A simple rule is scoped to the topology type Jv and has the condition threads_started gt 10 This means that the rule will enter the Fire state when any instance of the JVM topology type returns a started threads count greater than 10 The rule includes an expression called ThreadsNum The value of this expression is the metric threads_started the same metric that is used in the rule s condition In turn this expression is referenced in a message called ProblemSynopsis whose value is Threads started count is too high ThreadsNum 314 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide An entering Email action is set for this rule This action uses the ProblemSynopsis message as the text of the email that is sent when the rule enters the Fire state e Example Creating Multiple Severity Rules with a Topology Scope on page 314 e Example Configuring Rule Action Parameters on page 314 e Example Creating Rule
233. ed Metrics dashboard contains a list of all derived metrics showing their name and scope The derived metrics that exist in your vFoglight environment appear on the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard However there is no distinction between raw and derived metrics in other locations on the Administration module This dashboard also includes controls for filtering the list of derived metrics by the metric name scope or cartridge For instructions on how to use the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard see the following sections e Accessing the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard on page 333 e Editing permissions of derived metrics on page 335 e Copying derived metrics on page 339 e Deleting derived metrics on page 341 e Viewing and editing derived metrics on page 341 Accessing the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard The Manage Derived Metrics dashboard includes a list of the derived metrics that exist in your monitoring environment and allows you to add or delete derived metrics and perform other metric management operations To access the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Data gt Manage Derived Metrics The Manage Deri
234. ed in rule definitions For more information see Working with Rules on page 223 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables vFoglight registry variables can be used in rule conditions expressions and actions They are stored in the vFoglight registry A registry variable can have a global value that is available to all topology types and objects It can also have multiple additional values associated with specific topology types or objects or calendar dates In addition these values can be configured to change at certain times You create new registry variables assign values to registry variables and manage registry variables using the dashboards that come with the Administration module Because registry variables can have multiple values that are tied to the topology or dates you can see verify their values and see how they are affected by these parameters For complete information see the following sections e Managing Registry Variables on page 185 e Creating Registry Variables on page 195 Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 185 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables e Editing Registry Variables on page 200 e Viewing Registry Values on page 209 e Example Assigning Multiple Values to a Registry Variable on page 216 e Example Using Performance Calendars on page 216 e Example Assigning Host Specific Email Addresses of vFoglight System Administrators on page 217 Managin
235. ee hours Tip The Hour box accepts any positive values The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted 4 Specify the date and time after which the schedule item ends using the controls in the Range of Occurrence area Using Schedules 421 Creating Schedules Range of Occurrence CNoEnd End Date fis August J zo0e End By Date End Timefhh mm foo 00 e To specify an end date in the Range of Occurrence area ensure that the End By Date option is selected and specify the end date and time using the End Date and End Time hh mm boxes as required Tip Use the Calendar button on the right and use the calendar controls that appear to specify the start date August 2008 29 30 31 5 7 24 28 4 2007 2008 2003 k Cancel Tip The Day box accepts the values between 1 and 31 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 31 negative values are not accepted The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 24 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted e To have the schedule item recurring at the recurrence pattern specified in step 3 without an end date in t
236. eed to edit groups for a single user account use the Manage Users dashboard For information see Adding Users to Groups on page 112 Another way to assign or remove users from groups is to use the security assigngroup command that comes with the fglemd interface For more information see the Command Line Reference Guide To add users to a group Note This procedure continues from Creating Groups on page 122 1 In the Manage Groups dashboard select the row containing the group to which you want to add users 2 Click the Edit Users button in the lower right corner on the left of the Edit Roles button The Edit Users dialog box appears Edit Users test ep administrator demo jp foglight am operator Save Cancel Note The dialog box lists existing vFoglight users If you added any users they also appear in the dialog For information on how to add users see Creating Users on page 111 3 In the Edit Users dialog box select the users that you want to add to the group by clicking the appropriate symbol to the left of the group name e The user account is added or already belongs to this group 124 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide The user account has been removed from or does not have access to this group e O There is no change in user assignment For example to add the default foglight user account to the group ensure that the green plus sign appears to the left
237. ees Lees Forcing Password Chariges icsasccanalisivina ndash ania nenieddadouinaaadndianinerhiandaiiad Unlocking Passwords ss vines eae i Gee N a ie a eae pala Aa ae ees Deleting Intermal USES lt sciscscssiiesccasctsdestecvncisddres cistischatiestttendnaeaiatiaa dnimiaddalaniei aa dastanbniandibinavadia tie Managing Groups Accessing the Manage Groups Dashboard Creating G TOUP ieina ran AiE tE G AEEA A E ANE ATA A ai ei aa a iE Editing Users in GOUpS adi a a a E E T alee ateletgaten Assigning Rolesto a Group aiktaeiki Mad iicn alah nian Ane ANA a dash Deleting Intermal Groups tosni aa e A EAEE E AE AREE Managing R olisin se secsccativss ciesecens didens deired octavian Sanieeiiia disirialaiad dveisncisdneed a a a Accessing the Manage Roles DaShb0ard secs teesesstessiessiesseeesieesneessnesseesiessieenieesicseceenesneeenneesy Creating Roles woes Editing Groups fora Role Deleting Internal ROlGS c scsssssssssssessessssessecssesscsssssssssscsussssssssesnsesnssneesnessuesvessuessessscssssssessessusssecssesssassesanaess Configuring Password S ettingS ticcakwes weed Son ateaet ad ae ae Ane es eed Me ded eed Sean Table of Contents 5 Accessing the Configure Password Settings Dashboard 00 cesssesstessteeseessteesieesestesseesneesesseesniessiesicssenes 136 Editing Password CtingSss ssiidi cis decdaiesnti decane Selenite a aa a aa Changing Database Credentials Configuring Directory Services essences Accessing the Configure Dir
238. egin Time Period End Time RARAN ay Value There Is No Data To Displa 3 The dashboard shows the following information e Variable Name The name of the registry variable whose value you want to view e Topology Type Name The topology type with which the registry value is associated e Topology Object The object instance of the specified topology type with which the registry value is associated e Date Time Range The date and time range for which you want to look up the registry value 210 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e Registry Value The value to which the variable is set during a specified date and time range If there are multiple time ranges during which the registry value changes the table shows the registry value for each range 4 Specify the name of the variable whose values you want to view For example we will look at the SySADMIN variable that is scoped to two topology object instances and two different performance calendars Note By default the SYSADMIN variable has no scoped values They have been created for the purpose of this exercise For an example of how you can scope a registry variable to multiple topology objects see Example Assigning Multiple Values to a Registry Variable on page 216 a Inthe View Registry Variable view click the link that appears on the right of Variable Name The Registry Variable list appears showing the registry variables that exist in your
239. egistry Yariable Name Description Comments Registry alue Type 3 Specify the name description and data type for the variable using the following boxes e Registry Variable Name The name of the variable Note The registry variable name cannot be longer than two hundred and fifty 250 characters and cannot be the same as the name of an existing registry variable In addition the name cannot be changed once the registry variable has been added This is because registry variables are referred to by their names in rule conditions and expressions and changing them would invalidate these references However you can copy a registry variable and give the copy a different name Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 197 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables Description Comments Any comments about the variable or its usage Registry Value Type The data type of the variable There are 6 possible data types to which a variable can be set as listed below Note The registry variable type cannot be changed once the registry variable has been added Registry Value Description Example Type Boolean A boolean value true or false true String A text string This message was generated by vFoglight Integer An integer value between 2 and 6825 231 1 For example valid values include 235 and 10000 Double A decimal value For example valid 95 0 values include 34 1234 35e3 meaning 35 000 0 or 1 2E 2 m
240. enced with its uniqueID property Specifying the scoping query manually You can use the syntax shown in one of the examples below to manually specify all or part of the scoping query in the box immediately below the Topology Type and Property boxes Note In addition to the examples shown below there are many different ways of specifying a scoping query These examples are simply provided as guidelines with regard to the query language syntax Examples e You can scope the rule or derived metric to a specific named topology object by using the syntax lt TopologyType gt where name lt Object gt where TopologyType is the name of the topology type of which Object is an instance and Ob ject is the specific instance to which you want the rule or derived metric to be scoped e You can scope the rule or derived metric to multiple similarly named topology objects of a certain type by using syntax similar to lt TopologyType gt where name like lt Object gt where TopologyType is the name of the topology type of which the topology objects with names like Ob ject are instances In the example shown above the wildcard causes the rule or derived metric to be scoped to all topology objects of the specified type with names that end with what you specify in place of Object e You can cause the rule or derived metric to be scoped to all topology objects of a specific type except for a single named instance by using th
241. ent properties schedules derived metrics or thresholds for changes that occur within the applicable default time range A diagnostic snapshot consisting of service status agent status thread dump etc A full file listing for all files under the vFMS home directory vFMS installation log A listing of all installed cartridges and their versions An export of the Monitoring Policies persistent configuration of the VFMS Brief description about this support bundle Defines the weight of attached agents Used to help determine vFMS load Config parameters for the VFMS Config parameters for the vFMS logging capabilities Various configuration options for running the vFMS as a service Various log configuration options for the vFMS 82 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide restart_monitor config server_restarter log config logs ManagementServer_ log server default conf jacorb properties deploy nitro dyn ds xml jbossweb tomcat55 sar context xml server xml vFMS restart configuration parameters as a service Logging parameters for the VFMS The three most recent vFMS logs vFMS JacORB configuration parameters vFMS data source definition JBoss application configuration file JBoss application configuration file Note The indicates a date time stamp of the format YYYY MM DD_HH MM SS Viewing Audit Information vFoglight maintains security
242. ent Properties dashboard to view and edit type specific agent properties both primary and secondary To access the Agent Properties dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Agents gt Agent Properties The Agent Properties dashboard appears in the display area Managing Agents 169 Managing Agent Properties by Type Apem Property s TA Dove send AM EST Namespace ee SPI Fam Namespace pane Types pane Agent pane List pane Note For a sample screen capture of this dashboard in a monitoring environment that uses the vFoglight Client see Agent Properties dashboard on page 501 The Agent Properties dashboard contains three panes e Namespace Contains a list of vFoglight adapters that allow the agent to communicate with the vFoglight Management Server The majority of vFoglight agents use the vFoglight Agent Manager and the SPI adapter Other agents come with their own agent adapter For example the Java EE cartridge has its own agent adapter e Types Lists agent types for a selected agent adapter Note This pane is initially blank e Agent Lists type specific agent properties for a selected agent type Note This pane is initially blank e List Shows lis
243. ent dashboard in the Agent Status area click the Create Agent button in the lower left corner The Create Agent dialog box appears Create Agent Host Select a Host Agent Type Instance Name Generate Name E peren pr 2 Specify the host that you want to monitor with the script based agent instance that you are about to create Note In order to select the host the vFoglight Agent Manager must be up and running on the monitored host In the Create Agent dialog box click Host and select the monitored host computer The Agent Type box refreshes showing a list of agent types that can be created on the selected host The script agent package that you deployed to the monitored host in Deploying Script Agent Packages on page 454 appears in the list Working with vF oglight Tooling 459 Building Script Agents Create Agent Host tor012991 prod quest corp Fql4M v Agent Type MyScriptAgent MyScriptAgent OSCartridge NetMonitor OSCartridge LogFilter OSCartridge WebMonitor OSCartridge ApacheSvr OSCartridge SNMP OSCartridge Windows System OSCartridge AppMonitor zi Instance Name Generate Name a The list reflects the cartridges that have been installed enabled and deployed to the monitored host Select the script agent to use as a type for the agent instance you are about to create Note You can only create instances of those agents whose types have already been deployed to the moni
244. ented dashboards or build their own dashboards Foglight Operators Allows the users to have access to core and cartridge dashboards and to create new dashboards Foglight Security Administrators Provides access to all dashboards under the Users amp Security node in the Administration module Note Built in groups cannot be deleted External The groups that are mapped from an LDAP compatible directory service supported by vFoglight as part of the process of mapping external users Managing Users and Security 119 Managing Groups For more information about configuring vFoglight to use an external directory service see Configuring Directory Services on page 139 Roles are assigned to a user through groups when a user belongs to a group the roles that are assigned to that group are also assigned to the user A user can belong to one or more groups If you belong to a group that includes the Security role the Manage Groups dashboard allows you to create and manage groups add users to groups and assign roles to groups For more information on how to use the Manage Groups dashboard see the following sections e Accessing the Manage Groups Dashboard on page 119 e Creating Groups on page 122 e Editing Users in Groups on page 123 e Assigning Roles to a Group on page 124 e Deleting Internal Groups on page 126 Accessing the Manage Groups Dashboard The Manage Groups dashboard contains a table
245. ents to communicate with the vFoglight Management Server e Monitoring policy A monitoring policy contains information and settings that help vFoglight analyze the data that the agents collect such as rules registry variables schedules and derived metrics The items included in the monitoring policy are specific to each type of cartridge e Dashboards Dashboards display information collected from your monitored environment such as metrics Each dashboard is a top level view from which you can drill down to more detailed views The dashboards included with a cartridge allow the information collected by the agents to be displayed in a unified view Each cartridge may include one or more dashboards Installing and Managing Cartridges Use the Administration module to install cartridges on the vFoglight Management Server enable and manage cartridges and download agent installers Cartridges allow you to monitor additional operating systems processes databases applications and servers in your environment Adding a cartridge to the vFoglight Management Server is a two step process First the car file that contains the cartridge must be installed on the vFoglight Management Server Installing a cartridge causes the server to be aware of it You can only install those cartridges that are listed in your vFoglight license For information on how to find out whether your license includes a particular cartridge see Chapter 2 View
246. eploy the package using the command line To deploy a script agent package Note This procedure continues from Uploading Agent Scripts and Building Agent Packages on page 452 1 On the Build Script Agent dashboard in the lower left corner of the Agent Status area click Deploy Agent Package The Agent Status area appears in the Build Script Agent dashboard The Deploy Agent Package dialog box appears Deploy Agent Package Host Select a Host FE Package Select a Package Show Packages for All Platforms Cancel 2 Specify the monitored host to which you want to deploy the agent package Note In order to select the agent adapter the adapter must be up and running on the monitored host In the Deploy Agent Package dialog box click Host and select the monitored host to which you want to deploy the agent package 3 Select the script agent package Click Package and select the script agent package that you created in Uploading Agent Scripts and Building Agent Packages on page 452 from the list that appears Package OSCartridge Agent WindowsxP 5_2_4 Show Packages gt for All MyScriptAgent_1 2 0 Platforms 456 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide For example MyScriptAgent 1 2 0 4 Click Deploy The Deploy Agent Package dialog box refreshes showing the status of the deployment operation Deploy Agent Package Task Deploying package MyScriptAgent 1 2 1 Progress
247. er fglemd command to create a user For more information see the Command Line Reference Guide To create a user Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Users Dashboard on page 108 1 Inthe Manage Users dashboard click the Create User button in the lower left corner The Create User dialog box appears Create User Name Password Confirm Password 2 Specify the name and password of the user that you want to create a Inthe Create User dialog box in the Name box type the user name For example test b In the Password and Confirm Password boxes type the user password Note The Password box is encrypted For example test 123 112 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide As you type the password into the Password and Confirm Password boxes asterisk characters appear Note Passwords must meet certain criteria For example by default each password must be between seven 7 and sixteen 16 characters long For more information see Configuring Password Settings on page 135 If you specify a password that is longer than sixteen 16 characters for an end user that user cannot log into vFoglight c Click Create The Create User dialog box closes and the Manage Users dashboard refreshes to show the newly created user account When you create users their type appears as Internal on the listing Once you create a new user you should ensure that the user changes
248. erformance calendars on page 204 2 Click Save to save the global default value From here you can proceed to Using performance calendars on page 204 Using performance calendars If you want the default value to change over time add one or more schedules to the performance calendar and specify the value for each schedule See Example Using Performance Calendars on page 216 for an example of how to use this feature The vFoglight Management Server evaluates the schedules in the performance calendar in the order they are listed starting with the first one Changing their order affects the behavior of the actions that are associated with the variable whose value is set by the schedule based entries in the performance calendar For example if there are two schedule entries in the performance calendar that overlap in time but have two different values the first entry listed takes precedence causing one or more actions that are associated with that variable to make use of that entry for the duration of the schedule Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 205 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables To add schedules to a performance calendar Note This procedure continues from Specifying values on page 201 1 Choose a schedule Click Schedule Name and select a schedule from the list that appears The list reflects the existing schedules For information on how to add schedules to vFoglight see Chapte
249. es support ap dell com toll free 1 800 394 7430 toll free 1 800 394 7488 toll free 1 800 394 7478 toll free 1 800 394 7430 option 6 toll free 1 800 394 7412 toll free 1 800 394 7419 Slovakia Prague International Access Code 00 Country Code 421 Web Address E mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Fax Tech Fax Switchboard Sales support euro dell com czech _dell dell com 02 5441 5727 420 22537 2707 02 5441 8328 02 5441 8328 02 5441 8328 02 5441 7585 South Africa Web Address support euro dell com J ohannesburg E mail Address dell_za_suppor dell com International Access Cd Queue 011 709 7713 Code 09 091 Technical Support 011 709 7710 Country Code 27 Customer Service 011 709 7707 Sales 011 709 7700 City Code 11 Spain Madrid Web Address Support euro com Home and Small Business International Access Technical i 21001 Code 00 echnica Support 902 100 130 Customer Service 902 118 540 Country Code 34 City Code 91 Sales 902 118 541 Switchboard 902 118 541 Fax 902 118 539 Corporate Technical Support 902 100 130 Customer Service 902 115 236 Switchboard 91 722 92 00 Fax 91 722 95 83 Sweden Upplands Web Address support euro dell com Vasby Technical Support 08 590 05 199 International Access Code 00 Country Code 46 City Code 8 Relational Customer Service Home Small Business Customer Service Employee Purchase Program EPP Support Technical Sup
250. es appear during installation For information about changing port assignments at installation time see the Installation and Setup Guide Some of these port numbers can be seen in the Ports view of the vFoglight Configuration dashboard and they are described in Ports on page 63 Port Name Default Description Port Number Cluster Multi cast 45566 Cluster Multi cast port It is used when vFoglight Port is running in High Availability HA mode Database Port 3306 User defined port for connecting to the database 66 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Port Name Default Description Port Number HA JNDIJNP Port 1100 Port for the bootstrap JNP service when vFoglight is running in HA mode For more information about High Availability mode see the Installation and Setup Guide HA JNDI RMI Port 1101 Port for the Remote Method Invocation RMI naming service when vFoglight is running in HA mode It can be used to observe the network traffic between the vFoglight Management Server and other computers on the same network If it finds another JBoss server it checks the partition name to see if the JBoss server is a primary or a secondary server HA JNDI UDP 1102 Port for the UDP group when vFoglight is running Group Port in HA mode HA JRMP Invoker 4447 Port for the RMI JRMP invoker when vFoglight is Port running in HA mode HA Pooled Invoker 4446 Pooled invoker port when vFoglight is running in Port HA
251. es as outlined below To enable a cartridge Note This procedure continues from Installing Cartridges on page 155 1 In the Cartridge Inventory dashboard select one or more disabled cartridges in the table that you want to enable The Status column contain icons that indicate if a cartridge is enabled jg enabled pending dependency partially enabled 4 or disabled Tip To select multiple cartridges press the CTRL or SHIFT key while selecting the rows containing the cartridges that you want to enable Click the Enable Selected button at the bottom of the Cartridge Inventory dashboard If the operation is successful a message appears above the cartridge list 158 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Requested operation was successfully completed 3 In the Cartridge Inventory dashboard observe the Status column of the cartridges that you enabled The Status column of each newly enabled cartridge contains an icon indicating that the operation was successful Disabling Cartridges A cartridge can be in one of the following states e Enabled e Enabled pending dependency e Disabled e Partially enabled Disabling a cartridge causes its components to no longer be available for use by the vFoglight Management Server A disabled cartridge remains installed on the Management Server For example you could disable a cartridge to temporarily disable its functionality but keep the car file
252. es 240 viewing rule summary 241 writing rule conditions 261 managing registry variables 185 managing rules 225 Rules amp Notifications node in navigation panel 10 11 33 185 196 209 217 226 247 283 311 316 S Schedule Confirmation dialog box 414 Schedule Delete Confirmation dialog box 404 schedules adding schedule items 410 creating 407 deleting schedule items 410 getting started with schedule definitions 409 managing 397 accessing Create Schedule dashboard 408 accessing Manage Schedules dashboard 397 copying schedules 402 deleting schedules 404 editing permissions 399 editing schedule definitions 406 viewing schedule definitions 405 406 Schedules dashboards 395 528 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide about 396 Create Schedule 42 407 408 409 410 411 accessing 408 adding schedule items 410 creating schedules 407 deleting schedule items 410 Edit Schedule Add Schedule Item view 412 Edit Schedule view 412 getting started with schedule definitions 409 Schedule Confirmation dialog box 414 Step 1 Create Schedule Schedule Name and De scription view 408 Step 2 Create Schedule Details of Schedule view 410 411 Step 3 Create Schedule Schedule Added view 411 Manage Schedules 41 182 397 399 402 403 404 405 407 408 accessing 397 Add Role Permission dialog box 400 Add User Permission dialog box 400 Business Hours dialog box 405 406 Copy Schedule dialog box 402 copying schedul
253. es 402 deleting schedules 404 Edit Role Permission dialog box 401 Edit Schedule view 403 405 407 413 414 Edit User Permission dialog box 401 editing schedule definitions 406 editing schedule permissions 399 Schedule Delete Confirmation dialog box 404 viewing schedule definitions 405 406 managing schedules 397 Schedules node in navigation panel 10 11 33 397 408 Schema Browser dashboard 384 385 Schema Browser node in navigation panel 384 Schema dashboards Schema Browser 384 385 Schema node in navigation panel 384 scope about 30 scoping queries using the query language 474 Scoping Query Editor dialog box 475 476 477 478 479 script agents building 448 accessing Build Script Agent dashboard 451 building agent packages 452 examples type 1 script 466 type 2 script 466 instances creating 457 packages deploying 454 uploading 452 properties editing 464 script syntax 449 uploading 452 uploading agent scripts 452 Script Editor dashboard accessing 468 retrieving data from topology objects 472 selecting topology objects 469 Script Editor node in navigation panel 468 security managing groups 118 managing roles 127 managing users 107 Selected Agents dialog box 181 182 Server Licensing Error view 37 server Support bundles 75 creating 77 retrieving 79 viewing content 80 Server view 57 Setup amp Supportdashboards 53 about 54 Connection Status 40 54 Manage Licenses 48 69 70 73 74 accessing 69 deleting license
254. es to be sent to a specified recipient when the rule fires For more information about viewing the settings related to email actions and configuring email actions in vFoglight see Viewing email settings and configuring email actions on page 279 Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 279 Working with Rules e Command Actions They cause an external action to be executed on the machine hosting the vFoglight Management Server For example a Command action may run the executable that starts a service Various parameters can be set for this action The mandatory parameter is COMMAND_LINE which is the executable command and one or more arguments Optionally you can also set OS environment variables separated by an exclamation mark e Remote Command Actions They cause an external action to be executed on a remote platform Various parameters can be set for this action including a mandatory parameter is COMMAND_LINE e Script Actions They cause an arbitrary script to be run when the rule fires This is to be used for any integration not available through built in actions Various parameters can be set for this action such as script name mandatory scoping topology ID scripting object ID and arguments associated with the script The ten arguments 0 9 must be mapped directly to the script and it is the responsibility of the user to assure the parameters match the script in number and in type There is currently no validation fa
255. es you to the concepts and terms related to managing security in vFoglight and looks into security related components that you can manage using the Administration module It also takes you through the process of creating and managing users groups and roles in vFoglight Note In order to complete each of the procedures in this chapter your user account must belong to a group with the Security role For more information see Managing Groups on page 118 This chapter contains the following sections About Secun m YF OOM ciiisean denna 106 EEA A E T E 107 PPP ICME ei a A E E 118 Managing ROES iniu deta ead eaa EA AA ANN Ea 127 Configuring Password SettingS ciscccanan iain 135 Configuring Directory SernigEp conieco irie TEETE ai EEEE 139 Administration and Configuration Guide 106 vF oglight About Security in vFoglight In vFoglight user management consists of three related entities Users A user has a user name and a password and can belong to one or more groups Logging in to vFoglight as a specific user authorizes you to perform a certain set of actions based on the roles that have been assigned to the group s to which the user belongs vFoglight can store user passwords on the vFoglight Management Server or in an external directory For more information see Managing Users on page 107 Configuring Password Settings on page 135 and Configuring Directory Services on page 139 Groups A group
256. eshold Bounds table Threshold Bounds Level Type Inc Info Collecting data value 85 To save your changes Note This procedure continues from any of the following sections To bind a threshold level to a metric on page 367 To bind a threshold level to a registry variable on page 368 e To bind a threshold level to a constant value on page 369 1 Ensure that the order of the bounds in the threshold bounds is valid Caution The vFoglight Management Server evaluates threshold bounds in the order that they are listed starting with the first one Changing their order affects the output of actions that are associated with that threshold level To move a threshold bound up or down in the Threshold Bounds table in the Info column use the Move up this bound 4 or Move down this bound buttons as required 2 Complete one of the following steps e Existing thresholds Click Save A list appears in the display area showing the newly added threshold bounds for the selected threshold level Working with Data 371 Working with Thresholds tent emai Ornette Thevshold Bound Gaai Bowed Type O togirtry variable Thrribstd Boond constant Threthotd Bound or e New thresholds Click Add A list appears in the display area showing the threshold bounds for the selected threshold level May 23 2008 td OM EDT Select Threshold Level Threshold Added Step 4 Create Threshold Threshold Added
257. essscssscssssssesssssssesneesnssneesnesneesnerseessssseesees 32 Viewing the Administration DaShboard usccssesssessesssesssssessssssnssssssneesnssssesnsssessesssessscsesssssssesusssssssssessssssessnsesneaneesnses 39 Looking at Administration TaSKs ss sasccssssvacssisvisssasscectssvecesusbevsesehdvtesvassoedval vil cach sande a a a aa 50 Setting Up VE Og ight sissicicscivcisssievs cove csiassvartsavsuctavsscssusictsavesdsastvedeivavainrciavinsviaineviusivrateaiaiaidusbeiausiivanitistaiereteieis About vF oglight Setup Viewing Connection Status Viewing VE oglight Configurations sisccsschcos csstavtscns i EN atvadatathiadandel Miata tiaaden 56 Accessing the vF oglight Configuration Dashboard ssssssrcccrersnnncccinennnmenmmnininnnni 67 Managing Licenses watis cu cnidansiAraiiia tania dks iii Aa noe Abed doae aula 69 Accessing the Manage Licenses Dashboard sssssccccccccrrenennncccinennneennnnnnniiininiii 69 INS CaMlIMG LICENS eSa nnan AATA Aa vats E AAAA A ln AON A AAGA EAA 70 Viewing License Capabilities sessiieisrriiiriiroriiiriiisiiiiiatiiiret aa taK RRNA 72 Deleting Licenses 4 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Managing SupportBundless ss sdi2 onsite tod a T a 1B Accessing the Manage Support Bundles Dashboard scccssssuesseestessteeseesstessieeseessseesseestteriessieesnnenseesnesees 76 Creating Server Support Bundles isc easssatuicimeeietian a nite cement aaa 71 Retrieving Server Support
258. eted ier A k t m e A Oaa a W pera ances ipateda Noy odes toxteya Stats bosten hyprt Jog ation Ter keck ation 7 cooeg Mode aereo hyreys z Deta of Abstract View amp Ancestors Gescercdarts rot ances Ensure that the Schema Browser shows the core topology types On the navigation panel under Schema Selector verify if the vFoglight entry is selected Foglight Administration Console Dashboards Meta Data Observe the list of topology types that appear in the Schema Browser dashboard Select a topology type in the upper pane of the Schema Browser and review its details in the lower pane For example to look at the details of the Alarm topology type in the list appearing in the upper pane click the Alarm entry The lower pane shows the details of the Alarm topology type 386 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Details of Alarm View by Properties Ancestors Descendants Instances Name Type Name a uniqueld String sourceID String sourceName String ruleId String ruleName String createdByLocalRule Boolean severity AlarmSeverity topologyObject TopologyObject message String hal To find out the ancestors of the selected topology type at the top of the lower pane on the right of View by click Ancestors The lower pane refreshes showing the ancestors of the selected topology types Details of Alarm View by Properties i4r i Descendants Instances Name Alarm DataObject Objec
259. etric has a data driven trigger it will be evaluated every time that data that is used in the expression for the derived metric is sent to the vFoglight Management Server To assign a schedule driven trigger Note This procedure continues from Adding calculations to derived metrics on page 344 1 Inthe Expression area under Trigger Type select the Schedule Driven option The Expression area refreshes showing a set of controls on the right schedule Driven Schedule Trigger Type Orime Driven Trigger Timing Enter and Exit ov data Driven Enable Trigger without Data 2 Choose the schedule during which you want the derived metric to be triggered Click Schedule and select a schedule from the list that appears Note The list shows all schedules that exist in vFoglight For information on how to add or remove schedules see Chapter 8 Using Schedules on page 395 3 Select the trigger timing option to specify the point in time in which vFoglight evaluates the derived metric in relation with the newly specified schedule Click Trigger Timing and select one of the following options from the list that appears 350 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 5 Enter and Exit e Enter only e Exit only To enable the trigger without data select the Enable Trigger without Data check box Save your changes To assign a time driven trigger Note This procedure continues from Adding
260. f 3000 Nha AM EDT showing 1 17 of 42 Rules as of Jul 17 2008 09 54 48 Petree _ TT paso Meatth Sane Agent agentiD 0 Core MonitoringPotioy ereaas AgeeriMons AppMonitor_Agentmegs OS AppMoniter esf86 8 tate ESM Iintegration x x So Capacity Windows_System_fileSys_Table OS Windows_Systemn sFf8 a Gatabat Date sendoe Duucaene Dats CatalysDataservice Core MentteringPoticy seFfta Satar Daanan ome necting Catahyi Database Core MeniteringPoticy ef68 a Catabat Fine foace Checking for Ore Catalys Tablespace Core MenitoringPotticy eseftes8 oa sa Unmeatien Windows _System_System_Table O5 Windows_System oco Crier Not Foun Nethtonitor_Servicel evets O5 NetMonitor lt c Gnor Wnmeaitanee Netonitor_SerriceLevets O5 Netmonitor ef8 a xk Uttiin Windows_System_Ptysical_Disk_ OS Windows_System sF S8a Coat Aecrarks sameie Core Reporwiotification sF amp a Contos Windows _System_Eventiog O5 Windyes System sesf8 a tores memory Liate Chest CatabystServer jven Core MeniteringPoticy sefes8 a tish istem Uae Wiadows_System_Top_CPU_Tabl OS Windaws_System sFta irato Sevetoats SNP _jotertace 05 SNMP sFfea alahan Dies onde Coe ee ren a n z Selected Sus i hind SESS eS O From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures Editing rule permissions on page 228 Copying rules on page 231 Deleting rules on page 233 Disabling or enabling rules on page 234
261. f D Start Timefhhimm N4 0 F Whole Day g Dwrationfjhh mm 0 0 Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 24 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 24 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted If you want the schedule to occur for the entire day select the Whole Day check box The Start Time hh mm End Time hh mm and Duration hh mm boxes appear disabled Schedule Name My Schedule Description Comments Start Date 14 2008 End Timefhh mn i F z Duration hh mm i 0 Start Time hh mm fi Whole Day 426 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 4 Specify the recurrence pattern In the Recurrence Pattern area use the Every box to specify the number of days at which the schedule recurs Tip The Every box accepts any positive values 5 Specify the date and time after which the schedule item ends using the controls in the Range of Occurrence area Range of Occurrence CNoEnd End Date fis August e zo0e End By Date End Timefhh mm 00 _ 00 e To specify an end date in the Range of Occurrence area ensure that the End By Date option is selected and specify the end date and time using the End Date and End Time hh mm boxes as required Tip Use the Calendar button on the r
262. f purge setting P2 Average data older x than4hto1h G2 Store for 14 days regardless of purge setting P3 Average data older than 5daysto4h G3 Store forever oruntil purge Individual cartridges frequently have their own policies which must be examined on individual object level to understand that retention policy behavior Developing a retention policy Example While the browser interface does not prevent you from setting policies that are in conflict with the generations setting policies that are outside of these boundaries does not yield the expected results Instead the retention policy engine find the most optimal scheme for your data ensuring that the lowest granularity is written to Generation and that longest duration data are written to Generation 3 The table shows how to configure retention policies at 1 2 or 3 levels of aggregation following the specifications below Acceptable Acceptable Explanation age values roll up values Three level policy including a purge Level 1 lt 15 minutes lt 15 minutes Data is persisted at the roll up interval defined in the Level 1 policy for three days Working with Data 377 Managing Retention Policies Acceptable Acceptable Explanation age values roll up values Level 2 gt 15 minutes Any roll up The age date for the Level 2 policy and lt 3 days greater than must be less than or equal to three Level 1 days Data is persisted at
263. fee eet he Multiple severity rule If you plan to make use of this feature you need to add those variables before writing conditional expressions For instructions see the following sections e Adding severity level variables on page 256 e Writing conditions on page 261 e Copying conditions in multiple severity rules on page 276 e Defining actions on page 278 256 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e Copying severity level variables and actions in multiple severity rules on page 297 Adding severity level variables Each severity level can have its own set of variables that you can use in alarm messages Unlike registry variable that are global in nature severity level variables are only accessible to the severity level in which you define them There are two types of severity level variables e Expressions An expression is used to retrieve data It can contain a registry variable or a function e Messages A message is typically a text string that can include other severity level variables displaying dynamically supplied data about your monitored system For example Severity Level Variables Name Value Type varl scope get agent host name Expression var2 CPU_Utilization Expression var3 Run_Queue_Length Expression Text varl CPU Utilization Message Subject CPU Utilization is at var2 and the Message number of process in the run que
264. firm Delete dialog box 117 118 Confirm Force Password Change dialog box 115 Confirm Unlock dialog box 116 Create User dialog box 111 112 Edit Groups dialog box 113 114 Schema Browser 384 385 Script Editor Script Editor dashboard 41 468 469 470 472 vF oglight Configuration 40 47 56 57 58 59 60 61 63 65 67 68 280 Database view 59 68 Federation Configuration view 58 Federation view 57 JVM view 60 Mail Global Settings view 62 0S view 61 516 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Ports view 63 65 Server view 57 WCF view 61 View Audit Information 40 82 83 85 87 88 Show columns dialog box 84 85 86 Data dashboards 327 332 353 about 328 Add Topology Type 329 330 331 adding topology types 329 Create Derived Metric 42 342 343 344 adding calculations to derived metrics 344 defining derived metrics 344 Expression Editor dialog box 482 483 484 485 487 488 491 getting started with defining derived metrics 344 Scoping Query Editor dialog box 475 476 477 478 479 setting derived metric value types 350 triggering derived metrics 348 Create Registry Variable creating derived metrics 342 Create Threshold 42 361 362 363 364 adding bounds to metric threshold levels 364 creating thresholds 361 defining thresholds 362 selecting metrics and levels in thresholds 363 Derived Metrics Expression Editor dialog box 482 483 484 485 487 488 491 Scoping Query Editor dialog box 475 476 477
265. flocalhost 8080 What should Firefox do with this file Open with WinZip default x k C Do this automatically For files like this From now on Note The appearance of the above dialog box may be different depending on the type and version of your Web browser 3 Save the generated ZIP file to disk The newly generated support bundle appears in the Support Bundle Inventory view Support bunde Inventory showing 1 3 of 3bundes as of Ape 11 2008 14 04 19 Refresh a O i Se support bunde foit 2008 0602 12 00 13 funcie created on Wed Apr O2 120114 EDT 2008 by foghght Age C2 2008 12 01 13 fogkge MX apport bunde fopi 2000 0651 tT Bundle crested on Fri Apr 11 131740 EDT 2006 by fogight Apr 11 2000151740 fogighe 3 Ripper nde Foppa JOI APSA TS My support bunde Age 02 2008 1201 13 fogat R gt es Sant Sateen In addition to the bundle name the Support Bundle Inventory view shows the bundle description the date and time at which it was created and the name of the user who created it Setting Up vFoglight 79 Managing Support Bundles Retrieving Server Support Bundles vFoglight stores support bundles in the lt vfoglight_home gt support lt user_name gt directory on the computer hosting the vFoglight Management Server You can retrieve a copy of an existing support bundle as a file download using the Support Bundle Inventory view immediately after its creation or at a later time To retrieve
266. formation on how to add roles see Creating Roles on page 131 In the Edit Roles dialog box select the roles that you want to assign to the group by clicking the appropriate symbol to the left of the group name e r The role is added or already belongs to this group e The role has been removed from or does not have access to this group e There is no change in role assignment For example to add default Administrator and Security roles to the group ensure that the green plus sign appears to the left of Administrator and Security entries and that the red minus sign appears to the left of the other entries in the Edit Roles dialog box Click Save The Edit Roles dialog box closes and the Manage Groups dashboard refreshes to show the users that you added to the group 126 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Deleting Internal Groups Use the Delete button on the Manage Groups dashboard to delete user accounts from vFoglight You can only delete those groups that you add to vFoglight after the installation Their type appears as Internal on the Manage Users dashboard You cannot delete any of the groups accounts that are included with vFoglight Their type appears as Built In Type Internal Groups that you create Built In ______ Groups that come with vFoglight For more information about the types of groups that exist in vFoglight see Managing Groups on pag
267. formed into a standard format Therefore the state of the rule can change if the data changes For example if a set of monitoring data matches a simple rule s condition the rule enters the Fire state If the next set does not match the condition the rule exits the Fire state and enters the Normal state A tule condition is a type of expression that can be true or false When it evaluates to true the rule is said to fire causing any actions that are associated with the rule or severity level to be performed You can configure a rule to perform one or more actions upon entering or exiting each state When a multiple severity rule fires an alarm also appears in vFoglight For more information see Working with Rules on page 223 Core vFoglight rules Rules in this section e Agent Health State Rule e BSM All Events Rule e Catalyst Data Service Discarding Data Rule e Catalyst Database Space Checking Rule e Catalyst Free Space Checking for Oracle Tablespaces Rule e DiagnosticAgentDiscovery e Email Reports Sample Rule e vFoglight Agent Type License Checker e vFoglight Memory Usage Check Rule e vFoglight Topology Size Limit Reached Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 307 Working with Rules e Remote Agent Manager State Rule e ServiceLevelEvaluation FMSServiceSLP Rule Agent Health State Rule Purpose This rule monitors the health of all agents in the monitoring environment Scope Agent agentID 0 Rule Defin
268. from the action parel Getting Stated Documentation Release Notes List configuration What s New Guide Getting Started Gi suggests staon prints in the Fogi je instalation and satun proceduras and ineettore rting all isencere products You can create and manage casas dawnioad saftwars and documentation and metion and solution je solutiors with other users ack questions and interact wth other Fodight Wolcome to vFeghight Sep 5 2008 17 2514 5 EDT Gettng Stated Tips Navigation panel Display area The Welcome page contains the following elements Action panel e Navigation panel shows the dashboards that the current user can access For more information about users and security in vFoglight see Chapter 3 Managing Users and Security e Display area contains the current dashboard When you log into vFoglight the Welcome to vFoglight page appears in the display area Once you select a dashboard in the navigation panel the display area refreshes to show the selected dashboard e Action panel includes any actions that you can perform in the selected dashboard For complete information about this page see the vFoglight User Guide e If your vFoglight server does not have a valid license one of the following views appears in the display area depending on your user permissions For more information about user permissions and security in vFoglight see Chapter 3 Managin
269. from your virtual environment It creates a dynamic data model while collecting data and uses that data to populate views and dashboards The Administration Module allows you to manage vFoglight data collectors topology and rules that implement your business logic It also lets you manage security by granting user permissions to various vFoglight entities 32 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Getting Started with the Administration Module Each vFoglight module contains a set of dashboards that you can configure and use to monitor your environment in real time You can access them from the navigation pane on the left of the display area v Dashboards Y 3 Administration Alarms Applications Foglight Hosts Operating Systems Reports Services Configuration The Administration module includes a set of dashboards that allow you to manage agents cartridges users and other entities You can find them in the navigation panel under Dashboards gt Administration Administration Administration Agents Cartridges Data Rules amp Notifications Schedules Setup amp Support Tooling Users amp Security The following table lists the nodes that appear in the Administration module common tasks that are associated with each node and references to other chapters in this manual that contain information about each node or task Node Task See Administration View entry points to the Chapter 1 Viewing the Administration
270. fy a condition for one or more of the following severity levels Fatal Critical or Warning When you edit multiple severity rules you write a condition for each specified severity level Unlike simple rules that can have only one condition associated with their Fire state multiple severity rules can have a conditional expression associated with each severity Warning Critical and or Fatal along with an alarm message associated with that conditional expression This is because simple rules do not generate alarms They fire when the condition for their Fire state is met On the other hand multiple severity rules generate alarms each time they enter a severity state As with simple rules the conditions for a multiple severity rule are regularly evaluated against monitoring data All conditions in a rule are evaluated the severity state is set to the highest level for which the condition evaluates to True If none of the conditions are met the severity state is set to Normal If a condition cannot be evaluated because data is missing or unavailable the state is set to Undefined For complete information about simple and multiple severity rules see Defining rule types on page 250 Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 255 Working with Rules Tauns i pree es a L Sen Ost cre t tpe Seem Hoe ane Simple rule ae i lhl I CAC AS a Define Coraiitearn Ama 8 Actors Om ipe
271. g Registry Variables The Manage Registry Variables dashboard allows you to create new registry variables assign values to registry variables and manage registry variables For complete information see the following sections e Working with vFoglight Registry Variables on page 184 e Accessing the Manage Registry Variables dashboard on page 185 e Editing permissions of registry variables on page 188 e Copying registry variables on page 191 e Deleting registry variables on page 193 e Viewing and editing variable definitions on page 194 Accessing the Manage Registry Variables dashboard The Manage Registry Variables dashboard includes a list of the registry variables that exist in your monitoring environment and includes an interface for adding and deleting registry variables To access the Manage Registry Variables dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Rules amp Notifications gt Manage Registry Variables The Manage Registry Variables dashboard appears in the display area 186 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide ed saat Fides ae abe meme ad hee Oe te aged Cota out n A a st itie wa ng A tee g
272. g Users and Security on page 105 About the Administration Module 37 Getting Started with the Administration Module Unlicense Server Yiew Oct 22 2008 11 32 25 AM EDT The server is unlicensed Do You Want to Install a Licence Continue without Installing a Licence Users whose account includes the Administration role Server Licensing Error Oct 21 2008 10 49 07 AM EDT Server Licensing Error Please contact your Administrator Users whose account does not include the Administration role If your user account includes the Administration role in the Unlicensed Server View click Install License In the Manage Licenses dashboard that appears install the license for the vFoglight Management Server For instructions on how to add a license see Chapter 2 Installing Licenses on page 70 If your user account does not include the Administration role contact your vFoglight administrator as indicated in the Server Licensing Error view 6 On the navigation panel under Dashboards expand the Administration module A set of nodes appears under the Administration module 38 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide B Administration Administration Agents Cartridges Data Rules amp Notifications Schedules Setup amp Support Tooling Users amp Security 7 Select a dashboard and look at its contents in the display area For example to look at the Cartridge Inventory dashboard that
273. g a number of rules each of which is scoped to a different EJB instance You know that you need to configure the conditions for many of these Using the Query Language 491 Using the Query Language in Rule Conditions or Derived Metric Expressions rules to perform the same function rate on the same metric passivationCount Instead of doing this manually for each rule you decide to create a derived metric that you can use in all of these rules conditions You use the fields and controls on the Create Derived Metric dashboard Data gt Create Derived Metric to create a derived metric expression that calculates the passivation rate for EJBs After launching the Expression Editor dialog box you open the Function tab and select rate from the Function Name box You then specify the argument for this function in the Arg1 field For example specify the passivation count as an argument for this function by typing passivationCount in the Argl field Then click Insert to insert the function The function and its parameter appear in the Condition field rate passivationCount Using Functions with Conditions and Expressions Derived metric expressions and rule conditions and expressions are matched against monitoring data vFoglight can perform functions on this data Functions cause calculations to be performed on the data specified in conditions and expressions allowing the data to be modified before it is matched Most of the defa
274. g on the newly specified topology type or object In the Default Value area select the Static Value or Registry Variable Reference option and use the Value box to specify the default value Click Add The Create Registry Value Step 2 view appears in the display area Mamaa Pets V miie Poegtitiy Var tabebe Himne tan Registry Vater Type Topology Type Age Detowt Vawe none nare Schedule hians Peepers to ins Valeo Optional If you want the default value to change over time add one or more schedules to the Default Value Performance Calendars table and specify the value for each schedule To add a schedule to the performance calendar complete the following steps a Choose a schedule Click Schedule Name and select a schedule from the list that appears The list reflects the existing schedules For information on how to add schedules to vFoglight see Chapter 8 Using Schedules on page 395 b Specify the value for the newly selected schedule Similar to the global default value there are two options you can specify Static Value and Registry Variable Reference 208 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Use the Value box to specify the value with which you want to replace the default value during the period defined by the schedule c Click Add The schedule and alternate value appear in the Default Value Performance Calendars table as specified Default Yalue Performance Calendars S
275. g three check marks in the Permission columns one for each of the read write and control permissions Permission granted eo ft e Permission denied 3 To edit or delete permissions for a schedule complete the following steps a Click the role or user whose permissions you want to edit Tip Three check marks in the Permissions columns indicate that the role already has permissions assigned to it The Edit Role Permission or Edit User Permission dialog box appears 402 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Edit Role Permission Edit User Permission Role Name Administrator User Name administrator Obvelete ODelete b To edit the permissions ensure that the Edit option is selected and use the Read Write and Control check boxes as required c To delete the permissions select the Delete option d Click Save The dialog box closes and the selected entry refreshes showing the newly edited permissions Copying Schedules Use the Copy Schedule button on the Manage Schedules dashboard to copy a schedule as outlined below To copy a schedule Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Schedules Dashboard on page 397 1 In the Manage Schedules dashboard in the row containing the schedule that you want to copy click the Copy Schedule button The Copy Schedule dialog box appears Using Schedules 403 Managing Schedules The dialog box closes and the Edi
276. g with vFoglight Registry Variables Show columns M Period Begin Time J Period End Time JV Registry Value Apply Cancel Actions Export as CSV Export as PDF Since all of the four columns appear in the Registry Value table by default all of the check boxes that correspond to the columns appear selected b To hide a column in the Show columns dialog box clear the corresponding check box or To show a column clear the corresponding check box For example to display only the time at which the value was set and the value ensure that the Period Begin Time and Registry Value check boxes are selected and clear the Period End Time check box c Click Apply The audit log table refreshes showing only the selected columns Period Begin Time Registry Value 10 14 08 5 06 PM mary abe com 10 18 08 12 00 4M kevin abc com 10 20 08 12 00 AM mary abc com 9 Optional Print the list of audit logs to a file a In the audit log table in the Operation Name Name column click the Show Hide columns button 214 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Show Hide columns Period Begin Time Period End Time Registry Value E 10 14 08 5 06 PM 10 18 08 12 00 AM mary abc com The Show columns dialog box appears Show columns M Period Begin Time MV Period End Time M Registry Value Apply Cancel Actions Export as CSV Export as PDF b Inthe Show Columns dialog box under Actions click one
277. ge Schedules dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Schedules gt Manage Schedules The Manage Schedules dashboard appears in the display area 398 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Manage Schedules Apr 30 2008 9 25 14 AM EDT Showing 1 18 of 18 schedules as of Apr 30 2008 10 25 49 Refresh e Frequent Test Wed Apr 30 2008 10 25 EDT Always Wed Apr 30 2008 10 25 EDT Business hours Wed Apr 30 2008 10 25 EDT Business week Wed Apr 30 2008 10 25 EDT Hourly Wed Apr 30 2008 11 00 EDT End of Day Wed Apr 30 2008 17 00 EDT Beginning of the day Thu May 01 2008 00 00 EDT First day of month Thu May 01 2008 00 00 EDT Beginning of the month Thu May 01 2008 00 00 EDT Daily Off Hours Thu May 01 2008 00 00 EDT Monthly Off Hours Thu May 01 2008 00 00 EDT Daily Database Maintenance Thu May 01 2008 02 00 EDT Start of Day Thu May 01 2008 08 00 EDT Weekends Sat May 03 2008 00 00 EDT First day of week Mon May 05 2008 00 00 EDT Weekly OF Hours Mon May 05 2008 00 00 EDT Beginning of the week Mon May 05 2008 00 00 EDT Quarterly Off Hours Tue Jul 01 2008 00 00 EDT ERE B ERE E m H a B B B B B B B E a B GB B ERE eB Ad
278. ge dialog box appears Confirm Force Password Change x 2 Are you sure you want to run the Force Password Change action on the selected rows Cancel Click OK to confirm the forced password change The Confirm Force Password Change dialog box closes The next time the user attempts to log in they will be prompted to change their password Unlocking Passwords If a user attempts to log in with an incorrect password several times in a row vFoglight locks the user s account You can configure the number of unsuccessful login attempts 116 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide using the Configure Password Settings dashboard For more information see Editing Password Settings on page 137 By default any user passwords that become locked stay in that state for 15 minutes after which vFoglight unlocks them To unlock a user account use the Unlock button on the Manage Users dashboard To unlock a user s password Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Users Dashboard on page 108 If possible advise the user whose password has been locked to wait 15 minutes from the moment the password was locked for vFoglight to unlock the password automatically Complete the following steps a Open the Manage Users dashboard For instructions see Accessing the Manage Users Dashboard on page 108 In the Manage Users dashboard select the row containing the user account who
279. gh the HTTP port while external requests use HTTPS JNDI RMI Port Port for the Remote Method Invocation RMI naming service This setting is defined by the foglight jndi rmi port parameter JNDI JNP Port Port for the bootstrap JNP service This setting is defined by the foglight jndi jnp port parameter JRMP INVOKER PORT Port for the RMI JRMP invoker This setting is defined by the foglight jrmp invoker port parameter ORB IIOP Port Corba ORB port used by the Agent Adapter This setting is defined by the foglight orb port parameter ORB IIOP SSL Port Corba ORB SSL port used by the Agent Adapter This setting is defined by the foglight orb ssl port parameter Setting Up vFoglight 65 Viewing vFoglight Configuration Ports JavaEE Agent Port NexusTalk a G Mirige is not installed Cluster Mcast Port 45566 HA INDI RMI Port 1101 HA INDI INP Port 1100 HA JRMP Invoker Port 4447 HA Pooled Invoker Port 4446 HA INDI UDPGroup Port 1102 HTTP Port 8080 HTTPS SSL Port 8443 INDI RMI Port 1098 INDI INP Port 1099 IRMP INYOKER PORT 4444 ORB IIOP Port 3528 ORB IIOP SSL Port 3529 For information on how to view the information on the vFoglight Configuration dashboard see Accessing the vFoglight Configuration Dashboard on page 67 Default port assignments The following table shows the default port assignments The port numbers are defined in the file lt vfoglight_home gt vFoglight config foglight config Their default valu
280. ght corner The Edit Groups dialog box appears Edit Groups Foglight um Cartridge Developers op Foglight Administrators Foglight Operators oF Foglight Security Administrators Save Cancel Note The dialog box lists default vFoglight groups If you previously added any groups they also appear in the dialog For information on how to add groups see Creating Groups on page 122 3 In the Edit Groups dialog box select the groups to which you want the user to belong by clicking the appropriate symbol to the left of the group name e The user account is added or already belongs to this group The user account has been removed from or does not have access to this group e There is no change in group assignment For example to add a user to the vFoglight Administrators and vFoglight Security Administrators groups ensure that the green plus sign appears to the left of the vFoglight Administrators and vFoglight Security Administrators entries and that the red minus sign appears to the left of the other groups in the Edit Groups dialog box 4 Click Save 114 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide The Edit Groups dialog box closes and the Manage Users dashboard refreshes to show the groups that you added to the user account Changing Passwords Use the Change Password button on the Manage Users dashboard to change a user s password as outlined below To change a user s password
281. gistry variable see Editing Registry Variables on page 200 Important In some situations you need to create or receive email alerts that contain a URL to the browser interface To ensure the URL points to the computer on which the vFoglight Management Server is running ensure that the CATALYST_URL registry variable contains the correct computer name and port number For example http MyHost MyDomain com 8080 Adding actions to rules An action is a particular operation that is performed when a rule enters and or exits a state for example when a rule condition is met You can associate multiple actions can be with simple rules as well as with each severity level in a multiple severity rule You can add actions to a rule after it is created Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 287 Working with Rules To add an action to a rule Note This procedure continues from Defining conditions for data driven and time driven rules on page 263 1 Inthe Conditions and Actions tab simple rules or Conditions Alarms amp Actions tab multiple severity rules open the Action tab The Action tab appears in the display area Condition Severity Level Variables Action Name Action Type Desorption Ernalt ton Erter gt Entering Action Type Exiting Action lt cAgd Description Delete Selected 2 Define the action type by selecting one of the following Action Type options on
282. gistry variables 191 Index 519 rule conditions 276 298 rules 231 schedules 402 create agent instances 504 derived metrics 343 groups 122 registry variables 195 retention policies 388 roles 131 rules 247 script agent instances 457 server support bundles 77 thresholds 361 users 111 define alarm and action behavior 302 rule conditions 263 271 rule types 251 rule level variables 304 schedule items that occur daily 422 schedule items thatoccur monthly 433 schedule items thatoccuronce 416 schedule items that occur periodically 419 schedule items that occur weekly 427 schedule items that occur yearly 440 delete derived metrics 341 internal groups 126 internal roles 134 internal users 117 registry variables 193 retention policies 382 rules 234 schedule items 414 schedules 404 secondary properties 177 thresholds 359 delete licenses 74 deploy agent packages 503 520 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide script agent packages 455 disable cartridges 158 rules 234 download agent components 162 164 edit default retention policy periods 387 derived metrics 341 directory settings 144 lists in secondary properties 175 password settings 137 primary type specific properties 172 role groups 132 rule definitions 245 schedules 407 script agent properties 464 thresholds 360 variable definitions 194 enable cartridges 157 rules 235 enable collection of data with older timestamps 392 filter audit logs 87 forc
283. glight Administration and Configuration Guide f Building was successful Continue to agent listing or build more scriptable agents Mowe to Agent Listing Build More Agents 6 Inthe Build Script Agent dialog box click Move to Agent Listing The Agent Status area appears in the Build Script Agent dashboard Mtd Script Agere Ang I2 2008 hi5 AM DOT Agent Status showing 1 4 Of 4 agents as of Aug 12 2008 11 13 34 telre tordt2991 prod que OSCartridga Appaic SPI AppMonitor 5 2 3 x e tor012991 prod que OscartridgesLogFil Spi Log ilter 5 2 3 x e tor0129 prod que OSCartridges webm SPI WebMonitor 5 2 3 x sa tor012991 prod que My_Windows_Systei SPI Windows _Systerr 5 2 3 x ags Star Data Collection Activate Oeacivets From here you can proceed to Deploying Script Agent Packages on page 454 Deploying Script Agent Packages When you successfully upload the agent script and build the agent package you can deploy that package to the vFoglight Agent Manager Package deployment is identical to the process you use to deploy any other agent package One thing you need to pay attention to is the package name and version use the same name and version number that you specify when uploading and building the package Working with vF oglight Tooling 455 Building Script Agents Use the Agent Status area in the Build Script Agent dashboard to deploy a script agent Alternatively you can d
284. gt config foglight config file and open it for editing 2 In the foglight config file locate the following line of code Uncomment the following lines starting with optionO to adjust VM settings Following the above line is a list of VM options some of which may or may not be used A default installation does not have any of the VM options set foglight vm optionO foglight vm optionl Po eia foglight vm option99 Working with Data 393 Enabling the Collection of Data with Older Timestamps 3 Find an unused VM option and set it to a desired length in milliseconds a Remove the comment marker from the beginning of the line b Insert the foglight data_service max_past_timestamp_delta option and the length of the store and forward period between the quotation marks For example to set the store and forward period to 8 hours you should set the foglight data_service max_past_timestamp_delta option to 28 800 000 milliseconds 8 hours 8 hours 60 minutes 60 seconds 1 000 28 800 000 milliseconds For example foglight vm option0 Dfoglight data_service max_past_timestamp_delta 28800000 4 Save your changes Important In order for the changes to take effect you need to restart the vFoglight Management Server 394 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Using Schedules This chapter introduces you to vFoglight schedules and provides information on how to create a
285. hat includes the newly defined command action it writes the information to the output file Here is a sample of what that output may look like jorcl PUBLIC 19 0 root localhost melscv w2k3 fdb melsales dev mel au qsft For complete information on how to add actions to rules see Defining actions on page 278 326 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Working with Data This chapter introduces you to vFoglight data management entities on how to create and manage these entities It contains the following sections Note In order to complete each of the procedures in this chapter your user account must belong to a group with the Administration role For more information about users groups and roles see Managing Users and Security on page 105 This chapter contains the following sections About Data Management in VF OG IQNE csssscssessssssssssssssrssssssssssrsssseserssssssssarssssansrssensesssneey 328 Adding Topology TYG scccscceesecetcctescesstessesscesntescecestetessessensateretsecanbescesersneesaedenericesecbaneetnnieiy 329 Working with Derived Metrics cscsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssrssssssssssrsssssnsesssussssserssssasessansessensesss 332 Working with THES holis isis niece anki adeninienniiin A 353 Managing Retention Policies s ssssssssssserssssrssrenssssrnriennssnrntiennnnnnnnrenansnninrennnnnninrrnnnnsninrrnnnnannnnre 372 Enabling the Collection of Data with Older Timestamp
286. he Range of Occurrence area select the No End option The Range of Occurrence area refreshes no longer showing the controls for specifying the end date 422 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Range of Occurrence No End CEnd By Date 5 Save the changes to the schedule item New schedules In the lower right corner click Add Existing schedules In the lower right corner click Save The Schedule Items table refreshes showing the newly added schedule item Create hedule Schedule Name and Description Details of Schedule Schedule Added Step 3 Create Schedule Schedule Added The following schodule was successfully added to the syster Schedule Name My Schedule Description Comments Schedule Itens Net Scheaused Tene Recurrence Pattern Range of Ocowrence Ovteds Tene Range Tha Aug 14 2000 10 2 29001 Penodca Und Dy Aug 16 2000 0000 Every C200 hours Drs NIA Edit Schodulo Go to Schedule List 6 Add one or more schedule items if required For details see Adding or Removing Schedule Items on page 410 To define a schedule item that occurs daily Note This procedure continues from Adding or Removing Schedule Items on page 410 1 Inthe Recurrence Pattern area select the Periodical option The view refreshes showing a set of controls that allow you to define a schedule item that occurs on a daily basis Using Schedules 423 Creating Schedules Schedule Name My
287. he list of cartridges whose name matches the filter pattern Cartridge Inventory Sep 25 2008 thuldr48 AM EDT Install Cartridge amp File on Local Computer Browse C File on Server F F Enable on install Inston Showing 1 3 of 3 Cartridges as of Sep 24 2008 11 10 35 nefrech Osrtiostaodet Windows 5 2 4 B B OS Widows System 5 2 4 Bo carrida WindowsXP 5 2 4 Uninstall Selected Enable Selected Disable Selected aj hd To clear the filters click Clear Filters 154 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide The Cartridge Inventory dashboard refreshes showing the list of all cartridges Cartridge Inventory Sep 25 2008 10 19 48 AM EDT Install Cartridge File on Local Computer Browse File on Server Enable on install Install Cartridge Showing 1 12 of 12 Cartridges as of Sep 24 2008 11 10 35 Refresh Installed Cartridges v Clear Filters B FelaM 5 2 4 B OS Apacheswr 5 2 4 B OS AppMonitor 5 2 4 B OS Common 5 2 4 B OS HostModel Windows 5 2 4 B OS LosFilter 5 2 4 B OS NetMonitor 5 2 4 B OS OnlineHelp 5 2 4 B ose 5 2 4 OS Webmonitor 5 2 4 B OS Windows System 5 2 4 i E Uninstall Selected Enable Selected Disable Selected From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures Installing Cartridges on page 155 Enabling Cartridges on page 157 Disabling Cartridges on page 158 Uninstalling Cartridges on
288. he relationship between roles and dashboards Note The Built In roles cannot be deleted vFoglight comes with the following Built In roles e Administrator This role enables a user to access the Administration Module the Web Console web xml hidden Administration URLs and the JMX Console An Administrator can manipulate agents rules derived metrics registry variables cartridges types and scripts The only limitation for Administrators is that they cannot access or edit the Users and Security dashboard e Advanced Operator This role builds on the Operator role by adding the ability to access build oriented dashboards such as the Service Builder Application Builder and the Report Builder where users can add manage and manipulate scheduled reports e Cartridge Developer This role extends the Dashboard Designer role by allowing the user to modify core dashboards and system modules e Console User This role enables a user to access the Web Console web xml only It is the base level locked down read only role Users assigned this role will not have access to core dashboards e Dashboard Designer This role builds on the Dashboard User role by adding the ability to access all dashboard tools such as Definitions Data Sources and 128 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide the Schema Browser This role is for users who design dashboards using these advanced dashboard tools Dashboard User This role is simil
289. headings as required To filter the list of groups use one or more of the following boxes at the top of the Manage Users list e Name Enter the group name for which you want to filter e Users Enter the user name for which you want to filter e Roles Enter the role name for which you want to filter Type Enter the type name for which you want to filter For example to list only the groups whose name starts with Foglight in the Name box type Foglight The Manage Groups list refreshes showing the list of groups whose name matches the filter pattern Managing Users and Security 121 Managing Groups Manage Groupe Manage Groups Showing 1 3 of 3 Groups as of May 30 2008 13 08 52 Fogigm rie oo eee 8 Foglight Administrators foglight operator Administrator Advanced Operator Conso yilt in Foglight Operators foglight operator Console User Operator Foglight Security Admini foglight operator Security Delete To clear the filters click Clear Filters The Manage Groups list refreshes showing the list of all groups Manage Growps Manage Groups Showing 1 4 of 4 Groups as of May 30 2008 13 08 52 Ce eee Cartridge Developers fogtight operator Cartridge Developer Console User Sulitin Foglight Administrators fogtight operator Administrator Advanced Operator Conso Guilt In Foglight Operators foglight operator Console User Operator built in Foglight Security Admini foatight operator Secur
290. hes showing the newly added variable Rule ariables Name Expression Message Type vari scope get agent host iname Expression Delete Selected To delete a rule level variable from the list select the row containing that variable in the Rule Variables pane and click Delete Selected Core vFoglight Rules The vFoglight Management Server includes some built in rules that monitor the health of your application server environment Overview of rules vFoglight allows you to create flexible rules that can be applied to complex interrelated data from multiple sources within your distributed system You can associate several 306 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide different actions with a rule configure a rule so that it does not fire repeatedly and associate a rule with schedules to define when it should and should not be evaluated Different types of data can be used in rules including registry variables raw metrics derived metrics and topology object properties There are two types of rules in vFoglight simple rules and multiple severity rules A simple rule has a single condition and can be in one of three states Fire Undefined or Normal A multiple severity rule can have up to five severity levels Undefined Fatal Critical Warning and Normal Rule conditions are regularly evaluated against monitoring data metrics and topology object properties collected from your monitored environment and trans
291. how the permissions for each vFoglight user or role Permission granted Permission denied Permissions not assigned Not assigned To add permissions for a schedule Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Schedules Dashboard on page 397 1 Inthe Manage Schedules dashboard in the row containing the schedule whose permissions you want to edit click the Edit Permissions for Schedule button 19 The Edit Permissions for Schedule area appears in the Manage Schedules dashboard 400 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Manage Schedules Age 30 2008 9 25 34 AM EDT Edt Permissions for Schedule First day of wosk Schedule Name First dary of week Permissions Read Witte Cortrel 2 To add permissions to a schedule complete the following steps a Click the role or user to which you want to assign permissions Tip The Not Assigned icons in the Permissions columns indicate that the role has no permissions assigned to it The Add Role Permission or Add User Permission dialog box appears Add Role Permission Role Name Advanced Operator VRead Murite MEControl Using Schedules 401 Managing Schedules Add User Permission User Name demo MRead Mr ite MEontrol b Inthe dialog box that appears use the Read Write and Control check boxes to assign permissions as required and click Save The dialog box closes and the selected entry refreshes showin
292. hreshold M freeMemory Threshold Topology Type Metric i reeMemory Permissions Read Viie Conirol Roles 2 To add permissions to a threshold complete the following steps a Click the role or user to which you want to assign permissions Tip The Not Assigned icons in the Permissions columns indicate that the role does not have permissions assigned to it The Add Role Permission or Add User Permission dialog box appears 358 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Add Role Permission Add User Permission Role Name Advanced Operator User Name demo VRead VRead hr ite Mirite icontrol iControl b Inthe dialog box that appears use the Read Write and Control check boxes to assign permissions as required and click Save The dialog box closes and the selected entry refreshes showing three check marks in the Permission columns one for each of the read write and control permissions Permission granted Sf GF e Permission denied 3 To edit or delete permissions for a threshold complete the following steps a Click the role or user whose permissions you want to edit Tip Three check marks in the Permissions columns indicate that the role already has permissions assigned to it The Edit Role Permission or Edit User Permission dialog box appears Working with Data 359 Working with Thresholds Edit Role Permission Edit User Permission Role Name Administrator User Name a
293. ia August jf2o08 End By Date Eng Timefhh mm 00 00 Note In the Range of Occurrence area the No End option appears disabled while the End By Date option is enabled and selected This is because a schedule item that occurs once must have an end date a Use the End Date boxes to specify the day month and year of the start date Tip The Day box accepts the values between 1 and 31 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 31 negative values are not accepted Alternatively click the Calendar button on the right and use the calendar controls that appear to specify the end date 418 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide August 2008 2007 2008 2003 Ok Cancel b Use the End Time hh mm boxes to specify the hour and minute of the end time Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 24 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 24 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted 4 Save the changes to the schedule item e New schedules In the lower right corner click Add e Existing schedules In the lower right corner click Save The Schedule Items table refreshes showing the newly added schedule item Create Scbedute Arey 1D 2008 S97 PM EDT hedule Name and Description Detalls of S
294. iable view 194 200 218 219 281 282 285 286 Edit Retention Policy Period dialog box 386 387 388 390 Edit Role Permission dialog box 190 230 338 358 401 Edit Roles dialog box 124 125 Edit Rule view 241 242 243 244 245 323 Edit Schedule Add Schedule Item view 412 Edit Schedule view 403 405 407 412 413 414 Edit Threshold view 360 Edit User Permission dialog box 190 230 338 358 401 Edit Users dialog box 123 124 Expression Editor dialog box 482 483 484 485 487 488 491 expressions and functions 491 F Federation Configuration view 58 Federation view 49 56 57 functions using with conditions 491 using with expressions 491 G groups assigning roles to groups 124 creating 122 deleting internal groups 126 editing role groups 132 editing users in groups 123 managing 118 accessing Manage Groups dashboard 119 H how to access Build Script Agent dashboard 451 Cartridge Inventory dashboard 150 Configure Directory Services dashboard 140 Create Schedule dashboard 408 anage Groups dashboard 119 anage Registry Variables dashboard 185 anage Retention Policies dashboard 379 anage Roles dashboard 129 anage Rules dashboard 225 anage Schedules dashboard 397 Manage Support Bundles dashboard 76 anage Users dashboard 108 Script Editor dashboard 468 View Audit Information dashboard 83 access Manage Licenses dashboard 69 activate script agent instances 457 add actions to rules 287 metrics to
295. ical Support Penang Malaysia 604 633 4966 Country Code 673 Customer Service Penang Malaysia 604 633 4888 Transaction Sales Penang Malaysia 604 633 4955 Canada North York Online Order Status Web Address www dell ca ostatus Ontario AutoTech automated Hardware and Warranty International Access Code 011 Support Customer Service Home Home Office Small Business Medium Large Business Government Education Hardware Warranty Phone Support Computers for Home Home Office Computers for Small Medium Large Business Government Printers Projectors Televisions Handheld Digital Jukebox and Wireless Sales Home and Home Office Sales Small Business Medium Large Business Government Spare Parts and Extended Service support ca dell com toll free 1 800 247 9362 toll free 1 800 847 4096 toll free 1 800 906 3355 toll free 1 800 387 5757 toll free 1 800 847 4096 toll free 1 800 387 5757 1 877 335 5767 toll free 1 800 999 3355 toll free 1 800 387 5752 toll free 1 800 387 5755 1 866 440 3355 Cayman Islands E Mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales la techsupport dell com 1 877 262 5415 Chile Santiago Country Code 56 City Code 2 Web Address E Mail Address Sales and Customer Support www dell com cl la techsupport dell com toll free 1230 020 4823 China Xiamen Country Code 86 City Code 592 Technical Support Web Address Technical Sup
296. ick Install License A message appears indicating that the license installation was successful 72 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Install License License was successfully installed Once the vFoglight Management Server reads the license file it stores it internally in the database and no longer requires the physical file Viewing License Capabilities The Licensed Capability Summary area provides an overview of the licensed capabilities currently enabled on the vFoglight Management Server Each capability has an icon that is associated with it 5 Cartridge Installation Configuration Management Fe Data Archiving Trending A High Availability a LDAP Integration i Performance Calendars Request Trace Analysis Additionally Cartridge License Name in the same area lists the cartridges that are licensed with your current vFoglight license Alternatively you can review licensing capabilities using the 1icense list command that comes with the fglemd interface For details see the Command Line Reference Guide Setting Up vFoglight 73 Managing Licenses To view license capabilities Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Licenses Dashboard on page 69 1 Inthe Manage Licenses dashboard in the area that lists installed licenses select a license whose capabilities you want to view The Licensed Capability Summary area lists the capabilities of the selected license and
297. if applicable and the range of occurrence as required Create tihedube Schedule Name and Description Details of Schedule Schedule Added Step 2 Create Schedule Details of Schedue O Schedule Mame Description Comments Start Date 1 Asgunt ie Start Timefhtimmy ff Recurrence Pattern Onte edule 3 Range of Occurrence Cho End tnd Date fia August 0 yl F End By 0ste End Timejhh zmm 05 oo Beck Add Cencet For complete information on how to define a schedule item see Defining Schedule Items on page 415 To add a schedule item to a newly created schedule that already contains schedule items Note This procedure continues from Defining Schedule Items on page 415 1 Open the schedule for editing In the Step 3 Create Schedule Schedule Added view click Edit Schedule 412 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Crone hw tate Setette Name and Desorption Step 3 Create Schedule Schedule Added The tnhowing schedule een tuccenstety adtad te the syite Schedule Name My Schedule 3 Description Comments Sedersttin Deme fant screaam Tee Aeae e hater Ramga of Our iam Ta Pore eed og 1 meor om fr Oy Ang ta 28 OO fog 1 8 eg 14 GOD ma C Eaa Senodute Yoo to Schodute Lat The Edit Schedule view appears In the Edit Schedule view click Add Schedule Item in the lower right corner Edit Schedule My Schedule 3 Schedule Name ii SGeaie3 Sav
298. ight Tooling The vFoglight Management Server collects data from your monitored system and organizes that data into a topology model Each topology model is comprised of nodes The nodes and their relationship in the topology model represent the logical and physical structure of the entities in your monitored environment Furthermore each topology model includes a set of topology types to describe the nodes or topology objects in that model The topology types that exist in your environment depend on the nature and complexity of your monitoring environment and the type of vFoglight cartridges and their agents that you use to collect information from monitored hosts In addition to a wide offering of vFoglight cartridges for a number of different environment types your business scenario may require additional custom agents vFoglight allows you to add one or more script based custom agents to address your unique monitoring needs For more information see Building Script Agents on page 448 Furthermore vFoglight uses the query language that allows you to drill through the topology model and select topology objects as required You interact with the query language when specifying rule conditions derived metrics and other vFoglight entities You can take advantage of the query language to select a range of topology objects and run a script against those objects to retrieve instant results For more information see Retrieving Data with
299. ight and use the calendar controls that appear to specify the start date August 2008 29 30 31 lie 12 13 14 49 20 24 2 7 2 Daa 2007 2008 2009 _Ok Cancel Tip The Day box accepts the values between 1 and 31 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 31 negative values are not accepted The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 24 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted Using Schedules 427 Creating Schedules To have the schedule item recurring at the recurrence pattern specified in step 4 without an end date in the Range of Occurrence area select the No End option The Range of Occurrence area refreshes no longer showing the controls for specifying the end date Range of Occurrence No End CEnd By Date 6 Save the changes to the schedule item New schedules In the lower right corner click Add Existing schedules In the lower right corner click Save The Schedule Items table refreshes showing the newly added schedule item Create Schedule Aug 4 2008 110401 AM EDT Edit Schedule My Schedule Changes have been saved Schedule Name My Schedule Save View Schedule Desc ription C omments Schedule Items Neat
300. iguration Guide Property Data Type Description createdTime Date Specifies the time at which the event is created report Report Contains an object of the Report type For complete information about creating and scheduling reports in vFoglight see the vFoglight User Guide In addition to the ReportGeneratedEvent object properties you can reference the Report object properties when writing rule conditions for a rule triggered by a report generation event The following table lists the Report object properties their data types and descriptions Property Data Type Description dateRun Date The date on which the report is run emailRecipients String The email recipients to which the report is to be sent errorMessage String An error message associated with the report isEnabled Boolean Specifies whether the report generation is enabled name String The report name numResultsRetained Integer The number of records in that are retained in the report reportid String The report ID scheduleld String The ID of the schedule that is associated with the report Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 271 Working with Rules Property DataType Description scheduleName String The name of the schedule that is associated with the report size Integer The report size in bytes templateld String The ID of the template used to create the report templateName String The name of the template used to create the
301. igure Directory Services 43 139 140 144 145 editing directory settings 142 Configure Directory Services dashboard accessing 140 Configure Password Services 43 Configure Password Settings 116 135 136 137 138 accessing 136 editing password settings 137 Manage Groups 41 112 118 119 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 132 accessing 119 assigning roles to groups 124 Create Group dialog box 122 creating groups 122 deleting internal groups 126 Edit Roles dialog box 124 125 Edit Users dialog box 123 124 editing users in groups 123 Manage Roles 41 124 127 128 129 131 132 133 134 accessing 129 Create Role dialog box 131 132 creating users 131 deleting internal roles 133 Edit Groups dialog box 132 133 editing role groups 132 Manage Users 41 107 108 109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 123 126 134 140 115 accessing 108 adding users to groups 112 Change Password dialog box 114 115 changing user passwords 114 Confirm Delete dialog box 117 118 Confirm Force Password Change dialog box 115 Confirm Unlock dialog box 116 Create User dialog box 111 112 creating users 111 Edit Groups dialog box 113 114 Users amp Security node in navigation panel 10 33 109 118 119 129 136 140 using functions with conditions 491 with expressions 491 using the query language in conditions 480 in scoping queries 474 V vFoglight Agent Manager IDs 506 vFoglight Agent Manager support bundles 75 vFoglight configur
302. ing 158 downloading agent components 163 enabling 157 installing 149 155 accessing Cartridge Inventory dashboard 150 managing 149 accessing Cartridge Inventory dashboard 150 uninstalling 159 Cartridges dashboards 147 about 148 Cartridge Inventory 39 45 46 149 150 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 accessing 150 Cartridge Confirmation dialog box 159 160 161 disabling cartridges 158 enabling cartridges 157 installing cartridges 155 uninstalling cartridges 159 View Cartridge Details view 152 Components for Download 39 161 162 163 164 accessing 161 downloading agentcomponents 163 Cartridges node in navigation panel 10 11 33 150 162 Change Password dialog box 114 115 Check Registry Value dashboard 209 Show columns dialog box 212 213 214 View Registry Variable view 209 210 211 212 Check Registry Value node in navigation panel 209 client support bundles viewing content 498 collecting data with older timestamps 392 Components for Download dashboard 39 161 162 163 164 accessing 161 downloading agent components 163 Components for Download node in navigation panel 162 Condition Editor dialog box 318 319 482 483 484 485 487 488 490 conditions and functions 491 specifying 481 using the query language 480 Configure Directory Services accessing 140 Configure Directory Services dashboard 43 139 140 144 145 editing directory settings 142 Configure Directory Services node in navigation p
303. ing License Capabilities on page 72 Next the cartridge must be enabled Enabling a cartridge causes its components to be available for use by vFoglight Using the vFoglight Administration Module you can cause a cartridge to be automatically enabled upon installation or to be enabled after installation When a cartridge has been installed and enabled all of the components included in the cartridge are part of the Management Server 150 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Use the Cartridge Inventory dashboard to view information about installed cartridges and to install enable disable and remove cartridges For more information on how to use the Cartridge Inventory dashboard refer to the following sections e Accessing the Cartridge Inventory Dashboard on page 150 e Installing Cartridges on page 155 e Enabling Cartridges on page 157 e Disabling Cartridges on page 158 e Uninstalling Cartridges on page 159 Accessing the Cartridge Inventory Dashboard The Cartridge Inventory dashboard contains controls for installing enabling disabling and uninstalling cartridges as well as for viewing information about the installed cartridges To access the Cartridge Inventory dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 or Viewing the Administration Dashboard on page 39 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open
304. ing the cartridges that you want to remove 2 Click the Uninstall Selected button in the lower left corner of the Cartridge Inventory dashboard The Cartridge Confirmation dialog box appears Cartridge Confirmation Are you sure you want to uninstall the Following cartridges Virtual Wware Version 5 2 3 The list of cartridges that appears in the Cartridge Confirmation dialog box reflects your cartridge selection Managing Cartridges 161 Downloading Agent Components 3 In the Cartridge Confirmation dialog box click OK The Cartridge Confirmation dialog box closes If the operation is successful a message appears above the cartridge list Requested operation was successfully completed 4 Inthe Cartridge Inventory dashboard observe the list of cartridges The cartridges that you removed no longer appear in the list Downloading Agent Components There are two types of agent components that you can download using this dashboard e Executable agent installers Some cartridges include one or more executable agent installers The agent installers that are available for download are listed on the Components for Download dashboard You can use the controls on this page to download agent installers from the Management Server to a remote machine Caution Read and follow any documentation provided with the agent installers e Agent packages Other types of cartridges include agent packages that can be deployed and activated using
305. installed on the Management Server Note If you are installing a new version of a cartridge vFoglight will detect and automatically disable the older version Use the Disable Selected button on the Cartridge Inventory dashboard to disable one or more cartridges as outlined below To disable a cartridge Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Cartridge Inventory Dashboard on page 150 1 In the Cartridge Inventory dashboard in the cartridge table select one or more enabled cartridges that you want to disable Managing Cartridges 159 Installing and Managing Cartridges The Status column contain icons that indicate if a cartridge is enabled jg enabled pending dependency partially enabled g or disabled Tip To select multiple cartridges press the CTRL or SHIFT key while selecting the rows containing the cartridges that you want to disable 2 Click the Disable Selected button at the bottom of the Cartridge Inventory dashboard The Cartridge Confirmation dialog box appears Cartridge Confirmation Are you sure you want to disable the Following cartridges Virtual ware Verson 5 2 3 The list of cartridges that appears in the Cartridge Confirmation dialog box reflects your cartridge selection 3 In the Cartridge Confirmation dialog box click OK The Cartridge Confirmation dialog box closes If the operation is successful a message appears above the cartridge list Requested operati
306. internal user Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Users Dashboard on page 108 1 Inthe Manage Users dashboard select the row containing the user account that you want to delete 2 Click the Delete button at the bottom of the Manage Users dashboard The Confirm Delete dialog box appears asking you to confirm the delete operation 118 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Confirm Delete x p Are you sure you want to run the Delete action on the selected rows Cancel 3 In the Confirm Delete dialog box click OK The dialog box closes and the Manage Users dashboard refreshes 4 Observe the Manage Users dashboard The user account that you deleted no longer appears in the list Managing Groups A group can contain users Roles are assigned to groups In turn a role that is assigned to a group is also assigned to each member of that group There are three types of roles in vFoglight Internal Include the groups that are created using the Manage Groups dashboard after the installation Built In Include the groups that come with vFoglight They are as follows Cartridge Developers Allows the users to modify core dashboards and system modules Foglight Administrators Enables the users to access all of the dashboards that come with the Administration module with the exception of the Users amp Security dashboards Additionally it enables the users to use build ori
307. ions or Derived Metric Expressions on page 480 for detailed information about the query language in vFoglight e Alarm Message vFoglight generates an alarm message when the conditional expression associated with a multiple severity rule evaluates to True An alarm message is typically a text string that can include other severity level variables displaying dynamically supplied data about your monitored system Important Simple rules do not generate alarms They fire when the condition for their Fire state is met On the other hand multiple severity rules generate alarms each time they enter a severity state For information on how to write conditions see the following sections e Expression scope on page 262 e Copying conditions in multiple severity rules on page 276 e Defining conditions for data driven and time driven rules on page 263 e Defining conditions for event driven rules on page 267 Expression scope Expressions and messages can be set with one of two distinct scopes e Rule scoped expressions and messages They can be referenced by the actions set for the Fire and Undefined states of a simple rule and for all severity levels Fatal Critical Warning Normal and Undefined in a multiple severity rule Note Itis a best practice that rule scoped expressions are used until there is a need for more finely scoped expressions e Severity scoped expressions and messages They can only be referenced by th
308. ions tab simple rules If you are defining a simple rule the Conditions amp Actions tab opens If you are defining a multiple severity rule the Conditions Alarms amp Actions tab opens 258 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide CT zean wow s anos soos wee D ees L lt _ ea ire nee ee Note For more information about rule severity levels see Adding severity level variables on page 256 Choose the alarm level for which you want to define the severity level variables If you are defining a simple rule click Fire If you are defining a multiple severity rule click one of the following bars e Fatal e Critical e Warning A pane containing the severity level condition definitions expands under the severity bar with the Condition tab open Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry Working with Rules 259 Condition SIO iv Simple rule 1 Copy condtion atenm fron Copy variablesJactons trom ERDOEROORooo Aly 3 Open the Severity Level Variables tab Multiple severity rule The Severity Level Variables tab appears in the severity level definition pane 260 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide everty Level vanati Severity Level Variaties Type ane Evtretnenades tage Type Name Expression Message 4 Define the type of the severity variable
309. irectory NearestLDAP ldap ldapserver example com 389 server Secondary ldap backupldapserver example com 389 LDAP server URL Distinguished The distinguished The distinguished name CN foglight_a name of the name DN of the DN of the service dmin service service account for account for further user O Services account further user searching searching or a special account ___anonymous__ Password User defined LDAP query CN uid CN prefix LDAP query OU Employees DC MyCompany DC com O novell suffix The scope s 0OU Groups DC MyCompany DC com O novell to search for groups Managing Users and Security 143 Configuring Directory Services Setting Active Directory Sun Java Systems Novell Directory Server eDirectory OpenLDAP The second OU Dynamic N A group Groups DC MyCompany DC com namespace The third N A group namespace The LDAP OU People DC example DC com o novell context for user searching Role attribute name cn istweb ID Is Role false attribute a DN User alias sAMAccountName uid uniqueld attribute ID Userattribute member uniqueMember CN foglight_a ID to search dmin for groups O services Match on true User DN JAAS com quest nitro service security auth spi NitroExte LoginModule ndedLdapLoginModule Name Name of fgl web console J AAS security domain 144
310. ired To access the View Audit Information dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Setup amp Support gt View Audit Information The View Audit Information dashboard appears in the display area showing the Zonar and a list of audit logs underneath 84 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide iew Audit Information Tuesday October 21 2008 9 26 AM 1 26 PM 4 0 hours Time Range 10 21 08 1 10 PM 10 21 08 1 01 PM 10 21 08 1 26 PM 10 21 08 1 10 PM 10 21 08 1 10 PM User Name Service Name foglight foglight foglight foglight foglight SecurityService SecurityService SecurityService SecurityService SecurityService DEGIA AM ste Theta taeadem Operation Name Name authenticate Logged out authenticate Login OK authenticate Login OK httpsession Session Created httpsession Session Ended The Zonar displays the current date time and time range and allows you to modify the current time range The list below the Zonar displays the audit logs that the vFoglight Management Server records within the time range specified in the Zonar For more information about the Zonar and its functionality see the vF
311. irst you need to write an agent script using a particular syntax upload it using the Build Script Agent dashboard The upload process automatically builds the agent package Next you deploy that agent package to the vFoglight Agent Manager create one or more agent instances as required and edit agent properties if required For complete instructions see the following sections e Looking at the Script Syntax on page 449 e Accessing the Build Script Agent Dashboard on page 451 e Uploading Agent Scripts and Building Agent Packages on page 452 e Deploying Script Agent Packages on page 454 e Creating and Activating Script Agent Instances on page 457 e Editing Script Agent Properties on page 464 Looking at the Script Syntax When writing a script to create a custom agent use the following syntax TABLE table_name START SAMPLE PERIOD field_name type id obs unit value END_SAMPLE_ PERIOD END_TABLE Note The ellipsis indicates that you can repeat the level A Canonical Data Transformation CDT dynamically converts the output data into the appropriate format such as topology types and observations that exist in the collection model This mechanism dictates the syntax of the line of the code that specifies the field 450 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide data immediately following the START_SAMPLE_PERIOD command as shown in the above syntax block STAR
312. is aggregated Policies can be set at an object level however retention policies also adhere to the object inheritance capabilities If a policy has not been explicitly assigned to an object it inherits a value from a higher level in the model The top level object is TopologyObject The policy that is applied to TopologyOb ject and therefore any object which does not have explicitly assigned policies is as follows Policy Translates to Age 15 minutes After 15 minutes store 15 minute average data to Generation 1 where they are stored for three days Roll up 15 minutes Age 4 hours Data older than four hours is eligible for roll up they are actually only rolled up once a day during the database roll Roll up 1 hour up to one hour averages and persisted into Generation 2 where they are stored for 14 days Age 5 days Data older than 5 days old is eligible for Roll up they are actually only rolled up once per day during the database Roll up 4 hours roll up to four hour averages and persisted into Generation 3 indefinitely The illustration below shows the interaction between the TopologyObject retention policy and the default generation definitions 376 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Default Retention Default Generations Policies Cache Data until age of first Agent collects data retention policy P1 Average data older than15mto15m G1 Store for 3 days regardless o
313. is empty a complete scoping query including the topology type you selected will be inserted into it 4 Inthe Scoping Query Editor dialog box click Insert Query The Scoping Query Editor dialog box closes and the scoping query or scoping query segment appears in the box immediately below the Topology Type and Property boxes 5 Validate the scope by clicking the Validate Scope button on the right If the scope is valid a confirmation message appears above the Topology Type box while the name of the newly edited expression appears at the bottom with the topology type instance referenced with its uniqueID property Filtering through topology type properties When you specify a topology type you can select an object instance of that type using the type s property values as a filter and insert the instances whose properties match the filter into the scoping query using the Scoping Query Editor dialog box 478 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide To specify topology type properties Note This procedure continues from Restricting the scope to topology objects on page 476 1 In the Scoping Query Editor dialog box click the Filter tab The Filter tab opens in the Scoping Query Editor dialog box allowing you to create a logical expression containing up to three comparison expressions that are connected with AND or OR logical operators Scoping Query Editor Windows _System_
314. ist of cartridges use one or more of the following boxes above the component table e Name Type the component name for which you want to filter e Cartridge Name Type the cartridge name for which you want to filter e Component Name Type the component name for which you want to filter e OS Type the OS name for which you want to filter e Architecture Type the architecture name for which you want to filter e Installer Type Click and select All Installers or Manual Installers as required For example to list only the agent components that can be installed on monitored hosts that are running AIX in the OS box type aix The Components for Download dashboard refreshes showing the list of components whose name matches the filter pattern To clear the filters click Clear Filters The Components for Download dashboard list refreshes showing the list of all components From here you can proceed to Downloading Components on page 163 Downloading Components Use the Name column on the Components for Download dashboard to download agent components as outlined below 164 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide To download an agent component Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Components for Download Dashboard on page 161 1 In the Components for Download dashboard click the Name column of the row containing the agent component that you want to download Your Web browser dis
315. it Derived Metric view 342 Edit Role Permission dialog box 338 Edit User Permission dialog box 338 Expression Editor dialog box 482 483 484 485 487 488 491 Scoping Query Editor dialog box 475 476 477 478 479 Manage Groups 41 112 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 132 Create Group dialog box 122 Edit Roles dialog box 124 125 Edit Users dialog box 123 124 Manage Licenses 40 48 69 70 73 74 License Confirmation dialog box 74 75 Manage Registry Variables 40 185 186 187 188 191 193 194 195 196 200 217 218 219 220 221 234 247 280 281 282 283 286 484 Add Role Permission dialog box 189 Add User Permission dialog box 189 Copy Registry Variable dialog box 191 192 Create Registry Value Step 1 view 206 219 220 Create Registry Value Step 2 view 207 220 Edit Registry Variable view 194 200 218 219 281 282 285 286 Edit Role Permission dialog box 190 Edit User Permission dialog box 190 Registry Variable Confirmation dialog box 194 Manage Retention Policies 39 372 378 379 380 381 382 386 387 388 390 Add Retention Policy dialog box 388 389 Edit Retention Policy Period dialog box 386 387 388 390 Manage Roles 124 128 129 131 132 133 134 41 Create Role dialog box 131 132 Edit Groups dialog box 132 133 Manage Rules 40 46 47 225 226 227 228 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 242 244 245 246 247 313 490 Action Parameter Edito
316. ith derived metric definitions on page 344 or Viewing and editing derived metrics on page 341 1 New derived metrics In the Derived Metric Calculations area click Add Calculation The display area refreshes showing the Derived Metric Scope and Expression areas that allow you to define the scope for the derived metric 346 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Derived Metric Scopes v Topology Type Property No merprstation avedadie Use vaddme bution to update wtecpretation Expression o dO Gal ale Osenedute Driver Irigoer Types Tise rhen Data Driven Description 2 Use the Derived Metric Scope and Expression areas to specify the scope of the derived metric Caution If you change the topology type or object s to which the derived metric is scoped you may need to reconfigure the derived metric expression the metrics specified in the existing expression may not be available for the new topology type or object Likewise if you change the metrics that are specified in the Expression field ensure that the new metrics are available for the topology type or object s to which the derived metric is scoped For detail instructions see Setting the Scope for a Rule or Derived Metric on page 474 Working with Data 347 Working with Derived Metrics When you finish adding calculations to derived metrics ensure that their order is valid Caution The vFoglight Management Server evaluates der
317. itical condition To copy a condition from an existing severity level Note This procedure continues from Adding severity level variables on page 256 1 On the Conditions Alarms amp Actions tab open the Conditions tab The Condition tab opens in the display area 4 Copy condtonatenn fron 9 Copy varisblesJections fron j ondition VA Severity Level Variables DA Action I Activate Condition D Alarm Massage eC PEE IEEE le A 2 Choose the severity level from which you want to copy the conditional expression Caution You can only copy the conditions from those severity levels that are already defined Attempting to copy a condition for a rule that has no conditions defined results in an error Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 277 Working with Rules a Click the Copy condition alarm button above the Condition tab A list appears showing those severity levels for which the conditions have been defined For example if you are defining a condition for the Critical severity and the conditions for the Fatal and Warning levels have already been defined the list shows two options Fatal and Warning as illustrated below Fatal bd Warning Caution Attempting to copy a condition for a rule that has no conditions defined results in error b Select the severity level whose condition you want to copy The Condition tab refreshes showing the newly copied
318. ition Conditions State An agent is down Warning An agent s health is in decline Critical BSM All Events Rule Purpose This rule sends all alarms from vFoglight to the Service Discovery and Dashboards product Scope None Catalyst Data Service Discarding Data Rule Purpose This rule monitors the observations and generates alarm if the Data Service starts discarding any observations This can happen when the vFoglight Management Server is overloaded or when there is a difference or the difference in the system time between the monitored system and the vFoglight Management Server Scope CatalystDataService 308 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Rule Definition Conditions State The Data Service discards one or more observations within a 15 Warning minute interval Catalyst Database Space Checking Rule Purpose This rule monitors the size of the database Scope CatalystDatabase Rule Definition Conditions State The size of the vFoglight database exceeds 75 of the maximum Warning database size The size of the vFoglight database exceeds 90 of the maximum Critical database size The size of the vFoglight database exceeds 98 of the maximum Fatal database size Catalyst Free Space Checking for Oracle Tablespaces Rule Purpose This rule checks the space that is currently available to the Oracle database against the thresholds defined in the vFoglight registry by the followi
319. ity From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures e Creating Groups on page 122 e Editing Users in Groups on page 123 e Assigning Roles to a Group on page 124 122 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e Deleting Internal Groups on page 126 Creating Groups Use the Create Group button on the Manage Groups dashboard to add a group to vFoglight as outlined below Alternatively you can create groups using the security createuser command that comes with the fglemd interface For more information see the Command Line Reference Guide To create a group Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Groups Dashboard on page 119 1 Inthe Manage Groups dashboard click the Create Group button in the lower left corner The Create Group dialog box appears Create Group Name Create Cancel 2 Specify the name of the group that you want to create a Inthe Create Group dialog box in the Name box type the user name For example test b Click Create The Create Group dialog box closes and the Manage Groups dashboard refreshes to show the newly created group test Internal When you create groups their type appears as Internal on the listing Managing Users and Security 123 Managing Groups Editing Users in Groups Use the Edit Users button on the Manage Groups dashboard to quickly edit users in one or more groups Alternatively if you n
320. ive the copy a different name 2 Optional Add or edit the existing comments in the Description Comments box and then click Save on the right From here you can proceed to Specifying values on page 201 Specifying values A registry variable can have a global value and multiple scoped values that is values that are associated with specific topology types or objects Each of these values has a default setting For example if the variable s type is Integer the global default value would be set to a specific integer However you can also configure the setting for each value to vary over time by adding schedules and alternate values to the value s performance calendars A performance calendar specifies an alternative value which is only in effect during the span s of time set by a schedule All of the schedules that have been created are available for use with registry variables See Example Assigning 202 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Multiple Values to a Registry Variable on page 216 for an example of how to use this feature For more information about schedules see Chapter 8 Using Schedules on page 395 The values that you assign to a variable must be consistent with the data type that you specify at variable creation time For example if you selected Integer as the data type type 10 when specifying the value not ten To specify values for a variable Note This procedure continues f
321. ived M GUS vesiviiscca cicsidncnciraiea ee dieinianaiin dna aaidnatawaniaiannnindninidiaan Example Creating and Managing Multiple Rules with the Same Scope Example Using a Single Derivation with Multiple Scoping or Multiple Derivations Example Optimizing Performance ennnen Working with ThreShOlds cs sccrsascscsseschaceeassstecvscsetestisesvaibeseavase onefalesSehlisseashsipbavbdisssuedsedbedadecssadacsh A E Managing Thresholds sisi aciitintenieia nei aaa nine a AA E ChEAINGTH ESN OMS ii ies tevseeterra ania A a E E antivienia bavtei laa bane eosin Defininig ThreSNOldS sss iiss istsscesteieisndrineveccinch car Svceis Sanita bland R hide Adak iin Ge Managing Retention P OlIGleS cis 0s ie anishsniakainits reinnd matte acini a eaten Gide N AN ai About Retention Policy Mechanisms Accessing the Manage Retention Policies Dashboard Deleting Retention Policies c ssssssssesssssessessesssessesssessssssssssssssssssesnssuvesseesnessessessessesrsessessscssssseesecssessesssens Editing Retention Policies iss ceases ces cess ccss cbs cash cvsdessavsscitsteatecudsetncus deleasabshacivd detains ae AA ANa Table of Contents 7 Creating Retention POliGleS hanion ungan aa aN 388 Example Addressing Data Storage COMCEINS ssssccrecerenccccccrennnenennnnnninnnniiis 390 Enabling the Collection of Data with Older Timestamp cscssssssssessssessssssusesesssssessesssesssssessecsssssssesessseesnesnesneesnes 392 Using Schedules About Schedules a ccs
322. ived metric calculations in the order that they are listed starting with the first one Changing their order affects the output of actions that are associated with those calculations To move a threshold bound up or down in the Derived Metric Calculations table in the Derived Metric Scope column use the Move up 4 or Move down yw buttons as required Specify the unit of the derived metric Use one or a combination of the two Unit boxes under the Derived Metric Calculations list to specify the unit Each box contains the following choices e billion billionth e bit e byte e count e day e exabyte e gigabyte hour e kilobyte e megabyte e microsecond million millionth millisecond minute e month e nanosecond e percent e petabyte e second e terabyte 348 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e thousand e thousandth e trillion e trillionth e year For example to set the unit of the derived metric to a number of days per month click the left Unit box and select day from the list that appears then click the right Unit box and select month as illustrated bellow Unit day month 5 Define the data type of the derived metric A derived metric take over the form of a metric or an observation type Click Value Type and select one of the following values as required e AgentStateObservation e AlarmStateObservation e CatalystPersistencePolicyRollupObservation
323. k the Default link of that appears in the row s Value column The Action Parameter Editor dialog box appears 296 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Action Parameter Editor Parameter Name COMMAND_LINE 4 Variable A User Defined Registry Variables Name BSM URL CATALYST_URL SENTBY Rule System Variables Name foglight_rule_alarm_link foglight_rule_comments foglight_rule_domain_query foglight_rule_id Global Default http TORO1 2991 prod quest c This message was sent by Cz Expression NA NA Nia Nia 4 Specify the parameter value by completing one of the following steps in the Action Parameter Editor dialog box Caution When specifying the parameter value ensure that the value you specify matches the parameter s data type For more information see step 2 e Set the parameter to a vFoglight registry variable In the Variable tab in the Registry Variables table select the row containing the vFoglight registry variable to which you want to set the parameter e Set the parameter to a rule system variable Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 297 Working with Rules In the Variable tab in the Rule System Variables table select the row containing the rule system variable to which you want to set the parameter The list of available variables depends on the rule trigger type For complete information about rule system variables see About rule system variables o
324. king with vFoglight Rules and Registry 189 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables Manage Registry Variables Ape 22 2008 14st PM EDT Ldt Permissions for Regutry Variable CPucrtkal Registry Variable Name CPUCrRical Permissions Read Write Control Eyres IA F Pujwancerd Oper af F Nok mayad 2 LSS Nok assigned Nok assayed Roles Nock assigned Nok aseared Nok mayad Net ovaged Not assigned Permissions Read Write Control Users v Nek soured y Net avayed v Net araye P rt as wad 2 To add permissions to a variable complete the following steps a Click the role or user to which you want to assign permissions Tip The Not Assigned icons in the Permissions columns indicate that the role has no permissions assigned to it The Add Role Permission or Add User Permission dialog box appears 190 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Add Role Permission Add User Permission Role Name Advanced Operator User Name demo VRead VRead hr ite Mrite icontrol icontral b Inthe dialog box that appears use the Read Write and Control check boxes to assign permissions as required and click Save The dialog box closes and the selected entry refreshes showing three check marks in the Permission columns one for each of the read write and control permissions Permission granted Cf G ss Permission denied 3 To edit or delete permissions f
325. kouts dashboard refreshes showing the list of all agents Assigning Blackouts to Agent Instances Managing Agents 181 JA Li 2008 0735 AM EDT Agent Blackouts Agent Blackouts i Showing 1 4 of 4 blackouts as of Jul 11 2008 09 07 43 Refresh a ae 17 tor012991 prod quest corp My_Windows_ Windows_ None 19 tor012991 prod quest corp My_Lopfilter LogFilter None 20 tord12991 prod quest corp My_ApacheSy ApacheSvi None 21 tor012991 prod quest corp My_AppMonit AppMonitk None z Asipa Blackoulffeleet al feted Meme To clear the filters click Clear Filters 5 Assign or remove a blackout schedule for an agent a Select the row containing that agent b Click the Assign Blackout button at the bottom The Selected Agents dialog box appears D My_Windows_System_Agent Schedule w c Choose a blackout schedule for the selected agent Click Schedule A list of all available schedules appears 182 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide None Daily Database Maintenance Beginning of the month Beginning of the week Beginning of the day First day of month First day of week The list reflects the entries in Manage Schedules dashboard For more information see Managing Schedules on page 397 To remove a schedule select None in the list To assign a schedule select any other entry in the list as required For example to black out the selected agent
326. kup version 3 0 0 Copyright 2002 2005 Innobase Oy License A11983 is granted to Vizioncore Inc This program is legally licensed to Vizioncore to be used in connection with a product of Vizioncore only Type ibbackup license for detailed license terms help for help Contents of backup config my cnf innodb_data_home_dir got value Contents of backup config backup cnf innodb_data_home_dir got value ibbackup Found checkpoint at Isn 0 282084809 ibbackup Starting log scan from lsn 0 282084352 ibbackup Progress in MB 100 200 ibbackup A copied database page was modified at 0282085337 ibbackup Scanned log up to lsn 0 282085565 ibbackup Was able to parse the log up to lsn 0 282085565 ibbackup Maximum page number for a log record 11925 98 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide ibbackup Compressed 210 MB of data files to 36 MB compression 82 080922 15 29 54 ibbackup Full backup completed 5 View the contents of the backup directory by issuing the following command C Vizioncore vFoglight mysql bin gt dir C Vizioncore vFoglight backup data Volume in drive C is System Volume Serial Number is BCD1 A216 Directory of C Vizioncore vFoglight backup data 10 24 2008 10 55 AM lt DIR gt 10 24 2008 10 55 AM lt DIR gt 10 24 2008 10 55 AM 5 632 ibbackup_logfile 10 24 2008 10 55 AM 02 16 PM 77 594 624 ibdatal 2 File s 77 600 256 bytes 2 Dir s 49 386 782 720 bytes free Note The
327. l Print the list of audit logs to a file 86 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide a In the audit log table in the Operation Name Name column click the Show Hide columns button Show Hide columns Time Range User Name Service Name Operation Name Name 10 21 08 1 10PM foglight SecurityService authenticate Logged out The Show columns dialog box appears Show columns M Time Range JV User Name M Service Name M Operation Name Mame Apply Cancel Export as CSW Export as PDF Actions b Inthe Show Columns dialog box under Actions click one of the following links Export as CSV to export the table contents to a Comma Separated Values CSV file Export as PDF to export the table contents to a PDF file Important If you previously show or hide one or more columns in the audit table this layout is reflected in the exported file For example if you display only the time range and the operation name only the Time Range and Operation Name Name columns are exported to a file When exporting the table contents to a PDF file the PDF output appears in a new tab or window depending on the type and version of your Web browser Setting Up vFoglight 87 Viewing Audit Information When exporting the table contents to a CSV file a dialog box appears allowing you open the exported file or to save it to disk Opening w20582457 cs x You have chosen to open ej w20582457 csw whi
328. le Description Comments Start Date 14 August _ 2008 End Timefhh mn i fi Start Time hh mm A Duration hh mn i 0 Whole Day Using Schedules 431 Creating Schedules 4 Specify the recurrence pattern In the Recurrence Pattern area use the Every box to specify the number of weeks at which the schedule occurs Tip The Every box accepts any positive values Select one or more check boxes that represent the days of the week on which the schedule occurs For example to have the schedule occurring on Mondays and Wednesdays for four weeks in a row in the Every box type 4 and select the Monday and Wednesday check boxes as illustrated bellow Every E week s on MiMonday Tuesday JV Wednesday P Thursday Friday Saturday M Sunday 5 Specify the date and time after which the schedule item ends using the controls in the Range of Occurrence area Range of Occurrence CNoEnd End Date fis August Fjo End By Date End Timefhh mm 00 00 432 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide To specify an end date in the Range of Occurrence area ensure that the End By Date option is selected and specify the end date and time using the End Date and End Time hh mm boxes as required Tip Use the Calendar button on the right and use the calendar controls that appear to specify the start date August 2008 29 30 31 E E 12 43 44 49 20 24 25 27 28 a
329. le Level Variables ssssssssssssssessessecssessssssssssssssssssesssssesnseesnssnsesssssessesssessessscssesssessessusssesssersnaees Core VFoglight Rules srinaranata Se aeiateca Media ail wad Aled dn eleneenincaeed dicen Nidal Example Creating a Multiple S everity Rule Scoped to an EJ B INStaNCe wo eeseecseess tees teesntessteeeteesneeeeeies 311 Example Greatirigca Simple Rule ses tcssiesccssessasiscivaccisiransscncas ceatesvnaiecvncvacita ects satiated E N Example Creating Multiple Severity Rules with a Topology Scope Example Configuring Rule Action Parameters csssssssssesssessessssssesssnsssscsuesssssssssessessscssssssesssssssssssssssesssssssaess Example Creating Rules with Different Topology Types ssccccccccrccrcrercccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Example Implementing Command Actions in Rules sssrinin Working with Datta cssssssssssssssssssssssssrssssscsssscsossacsocsacsscsaesecsseeesesceeseseeseseesusaceaceaseaceaceaceaceaseeceaeeeseaseeseaseeseaaseats 327 About Data Management in vFoglight cscssssssssessesssesssssssssssesnssssesnsesnesssesnesssssesssssssssssssessusessssssesssssaesneesnssnsesnss 328 Adding Topology Types escseseeesesieen Working with Derived Metrics Managing Derived Metrics ics iccissecosticsects teas cevdanveccvadvadest saavsestiesiesadevedsvadiaasedtineiecsiaardhdocdbacanuctavavsieledbandsdlitscnsiade Creating Derved MEMC tirasizs avira etd aati deans nave iin aeons ade hacia maga gate gested Ra Defining Der
330. le permissions on page 228 e Copying rules on page 231 e Deleting rules on page 233 e Disabling or enabling rules on page 234 e Suspending or resuming alarms on page 236 e Suspending or resuming actions on page 238 e Viewing rule schedules on page 240 e Viewing a rule summary on page 241 e Viewing and editing rule definitions on page 245 Accessing the Manage Rules dashboard The Manage Rules dashboard includes a list of the rules that exist in your monitoring environment and allows you to add or delete rules and perform other rule management operations To access the Manage Rules dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 or Viewing the Administration Dashboard on page 39 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open 226 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Rules amp Notifications gt Manage Rules The Manage Rules dashboard appears in the display area showing i 14 Wades at at Ad 1 SObu 0418458 ace Fier by tate eee e Carrie meme Shae Phere BA oneee o Cute trage Lert ikoe omen hae ut Ye en 2j aps es w x xm Jom om shes tf sos hat lt o d slystT S E 2 irer lt 9 wermentt i ss bane t lt 95 bous to
331. lect Second from the list that appears Then select the Tuesday check box and in the every box type 3 as illustrated below 438 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Monday IV Tuesday Wednesday C By Date The Second f Thursday of every 3 month s By Week Friday F Saturday F Sunday In the Recurrence Pattern area use the Every box to specify the number of weeks at which the schedule occurs Tip The Every box accepts any positive values 5 Specify the date and time after which the schedule item ends using the controls in the Range of Occurrence area Range of Occurrence End Date 15 August x42008 g CNo End End By Date End Timefhh mm 00 00 e To specify an end date in the Range of Occurrence area ensure that the End By Date option is selected and specify the end date and time using the End Date and End Time hh mm boxes as required Tip Use the Calendar button on the right and use the calendar controls that appear to specify the start date August 2008 29 30 31 2007 2008 2009 OK Cancel Tip The Day box accepts the values between 1 and 31 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 31 negative values are not accepted Using Schedules 439 Creating Schedules The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 24 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted The Minute box acce
332. lect the system variable and click Insert The newly added variable appears in the Alarm Message box When you finish adding variables to the alarm message close the Alarm Message box by clicking Close 6 Save the newly defined rule condition by clicking the Save button above the Condition tab From here you can proceed to Defining actions on page 278 276 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Copying conditions in multiple severity rules In some cases you may need to copy the conditions from an existing severity level of the same rule A condition is comprised of a conditional expression and an alarm message both of which are copied when required For more information about conditional expressions and alarm messages see Writing conditions on page 261 Copying a condition can be useful in situations when the conditional expressions of different severities are similar so instead of writing and validating them for each severity level you can copy an existing expression and modify it as required While you are in the edit rule mode any unsaved changes to the conditional expressions or alarm messages that you want to copy will be carried over to the destination condition For example if you edit a conditional expression for the Warning condition of a rule without saving it and then proceed to copy that condition in the Critical pane the unsaved edits of the Warning condition will be carried over to the Cr
333. liInstaller admin Creating agent instances Important The procedure below assumes that the have access to and have configured the fglcmd package on the computer you are using to create agent instances For complete instructions see the Command Line Reference Guide To create an agent instance using the command line 1 Open a Command Prompt window and navigate to the directory on your computer that contains the uncompressed fglemd package For example lt vfoglight_home gt bin Note For complete information on how to get started with fglemd see the Command Line Reference Guide 2 List the agent types that are available to the vFoglight Client using the following command syntax fglcmd usr username pwd password cmd agent packages clientname myhost mydomain corp An output similar to the following appears listing all agent types that are available to the specified vFoglight Client Client ID myhost mydomain corp SPI Appendix vFoglight Client Reference 505 Command Line Interface myhost mydomain corp 0 Client Name SPI myhost mydomain corp 0 Agent Types NetMonitor Windows_System WebMonitor AppMonitor LogFilter SNMP ApacheSvr TerminalServer 3 Review the above output and record the type of the agent whose instance you want to create 4 Create an agent instance using the following command syntax fglcmd usr username pwd password cmd agent create name instance_name type agent_type If su
334. light Administration and Configuration Guide or e Use the Start Time hh mm boxes to specify the hour and minute of the start time Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 23 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted e Select the Duration hh mm option and specify the hour and minute of the duration time Note The End Time hh mm boxes appear disabled when you specify the Duration hh mm option Start Date 14 Augus z 2008 _J C End Tine bb mneny f Start Timefhh mm 14 30 F Whole Day Duration hhzmm 0 0 Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 24 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 24 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted If you want the schedule to occur for the entire day select the Whole Day check box The Start Time hh mm End Time hh mm and Duration hh mm boxes appear disabled Schedule Name My Schedule Description Comments Start Date 14 August _ 2008 End Timefhh mn i fi Start Time hh mm A Duration hh mn i 0 Whole
335. logy types on page 474 For more information about the query language syntax see Specifying the scoping query manually on page 479 2 Specify the property name you want to query a In the above expression select property b Click Property and select the property name from the list that appears c Click the Append button A to the right of the Property box 476 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide The name of the newly selected property appears in the expression immediately below the Property box 3 Specify the property value for which you want to query In the above expression select value and replace it with the property value 4 Validate the scope by clicking the Validate Scope button on the right If the scope is valid a confirmation message appears above the Topology Type box while the name of the newly edited expression appears at the bottom Note You can also use the controls in the Scoping Query Editor to build a scoping query that uses the correct syntax and then insert it into the Rule Scope or Derived Metric Scope field See Restricting the scope to topology objects below for instructions Restricting the scope to topology objects When you select a topology type use the Scoping Query Editor dialog box to narrow down the scope for a rule or derived metric The controls in this dialog allow you to select an instance of a topology type insert them into the scoping expression as requir
336. logy in vFoglight vFoglight collects data about your system and dynamically builds topology models at run time A topology model organizes the data in a way that represents the logical and physical relationship between items in your monitored environment and provides the context for the collected metrics Each topology model includes one or more topology types and each type has an associated set of metrics Topology objects are instances of a topology type For example a Host model may contain Processor Host and Memory topology types a specific CPU would be an instance of the Processor topology type For more information on data and topology models see Chapter 7 Working with Data on page 327 A registry variable can have a global value that is available to all topology types and objects as well as multiple values that are associated with specific topology types or objects If required these values can be configured to change at certain times For more information see Working with vFoglight Registry Variables on page 184 A tule is associated with a topology type and can be configured to run against specific topology objects Rule definitions can include registry variables raw metrics derived metrics and topology object properties At run time vFoglight creates topology objects and initiates rules to run against these objects using registry variables metrics and object properties as thresholds for alarm generation as specifi
337. ls are sent mail transport protocol The default mail transport protocol for example SMTP POP3 IMAP4 or others mail user The default user name that the vFoglight Management Server uses for logging into the email server To set the global value of a registry variable complete the following steps a On the Manage Registry Variables dashboard click the Variable Name column of the registry variable whose global default value you want to edit For example to edit the value of the mail host variable click mail host The Edit Registry Variable view appears in the Manage Registry Variables dashboard showing the settings of the mail host variable 282 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Manage Fegriry Varsables Edit Registry Variable maT host o Registry Vartidte Name mat host Cartridge Name Core MonitoringPolicy Registry Value Type String Description omments Host name for sending emails Save G Statik Value C Registry Reference Global Default sea Delo Velse Performance Colendors Senede Name vae Schedule tame Feqan lt lt Add G Static Value C Registry Reference Vaive f o Regntry Valius Topemgy Type Topotogy Otac Nane Scopes Dersa Add Registry Value Copy Registry Variabile Goto Registry Variable List Delete Ths Venable In the Edit Registry Variable view in the Global Default area type the global default value that you want to assign to the va
338. m Accessing the Manage Registry Variables dashboard on page 185 194 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 1 Inthe Manage Registry Variables dashboard select the row containing the variable that you want to delete 2 Click the Delete Selected button at the bottom The Registry Variable Confirmation dialog box appears Registry Yariable Confirmation x Are you sure you want to delete the Following variable s fext2 3 Inthe Registry Variable Confirmation dialog box click OK The Registry Variable Confirmation dialog box closes 4 Observe the Manage Registry Variables dashboard The newly deleted variable no longer shows in the list Viewing and editing variable definitions To view or edit variable definitions Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Registry Variables dashboard on page 185 1 Inthe Manage Registry Variables dashboard click the Variable Name column of the row containing the variable whose definitions you want to view The Edit Registry Variable view appears in the display area Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 195 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables Regit y Vartebbe Mare Cartridge ewe 8 Reqntry Value Type Dress sapinen amr wet Coho teal Cretan uen brima vaie Ferteemare aterntors oe hoe Sa tee dute hiama Feet Gay a mme lt a tat Value os Taeg eect tane cages Dorna Ass Pregeety Y aue Copy
339. mer Service dealing with U K only 0870 906 0010 Corporate Customer Service dial within U K 0870 907 4499 only U K Sales dial within U K only 0870 907 4000 Italy Milan Web Address Support euro dell com International Access Home and Small Business Code 00 Technical Support 02 577 826 90 f Customer Service 02 696 821 14 Country Code 39 City Code 02 Fax 02 696 821 13 Switchboard 02 696 821 12 Corporate Technical Support 02 577 826 90 Customer Service 02 577 825 55 Fax 02 575 035 30 Switchboard 02 577 821 Jamaica E mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales dial from within Jamaica only Ta techsupport dell com 1 800 440 920 J apan Kawasaki International Access Code 001 Country Code 81 City Code 44 Web Address Technical Support Dimension and Inspiron Technical Support outside of Japan Dimension and Inspiron Technical Support Dell Precision OptiPlex and Latitude Technical Support outside of Japan Dell Precision OptiPlex and Latitude Technical Support Dell PowerApp Dell PowerEdge Dell PowerConnect and Dell PowerVault Technical Support outside of Japan PowerApp PowerEdge PowerConnect and PowerVault Technical Support Projectors PDAs Printers Routers Technical Support outside of Japan Projectors PDAs Printers Routers Faxbox Service 24 Hour Automated Order Status Service Customer Service Business Sales Division up
340. mode HTTP Port 8080 HTTP 1 1 connector used for HTTP connections HTTPS Port 8443 HTTP 1 1 connector used for HTTPS connections Note The vFoglight Management Server uses the HTTP port for local access even if you are accessing the browser interface through an HTTPS connection If that is the case both ports are open the HTTPS port for external requests coming from the browser interface and the HTTP port for local requests For example the reporting service accesses the vFoglight Management Server through the HTTP port while external requests use HTTPS JNDIJNP Port JNDI RMI Port JRMP Invoker Port 1099 1098 4444 Port for the bootstrap JNP service Port for the Remote Method Invocation RMI naming service Port for the RMI JRMP invoker Setting Up vFoglight 67 Viewing vFoglight Configuration Port Name Default Description Port Number QP5 Application 8448 Port for the SQL parser Port ORB IIOP Port 3528 Corba ORB port used by the Agent Adapter vFoglight Agent 3529 Corba ORB SSL port used by the Agent Adapter Manager JavaEE Agent 41705 Port for the JavaEE Agent Accessing the vFoglight Configuration Dashboard Use the vFoglight Configuration dashboard when you need to find out the configuration of your monitoring environment To access the vFoglight Configuration dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the n
341. mple rule you specify a single condition for it You can edit this condition after you create the rule When you create a multiple severity rule you must specify a condition for one or more of its severity levels Fatal Critical and Warning along with an alarm message that is associated with each condition e Conditional Expression A conditional expression can be either true or false They can reference registry variables Groovy functions and metrics associated with the one or more topology types or their topology objects to which the rule applies Additionally conditional expressions can reference properties of topology objects that are related within the hierarchy of the topology model to one or more topology objects to which the rule is scoped For example the condition for a simple rule that is associated with a specific JVM can reference properties of the server on which the JVM is running such as the server name or properties of the cluster to which the server belongs 262 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Furthermore event driven rules can retrieve data generated by report and alarm related events Expressions can be simple for example an expression can consist only of a metric name but they can also be defined using very complex syntax See Examples on page 481 for examples of expressions Conditional expressions make use of the query language See Using the Query Language in Rule Condit
342. mples e You are configuring the Critical severity level for an existing rule that scoped to all requests with names that include the element jdbc the rule scope is RequestType where name like jdbc You want an alarm to be fired for this level if the average execution time over the last hour for a request in the rule scope exceeds the limit set by the registry variable ExecuteTimeCritical You select the rule from the Manage Rules dashboard to open it for editing and use the fields and controls on the Critical pane to create the condition for this severity level After launching the Condition Editor dialog box open the Function tab and select avg from the Function Name box You then specify the argument for the selected function in the Arg field For example specify the execution time as an argument for this function by typing executionTime for 1 hour in the Arg field Then click Insert to insert the function The function and its parameter appear in the Condition field To complete the condition you need to insert the appropriate operator and the registry variable You place the cursor at the end of the condition and insert the the greater than gt operator In the Condition Editor dialog box you switch to the Registry Variable tab select ExecuteTimeCritical from the list and click Insert The condition appears as follows avg executionTime for 1 hour gt registry ExecuteTimeCritical e You are creatin
343. ms Returns a list of all log entry objects with a particular severity checkUserPermission Check the permissions assigned to a user compareStrings Compares two text strings count calculates the number of observations An observation can be either a metric or a property of a topology object createObservationAlarms Returns a list of all log entry objects with a particular severity currentUserHasAdvancedOperationsRole delta calculates the difference between the maximum value of the two most recent samples of a single metric The delta function is used with metrics whose unit of measurement is count delta_rate calculates the rate per second of the delta descendents returns the set of topology objects that are directly or indirectly contained by each topology object referenced by this function s scope parameter f4registry Returns the value of a given registry variable for the current scoping object findObservationEntries Returns a list of log entry objects with a specified set of properties generateUUID getAlarmSeverities Retrieves a list of alarm severities for a given object getAllMonitoredComponents Returns all monitored components in the definition of the scoping object getContainedComponentsPropertyName getContainedObjects returns the set of topology objects of the specified type that are directly contained by each topology object referenced by this function s scope parameter get Impacte
344. mune me ti Wast at teart Dt mmn wg aties Must cohen Viewing and editing rule definitions To view or edit rule definitions Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Rules dashboard on page 225 1 Inthe Manage Rules dashboard click the Rule Name column of the row containing the rule whose definitions you want to view The Edit Rule view appears in the display area 246 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide tute delenn es rea iL heeten barw FH Sn veiam Condon g Acrens ngenar penne a COO Bate Type sorgis Rate Simple rule se tater tution town A amans Lawton CO aa unam Conditions Alarms amp Actions sub Won mageanren OL Bate Ipe anp e Re Multiple severity rule Note The appearance of the Edit Rule area depends on the severity levels of the newly copied rule as indicated in the above illustration For more information about rule severity levels see Defining rule types on page 250 2 Observe the rule definitions 3 Edit the rule definitions as required For complete instructions see Defining Rules on page 248 Creating Rules Creating rules allows you to customize how vFoglight notifies you of the status of your monitored system and to specify what actions should be performed when the status changes vFoglight allows you to create rules using the Create Rule dashboard You can access this dashbo
345. n Agent Agent Type MyScript4gent Version 1 2 0 Are you sure you want to proceed with the building and deployment of this cartridge Confirm Cancel The Build Script Agent dialog box shows that the agent you are about to create includes two components an agent component and a cartridge component That is because in vFoglight each agent requires a cartridge component that contains topology definitions and default agent properties while the agent component acts as a data collector When you create script based agents the name and version number of the agent component are identical to the name and version number of the cartridge component 5 Inthe Build Script Agent dialog box click Confirm Note vFoglight checks the collection of the existing cartridge list and displays a warning message if duplicate cartridges exist If it finds a cartridge with the same name and version the Confirm button appears disabled and a warning message appears If a cartridge with the same name but different version exists a warning message appears but the Confirm button is enabled In this case vFoglight disables the existing cartridge during the installation of the new cartridge The Build Script Agent dialog box closes A progress bar in the Build Script Agent dashboard indicates that the upload operation is in progress After a few moments the Build Script Agent dialog box reappears indicating the success of the build operation 454 vF o
346. n option Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 253 Working with Rules The Rule Definition tab refreshes showing the Event Name box on the right Rule Triggering OTime Driven Data Driven Event Name AlarmSystemEvent M Event Driven 2 Specify the event that you want to use as the rule trigger Click Event Name and select one of the following events e AlarmSystemEvent e ReportGeneratedEvent Note For details on how to write conditions for event driven rules see Defining conditions for event driven rules on page 267 From here you can proceed to Defining the rule scope on page 253 Defining the rule scope The scope of a rule defines the set of topology objects against which it runs A rule must be scoped to a topology type and can optionally be scoped to specific topology objects of that type If a rule is not scoped to specific objects it applies to all instances of that type The scope object is the object on which alarms will appear in the vFoglight interface The rule scope is specified using the query language A tule can apply to a topology type or to one or more objects of that type You can change the scope of a rule the topology type or specific topology object s to which it applies after its creation For detail information on how to scope a rule or derived metric to one or more topology objects see Using the Query Language on page 473 Caution You may need to reconfigure the rule
347. n page 279 290 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Parameter mail subject Remote Command Actions COMMAND_LINI Gl ENVIRONMENT_VARIABL Fl n HostName MatchAll PlatformInfo RemoteInstallationId RemoteWorkingDir Required No Yes Yes Description Mail subject line The command that you want to run remotely along with its options and arguments if applicable A list of environment variables separated by exclamation marks The name of the host computer on which the command is to be executed A flag indicating whether to run the command on all hosts that match the selection criteria The false default runs the command on the first matching host only The target platform specification Target installation ID This information is useful if there are multiple remote agents that support remote command execution Working directory on the remote machine Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 291 Working with Rules Parameter Required Description UseRegExp No Indicates whether the values specified by the HostName PlatformInfo and RemotelInstallationId parameters are regular expressions Script Actions Argument 1 10 No Parameters to pass to the script Scoping object id No The ID of the scoping object Script name Yes The name of the script Caution The rule runs the script from the lt foglight_home gt scripts directory
348. n page 292 For details on rule triggers see Triggering rules on page 251 e Set the parameter to a custom value Open the User Defined tab and type a value for the action parameter 5 Click Change The Action Parameter Editor dialog box closes and the Action Parameters table refreshes showing the newly modified parameter value in the Value column of the parameter s row 6 When you finish making changes to the action parameters click Go to Action List to return to the list of actions The Actions pane refreshes showing the newly edited action Actions Action Name Action Type Description CommandAction Entering Delete Selected To delete an action from the list select the row containing that action in the Actions pane and click Delete Selected From here you can proceed to Associating Rules with Schedules on page 299 Copying severity level variables and actions in multiple severity rules In some cases you may need to copy the severity level variables and actions from an existing severity level of the same rule Each severity level can have its own actions and severity level variables For more information about severity level actions and 298 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide variables see Adding severity level variables on page 256 and Defining actions on page 278 While you are in the edit rule mode any unsaved changes to the severity level variables or actions that you
349. n top of other models There are two types of virtual models aggregate models that do not require any additional configuration and user models that require user based configuration Depending on your monitoring needs and the type and range of vFoglight cartridges that you use for gathering data your system includes one or more collection models An example of a collection model is the Host Model illustrated above that collects information about host machines The following diagram illustrates a simplified version of the Host Model that vFoglight builds in a typical business scenario Utilization eed rate Speed Total CO tomy T Aam Alam B enn Host A Utilization Paging rate Legend CEED Node Property Metric AAND About the Administration Module 31 About Models and Scope in vFoglight vFoglight makes use of a topology model to describe the logical and physical relationships between data nodes Hierarchy in topology models provides the context for metrics and properties vFoglight stores context information only once The relationship between nodes metrics properties and other nodes propagates the context across multiple data elements vFoglight stores metrics and properties next to one another Unlike properties that describe nodes and are typically static in nature metrics change over time as vFoglight collects them For example in a host model CP
350. nage Registry Variables 185 196 217 484 anage Retention Policies 379 anage Roles 129 anage Rules 226 247 anage Schedules 397 408 anage Support Bundles 76 anage Thresholds 354 361 anage Users 109 Rules amp Notifications 10 11 33 185 196 209 217 226 247 283 311 316 Schedules 10 11 33 397 408 Schema 384 Schema Browser 384 Script Editor 468 Setup amp Support 10 33 53 54 67 69 76 83 Tooling 10 11 33 447 451 468 Users amp Security 10 33 109 118 119 129 136 140 vFoglight Configuration 67 View Audit Information 83 0 OS view 61 P passwords changing 114 configuring password settings 135 accessing Configure Password Settings dashboard 136 editing password settings 137 forcing password changes 115 unlocking 115 Ports view 63 65 Q query language using in conditions 480 using in scoping queries 474 R Registry Variable Confirmation dialog box 194 registry variables creating 195 editing 200 getting started with editing registry variables 200 scoping to topology 206 specifying values 201 using performance calendars 204 examples assigning multiple values to a registry variable 216 using performance calendars 216 managing 185 accessing Manage Registry Variables dashboard 185 copying registry variables 191 deleting registry variables 193 editing variable definitions 194 editing variable permissions 188 viewing variable definitions 194 restoring vFoglight
351. navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Schedules gt Create Schedules The Create Schedule dashboard appears in the display area showing the Step 1 Create Schedule Schedule Name and Description view Using Schedules 409 Creating Schedules Create Schedule Apr 30 2008 11 37 02 AM EDT Schedule Name and Description Details of Schedule Schedule Added Step 1 Create Schedule Schedule Name and Description Schedule Name Description Comments From here you can proceed to Getting Started with Schedule Definitions on page 409 Getting Started with Schedule Definitions To get started with schedule definitions Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Create Schedule Dashboard on page 408 1 Specify the schedule name In the Create Schedule dashboard in the Schedule Name box type the name that you want to assign to the schedule Optional Add information that describes the schedule In the Description Comments box type the schedule description or comments as required For example A schedule that runs at the end of the day This schedule is used to trigger an activity As a result it does not have a significant duration 3 Click Next 410 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide The Step 2 Create Schedule Details of Schedule view appears in the Create Schedule dashboard Create Schedule Apr 30 2008 1 17 35 PM EDT Schedule N
352. nd manage them It contains the following sections Note In order to complete each of the procedures in this chapter your user account must belong to a group with the Administration role For more information about users groups and roles see Managing Users and Security on page 105 This chapter contains the following sections About Schedules Managing Schedules CPSU SCN OOUUNEE osc cccssesccsssssssdasvast ceucnaescavetaccvacasestdavia senses aststitesisevebisesciisdietsabsviierisciendsaend 396 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide About Schedules A schedule is a calendar entry A schedule consists of one or more schedule items Each schedule item is effectively a sub schedule it includes a start date and can include an end date a time range during which it runs a recurrence pattern once periodically daily weekly monthly or yearly and range of recurrence You use schedules to set effective periods and blackout periods for rules and agents For more information see Chapter 6 Associating Rules with Schedules on page 299 and Chapter 5 Assigning Blackouts to Agent Instances on page 179 Additionally you can create schedule driven derived metrics and configure the values for registry variables to change at certain times based on schedules See Chapter 7 Triggering derived metrics on page 348 and Chapter 6 Using performance calendars on page 204 for more informa
353. nd or exiting each state Multiple Severity rules A multiple severity rule is a more complex type of rule that can have up to five severity levels e Undefined e Fatal e Critical e Warning e Normal When you create a multiple severity rule you must specify a condition for at least one severity level Fatal Critical or Warning As with simple rules the conditions for a multiple severity rule are regularly evaluated against monitoring data All conditions in a rule are evaluated the severity state is set to the highest level for which the condition evaluates to true If none of the conditions are met the severity state is set to Normal If a condition cannot be evaluated because data is missing or unavailable the state is set to Undefined Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 251 Working with Rules An alarm is generated each time a multiple severity rule enters a new state In addition you can configure a multiple severity rule to perform one or more actions upon entering and or exiting each state To define the rule type Note This procedure continues from Getting started with rule definitions on page 249 Select the rule type In the Rule Definition tab select one of the following Rule Type options e Simple Rule e Multiple Severity Rule From here you can proceed to Triggering rules on page 251 Triggering rules The type of the trigger that you select determines when the rule s co
354. nder Core select Host Narrow down the scope of the value by setting the value scope to a particular instance of the Host type On the right of Topology Object click All Objects In the list that appears select a monitored host Specify the email address of the system administrator that is responsible for that host In the Default Value area ensure that the Static Value option is selected In the box at the bottom of the Default Value area type the administrator s email address At the bottom of the Create Registry Value Step 1 view click Add The Manage Registry Variables dashboard refreshes showing the Create Registry Value Step 2 view Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 221 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables Manage Registry Variables Sep 19 2008 1 2400 PM EDT Select Topology and Default Value Add Performance Calendars Create Registry Value for SYSADMIN Step 2 Add Performance Calendars o Registry Variable Name SYSADASN Registry Value Type String Topology Type Host Default Value joe xyzdomain com Performance Calendars miem e yan Schedule Name Frequent Text lt cAdd Static Value C Registry Reference Value f Delete Selected Doroj f Inthe bottom right click Done The Manage Registry Variables dashboard refreshes showing the newly added value in the Registry Values table Registry alues i Topology Type Topology Object Name Scoped Default Host H
355. nditions are evaluated against the data that is collected from your monitored environment You configure a rule to have one of the following triggers Data Driven Trigger If a rule has a data driven trigger one or more if its conditions will be evaluated every time that new data associated with one or more topology types or objects to which the rule applies is sent to the vFoglight Management Server This option is selected as the default trigger Time Driven Trigger A time driven trigger causes one or more of rule s conditions to be evaluated once per pre defined interval By default time driven rules are only evaluated if data for the evaluation of the condition is available For details on how to write conditions for data driven and event driven rules see Defining conditions for data driven and time driven rules on page 263 Event Driven Trigger An event driven trigger causes one or more of rule s conditions to be evaluated every time a pre defined event occurs There are two types of events that can act as rule triggers e AlarmSystemEvent Multiple severity rules generate system events when a rule severity level is reached Alarm based system events allow you to monitor alarm related system events e ReportGeneratedEvent Report generation creates events You can monitor those events as required and use them to trigger report related events 252 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide For details on how to w
356. ne of the following panes Scoping Topology Child Topology or Other Topology 486 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide The Metric Property tab refreshes showing the instances and metrics for the selected topology type Expression Editor Registry Variable s3 Metric Property Choose Metric or Property CollectianModelRootSummary 4 gt ja Scoping Topology Instances 3 CollectionModelRootSummary m Child Topology aggregateAlarmState modelAlarmCriticalCount Other Topology modelAlarmFatalCount Agent modelAlarmvVarningCount AgentHealthstate modelChangeCountDetta AgentState AggregateModelinstance AggregateModelRoot AlarmChangeType AlarmRuleBasedview AlarmSeverity B Insert Close 4 Choose a metric or an instance The Metric Property tab displays only two columns at a time causing the initial list of topology types to shift to the left Use the arrow buttons in the upper left to navigate through the window A breadcrumb trail displays the metrics and properties you have chosen e To select a metric in the Metrics pane click the metric Note If you choose a metric you cannot navigate further in this dialog box or e To select an instance in the Instances pane click the instance name The Metric Property tab refreshes showing the list of properties for the selected instance Using the Query Language 487 Using the Query Language in Rule Conditions or Derived Metric
357. newly added variable appears in the Alarm Message box When you finish adding variables to the alarm message close the Alarm Message box by clicking Close 6 Save the newly defined rule condition by clicking the Save button above the Condition tab From here you can proceed to Defining actions on page 278 Defining conditions for event driven rules When you write conditions for event driven rules in addition to variables topology object metrics and Groovy functions you can use events and their properties to trigger rule actions Event driven rules allow you to monitor the events generated every time a pre defined event occurs There are two types of events that can act as rule triggers e AlarmSystemEvent Multiple severity rules generate system events when a rule severity level is reached Alarm based system events allow you to monitor alarm related system 268 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide events and use the following properties in rule conditions in order to trigger event driven rules Property Data Type Description alarmID String Contains the ID of the alarm that generates the event alarmLink String Contains the URL to the alarm clearedTime Date Specifies the time at which the alarm is cleared change AlarmChangeType Specifies the alarm change type Fire Clear or Acknowledge createdTime Date Specifies the time at which the alarm is created isAcknowledged Boolean Determine
358. ng variables DBSMon WarningFreeTablespaceSiz DBSMon CriticalFreeTablespaceSiz DBSMon FatalFreeTablespaceSiz Database administrators should provide values for these thresholds in order to get notified when the database starts growing out of bounds Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 309 Working with Rules Scope CatalystTablespace Rule Definition Conditions State The size that is available to the Oracle database exceeds the Warning threshold of set by the DBSMon WarningFreeTablespaceSiz registry variable The size that is available to the Oracle database exceeds the Critical threshold of set by the DBSMon CriticalFreeTablespaceSiz registry variable The size that is available to the Oracle database exceeds the Fatal threshold of set by the DBSMon FatalFreeTablespaceSiz registry variable DiagnosticAgentDiscovery Purpose This periodically looks for new agent instances that are connecting to the vFoglight Management Server It rebuilds the topology if it detects new agents Scope CatalystServer Email Reports Sample Rule Purpose This rule directs all scheduled reports to their email recipients A scheduled report can have one or more email recipients Scope None vFoglight Agent Type License Checker Purpose Checks whether the CPU count of an agent type exceeds the licensed number of agents 310 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Scope AgentTypeLicense
359. nistration and Configuration Guide To view email settings in vFoglight Note This procedure continues from Accessing the vFoglight Configuration Dashboard on page 67 In the vFoglight Configuration dashboard locate the Mail Global Settings view Mail Global Settings Connection Timeout Not Globally Configured From Not Globally Configured SMTP Host Not Globally Configured SMTP Port Not Globally Configured Recipient Not Globally Configured Socket Timeout Not Globally Configured User Not Globally Configured The Mail Global Settings view contains email settings that are used by vFoglight when sending messages to specified recipients such as the connection time out default email sender host name port number recipient s email address socket time out and the user logging into the email server used by vFoglight For complete information about the settings in the Mail Global Settings view see Mail Global Settings on page 61 These settings need to be configured after the installation For details proceed to To configure email actions in vFoglight To configure email actions in vFoglight Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Registry Variables dashboard on page 185 1 On the Manage Registry Variables dashboard locate the following variables mail from mail host mail password mail port mail receipient mail transport protocol and mail user Tip You can fil
360. nistration module Note In order to complete this procedure your user account must belong to a group with the Administrator role For more information about users groups and roles see Managing Users and Security on page 105 34 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 1 Ensure that your vFoglight Management Server is running For example on Windows platforms you can start the vFoglight Management Server by choosing Start gt Programs gt Vizioncore gt vFoglight 5 2 4 gt Start vFoglight For more information refer to the Installation and Setup Guide Obtain your vFoglight user name and password To obtain full access to the Administration module ensure that your user account belongs to a group with the Administrator and Security roles For more information see Managing Users and Security on page 105 Ensure that your Web browser has the JavaScript functionality enabled Note vFoglight displays dynamic data that is regularly updated For this reason it is recommended that you do not use your browser s Back and Forward buttons as this may cause cached views to be displayed or result in an error message Start the browser interface You can start the browser interface by opening a Web browser instance and navigating to the following URL http localhost 8080 console Note The above URL assumes the default HTTP port number 8080 For more information about default port assignments se
361. nistrator variable in the rule s email action Example Using Performance Calendars Creating a performance calendar for a variable s values allows you to cause rules to behave differently at different times Note Ifthe schedule used in a performance calendar is deleted the performance calendar will automatically be deleted as well There is a simple rule that applies to the servlets in your application an alarm fires if the request response time for a servlet exceeds the threshold set in the rule condition This threshold is a registry variable called ResponseTimeTooLong it is scoped to the topology type J2EEServlet and its default scoped value is 8 seconds However you know that at certain times of day response times for servlet instances are expected to exceed this threshold At these times the acceptable response time can be as long as 15 seconds You can use registry variable performance calendars to account for this and avoid having the rule fire as a result of false positives You create a schedule called EndOfDay Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 217 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables that is set to the recur daily at the times when it is acceptable for response times for the servlet instances to exceed eight seconds You then navigate to the Manage Registry Variables dashboard and select the variable ResponseTimeTooLong You leave the variable s scoped value for servlets at its default setting of 8
362. ns e Managing Rules on page 225 e Creating Rules on page 246 e Defining Rules on page 248 e Defining Conditions Alarms and Actions on page 254 e Associating Rules with Schedules on page 299 e Defining Alarm and Action Behavior on page 302 e Defining Rule Level Variables on page 303 e Core vFoglight Rules on page 305 e Example Creating a Multiple Severity Rule Scoped to an EJB Instance on page 311 e Example Creating a Simple Rule on page 313 e Example Creating Multiple Severity Rules with a Topology Scope on page 314 Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 225 Working with Rules e Example Configuring Rule Action Parameters on page 314 e Example Creating Rules with Different Topology Types on page 315 e Example Implementing Command Actions in Rules on page 322 Managing Rules The Manage Rules dashboard contains a table that lists all of the simple rules and multiple severity rules that are currently defined the scope of each rule and the cartridge with which each rule is associated if applicable This dashboard also includes controls for filtering the list of rules by cartridge for adding copying deleting and editing rules and for suspending rule alarms and actions For instructions on how to use the Manage Rules dashboard see the following sections e Accessing the Manage Rules dashboard on page 225 e Editing ru
363. ns For 3 Specify the time period for which you want to suspend actions In the Temporarily Suspend Rule Actions dialog box click For and select the time period as required then click Go Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 239 Working with Rules A message appears indicating the actions will be suspended for the selected amount of time Click Save The Temporarily Suspend Rule Actions dialog box closes and the Manage Rules dashboard refreshes showing a warning icon in the row containing the rule with newly suspended actions Note The warning icon indicates different types of states a rule may be in For example it appears when a tule is disabled or when its alarms or actions are suspended Placing the mouse pointer over the icon shows more details about the rule state 4 Place the mouse pointer over the warning icon A tool tip appears indicating that actions are currently suspended for the rule To resume actions for a rule Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Rules dashboard on page 225 1 In the Manage Rules dashboard select the row containing the rule whose actions you want to resume 2 Click the Resume Actions button at the bottom The Rule Confirmation dialog box appears Rule Confirmation Are you sure you want to resume rule actions for the selected rules 3 Click OK 240 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide The Rule Confirmation dialog box clo
364. ns dialog box 212 213 214 View Registry Variable view 209 210 211 212 Components for Download 39 161 162 163 164 Configure Directory Services 43 139 140 144 145 Configure Password Services 43 Configure Password Settings 116 135 136 137 138 Connection Status Connection Status dashboard 40 54 Create Derived Metric 42 340 342 343 344 Expression Editor dialog box 482 483 484 485 487 488 491 Scoping Query Editor dialog box 475 476 477 478 479 Create Registry Variable 42 195 196 283 Step 1 Create Registry Variable view 283 Step 2 Registry Variable Added view 284 285 Create Rule 42 246 247 311 312 316 317 318 Action Parameter Editor dialog box 295 296 297 Alarm Message Editor dialog box 266 267 275 Condition Editor dialog box 318 319 482 483 484 485 487 488 490 Scoping Query Editor dialog box 475 476 477 478 479 Create Schedule 42 407 408 409 410 411 Edit Schedule Add Schedule Item view 412 Edit Schedule view 412 Schedule Confirmation dialog box 414 Step 1 Create Schedule Schedule Name and De scription view 408 Step 2 Create Schedule Details of Schedule view 410 411 Step 3 Create Schedule Schedule Added view 411 Create Threshold 42 361 362 363 364 Manage Derived Metrics 39 248 333 334 335 336 339 341 342 343 Add Role Permission dialog box 337 Add User Permission dialog box 337 Copy Derivation dialog box 339 340 Delete Derivation dialog box 341 Ed
365. nt Yes Alarm system event generated by vFoglight BSM URL Yes URL of the BSM system to which to post the data Event Attributes No Optional event attributes to pass to BSM anaged Control Attributes No Optional component attributes to pass to BSM Technology Level Agreement No Optional Technology Level Attributes Agreement attributes to pass to BSM Command Actions Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 289 Working with Rules Parameter Required Description COMMAND_LINE Yes The command that you want to run on the command line along with its options and arguments if applicable Note Ifthe command is not accessible from the lt foglight_home gt directory you need to specify its path ENVIRONMENT_VARIABLES No A list of environment variables separated by exclamation marks l Email Actions mail attachement No Email attachment mail attachement file nam Yes The file name of the email attachment mail attachement mime typ Yes The attachment s MIME type mail bcec No Blind CC list Uses a comma as a separator mail cc No Mail CC list Uses a comma as a separator mail content type Yes Can be set to text plain or text html mail message No Message body mail recipient Yes Recipient s email address It overrides the value set by the global mail recipient registry variable For more information about this variable see Viewing email settings and configuring email actions o
366. nt package using the command line 1 Open a Command Prompt window and navigate to the directory on your computer that contains the uncompressed fglemd package For example lt vfoglight_home gt bin Note For complete information on how to get started with fglemd see the Command Line Reference Guide 2 List the agent packages that are available to the vFoglight Client using the following command syntax fglcmd usr user_name pwd password cmd agent types clientname SPI myhost mydomain corp 0 An output similar to the following appears listing all vFoglight Clients and the agent types that are available to them Client ID myhost mydomain SPI myhost mydomain corp 0 Installer ID myhost mydomain SPI1 504 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide myhost mydomain 0 SpiiInstaller admin Agent Package ID OSCartridge Windows2003 5 2 4 AgentPackage Agent Package Cartridge Name OSCartridge Windows2003 Agent Package Cartridge Version 5 2 4 3 Review the above output and record the ID of the agent package that you want to deploy 4 Deploy the agent package using the following command syntax fglcmd usr user_name pwd password cmd agent deploy packageid cartridge_name cartridge_version AgentPackage host myhost mydomain corp An output similar to the following appears Successfully installed package cartridge_name cartridge_version AgentPackage on myhost mydomain corp SPI1 myhost mydomain corp 0 Spi
367. ntion Policies on page 372 In addition to adding derived metrics and topology types and altering the retention policy for a topology type vFoglight allows you to assign threshold levels to metrics This feature is useful in case you need to reference these levels in rules or derived metrics For more information on how to create and manage thresholds see Working with Thresholds on page 353 a with Data 329 Adding Topology Types Adding Topology Types vFoglight transforms monitoring data into models A model is a set of objects and relationships designed to represent a monitored resource and its parts Topology describes the logical and physical relationships between data nodes in a model At run time vFoglight dynamically builds topology models based on data about your system that is collected by vFoglight agents Topology models provide the context for the metrics sent by the agents to the vFoglight Management Server The set of topology types that exist in your environment depends on your monitoring needs reflected in the type and nature of cartridges that you use for data collection If you need additional topology types you can add them to vFoglight as required using the Adding Topology Types dashboard Use the XML syntax when defining a topology type For example lt type name ApacheSvr_Transactions extends F4Table gt lt property name IntervalTransactions type Metric is containment true gt
368. occurs once Note This procedure continues from Adding or Removing Schedule Items on page 410 1 Inthe Recurrence Pattern area ensure that the Once option is selected 2 Specify the start date and time of the recurrence pattern using the controls that appear above the Recurrence Pattern area Start Date 13 August vfo Start Time hh mm foo o0 a Use the Start Date boxes to specify the day month and year of the start date Alternatively click the Calendar button on the right and use the calendar controls that appear to specify the start date Tip The Day box accepts the values between 1 and 31 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 31 negative values are not accepted Using Schedules 417 Creating Schedules August 2008 23 30 31 5 6 7 12 13 44 19 20 24 25 27 28 alaa 2007 2008 2009 _OK Cancel b Use the Start Time hh mm boxes to specify the hour and minute of the start time Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 23 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted 3 Specify the date and time after which the schedule item ends using the controls in the Range of Occurrence area Range of Occurrence CNoEnd End Date f
369. of Occurrence CNoEnd End Date fis August J zo0e End By Date End Timefhh mm 00 00 To specify an end date in the Range of Occurrence area ensure that the End By Date option is selected and specify the end date and time using the End Date and End Time hh mm boxes as required Tip Use the Calendar button on the right and use the calendar controls that appear to specify the start date 2007 2008 2009 Ok Cancel Tip The Day box accepts the values between 1 and 31 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 31 negative values are not accepted The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 24 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted 446 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted To have the schedule item recurring at the recurrence pattern specified in step 4 without an end date in the Range of Occurrence area select the No End option The Range of Occurrence area refreshes no longer showing the controls for specifying the end date Range of Occurrence No End C End By Date 6 Save the changes to the schedule item New schedules In the lower right corner click Add Existing schedules In the lower right corner click Save
370. of the foglight entry and that the red minus sign appears to the left of the other groups in the Edit Users dialog box 4 Click Save The Edit Users dialog box closes and the Manage Groups dashboard refreshes to show the users that you added to the group Assigning Roles to a Group Use the Edit Roles button on the Manage Groups dashboard to quickly edit one or more roles for a group Alternatively if you need to edit multiple groups for a single role use the Manage Roles dashboard For information see Editing Groups for a Role on page 132 Another way to assign or remove roles from groups is to use the security assignrole command that comes with the fglemd interface For more information see the Command Line Reference Guide To assign roles to a group Note This procedure continues from Creating Groups on page 122 1 In the Manage Groups dashboard select the row containing the group to which you want to assign one or more roles 2 Click the Edit Roles button in the lower right corner The Edit Roles dialog box appears Managing Users and Security 125 Managing Groups Edit Roles test oh Administrator am Advanced Operator sih Cartridge Developer sih Console User Dashboard Designer uaa Dashboard User uaa General Access aaa Operator cam Security Save Cancel Note The dialog box lists existing vFoglight roles If you previously added any roles they also appear in the dialog For in
371. of the following links Export as CSV to export the table contents to a Comma Separated Values CSV file Export as PDF to export the table contents to a PDF file Important If you previously show or hide one or more columns in the audit table this layout is reflected in the exported file For example if you display only the time at which the value was set and the registry value only the Period Begin Time and Registry Value columns are exported to a file When exporting the table contents to a PDF file the PDF output appears in a new tab or window depending on the type and version of your Web browser When exporting the table contents to a CSV file a dialog box appears allowing you open the exported file or to save it to disk Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 215 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables Opening w20582457 cs E xj You have chosen to open w20582457 cs which is 4 Microsoft Office Excel Comma Separated Values File From http localhost 38080 What should Firefox do with this file Microsoft Office Excel default x Save to Disk Tl Do this automatically For files like this from now on Note The appearance of the above dialog box may be different depending on the type and version of your Web browser 10 Change the object instance and the date and time range The Registry Value table refreshes showing the values scoped to the selected object instance and date and
372. of the following steps Using the Query Language 475 Using the Query Language to Set the Rule or Derived Metric Scope e Scope down to a property of the selected topology type by proceeding to Inserting topology type property names on page 475 or e Validate the rule scope by clicking the Validate Scope button Y to the right of the Property box If the scope is valid a confirmation message appears above the Topology Type box while the name of the newly selected topology type appears in the box at the bottom Note You must select a topology type before you can use the Property drop down menu or launch the Scoping Query Editor Inserting topology type property names You can optionally specify that a rule or derived metric be scoped to instances to the selected topology type with a particular property value To insert a topology type property name into a scoping query Note This procedure continues from Inserting topology types on page 474 1 In the box immediately below the Topology Type and Property boxes that already contains the topology type name edit the logical expression that matches the rule scope For example if you want to write a query for the instances of the selected topology type with a property that contains a a particular value edit the logical expression as follows TopologyType where property value Where TopologyType is the topology type you selected in Inserting topo
373. ogisti OPUF ata 2 Rus Or Condition teagistry RusQuevef atai OPU Utilization is at Gvae2 and the number of ad AcPUSB e Alarm Message using the Top de 10 determine whech contributors to CPU Loads or follow the Foghgh system is CPU consiraned Entering Action EmatAction Exiting Acther lt v Note The appearance of the Rule Summary pane depends on the rule type its severity levels and other settings In the above illustration the rule whose settings appear in the Rule Summary pane is active 3 Observe the rule summary The Rule Summary pane includes links to other areas in the Edit Rule view and Manage Rules dashboard that allow you to quickly edit the rule settings if required 4 Move the mouse pointer over the Rule Summary pane Hovering over a control that allows drill down actions shows a tooltip that describes the nature of the drill down action For example move the mouse pointer over Rule Triggering in the Rule Summary pane A tooltip appears Edit Trigger Type 5 Optional Edit the rule settings For example to edit the rule s alarm and action behavior in the Rule Summary pane click Alarm amp Action Behaviors Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 245 Working with Rules The Behavior tab opens in the Edit Rule view om ate L Aare a es teow Alarm Action Beheviors Harte Hemmer OU Lenin fase Type sarpe Severity OT smse mea postmetitan ae trem Tr CT te
374. oglight User Guide 3 Optional Reduce the number of columns that appear in the audit log table a Inthe audit log table in the Operation Name Name column click the Show Hide columns button Time Range 10 21 08 1 10 PM foglight Show Hide columns User Name Service Name Operation Name Name GS SecurityService authenticate Logged out The Show columns dialog box appears Setting Up vFoglight 85 Viewing Audit Information Show columns M Time Range M User Name M Service Name M Operation Name Name Apply Cancel Actions Export as CS Export as PDF Since all of the four columns appear in the View Audit Information dashboard by default all of the check boxes that correspond to the columns appear selected b To hide a column in the Show columns dialog box clear the corresponding check box or To show a column clear the corresponding check box For example to display only the time range and the operation name ensure that the Time Range and Operation Name Name check boxes are selected and clear the User Name and Service Name check boxes c Click Apply The audit log table refreshes showing only the selected columns Time Range Operation Name Name gt 10 21 08 1 10 PM authenticate Logged out 10 21 08 1 01 PM authenticate Login OK 10 21 08 1 26 PM authenticate Login OK 10 21 08 1 10PM httpsession Session Created 10 21 08 1 10 PM httpsession Session Ended 4 Optiona
375. oglight installation directory For instructions see To restore the previous vFoglight installation directory on page 104 3 Ensure that the vFoglight Management Server starts up successfully on the restored installation cd lt installation_dir gt bin fms The previous vFoglight installation is now restored To restore an Oracle database from the database export file 1 Log in to the Oracle database server machine 2 If necessary delete the database you are going to restore so that all the tables in the database are deleted in other words drop the database Choose one of the following options e Locate the oracle_drop_db sql script in the scripts sql directory of your vFoglight Management Server installation and then run that script using the following syntax sqlplus lt dbadmin_usr gt lt dbadmin_pwd gt lt ORACLE_SID gt Setting Up vFoglight 103 Backing Up Upgrading and Restoring vFoglight SQL gt lt foglight_home gt scripts sql oracle_drop_db sql Note The files oracle_drop_dp sq and oracle_drop_db sq are included with vFoglight when you use an Oracle database The are located in the lt foglight_homes gt scripts sq directory or e Execute the drop user command from the command line using the following syntax drop USER lt db_usr gt cascade Create the new database using the following syntax sqlplus lt dbadmin_usr gt lt dbadmin_pwd gt lt ORACLE_SID gt SQL gt lt path_to
376. ogy types Types Type For more information see Adding Topology Types on page 329 List edit or delete registry variables For more information see Managing Registry Variables on page 185 List edit or delete rules For more information see Managing Rules on page 225 View audit log entries For more information see Viewing Audit Information on page 82 Check connection status For more information see Viewing Connection Status on page 54 View vFoglight configuration items For more information see Viewing vFoglight Configuration on page 56 List add or delete licenses For more information see Managing Licenses on page 69 List add or delete support bundles For more information see Managing Support Bundles on page 75 About the Administration Module 41 Viewing the Administration Dashboard Entry Dashboard Use it to or View Schedules Schedule Manage List edit or delete schedules Management Schedules For more information see Using Schedules Tooling and Diagnostics Server Log Overview Server Performance Overview Script Agent Builder Script Editor Users and Security Groups Roles Users Tasks Create Overview Overview Build Script Agent Script Editor Manage Groups Manage Roles Manage Users on page 395 Lists server log entries Contains a series of tabs each containing a dashboard about th
377. olds To view or edit a threshold Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Thresholds dashboard on page 353 1 In the Manage Thresholds dashboard click the Metric column of the row containing the threshold whose definitions you want to view The Edit Threshold view appears in the Manage Thresholds dashboard Working with Data 361 Working with Thresholds Manege Thee utoih 2 Observe the threshold definitions 3 Edit the threshold as required For complete instructions see Adding bounds to metric threshold levels on page 364 Creating Thresholds You can add new thresholds to vFoglight using the Create Threshold dashboard You can access this dashboard from the navigation panel or through the Manage Thresholds dashboard To create a threshold Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 Open the Create Threshold dashboard by completing one of the following steps e On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Data gt Manage Thresholds 362 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide In the Manage Thresholds dashboard that appears in the display area click the Add Threshold button in the lower left corner or e On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose
378. oles that are available to them This dashboard also includes controls for managing user settings creating new users deleting non default users filtering the list of users forcing a password change for new users and unlocking a user who has been locked out after a pre defined number of bad login attempts Note Roles are not assigned directly to users Instead they are made available to users through the groups to which they belong See Managing Groups on page 118 for complete information assigning roles and adding users to groups To access the Manage Users dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left Managing Users and Security 109 Managing Users 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Users amp Security gt Manage Users The Manage Users dashboard appears in the display area showing a list of all existing users Manage Users Aor 3 2008 22919 PM EDT Manage Users showing 1 7 of 10 Users as of Apr 16 2000 15 19 25 Refrach Fiter by Name Grow Roles Nome a Paseword Groups Roles Red Only Type A dma ll kia j0mcoure Foghght Administr stars Foghght Securty Administrator Advanced Operator Cons Internal hme 0s fS SRC Cariye Developers Foghght Adres of Adminetr eter Advarned Oper
379. omments are welcome Please submit your feedback to the following email address info vizioncore com Please do not submit Technical Support related issues to this email address 14 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Text Conventions The following table summarizes how text styles are used in this guide Convention Code Description Monospace text represents code code objects and command line input This includes e Java language source code and examples of file contents e Classes objects methods properties constants and events e HTML documents tags and attributes Variables Monospace plus italic text represents variable code or command line objects that are replaced by an actual value or parameter Interface Bold text is used for interface options that you select such as menu items as well as keyboard commands Files components and documents Italic text is used to highlight the following items e Pathnames file names and programs e The names of other documents referenced in this guide About Vizioncore Inc Vizioncore was formed in July 2002 as a consulting and software development company with the mission to create easy to use software solutions that performed reliable and repeatable automation of datacenter functions specifically for the Citrix platform A main corporate goal was to enable business partners to offer solutions that targeted real world IT issue
380. omputer hosting the vFoglight Client For more information about this command see the Command Line Reference Guide Client support bundles contain diagnostic data about a vFoglight Client To view the content of a client support bundle Note This procedure continues from Managing Support Bundles on page 75 1 Locate the client support bundle whose content you want to view Each client support bundle is contained in a ZIP file in the lt vfoglight_home gt support lt user_name gt directory on the computer hosting the vFoglight Client 2 Extract the contents of the ZIP file containing the client support bundle to a local directory 3 Observe the file structure Appendix vF oglight Client Reference 499 Viewing the Content of a vFoglight Client Support Bundle Each client support bundle consists of the following files and directories config spid lt VERSION gt lt CACHE gt SPI SPI lt AGENT_NAME gt SPI xml SPINetwork SPINetwork lt AGENT_NAME gt Orb xml OrbinitRefs xml logs lt CARTRIDGE gt lt VERSION gt logs SPID configuration file JacORB configuration FMS server location details All log files from all deployed agents OSCartridge SPID Oracle SQL2005 etc are in this folder Additional logs may be present in other directories depending on the agent and or platform 500 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide manifests OPTIONAL may be present for sp
381. on 159 160 161 Change Password 114 115 Condition Editor 318 319 482 483 484 485 487 488 490 Confirm Delete 117 118 Confirm Force Password Change 115 Confirm Unlock 116 Copy Derivation 339 340 Copy Registry Variable 191 192 Copy Schedule 402 Create Agent 458 459 Create Agent Results 459 460 Create Group 122 Create Role 131 132 Create User 111 112 Delete Derivation 341 Delete Rule Confirmation 234 235 236 Delete Threshold 359 360 Deploy Agent Package 455 456 457 Edit Groups 113 114 132 133 Edit Retention Policy Period 386 387 388 390 Edit Role Permission 190 230 338 358 401 Edit Roles 124 125 Edit User Permission 190 230 338 358 401 EditUsers 123 124 Expression Editor 482 483 484 485 487 488 491 License Confirmation 74 75 Registry Variable Confirmation 194 Rule Confirmation 231 232 237 238 239 240 Schedule Confirmation 414 Schedule Delete Confirmation 404 Scoping Query Editor 475 476 477 478 479 Selected Agents 181 182 Show columns 84 85 86 212 213 214 Temporarily Suspend Rule Actions 238 239 Temporarily Suspend Rule Alarms 236 237 directory services configuring 139 accessing Configure Directory Services dashboard 140 518 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide directory settings editing 142 documentation cartridge 13 core 12 feedback 13 Suite 12 download 162 E Edit Derived Metric view 342 Edit Registry Var
382. on page 316 1 Create a simple data driven rule 2 Scope the rule to the Host topology type 3 Write a condition that generates an alarm each time the utilization of all of the scoped host s processors are utilized over 90 using the Processor s percentUserTime metric for each Processor object that is within the rule scope set to the Host type see step 1 For example min percentUserTime from Processor where host scope gt 05 9 4 Save your changes Example Implementing Command Actions in Rules In this example you will define a command action that calls a shell script and defines a set of environment variables containing information about the agent instances in your monitoring environment Next you will write the shell script that will print the content of the command action variables to an output file When you save your changes the command action calls the shell script which populates the output file with agent related information whenever the rule condition is met Alternatively a command action can issue a command directly without referencing it in a script by calling the command line directly To integrate a command action with a shell script 1 Locate a rule that you want to associate with a command action and open it for editing Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 323 Working with Rules 2 Inthe Edit Rule view open the severity level to which you want to add a command action
383. on panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Administration The Administration dashboard appears in the display area 44 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide te te emi hy Sh See a me Hh a heen ten tos iges bes ete on Lene Naty ou Cmeprentes cee f orca hget Sm A ta rita ae ot ert more erties iamm oni Sere yesi r 1 lt lt tena teas oc Amet Weems Garerey ued Capat ten Loria Potnana ig arc at ee E ee I Pade wen O rican u later ere heaps o a a bret a mae wan GEE Tora treaty one g ere Crore Koen or o ee eee Pita a eu vee eT ada an am emano E Petree Caters mam parumdemui aigiansno E brass ree nere eee E nata g ramen an cet momp is ts lagts a enee ae m E aita tue em ar eee ee emi ee Rte e meme tienes temrer taya Ea oe wore artes res 3 Inthe Administration dashboard observe the Navigation view The Navigation view contains links to Administration dashboards grouped into task specific categories Drill down to another dashboard in the Administration module using a link in the Navigation view For example to drill down to the Agent Hosts dashboard under Explore gt Agents click Properties by Type The Agent Properties dashboard appears in the display area Abeer ina o Agent Hosti A th 2008 Dohos mt ET Agent Hos
384. on policies interact with database generations on page 375 e Developing a retention policy Example on page 376 About database generations Generations refer to the database structures that hold long term data For any given metric each generation can hold one aggregation level of data for example raw hourly averages 4 hour averages and so on Out of the box there are three generations each holding data for e Generation I Data for 0 3 days e Generation 2 Data for 3 14 days 374 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e Generation 3 Indefinite Because data is constrained to those buckets retention policies must are also constrained to a set of rules In general you can create retention policies that e Have 3 retention policies including a purge where e The first retention policy sets the granularity of data stored for 3 days in generation 1 e The second sets the granularity of data stored for 14 days in generation 2 e The third sets the granularity of data that live indefinitely until a purge in generation 3 e Have 2 retention policies including a purge where e The first retention policy sets the granularity of data stored for up to 14 days in generation and or generation 2 e The second sets the granularity of data that live indefinitely until a purge in generation 3 e Have retention policy including a purge where e The first retention policy sets the granularity of data
385. on the first day of each month select First day of month 6 Click Apply The Selected Agents dialog box closes and the Agent Blackouts dashboard refreshes showing the schedule assignment in the Schedule Name column Agen Blackouts da 18 2008 9 07 35 AM EDT Agent Blackouts o Showing 1 4 of 4 blackouts as of Jul 11 2008 09 37 20 Refresh m wont gestion Minow Widows 19 tor012991 prod quest corp My_Logf ilter LogFilter None 20 tor012991 prod quest corp My_ApacheSy ApacheSvi None 21 tor012991 prod quest corp My_AppMonit AppMonit None As ig Blackout 6 Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry This chapter introduces you to vFoglight rules and registry and provides information on how to create and manage these entities It contains the following sections Note In order to complete each of the procedures in this chapter your user account must belong to a group with the Administration role For more information about users groups and roles see Managing Users and Security on page 105 This chapter contains the following sections About Rules Registry and Topology in vFoglight s ssssssssrssssssssssrsrnintiririerirrersnnnsnnnsnininrrnrnenna 184 Working with vF oglight Registry Variables sescssssssssessssessssssssssssnssssserssesersssserssssenseees 184 DUM POE ANE A EA E A A 223 184 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide About Rules Registry and Topo
386. on was successfully completed 4 Inthe Cartridge Inventory dashboard observe the Status column of the cartridges that you disabled The Status column of each newly disabled cartridge contains an icon J indicating that the operation was successful Uninstalling Cartridges Uninstalling a cartridge removes the files for that cartridge from the directory for the vFoglight Management Server 160 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide A CAR file can contain multiple cartridges When you remove all of the cartridges that come in a CAR file the CAR file will be deleted Caution If you remove a cartridge while the agents that were included in that cartridge are deployed and actively collecting data it can cause communication problems between the agents and the vFoglight Management Server For example the agents may not be able to connect to the Management Server If they are still able to connect the Management Server will likely not be able to recognize the data that they send To remove a cartridge Note This procedure continues from Disabling Cartridges on page 158 1 In the Cartridge Inventory dashboard select one or more cartridges that you want to remove The Status column contain icons that indicate if a cartridge is enabled jjj enabled pending dependency gy partially enabled gy or disabled Tip To select multiple cartridges press the CTRL or SHIFT key while selecting the rows contain
387. one of these functions but want the function to be performed on an object outside of the rule or derived metric scope For example if you wanted to compare the alarm count for objects within the scope of a rule with the alarm count for a specific server that is not within this scope you could specify a condition using the following syntax alarmCount scope gt alarmCount CatalystServer where name Server_IP 1099 getTopologyObjects 0 Where Server_IP is the IP address of the server For example alarmCount scope gt alarmCount CatalystServer where name 10 4 112 155 1099 getTopologyObjects 0 Note In the example shown above the exclamation point implies that the argument passed to the alarmCount function is a topology object property and not a metric Using the Query Language FAQ This section provides answers to the following FAQs e How do I reference a topology object property in an expression on page 495 e How do I export metrics from the command line on page 496 How do reference a topology object property in an expression If the rule is scoped to the topology object that has that property you can reference the property using the scope variable This variable contains a reference to the topology object against which the expression runs For example you are interested in the property ilesystemName you can use the following in an expression to obtain the property
388. ope dell com Code 900 Home Small Business Sales 0820 240 530 00 Country Code 43 Home Small Business Fax l 0820 240 530 49 City Code 1 Home Small Business Customer Service 0820 240 530 14 Home Small Business Support 0820 240 530 17 Preferred Accounts Corporate Customer 0820 240 530 16 Service Preferred Accounts Corporate Customer 0820 240 530 17 Switchboard 0820 240 530 00 Bahamas Web Address www dell com bs E Mail Address la techsupport dell com Technical Support Customer Service Sales toll free 1 866 874 3038 Barbados Web Address www dell com bb E Mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales la techsupport dell com 1 800 534 3142 Belgium Brussels Web Address Support euro dell com General Support 02 481 92 88 General Support Fax 02 481 92 95 Customer Service 02 713 15 65 Corporate Sales 02 481 91 00 Fax 02 481 91 99 Switchboard 02 481 91 00 Bolivia Web Address www dell com bo E Mail Address la_techsupport dell com Technical Support Customer Service Sales toll free 800 10 0238 Brazil Web Address www dell com br International Access Code 00 Country Code 55 City Code 51 E Mail Address Customer Service and Tech Support Technical Support Fax Customer Service Fax Sales BR_TechSupport dell com 0800 970 3355 51 2104 5470 51 2104 5480 0800 722 3498 British Virgin Islands Technical Support Customer Service Sales toll free 1 866 278 6820 Brunei Techn
389. or a variable complete the following steps a Click the role or user whose permissions you want to edit Tip Three check marks in the Permissions columns indicate that the role already has permissions assigned to it The Edit Role Permission or Edit User Permission dialog box appears Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 191 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables Edit Role Permission Edit User Permission Role Name Administrator User Name administrator ODelete ODelete b To edit the permissions ensure that the Edit option is selected and use the Read Write and Control check boxes as required To delete the permissions select the Delete option c Click Save The dialog box closes and the selected entry refreshes showing the newly edited permissions Copying registry variables Use the Copy Registry Variable button on the Manage Registry Variables dashboard to copy a registry variable as outlined below To copy a registry variable Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Registry Variables dashboard on page 185 1 Inthe Manage Registry Variables dashboard in the row containing the variable that you want to copy click the Copy Registry Variable button The Copy Registry Variable dialog box appears 192 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Copy Registry ariable x Are you sure you want to save a copy of the selected registry variable CPUFatal
390. ors on page 482 e Editing conditions and expressions on page 482 e Validating conditions or expressions on page 490 Inserting operators The available operators are listed along the top of the Condition and Expression boxes These operators are part of the query language To insert an operator into a rule condition or derived metric expression 1 Place the cursor in the Condition or Expression box where you want to insert the operator 2 Click the button for that operator Editing conditions and expressions The Condition Editor rules and Expression Editor derived metrics dialog boxes allow you to insert registry variables metrics and Groovy functions into rule conditions or derived metric expression To get started with editing conditions or expressions Note This procedure continues from Inserting operators on page 482 e Click the Condition Editor rules or Expression Editor derived metrics button E The Condition Editor rules or Expression Editor derived metrics dialog box appears Using the Query Language 483 Using the Query Language in Rule Conditions or Derived Metric Expressions Expression Editor 4 Registry Variable Name AvailabilityCritical AvailabilityFatal Availability Target AvailabilityVarning BaselineFactor BSM URL CapacityCritical CapacityFatal CapacityVYarning CATALYST_URL CPUCritical CPUFatal CPLVVarning Type Double Double Double Double Do
391. ort Bundles on page 75 Viewing Audit Information on page 82 Building Script Agents on page 448 Retrieving Data with Queries and Scripts on page 467 Configuring Directory Services on page 139 52 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Task See View or edit password settings Managing Groups on page 118 List add edit or delete groups Managing Groups on page 118 List add edit or delete roles Managing Roles on page 127 List add edit or delete users Managing Users on page 107 Setting Up vFoglight Once you get started with the Administration module you can use the Setup amp Support dashboards to administer vFoglight Note In order to complete each of the procedures in this chapter your user account must belong to a group with the Administration role For more information about users groups and roles see Managing Users and Security on page 105 This chapter contains the following sections About yF ogigi SEP oca a a 54 Viewing Connection Status csscsssssessssssssssssssssesssessessssssrsssnsssssnsssssuserssesssssarsrssansessansessenseess 54 Viewing vF oglight Configuration scsssssssesssssessscssssessssssssrssssssssssnsssssnssrssssssarsessasrsssnsessenseess 56 Managing LEEM ES otc itera an tiieatnaniananunutictian aie diana 69 Managing Support Bundles cece tes eeseeteeteesiessnesneenieeiesseesuteaneenieseantenieritsenseneeaieeneey 75
392. ost4 MyDomain com joe xyzdomain com To add another email address scoped to the other monitored host repeat step a to step f When you add the second topology scoped value the Registry Values table shows two entries one for each host 222 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Registry Yalues Topology Type Topology Object Name Scoped Default Host Host4 MyDomain com joe xyzdomain com Host HostB MyDomain Com larry pdqdomain com Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 223 Working with Rules Working with Rules vFoglight allows you to create flexible rules that can be applied to complex interrelated data from multiple sources within your distributed system You can associate several different actions with a rule configure a rule so that it does not fire repeatedly and associate a rule with schedules that define when it should and should not be evaluated The following list introduces you to the concepts and terms related to rules Rule A rule is a piece of business logic that links a condition with a result The result may be linked to actions There are two types of rules in vFoglight simple rules and multiple severity rules A rule includes a scope conditions expressions messages and actions Rule Scope The scope of a rule defines the set of topology objects against which it will run The scope object is the object on which alarms will appear in the vFoglight interface Simple Rule A simple rule r
393. ou want to delete from the list To select multiple entries press the CTRL key while clicking rows b Click the Delete selected row s button that appears in the lower right corner The newly deleted rows are removed from the list Removing cloned lists from secondary properties Use the Remove button on the Agent pane to delete lists that are assigned to secondary agent properties as outlined below You can only remove cloned lists Any lists that are included with vFoglight cannot be deleted To delete a secondary property Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Agent Properties Dashboard on page 168 1 In the Agent Properties dashboard in the Agent pane locate the list that you want to delete In the Agent pane the Remove button appears to the right of the Clone button indicating that the selected list is cloned and can be removed Edit Caution Secondary agent properties can apply to multiple agents If you want to edit a cloned list that is instance specific ensure that you select that list in the property box before clicking the Edit button Purge Data after 2 Click Remove 178 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide A message box appears asking you to confirm the delete operation Delete AppMonitor_PurgeDays_List2 3 Click Remove in the message box The message box closes and the list is removed from the collection of lists that are available for selec
394. ountry Code 352 Customer Service 32 0 2 481 91 19 Fax 26 25 77 82 Macao Technical Support toll free 0800 105 Country Code 83 Customer Service Xiamen China 34 160 910 Transaction Sales Xiamen China 29 693 115 Malaysia Penang International Access Code 00 Country Code 60 Web Address Technical Support Dell Precision OptiPlex and Latitude Technical Support Dimension Inspiron and Electronics and Accessories Support ap dell com toll free 1800 880 193 toll free 1800 881 306 City Code 4 i Technical Support PowerApp PowerEdge toll free 1800 881 386 PowerConnect and PowerVault Customer Service toll free 1800 881 306 option 6 Transaction Sales toll free 1800 888 202 Corporate Sales toll free 1800 888 213 Mexico Web Address www dell com mx International Access Code 00 E mail Address Customer Technical Support la techsupport dell com 001 877 384 8979 or 001 877 269 3383 Sales 50 81 8800 or 01 800 888 3355 Country Code 52 Customer Service 001 877 384 8979 or 001 877 269 3383 Main 50 81 8800 or 01 800 888 3355 Montserrat E mail Address la techsupport dell com Technical Support Customer Service Sales Toll free 1 866 278 6822 Netherlands E mail Address Ta techsupport dell com Web Address support euro dell com Antilles Netherlands Technical Support 020 674 45 00 i Technical Support Fax 020 674 47 66 Amsterdam International Access Code 00 Country Code 31
395. ountry Code 48 Sales 57 95 999 City Code 22 Customer Service Fax 57 95 806 Reception Desk Fax 57 95 998 Switchboard 57 95 999 Portugal Web Address Support euro dell com nternational Access Technical Support 707200149 Code 00 Customer Service 800 300 413 Sales 800 300 410 or 800 300 411 or Country Code 351 800 300 412 or 21 422 07 10 Fax 21 424 01 12 Puerto Rico Web Address www dell com pr E mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales la techsupport dell com 1 877 537 3355 St Kitts and Nevis Web Address E mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales www dell com kn la techsupport dell com toll free 1 866 540 3355 St Lucia Web Address E mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales www dell com Ic la techsupport dell com toll free 1 866 464 4352 St Vincent and the Web Address www dell com vc Grenadines E mail Address la techsupport dell com Technical Support Customer Service Sales toll free 1 866 464 4353 Singapore NOTE The phone numbers in this section should International Access Code 005 Country Code 65 be called from within Singapore or Malaysia only Web Address Technical Support Dimension Inspiron and Electronics and Accessories Technical Support OptiPlex Latitude and Dell Precision Technical Support PowerApp PowerEdge PowerConnect and PowerVault Customer Service Transaction Sales Corporate Sal
396. page 159 Managing Cartridges 155 Installing and Managing Cartridges Installing Cartridges Installation is the first step in adding a cartridge to the vFoglight Management Server A cartridge file has the extension car Installing the CAR file causes the Management Server to be aware of all cartridges in the CAR file Use the Cartridge Inventory dashboard to install a single cartridge at a time To install multiple cartridges at the same time use the cartridge install command For complete information about this command see the Command Line Reference Guide You can only install those cartridges that are listed in your vFoglight license Trying to install a non licensed cartridge results in error For information on how to find out whether your license includes a particular cartridge see Chapter 2 Viewing License Capabilities on page 72 A cartridge must also be enabled before it is added to the Management Server You can enable a cartridge upon or after installation See Enabling Cartridges on page 157 for instructions on enabling cartridges after installation To install a cartridge Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Cartridge Inventory Dashboard on page 150 1 In the Cartridge Inventory dashboard in the Install Cartridge area complete one of the following steps e If the CAR resides in a location that you can access from your local computer specify the path and name of the CAR file
397. panel 248 333 343 Manage Groups dashboard 41 112 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 132 accessing 119 assigning roles to groups 124 Create Group dialog box 122 creating groups 122 deleting internal groups 126 Edit Roles dialog box 124 125 Edit Users dialog box 123 124 editing users in groups 123 Manage Groups node in navigation panel 119 Manage Licenses dashboard 40 48 69 70 73 74 accessing 69 deleting licenses 74 installing licenses 70 License Confirmation dialog box 74 75 viewing license capabilities 72 522 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Manage Roles dashboard 41 124 127 128 129 131 132 133 134 Manage Licenses node in navigation panel 69 Manage Registry Variables dashboard 40 185 186 187 188 191 193 194 195 196 200 217 218 219 220 221 234 247 280 281 282 283 286 484 accessing 185 Add Role Permission dialog box 189 Add User Permission dialog box 189 Copy Registry Variable dialog box 191 192 copying registry variables 191 Create Registry Value Step 1 view 206 219 220 Create Registry Value Step 2 view 207 220 creating registry variables 195 deleting registry variables 193 Edit Registry Variable view 194 200 218 219 281 282 285 286 Edit Role Permission dialog box 190 Edit User Permission dialog box 190 editing registry variables 200 editing variable definitions 194 editing variable permissions 188 getting
398. pe the rule description 3 Optional Add information about the nature of the alert message In the Alarm Description box type the information about the alert that is generated by the rule From here you can proceed to Defining rule types on page 250 250 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Defining rule types There are two types of rules in vFoglight Each rule type of is associated with a topology type and can be scoped to one or more specific topology objects Those types are Simple rules A simple rule has a single condition and can be in one of three states e Fire e Undefined Normal If its condition is met the state of the rule is set to Fire and any actions that are associated with this state are performed If the condition is not met the rule remains in the Normal state If the rule s condition cannot be evaluated because data is missing or unavailable the state of the rule is set to Undefined and any actions that are associated with this state are performed The condition for a simple rule is regularly evaluated against monitoring data Therefore the state of the rule can change if the data changes For example if a set of monitoring data matches a simple rule s condition the rule enters the Fire state If the next set does not match the condition the rule exits the Fire state and enters the Normal state You can configure a simple rule to perform one or more actions upon entering a
399. pending rule actions 238 suspending rule alarms 236 viewing rule definitions 245 viewing rule schedules 240 rule level variables defining 303 viewing rule summary 241 Rules amp Notifications dashboards 183 184 223 about 184 Check Registry Value 209 Show columns dialog box 212 213 214 View Registry Variable view 209 210 211 212 Create Registry Variable 42 195 196 283 creating registry variables 195 scoping registry variables to topology 206 specifying registry variable values 201 Step 1 Create Registry Variable view 283 Step 2 Registry Variable Added view 284 285 using performance calendars in registry variables 204 Create Rule 42 246 247 311 312 316 317 318 Action Parameter Editor dialog box 295 296 297 action types 278 actions 278 adding actions to rules 286 adding severity level variables to rules 256 Alarm Message Editor dialog box 266 267 275 associating rules with schedules 299 Condition Editor dialog box 318 319 482 483 484 485 487 488 490 copying rule actions 297 copying rule conditions 276 copying severity level variables 297 creating rules 246 defining alarm and action behavior 302 defining rule actions 278 defining rule conditions 263 267 defining rule conditions alarms and actions 254 defining rule scope 253 defining rule triggers 251 defining rule types 250 defining rule level variables 303 defining rules 248 getting started with defining
400. plays a dialog box that allows you to open or save the support bundle Opening OSCartridge Agent WindowsxP 5_2 4 spar xj You have chosen to open E OSCartridge Agent WindowsxP 5_2_4 spar which is a SPAR file From http localhost 8080 What should Firefox do with this file Openwith Browse I Do this automatically For files like this From now on Note The appearance of the above dialog may be different depending on the type and version of your Web browser 2 Save the file to disk Managing Agents This chapter introduces you to vFoglight agents and provides information on how to install and manage them It contains the following sections Note In order to complete each of the procedures in this chapter your user account must belong to a group with the Administration role For more information about users groups and roles see Managing Users and Security on page 105 This chapter contains the following sections About vF oglight Agents sessen Managing Agent Properties by Type Assigning Blackouts to Agent Instances 166 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide About vFoglight Agents A vFoglight agent monitors a specific part of your environment such as a VirtualCenter application or server There are two categories of agents agents that run remotely on a monitored host and touchless agents which monitor remote systems from within the vFoglight M
401. ples that can help you understand their usage Chapter 7 Using Schedules Explains the concept of schedules in vFoglight and their usage in rules agent blackouts and derived metrics It contains instructions on how to create and manage schedules to their best potential using the Schedules dashboards Chapter 8 Working with Data Provides conceptual information about the topology model collected metrics and their data types Additionally it instructs you how to add custom data types to the topology model create derived metrics assign threshold levels to metrics and manage the periods of time in which vFoglight samples or purges data using the Data dashboards Chapter 9 Building Script Agents Provides insight into advanced administration tasks such as building custom agents or using queries to retrieving data from the data model It contains detailed instructions on how to upload agent scripts build and deploy and script agents and to drill through topology to retrieve data using the vFoglight query language all using the Tooling dashboards Chapter 10 Using the Query Language Discusses the vFoglight query language contains instructions on how to use it vFoglight uses a query language to set the scope for rules and derived metrics to create rule conditions and expressions to reference expressions in messages and to create derived metric expressions Appendix A vFoglight Client Reference Contains examples of dashboards an
402. policies the collected data has additional life cycle properties that are defined in the storage config xml file that is located in the directory lt vfoglight_home gt config For example according to the default retention policy for TopologyOb ject all data is rolled up to 15 minute periods after the age of 15 minutes then rolled up to one hour periods after the age of four hours and finally rolled up to four hour periods after the age of five days Furthermore the default settings in storage config xml dictate that the 15 minute interval data is kept for three days and is converted to one hour interval data while one hour interval data is kept for two weeks and then converted to four hour interval data If there is no existing retention policy for a topology type that type inherits the retention policy from its parent type If no policies exist within the entire hierarchy the type inherits the policy from the TopologyObject type Conversely setting a retention policy for a topology type completely overwrites any policy it inherits from a super type and is applied to all sub types of that topology type For an example of how to configure a retention policy in cases where data storage is limited see Example Addressing Data Storage Concerns on page 390 You create new retention policies and manage the existing ones using the Manage Retention Policies dashboard For complete information see the following sections Working with Data
403. port E Mail Address Customer Service E Mail Address Technical Support Fax supp support del customer ort dell com cn com cn email cn dell com 592 818 14350 Technical Support Dimension and Inspiron toll free 800 858 2969 Technical Support OptiPlex Lattitude and Dell toll free 800 858 0950 Precision Technical Support Servers and Storage toll free 800 858 0960 Technical Support Projectors PDAs Switches toll free 800 858 2920 Routers etc Technical Support Printers toll free 800 858 2311 Customer Service toll free 800 858 2060 Customer Service Fax 592 818 1308 Home and Small Business toll free 800 858 2222 Preferred Accounts Division toll free 800 858 2557 Large Corporate Accounts GCP toll free 800 858 2055 Large Corporate Accounts Key Accounts toll free 800 858 2628 Large Corporate Accounts North toll free 800 858 2999 Large Corporate Accounts North Government and toll free 800 858 2955 Education Large Corporate Accounts East toll free 800 858 2020 Large Corporate Accounts East Government and toll free 800 858 2669 Education Large Corporate Accounts Queue Team toll free 800 858 2572 Large Corporate Accounts South toll free 800 858 2355 Large Corporate Accounts West toll free 800 858 2811 Large Corporate Accounts Spare Parts toll free 800 858 2621 Columbia Web Address Wwww dell com co E Mail Address la techsupport dell com Technical Support Customer Service Sales 01 800 915 4755 Co
404. port E mail Address Portable Support E mail Address Phone Numbers Server Support E mail Address Phone Numbers Gold Support Only E mail Address Phone Numbers Customer Service Home and Small Business Large Corporate Accounts Sales Large Corporate Accounts Home and Small Business support ap dell com india support _desktop dell com india support notebook dell com 080 25068032 or 080 25068034 or your city STD code 60003355 or toll free 1 800 425 8045 india support Server dell com 080 25068032 or 080 25068034 or your city STD code 60003355 or toll free 1 800 425 8045 eec_ap dell com 080 25068033 or your city STD code 60003355 or toll free 1 800 425 9045 India care HSB dell com toll free 1800 4254051 India care REL dell com toll free 1800 4252067 1600 33 8044 1600 33 8046 Ireland Cherrywood Web Address International Access Support euro dell com Code 00 Technical Support c E mail Address dell_direct_support dell com ountry Code 353 i City Code 1 Business computers 1850 543 543 Home computers 1850 543 543 At Home Support 1850 200 889 Sales Home 1850 333 200 Small Business 1850 664 656 Medium Business 1850 200 646 Large Business 1850 200 646 E mail Address Dell IRL Outlet dell com Customer Service Home and Small Business 204 4014 Business greater than 200 employees 1850 200 982 General Fax Sales fax 204 0103 Switchboard 204 4444 U K Custo
405. port Fax 08 590 05 642 08 587 70 527 020 140 14 44 08 590 05 594 Switzerland Geneva International Access Code 00 Country Code 41 City Code 22 Web Address E mail Address Technical Support Home and Small Business Technical Support Corporate Customer Service Home and Small Business Customer Service Corporate Support euro dell com Tech support central Europe dell com 0844 811 411 0844 822 844 0848 802 202 0848 821 721 Fax 022 799 01 90 Switchboard 022 799 01 01 Taiwan Web Address support ap dell com International Access Code 002 Country Code 886 E mail Address Technical Support OptiPlex Latitude Inspiron Dimension and Electronics and Accessories Technical Support Servers and Storage Customer Service Transaction Sales Corporate Sales support dell com cn email toll free 0080 186 1011 toll free 0080 160 1256 toll free 0080 160 1250 option 5 toll free 0080 165 1228 toll free 0080 165 1227 Thailand International Access Code 001 Country Code 66 Web Address Technical Support OptiPlex Latitude and Dell Precision Technical Support PowerApp PowerEdge PowerConnect and PowerVault Customer Service Corporate Sales Transaction Sales Support ap dell com toll free 1800 0060 07 toll free 1800 0600 09 toll free 1800 006 007 option 7 toll free 1800 006 009 toll free 1800 006 006 Trinidad Tobago Web Address E mail Addres
406. prefix CN LDAP query suffix OU Employees DC mycompany DC com The scope s to search for groups OU Groups DC mycompany DC com The second group namespace OU Dynamic Groups DC mycompany DC com The third group namespace The LDAP context for user searching ou Employees DC mycompany DC com Role attribute ID name B Is Role attribute a DN false User alias attribute ID s MAccountName User attribute ID to search for groups member Match on User DN true JAAS LoginModule Name com quest nitro service security auth spi NitroExtendedLdapl Name of JAAS security domain fgl web console Parent group attribute ID memberOf Group attribute for nested group searching member Maximum level of group nesting 15 LDAP search timeout milliseconds 10000 Mode of group searching direct Account is anonymous Restore Defaults Revert 4 Edit the settings as required To restore the default values click Restore Defaults 5 Click Save The Configure Directory Settings dashboard refreshes and a message appears in the upper left corner indicating that your changes have been saved 146 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Configure Directory Services Modifications saved Managing Cartridges This chapter introduces you to vFoglight cartridges and provides information on how to install and manage cartridges It contains the following sections Note In order to complete each of the procedures in this chapter
407. pts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted To have the schedule item recurring at the recurrence pattern specified in step 4 without an end date in the Range of Occurrence area select the No End option The Range of Occurrence area refreshes no longer showing the controls for specifying the end date Range of Occurrence No End CEnd By Date 6 Save the changes to the schedule item New schedules In the lower right corner click Add Existing schedules In the lower right corner click Save The Schedule Items table refreshes showing the newly added schedule item Create Schedule Ag 14 2008 120928 PH EDT Schedule Name and Description Details of Schedule Schedule Added Step 3 Create Schedule Schedule Added The following schedule was successfully added to the system Schedule Name My Schedule Description Comments Schedule Items Neri Schock ded Tiere Recurrence Pattern Range of Occurence Detats Tris Range Sun Sep 14 2008 000000 EDT Monthy End By Sep 15 20080000 Day 14 of every 1 morads O2 00 howls trom 0000 Ede Schodule Go 16 Schedule List 7 Add one or more schedule items if required For details see Adding or Removing Schedule Items on page 410 440 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide To define a schedule item that occurs yearly Note This procedure continues from Adding or
408. r returnObjectsSatisfyingTypeNameFilter Returns a given number of objects whose name matches a string pattern specified by the parameter stddev Calculates the standard deviation from multiple metric values sum Calculates the sum of metric values updateHostModel Updates the Host Model Examples You are creating a multiple severity rule that applies to requests for a specific JSP You want this rule to generate a Warning alarm when there are more than ten requests of this type per second In the Condition box on the Condition tab of the rule s Warning pane you specify the following rate count gt 10 You are creating a simple rule that applies to JDBC requests You want this rule to fire an alarm if the metric requestResponseTime returns values greater than 750 milliseconds more than 10 of the time over the period of an hour In the Condition box for the rule s Fire state you specify a condition similar to the following metric requestResponseTime for 1 hour histo histogram metric 10 50 250 500 750 if histo 5 count metric gt 0 1 return true else Using the Query Language 495 Using the Query Language FAQ return false Advanced scripting example In most cases you use the scope variable as a parameter for the functions alarmCount descendents and getContainedOb jects However there may be a situation in which you need to create a condition or expression that uses
409. r 140 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide You can track user login credentials using the Manage Users dashboard This dashboard lists the users who have logged in to vFoglight using their external account credentials For more information see Managing Users on page 107 Accessing the Configure Directory Services Dashboard Use the Configure Directory Services dashboard to view and edit the settings that enable external users to log on to vFoglight using the credentials they previously set up in an external directory To access the Configure Directory Services dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Users amp Security gt Configure Directory Services The Configure Directory Services dashboard appears in the display area showing a list of directory settings Managing Users and Security Configuring Directory Services Configure Directory Services Configure Directory Services Nearest LDAP server Secondary LDAP server URL Distinguished name of the service account Password Confirm Password LDAP query prefix LDAP query suffix The scope s to search for groups The second group namespace The third group namespace The L
410. r 8 Using Schedules on page 395 2 Specify the value for the newly selected schedule Similar to the global default value there are two options you can specify Static Value and Registry Variable Reference Use the Value box to specify the value with which you want to replace the default value during the period defined by the schedule Note The value you specify here should match the data type of the variable For example if the variable is a boolean you can set it to true or false 3 Click Add The schedule and alternate value appear in the Default Value Performance Calendars table as specified Default Yalue Performance Calendars Schedule Name Value First day of week 45 4 Ifrequired add more schedules to the list and ensure that their order is valid Caution The vFoglight Management Server evaluates schedule based values in the order that they are listed starting with the first one Changing their order affects the output of actions that are associated with the value that is associated with their schedule entries 206 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide To move a threshold bound up or down in the Default Value Performance Calendar table in the Schedule Name column use the Move up the selected performance calendar a or Move down the selected performance calendar Mw buttons as required From here you can proceed to Scoping variables to topology types or object instances on page 206
411. r dialog box 295 296 297 Add Role Permission dialog box 229 Add User Permission dialog box 229 Alarm Message Editor dialog box 266 267 275 Condition Editor dialog box 318 319 482 483 484 485 487 488 490 Delete Rule Confirmation dialog box 234 235 236 Edit Role Permission dialog box 230 Edit Rule view 241 242 243 244 245 323 Edit User Permission dialog box 230 Rule Confirmation dialog box 231 232 237 238 239 240 Scoping Query Editor dialog box 475 476 477 478 419 Temporarily Suspend Rule Actions dialog box 238 239 Index 515 Temporarily Suspend Rule Alarms dialog box 236 237 Manage Schedules 41 182 397 399 402 403 404 405 407 408 Add Role Permission dialog box 400 Add User Permission dialog box 400 Business Hours dialog box 405 406 Copy Schedule dialog box 402 Edit Role Permission dialog box 401 Edit Schedule view 403 405 407 413 414 Edit User Permission dialog box 401 Schedule Delete Confirmation dialog box 404 Manage Support Bundles 40 42 75 76 77 79 Support Bundle Inventory view 78 79 Manage Thresholds 40 353 354 355 356 359 360 361 362 372 Add Role Permission dialog box 357 Add User Permission dialog box 357 Delete Threshold dialog box 359 360 Edit Role Permission dialog box 358 Edit Threshold view 360 Edit User Permission dialog box 358 Manage Users 41 108 109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 123 126 134 140 Change Password dialog box 114 115 Con
412. r local machine complete one of the following steps in the Import From File area of the Add Topology Type dashboard e Ensure that the File on Local Computer option is selected Then click Browse and navigate to the topology file in the file browser that appears The file browser closes and the File on Local Computer option refreshes to show the absolute path and name of the topology file or e Select the File on Local Computer option and in the box to the right type the absolute path and name of the topology file Windows example C Vizioncore vFoglight topology xml 4 To add one or more topology types that are defined in an XML file accessible by the machine on which the vFoglight Management Server is running complete the following steps a Select the File Location on Server option a with Data 331 Adding Topology Types b In the File Location on Server box type the path and name of the topology file Use either an absolute path or a path relative to the installation directory of the vFoglight Management Server Note Use the back slash character V as a directory separator For example both of the following lines point to the same topology file C Vizioncore vFoglight topology topology xml topology topology xml 5 To define one or more topology types using the text editor in the Add Topology Type dashboard in the Import From Text area type the topology definition that you want to add between the lt types gt and
413. ration Dashboard on page 67 Federation Configuration This view contains information about federation settings The federation settings are defined in the file lt vfoglight_home gt config federation config For more information about this file see the Installation and Setup Guide The Federation Configuration view displays the following settings Connection URLs The JNDI provider URLs for federated servers These URLs should use the JNDI JNP port see Ports on page 63 as configured in lt vfoglight_home gt config foglight config on the corresponding federated server This setting is defined by the JndiURLs parameter in the file lt vfoglight_home gt config federation config Max Alarm Update Delay millis The maximal delay in milliseconds that is allowed for the federation server to check all federated servers for alarm changes This setting is defined by the MaxAlarmUpdateDelay parameter Max System Time Difference millis The maximal acceptable difference in system time between federated servers and the federation server in milliseconds This setting is defined by the MaxSystemTimeDif ference parameter Setting Up vFoglight 59 Viewing vFoglight Configuration Topology Queries A list of one or more topology queries that identify topology objects that are be merged with the federated topology model This setting is defined by the TopologyQueries parameter Topology Refresh Period millis The number of millis
414. re not accepted e Select the End Time hh mm option and specify the hour and minute of the end time Note The Duration hh mm boxes appear disabled when you specify the End Time hh mm option Start Date 14 2003 i End Timefhh mm 0 0 sa Start Time hhcmm 14 30 o o Whole Day Duration tih mmy The end time should occur after the start time Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 24 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 24 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted or e Specify the start time and duration of the schedule item or Using Schedules 425 Creating Schedules e Use the Start Time hh mm boxes to specify the hour and minute of the start time Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 23 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted e Select the Duration hh mm option and specify the hour and minute of the duration time Note The End Time hh mm boxes appear disabled when you specify the Duration hh mm option Start Date 14 Augus z 2008 EJ C End Timefhh mm
415. re procedures for vFoglight installations It includes the following sections e Backing Up vFoglight on page 89 e Upgrading vFoglight on page 101 e Restoring vFoglight on page 102 Backing Up vFoglight The term backing up refers to making copies of data that can be used to restore your system after a data loss event For details of the vFoglight recovery procedure see Restoring vFoglight on page 102 This section outlines the vFoglight backup process which includes e Archiving the vFoglight configuration file scripts and installed cartridges e Backing up the entire database MySQL or Oracle e Verifying the settings of environment variables Oracle Saving the archive in a safe location separate from the original The following table shows the possible ways of backing up vFoglight some of which include the backup of the file system and in some cases the system registry Each option shows a sequence of actions that can be performed to back up vFoglight vFoglight Single Tier vFoglight Management Server on Windows with embedded MySQL Option e Stop the vFoglight Management Server e Perform a full system backup including the file system and the Windows Registry 90 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Option 2 Option 3 vFoglight Two Tier e Issue a mysqldump command to export the MySQL database Alternatively use the InnoDB HotBackup tool to back up the embedded
416. reate two scope expression pairs one for OS and the other for Unix e Choose a multiple derivation definition when you are using the same observation name for unrelated scoping queries For example if you have a derivation freeMemory for the types OS and JVM create two separate derivations to avoid coupling the definitions e Choose multiple derivation definitions when you have alternate ways of calculating the same observation for the same topology objects If you keep the calculations in the same derivation definition only the first calculation in the list will take affect Working with Data 353 Working with Thresholds Example Optimizing Performance Derived metrics can also help you optimize performance by reducing the number of calculations that need to be performed at run time For example if there are multiple rules that need to use the same complex metric expression in their conditions creating a derived metric with this expression and using it in these rules conditions would have a positive impact on performance the calculation specified in the metric expression would only need to be performed each time an instance of the derived metric is created instead of each time the rule is evaluated Working with Thresholds Threshold levels in metrics are useful in situations when you need to reference a specific metric value multiple times for example in derived metrics or rules You create new thresholds metrics and manage th
417. reshold Bounds Level Type Inc Info Starting a var AvailabilityCritical To bind a threshold level to a constant value Note This procedure continues from Selecting metrics and threshold levels on page 363 or Viewing and editing thresholds on page 360 1 Select the severity type of the threshold level Click Level and select a severity level from the list that appears 2 Select the Constant Threshold Bound option The Value box appears below the Bound Type options allowing you to specify the constant value to which you want to bind the severity level Level O metric Threshold Bound Bound Type Registry Variable Threshold Bound constant Threshold Bound alue tnclusive 3 Specify the value to which you want to bind the threshold level In the Value box type that value This can be a positive or a negative value depending on the metric range 4 If you want the vFoglight to acknowledge that the threshold is reached when the threshold level exceeds the value of the binding registry variable ensure that the Inclusive check box is cleared 370 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide If you want vFoglight to acknowledge that the threshold is reached when the threshold level reaches the value of the binding registry variable check the Inclusive check box 5 Click the Add button on the right of the Bound Type options The newly created registry variable threshold bound appears in the Thr
418. riable For example to configure the mail host variable type the name of the default email host that you want the vFoglight Management Server to use for sending emails On the right of the Global Default area click Save A message appears in the upper left corner indicating success Manage Registry Yariables Edit Registry Variable mail host Registry variable updated successfully c Return to the list of registry variables in the Manage Registry Variables dashboard by clicking the Go to Registry Variable List button at the bottom Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 283 Working with Rules The Manage Registry Variables dashboard refreshes and the row containing the newly edited variable appears selected in the list Variable Name a Type Global Default Scoped Default mail debug Boolean false NEA B mail from String jnikic sitraka com N A 5 For complete information on how to edit a registry variable see Editing Registry Variables on page 200 Optional Configure the mail connection and mail socket time outs The default values are 20 seconds for the connection and 10 seconds for the socket time out To use different values create the following registry variable values and assign them the appropriate integer value in seconds mail socket timeout and mail connection timeout To create a vFoglight registry variable complete the following steps a On the navigation panel under Dashboards choo
419. ridge Name Component Name 0S Architecture Virtual Viwate Agent Virtual VMware VMW Installer windows ky Select All If the row containing an agent installer shows the Manual Installer icon in the Manual Installer column amp this indicates that you need to run the agent installer manually on the monitored host after downloading it to the monitored host For complete information on how to manually install an agent component see your cartridge documentation Newly installed cartridges In the Components for Download list in the upper right corner click Refresh 2l The list of components refreshes showing any components that come with newly installed cartridges that are available for download View information about one or more agent components Move the mouse pointer over the Name column in the row containing the component about which you want to view information A dwell appears showing the component information Managing Cartridges 163 Downloading Agent Components Name Virtual VMware Agent Version 5 2 3 File Name setup exe Cartridge Name Virtual Mware Version 5 2 3 Component Name VMV Installer Version 5 2 3 OS windows Version M A Architecture N A Installer Locale M A Installer Type Manual Installer 5 To sort the list of components click any of the Name Cartridge Name Component Name OS Architecture or the Manual Installer icon column headings as required 6 To filter the l
420. ridge information and any dependencies with other cartridges click the Cartridge Name column in the row containing the cartridge about which you want to view information The View Cartridge Details view appears in the Cartridge Inventory dashboard Cartridge Inventory Sep 25 2008 10 19 48 AM EDT View Cartridge Details Cartridge Name 0S Windows_System Version 5 2 4 Build ID 524 20080924 0500 Creation Date wed Sep 24 2008 05 02 55 EDT Author N A Type N A Status Enabled Dependencies Name Version Match Type Description OS Common 5 2 4 Latest OS Common 5 2 4 matches LATEST Go to Cartridge Inventory To return to the Cartridge Inventory dashboard in the View Cartridge Details view click Go to Cartridge Inventory Managing Cartridges 153 Installing and Managing Cartridges 4 To sort the list of cartridges click any of the Status Cartridge Name or Version column headings as required 5 To filter the list of cartridges use one or more of the following boxes above the cartridge table e Name Type the cartridge name for which you want to filter e Version Type the cartridge version for which you want to filter e Core Type Click and select one of the following options as required Core Cartridges Installed Cartridges or All Cartridges For example to list the core cartridges that are related to the cartridges core cartridges in the Name box type Windows The Cartridge Inventory dashboard refreshes showing t
421. ristrator Advanced Operator Cas Internal dened aka Foghght Adminetrators Fogight Securt Admuristrator Advanced Operator Cos inkernal Force Pazeword Cheng To clear the filters click Clear Filters The Manage Users list refreshes showing the list of all users Manage Users Age Hs 200R POON OM EOT mpar 16 2008 15 19 25 E Foghght Adwirsstratons Foghght Securty Adminctrater Advanced Operator Consi internal ET Se Fogh Administrators Foght Securty Administrator Advanced Operator Cons Internal Cartridge Developers Pogight Administral Administrator Advanced Operator Cartri Buk In PEF Foul daniel PPEP E Courter Cot nial Cartridge Developers Foghght Admira Adrat ator Advanced Operator Cartri Current User sssssese eeeeeree sessesee eesseree ssessese sessesee srssesst Cortridign Dewelepers Fogight Adnrisiral Administrator Advanced Operator Cartri Internal ane Fa wag m From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures e Creating Users on page 111 e Adding Users to Groups on page 112 e Changing Passwords on page 114 Managing Users and Security 111 Managing Users e Forcing Password Changes on page 115 e Unlocking Passwords on page 115 e Deleting Internal Users on page 117 Creating Users Use the Create User button on the Manage Users dashboard to add a user account to vFoglight as outlined below Alternatively use the security createus
422. rite conditions for event driven rules see Defining conditions for event driven rules on page 267 To assign a time driven trigger Note This procedure continues from Defining rule types on page 250 1 Inthe Rule Definition tab under Rule Triggering select the Time Driven option The Rule Definition tab refreshes showing a set of Recurrence Interval boxes on the right Rule Triggering Time Driven Recurrence Interval hh mm ss QData Driven 00 00 00 OEvent Driven Grr Enable Trigger without Data 2 Specify the recurrence interval for the trigger in the hh mm ss format 3 To make time driven rules evaluate on each time interval regardless of the existence of data select the Trigger Without Data check box Note For details on how to write conditions for time driven rules see Defining conditions for data driven and time driven rules on page 263 To assign a data driven trigger Note This procedure continues from Defining rule types on page 250 e Inthe Rule Definition tab under Rule Triggering ensure that the Data Driven option is selected Note For details on how to write conditions for data driven rules see Defining conditions for data driven and time driven rules on page 263 To assign an event driven trigger Note This procedure continues from Defining rule types on page 250 1 Inthe Rule Definition tab under Rule Triggering select the Event Drive
423. rom Getting started with variable definitions on page 200 or Viewing and editing variable definitions on page 194 1 Specify a default value for the variable using the options in the Global Default area There are two types of options you can specify e Static Value This value does not change over time When you select this option specify the value of the registry variable in the Global Default area The value you provide must be compatible with the variable s data type that you set at variable creation The appearance of the Global Default area depends on the type of data you can use as indicated in the table below For example if the data type is Boolean instead of typing true or false select the appropriate value from the list that appears Data Global Default Area To specify the Type value Boolean Click the box and PEE S EE TEE RERE PEE select true or false Global Defawtt cHe Save from the list that appears Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 203 Working with vFoglight Registry Variables Data Global Default Area To specify the Type value String Type the value in the box making Long sure that the value G Static Value C Registry Reference is compatible with Integer Global Default Save the data type For example if the Double variable is of a Timestamp String type type a text string Password Type the password Value ROMAO Raterence into each box Globat Defautt 9 Seve Retype Pas
424. rules 249 Scoping Query Editor dialog box 475 476 477 478 479 setting expression scope in rule conditions 262 using trigger specific variables in rule condition expressions 292 writing rule conditions 261 Manage Registry Variables 40 185 186 187 188 191 193 194 195 196 200 217 218 219 220 221 234 247 280 281 282 283 286 484 accessing 185 Add Role Permission dialog box 189 Add User Permission dialog box 189 Copy Registry Variable dialog box 191 192 copying registry variables 191 Create Registry Value Step 1 view 206 219 220 Create Registry Value Step 2 view 207 220 creating registry variables 195 deleting registry variables 193 Edit Registry Variable view 194 200 218 219 281 282 285 286 Edit Role Permission dialog box 190 Edit User Permission dialog box 190 editing registry variables 200 editing variable definitions 194 editing variable permissions 188 getting started with editing registry variables 200 Registry Variable Confirmation dialog box 194 scoping registry variables to topology 206 specifying registry variable values 201 using performance calendars in registry variables 204 viewing variable definitions 194 Manage Rules 40 46 47 225 226 227 228 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 242 244 245 246 247 313 490 accessing 225 Action Parameter Editor dialog box 295 296 297 action types 278 actions 278 Add Role Permission dialog box 229 Add User
425. rules simpler and more efficient by creating a derived metric scoped to the same topology type and using it in these rules conditions See Examples on page 490 for an example In addition creating a derived metric could help you manage these rules For example if the metric expression used in the rules conditions needed to be calculated differently you could simply edit the expression for the derived metric instead of editing multiple conditions Example Using a Single Derivation with Multiple Scoping or Multiple Derivations Derivation definitions will allow multiple scoping query expression pairs under a single definition For each topology object the expression paired with the first scoping query which matches the object will be calculated This allows you to override a derivation definition based on the scoping query where multiple derivations definitions exist Use the following guidelines to decide when to use one derivation with multiple scopes or when to use multiple derivation definitions e Choose a single derivation definition when you need the overriding behavior If you have a subset of a topology object type that requires a derivation to be calculated differently use a single derivation definition with additional scope expression pairs For example you have a derivation freeMemory for topology type OS with a subtype Unix that requires a different reeMemory calculation Define a single derivation freeMemory c
426. ry refreshes showing three check marks in the Permission columns one for each of the read write and control permissions Permission granted wo ff ae Permission denied 3 To edit or delete permissions for a rule complete the following steps a Click the role or user whose permissions you want to edit Tip Three check marks in the Permissions columns indicate that the role already has permissions assigned to it The Edit Role Permission or Edit User Permission dialog box appears Working with Data 339 Working with Derived Metrics Edit Role Permission Edit User Permission Role Name Administrator User Name administrator Obvelete ODelete b To edit the permissions ensure that the Edit option is selected and use the Read Write and Control check boxes as required c To delete the permissions select the Delete option d Click Save The dialog box closes and the selected entry refreshes showing the newly edited permissions Copying derived metrics Use the Copy Derived Metric button on the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard to copy a derived metric as outlined below To copy a derived metric Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard on page 333 1 In the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard in the row containing the derived metric that you want to copy click the Copy Derived Metric button 23 The Copy Derivation dialog box appears 340 vF oglight
427. ry value from the database in its encrypted form which secures the password value 4 Click Add 5 A confirmation message appears in the display area informing you that the variable has been created Step 2 Registry Variable Added The following registry variable was successfully added to the system Registry ariable Name test4 Description Comments Registry Yalue Type Boolean Go to Registry Variable List Edit Registry Variable 200 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 6 To verify if the variable appears in the Manage Registry Variables dashboard click Go to Registry Variable List To edit the newly created variable click Edit Registry Variable For information on how to edit registry variables see Editing Registry Variables on page 200 Editing Registry Variables You can edit a newly created or an existing variable and assign it a global default value associate values with specific topology types or objects or configure performance calendars for each value For instructions see the following sections e Getting started with variable definitions on page 200 e Specifying values on page 201 e Using performance calendars on page 204 e Scoping variables to topology types or object instances on page 206 Getting started with variable definitions Once you create a variable you can proceed to add comments to it and edit its settings as required You
428. s Technical Support Customer Service Sales Wwww dell com tt la techsupport dell com toll free 1 888 799 5908 Turks and Caicos Islands Web Address E mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales www dell com tc la techsupport dell com toll free 1 877 441 4735 U K Bracknell International Access Code 00 Country Code 44 City Code 1344 Web Address E mail Address Customer Service Website Sales Home and Small Business Sales Corporate Public Sector Sales Customer Service Home and Small Business Corporate Preferred Accounts 500 5000 employees Global Accounts Central Government Local Government amp Education upport euro dell com dell _direct_support dell com support euro dell com uk en ECare form home asp 0870 907 4000 01344 860 456 0870 906 0010 01344 373 185 0870 906 0010 01344 373 186 01344 373 196 01344 373 199 Health 01344 373 194 Technical Support Corporate Preferred Accounts PCA 1000 0870 908 0500 employees Other Dell Products 0870 353 0800 General Home and Small Business Fax 0870 907 4006 Uruguay Web Address www dell com uy E mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales la techsupport dell com toll free 000 413 598 2521 U S A Austin Texas International Access Code O11 Country Code 1 Automated Order Status Service AutoTech portable and desktop computers Hardware and Warranty Support Dell TV
429. s 74 installing licenses 70 License Confirmation dialog box 74 75 viewing license capabilities 72 Manage Support Bundles 40 42 75 76 77 79 accessing 76 creating server support bundles 77 retrieving server support bundles 79 Support Bundle Inventory view 78 79 viewing server support bundle content 80 vFoglight Configuration 40 47 56 57 58 59 60 61 63 65 67 68 280 accessing 67 Database view 59 68 Federation Configuration view 58 Federation view 56 57 J VM view 60 Mail Global Settings view 61 62 280 OS view 61 Ports view 63 65 Server view 57 WCF view 61 View Audit Information 40 82 83 85 87 88 accessing 83 filtering audit logs 87 Show columns dialog box 84 85 86 viewing audit logs 88 Setup amp Support node in navigation panel 10 33 53 54 67 69 76 83 Show columns dialog box 84 85 86 212 213 214 specifying acondition 481 specifying topology type properties using the Scoping Query Editor 478 Step 408 Step 1 Create Registry Variable view 283 Step 1 Create Schedule Schedule Name and Descrip tion view 408 Step 2 Registry Variable Added view 284 285 Step 3 Create Schedule Schedule Added view 411 Index 529 Support Bundle Inventory view 78 79 support bundles client support bundles 75 managing 75 accessing Manage Support Bundles dashboard 76 server support bundles 75 T tasks in Administration module 50 Temporarily Suspend Rule Actions dialog box 238 239 Temporarily Suspend
430. s and provided the best possible installation and automation for their clients systems Vizioncore s solutions have proved successful in organizations from small to mid sized businesses to large enterprises in a wide variety of vertical industries including Financial Services Government Healthcare Manufacturing and High Tech Vizioncore Inc can be found in offices around the globe and at www vizioncore com Introduction to this Guide 15 AboutVizioncore Inc Contacting Dell Note If you do not have an active Internet connection you can find contact information on your purchase invoice packing slip bill or Dell product catalog Dell provides several online and telephone based support and service options Availability varies by country and product and some services may not be available in your area To contact Dell for sales technical support or customer service issues 1 Visit http support dell com 2 Verify your country or region in the Choose A Country Region drop down menu at the bottom of the page 3 Click Contact Us on the left side of the page Note Toll free numbers are for use within the country for which they are listed 4 Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need 5 Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you Country City Service Type Area Codes International Access Local Numbers and Code Toll Free Numbers Country Code Web and E Mail Addresses Cit
431. s dashboard Allows you install or delete vFoglight licenses and to view licensing capabilities for each license For details refer to any of the following sections as required e Accessing the Manage Licenses Dashboard on page 69 e Installing Licenses on page 70 e Viewing License Capabilities on page 72 e Deleting Licenses on page 74 e Command line The fglcmd interface includes commands for installing listing or removing vFoglight licenses For complete information see the Command Line Reference Guide Accessing the Manage Licenses Dashboard The Manage Licenses dashboard allows you to view install and delete licenses for your vFoglight Management Server installation This page consists of three areas Install Licenses Licensed Capability Summary and a listing of currently installed licenses To access the Manage License dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 or Viewing the Administration Dashboard on page 39 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Setup amp Support gt Manage Licenses 70 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide The Manage Licenses dashboard appears in the display area showing the list of installed licenses Smeg meres 9
432. s dashboard refreshes showing a box to the right of each setting Configure Password Settings Apr 17 2008 9 28 32 PM EDT Configure Password Settings i Days before user password expires 90 Days before administrator password expires 45 Bad logins before user account is locked out 5 Seconds after which lockout expires 0 for no expiration 900 Minimum password length 7 Number of old passwords that will be remembered 12 Number of days before password expiry to warn user a User password complexity level wlw lt lt Administrator password complexity level User cache expiry in minutes login is fast until cache expires 600 Restore Defaults Cance in Q z D E 2 Edit the following settings as desired e Days before user password expires e Days before administrator password expires e Bad logins before user account is locked out e Seconds after which lockout expires 0 for no expiration 138 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e Minimum password length Number of old passwords that will be remembered e Number of days before password expiry to warn user e User cache expiry in minutes login is fast until cache expires 3 Edit the password complexity levels You can set the complexity level that must be used in the passwords of internal users and the users with the Security role vFoglight uses the following levels e 1 Passwords are not checked for complexity e 2 Pass
433. s if the event is acknowledged It can be set to True or False isCleared Boolean Determines if the event is cleared It can be set to True Or False message String Contains the alarm message ruleComments String Contains any comments associated with the rule that generates the alarm rulelD String Contains the ID of the rule that generates the alarm ruleName String Contains the name of the rule that generates the alarm Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 269 Working with Rules Property Data Type Description severityLevel Integer Contains a number that identifies the severity level e 0 Undefined e 1 Normal e 2 Warning e 3 Critical e 4 Fatal severityName String Contains one of the following values that identify the severity level Undefined Normal Warning Critical or Fatal sourcelD String Contains the ID of the source data object that generates the event sourceName String Contains the name of the source data object that generates the event userDefinedData DataObject Contains a data object that includes any additional information about the alarm This data can be used when creating event related dashboards For more information about creating dashboards see the vFoglight User Guide ReportGeneratedEvent Report generation creates system events You can monitor these events and their properties in order to trigger event driven rules 270 vF oglight Administration and Conf
434. s with Different Topology Types on page 315 e Example Implementing Command Actions in Rules on page 322 Example Creating Multiple Severity Rules with a Topology Scope You want to monitor processor objects on a particular server called Server1 based on the metric percentUserTime You create a multiple severity rule to monitor these objects and scope the rule to the Processor topology type To cause this rule to apply to the server that you are interested in you specify in the scope that the rule should apply to the Processor topology object whose host name property is Server1 Processor where host name Server1 You want to include all three severity levels Fatal Critical and Warning in the rule You set these levels conditions as follows e Fatal percentUserTime gt 15 e Critical percentUserTime gt 10 e Warning percentUserTime gt 5 Example Configuring Rule Action Parameters You want to define rule actions for a rule severity level a remote command action on a monitored host and a script action on the vFoglight Management Server To configure a rule s action parameters Note The information in this procedure assumes that you have a good understanding of the rule editing workflow For step by step instructions on how to add actions to a rule and edit their parameters see Defining actions on page 278 1 Verify that the script is accessible by the rule To do that copy
435. se Administration gt Rules amp Notifications gt Create Registry Variable The Create Registry Variable dashboard appears in the display area showing the Step 1 Create Registry Variable view 284 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Create Registry Yariable Apr 23 2008 11 13 55 PM EDT Create Registry Variable Registry Yariable Added Step 1 Create Registry Variable Registry Yariable Name Description Comments Registry alue Type b Specify the name and data type for the variable using the following boxes Registry Variable Name The name of the variable mail connection timeout when specifying the connection time out or mail socket timeout for the socket time out Registry Value Type Click the box and select Integer from the list that appears c Click Add The Create Registry Variable dashboard refreshes showing the Step 2 Registry Variable Added view Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 285 Working with Rules Crease Registry Variable Sap 22 2004 200000 PM EOT Create Registry Variable Registry Variable Added Step 2 Registry Variable added The following registry variable was successfully added to the system Registry Variable Name mail connection timeout Description Comments Registry Value Type integer Goto Variable List Edit Registry Variable d Edit the newly created registry variable In the Step 2 Registry Variable Added view click Edit
436. se password you want to change The Name column shows the following message for each user whose account is locked This user is locked Click the Unlock button at the bottom of the Manage Users dashboard The Confirm Unlock dialog box appears asking you to confirm the unlock operation Confirm Unlock x Are you sure you want to run the Unlock action on the selected rows Cancel 2 In the Confirm Unlock dialog box click OK The dialog box closes and the Manage Users dashboard refreshes showing the user name in the Name column Managing Users and Security 117 Managing Users Deleting Internal Users Use the Delete button on the Manage Users dashboard to delete user accounts from vFoglight You can only delete those users that you add to vFoglight after the installation Their type appears as Internal on the Manage Users dashboard You cannot delete the user accounts that are included with vFoglight Their type appears as Built In If a Built In or Internal User is the current user their type appears as Current User User accounts that you create User accounts that come with vF oglight Current vF oglight user For more information about the types of groups that exist in vFoglight see Managing Groups on page 118 Alternatively you can delete internal users using the security deleteuser command that comes with the fglemd interface For more information see the Command Line Reference Guide To delete an
437. seconds but add the schedule EndOfDay to the list of Performance Calendars for the variable set the replacement value to the alternative threshold of 15 seconds and then save your changes Example Assigning Host Specific Email Addresses of vF oglight System Administrators The vFoglight Management Server includes the global registry variable SYSADMIN that allows you to set the email address of the vFoglight System Administrator Larger monitoring environments have different system administrators that manage different parts of vFoglight For example you can have a different system administrator looking after each monitored host Monitored hosts in the vFoglight data model exist as object instances of the topology type Host vFoglight registry variables can have topology scoped variables associated with particular topology types and or their object instances This feature allows you to assign host specific email addresses of different vFoglight administrators using the SYSADMIN registry variable In this example there are two monitored hosts and each host has a designated system administrator as listed below Host Administrator s email HostA joe xyzdomain com HostB larry pdqdomain com To assign host specific email addresses Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F
438. server support bundles are stored in the lt vfoglight_home gt support lt user_name gt directory or e Ifyou do not have access to the computer that is hosting the vFoglight Management Server retrieve the support bundle using the Support Bundle Inventory view For instructions see Retrieving Server Support Bundles on page 79 2 Extract the contents of the ZIP file containing the server support bundle to a local directory 3 Observe the file structure Each server support bundle consists of a number of files The following list illustrates a file collection sample that may appear in a server support bundle Note The list below does not include the entire list of files that are contained in server support bundle It is a partial listing that illustrates the directory structure and describes some of the common files that appear in the support bundle AuditingLog_ xml DiagnosticSnapshot_ txt DirectoryListing txt vFoglight_ lt version gt _InstallLog log InstalledCartridges_ xml MonitoringPolicies_ xml support_bundle_foglight_ xml config agent weight config foglight config log config remote_monitor config remote_monitor log config Setting Up vFoglight 81 Managing Support Bundles A listing of recent auditable changes to the vFMS registry rules cartridges security etc It contains information about the before and after states of a configuration object including rules registry variables ag
439. ses and the Manage Rules dashboard refreshes 4 Inthe Manage Rules dashboard observe the row containing the rule whose actions you resumed The absence of the warning icon indicates that the actions for the rule are no longer suspended If a warning icon appears in the row containing the rule with newly resumed actions place the mouse pointer over the icon The tool tip that appears no longer indicates that the rule s actions are suspended Note The warning icon indicates different types of states a rule may be in For example it appears when a rule is disabled or when its alarms or actions are suspended Placing the mouse pointer over the icon shows more details about the rule state Viewing rule schedules A tule can be associated with one or more schedules during which it is active effective schedules or inactive blackout schedules Use the Schedule button on the Manage Rules dashboard to view the schedules that are assigned to a rule or edit schedule assignments as required To view a rule s schedules Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Rules dashboard on page 225 1 In the Manage Rules dashboard click the Schedules icon in the row containing the rule whose schedules you want to view The Edit Rule area appears in the Manage Rules dashboard with the Schedules tab open Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 241 Working with Rules 2 If required edit the rule sche
440. ses you may need to enable or disable a rule For example if a rule monitors a host that needs to taken offline for system maintenance you can disable that rule temporarily to avoid triggering its actions while the monitored host is unavailable Use the Manage Rules dashboard to drill down to the rule that you want to disable or enable and then use the Disable Rules or Enable Rules buttons on the Manage Rules dashboard to change the rule state To disable a rule Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Rules dashboard on page 225 Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 235 Working with Rules 1 In the Manage Rules dashboard select the row containing the rule that you want to disable Tip To select multiple rules press the CTRL or SHIFT key while selecting the rows containing the rules that you want to disable 2 Click the Disable Rules button at the bottom The Delete Rule Confirmation dialog box appears Delete Rule Confirmation Are you sure you want to disable Following rules Agent Health State 3 In Delete Rule Confirmation dialog box click OK The Delete Rule Confirmation dialog box closes and the Manage Rules dashboard refreshes showing a Rule is currently disabled icon in the row containing the newly disabled rule 4 Place the mouse pointer over the Rule is currently disabled icon icon A tool tip appears indicating that the rule is disabled To enable a rule Note
441. set in the sub tabs of the tab for that severity level Caution Do not clear the Activate check box if you want to temporarily disable a rule To temporarily deactivate the alarms and actions for an entire rule follow the instructions in Suspending or resuming alarms on page 236 You can also configure the behavior of the alarms and actions for the rule See Defining Alarm and Action Behavior on page 302 for more information Multiple severity rules Define the alarm message associated with the newly defined condition In the Alarm box type the alarm message Multiple severity rules Optional To reference a rule level variable or a system variable in the alarm message in the Alarm Message box click the location to which you want to add the variable and then click the Alarm Message Editor button 7 above the Alarm Message box The Alarm Message Editor dialog box appears Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 267 Working with Rules Alarm Message Editor EA Rule Variables A System Variables Name ExpressionMessage Agentld scope get agentiIDi E AgentName scope get namey E HealthStateName scope get heatthState get n E Insert Close e To add a rule level variable in the Alarm Message Editor dialog box on the Rule Variables tab select the rule level variable and click Insert e To add a system variable on the System Variables tab select the system variable and click Insert The
442. shboard select the row containing the rule whose alarms you want to suspend 2 Click the Suspend Alarms button at the bottom The Temporarily Suspend Rule Alarms dialog box appears Temporarily Suspend Rule Alarms For 3 Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 237 Working with Rules Specify the time period for which you want to suspend alarms In the Temporarily Suspend Rule Alarms dialog box click For and select the time period as required then click Go The Temporarily Suspend Rule Alarms dialog box closes and the Manage Rules dashboard refreshes showing a warning icon in the row containing the rule with newly suspended alarms Note The warning icon indicates different types of states a rule may be in For example it appears when a rule is disabled or when its alarms or actions are suspended Placing the mouse pointer over the icon shows more details about the rule state Place the mouse pointer over the warning icon A tool tip appears indicating that alarms are currently suspended for the rule To resume alarms for a rule Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Rules dashboard on page 225 In the Manage Rules dashboard select the row containing the rule whose alarms you want to resume Click the Resume Alarms button at the bottom The Rule Confirmation dialog box appears Rule Confirmation x Are you sure you want to resume rule alarms For the selected rules
443. sia d o os Wrdeen sy t ssf ysters lt 92 E s A Bani P ntorfa we lt 9 s 2j Ad Fuse r J Siss J I i p a betes eee 3 Newly installed cartridges In the upper right corner click Refresh The list of rules refreshes showing any rules that come with newly installed cartridges 4 To sort the list of variables by their name scope or the name of the cartridge name to which they belong click the Rule Name Rule Scope or Cartridge Name column headings as required 5 Optional Filter the list of rules e To show only the rules whose name matches a particular text pattern in the Rule Name box at the top type the text pattern The Manage Rules dashboard refreshes showing only the rules whose name matches the specified text pattern e To show only the rules whose scope name matches a particular text pattern in the Rule Scope box at the top type the text pattern The Manage Rules dashboard refreshes showing only the rules whose scope matches the specified text pattern Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 227 Working with Rules e To show only the rules that belong to a particular cartridge in the Cartridge Name box at the top type the cartridge name The Manage Rules dashboard refreshes showing only the rules that come with the specified cartridge e To clear the filters click Clear Filters The Manage Rules dashboard refreshes showing the list of all rules Mamege Ruler ad o
444. side that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted e Specify the start time and duration of the schedule item 430 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide or e Use the Start Time hh mm boxes to specify the hour and minute of the start time Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 23 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted e Select the Duration hh mm option and specify the hour and minute of the duration time Note The End Time hh mm boxes appear disabled when you specify the Duration hh mm option Start Date 14 Augus z 2008 _J C End Tine bb mneny f Start Timefhh mm 14 30 F Whole Day Duration hhzmm 0 0 Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 24 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 24 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted If you want the schedule to occur for the entire day select the Whole Day check box The Start Time hh mm End Time hh mm and Duration hh mm boxes appear disabled Schedule Name My Schedu
445. simple rule or when configuring a severity level for a multiple severity rule you must specify a condition using the query language The query language is also used to specify the expression for a derived metric The derived metric is calculated based on this expression About the Query Language in Rule Expressions and Messages You can create expressions and messages in the Expression Message box on the Rule Variables tab or the Severity Level Variables tab for a rule severity level Using the Query Language 481 Using the Query Language in Rule Conditions or Derived Metric Expressions Expressions must be specified using the query language and the syntax expressionName must be used to reference expressions in messages Tip If you want to include an email address in a message simply use the symbol twice For example Send email to administrator example com Note The expressions that you can reference in a message vary depending on the scope of the message See Chapter 6 Adding severity level variables on page 256 for details You can also reference registry variables in expressions using the syntax registry registryVariableName Examples e You are editing a simple rule that is scoped to the topology type Jv the condition for the rule is threads_started gt 10 You want to create a message to use as the text of the email that is sent when the rule fires that includes the value of the threads_started metric
446. slash as an escape character for single or double quotation marks as it has no effects in command actions For example Correct argl arg2 arg3 arg one arg2 Incorrect arg three here arg one e If the command or an argument is quoted and has to contain one or more double quotes the embedded double quotation mark must be escaped by using two adjacent quotes or using a back slash and quote V whichever is suitable to the underlying OS 666666 e Triple quotes are recognized as one quotation mark This is useful in dealing with Windows batch files e Triple quotes are not allowed in a quoting context About rule system variables There are trigger specific rule variables that can be used in conditional expressions of rules with certain trigger types Each variable contains the information relative to the rule in which it is used For example if you create a rule RuleA and use the rule level variable foglight_rule_name as a parameter in an action that you add to RuleA that parameter uses the actual rule name RuleA Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 293 Working with Rules Rules in vFoglight can be triggered by data time or events Different trigger types such as time data and event triggers have different rule level variables available to them For example in an event driven rule you can reference the properties of the system alarm event that triggers the rule directly Th
447. ssceesneesseesseesneessteesseesnessineeateesteersneeatessanes 451 Uploading Agent Scripts and Building Agent Packages s sssssisiissisisssssssssssssrsrsiriririinisiisisssnsnnrirnriirnriirninininses 452 Deploying Script Agent Packages i is Creating and Activating Script Agent Instances Editing Scpt Agent Properes isccccsiriscstveedsandscovswiidviacviealeelasivisssasied ae ana a a aa Example Type 1 Senpere taaa ea eas aa aaien a a a naasta Example Type 2S enptis iniit i a E RRA AO AA A A N aaa Retrieving Data with Queries and Scripts Accessing the Script E ditor Dashboard Selecting Topology Objects s stiscveukia hain ida didi ndnd aie aan A aAA A RRAN AE Retrieving Data iaeaectssacsay aaicsnccaasecatea inti duc dauscneuantdmitiatacdterditua AARE Using the Query Language ssssssssnnnnnnnnsnsnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnannn nunnan nannan 473 8 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Using the Query Language to Set the Rule or Derived Metric SCOPG uo eessecseesstecsesstessiessessteesiessuessiesneesteeeneees Setting the Scope for a Rule or Derived Metric sccseseeeestessiesteesteseeseesiereesniesieeneeseeeesntsesneeneesnas Using the Query Language in Rule Conditions or Derived Metric Expressions About the Query Language in Rule Expressions and Messages Specifying a Rule Condition or Derived Metric EXpreSSiOn ccssssssssssesesssssessesssessessesssessesssessssssse
448. ssecssessecssessvessssssesssssssssussssssssesnsesseessesnesseesnesseeesessssssesess 179 Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry About Rules Registry and Topology in vFoglight sc eescessessecseesteseeseesecsueessessteesiessteerieesieseeseesnaessseesnesees Working with vF oglight Registry Variables ccessssssessessesssesssssssssssssssnsesnssnsesneesessessessessessscssesssssessseessesssseesssssesy Managing R egistry Variables cs scccesccsscsscosssscesaysevecsssveeasdssuncesiectesssscesnssscussts ecupesnsesveseeedarhanesieteayerbtscatisnsetdisensii Creating Registry Varia blesan S aa p E a a S Editing Registry Vara bleSsnsnsriinieiini iia A E ORANA Viewing Registry Values Example Assigning Multiple Values to a Registry Variable Example Using Performance Calendars sssccccccrcrrrrnnccccenennnnnnnncnensnnnnnnnnnnnnr Example Assigning Host Specific Email Addresses of vFoglight System Administrators esscccccrnnnns 217 6 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Workin With RUES ananuna a tiene o tind N a a Managing RURE Sin n aE A A REA A A a AA i Creating RUES anna a aa aaa sustieinn caeetren tian EEA A EET EAEan IAA CEAAL S EEEE Defining R ules Defining Conditions Alarms and Actions Associating Rules with Sch dules naniii aiaiai taratadi ia danie iie Defining Alarm and Action Behav ssscssssssessessssssecssessssssesssssssssussssssnsssesssssessssssesssesssssseassasseassesssessessses Defining Ru
449. ssssesssssees Using Functions with Conditions and Expressions iscsssssessessssssssssssusessssssesessessessessesssessssssessnssssssnsssesssssens Using the Query Language F AQ cccicncn iii ionaniavannaiiiniindi anand ah aendidenacntann Appendix vFoglight Client Reference sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesrsssesrssssocsossacsonsacsocsaceoceaeescsaeeesescenseeseesesnsestsaies Starting tHe VF OglOMEC Wena sists aa scestitectuctahiecltea hs ited N E ENA Viewing the Content of a vF oglight Client Support Bundle Browser Interface nianna Mies rans ivitan Ramin dena ar gent trdean einen Command Line Intertace sa acide dek kia Acti AL Gis ee aa hea oh hey Introduction to this Guide This chapter provides information about what is contained in the vFoglight Administration and Configuration Guide It also provides information about the vFoglight documentation suite and Vizioncore This chapter contains the following sections PAM MPMI iaaa A atari A A A ABOVE ME GUE cise ehh ea a e ae aa yFoglight Documentation SUE ai ncinditneniginidninianiinindminanianui nasties T RNG cise cecal esd padanthav ca N About Vonc e Mennari ieai a EEE AN 10 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide About vFoglight vFoglight helps IT organizations understand the virtual infrastructure by managing the relationships and interaction between all the components in the environment including data centers data stores clusters resource pools hosts
450. st Dats carvice Duccaneng Data CatalystDataService Core MonitoringFoticy ef8 a Catatyrt Databace Space Checking CatalystDatabase Core Monitoringroticy sefte a ataeat Fee Space Crees ing for Ones Catalyst ablespace Core MonitoringPoticy sefeaa PU Lrmeaten Windows_System_System_Table 05 Windows_System oran Derice Mot Fong NetMonitor_Servicetevels OS MetMortor eetea Device nants NetMonitee_ Serviced evels OS Nethoniter e9200 Ctee_uneenation Windows System Physical Disk OS Windows_System sfGa a Core ReportNotification sfet a omntiog Windows_System_EventLog OS Windows_System eoc N Delete Selected Suspend Alarms Resume Alarms s Add Ruh Siegert Aetions _ Resume Actions DisasleRues Enatie Rules For complete information about the Manage Rules dashboard see Chapter 6 Managing Rules on page 225 To return to the Administration dashboard click Administration in the breadcrumb trail To find out more about the server configuration that exist in your environment in the Current Statistic view click Server Version or Server OS The vFoglight Configuration dashboard appears in the display area 48 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Foghghi Coafigor stea Federation oder ation Moxie ansie Dat abase To return to the Administration dashboard click Administration in the breadcrumb trail 5 Inthe Administration dashboard observe the Currently Licensed Capabilities view The
451. st is a CollectionModelinstance ts a Modelinstance is a TopologyObject is a DataObject amp a Object Object Properties uniqueld 76797669 Ce32 4704 9fes Dodidsetds2 objectiO rl id mA versin ml topolegyObjectid 226 topologyObjectversionid amp 27 topolegyObjectVersion 3 abfortivaS t sett ato POROA Ee M A The Object Type Hierarchy area displays the hierarchical relationship between the selected topology type and its parent types The parent types appear as selectable items in the hierarchical listing If you click on any of the parent types the Instances box refreshes showing the entire set of instances for the parent type 4 Observe the object properties Use the scroll bar on the right to view the values contained in the object properties From here you can go to Retrieving Data on page 472 472 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Retrieving Data Once you retrieve information about one or more topology objects you can run scripts against a selected topology object and retrieve the data that it contains as required The Script Editor dashboard allows you to write and run scripts using the vFoglight query language and process scoping queries against one or more topology objects that exist in your monitoring system The query language allows you to specify the scope for a rule or derived metric A rule or derived metric must be scoped to a topology type and can optionally be scoped to specific inst
452. st persist before it is truncated Purge Policy gt Level 2 setting Purge Data is never purged from the system before the age value of the purge policy Data may however be retained for longer than the setting as the system waits to find an acceptable time to purge data One level policy including a purge Level 1 lt 15 minutes lt 15 minutes Data is persisted at the roll up interval defined in the Level 1 policy indefinitely A purge policy will define a minimum length of time that data must persist before it is truncated Purge Policy gt 15 minutes Purge Data is never purged from the system before the age value of the purge policy Data may however be retained for longer than the setting as the system waits to find an acceptable time to purge data Accessing the Manage Retention Policies Dashboard Use the Manage Retention Policies dashboard to create and edit retention policies for topology types and properties of topology types Each policy specifies one or more time periods after which data is rolled up and the granularity of the roll up Working with Data 379 Managing Retention Policies In the Manage Retention Policies dashboard the Age column specifies the amount of time allotted for data collection The Roll up Period defines the granularity of the collection period For example if Age is defined as one minute and the Roll up Period is defined as five min
453. sta Rica Web Address www dell com cr E Mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales la techsupport dell com 0800 012 0231 Czech Republic Prague Web Address support euro dell com E Mail Address czech _dell dell com International Access Technical 22537 2727 Code 00 echnica Support 53 c i Customer Service 22537 2707 ountry Code 420 ax 22537 2714 Technical Fax 22537 2728 Switchboard 22537 2711 Denmark Copenhagen Web Address Support euro dell com Intemational Acteks Technical Support l 7023 0182 Code 00 Customer Service Relational 7023 0184 Country Code 45 Home Small Business Customer Service 3287 5505 Switchboard Relational 3287 1200 Switchboard Fax Relational 3287 1201 Switchboard Home Small Business 3287 5000 Switchboard Fax Home Small Business 3287 5001 Dominica Web Address E Mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales www dell com dm la techsupport dell com toll free 1 866 278 6821 Dominican Republic Web Address E Mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales www dell com do la techsupport dell com 1 800 156 1588 Ecuador Web Address www dell com ec E Mail Address la techsupport dell com Technical Support Customer Service Sales Calling from Quito toll free 999 119 877 655 3355 Technical Support Customer Service Sales Calling from Guayaquil toll free 1800 999 119 877 655
454. such short term disruptions When the connection with the server is lost vFoglight agents continue to collect and store data from monitored hosts and forward that data to the server when the connection is restored without any additional configuration of the agents or agent manager components This feature is useful in situations when an agent temporarily loses a connection with the server However in some situations such as a longer term network outage you may need to increase the one hour time window to prevent the vFoglight Management Server to discard the data with timestamps that are older than one hour The length of that time window can be controlled with a virtual machine VM option foglight data_service max_past_timestamp_delta Add this option to the configuration file lt vfoglight_home gt config foglight config to change the length of the store and forward period in milliseconds Any data with older timestamps that is received and accepted by the vFoglight Management Server triggers data driven rules and derived metrics Time driven rules do not re evaluate data with older timestamps even if that data meets their conditions and would cause them to fire if collected in real time For more information about rule triggers see Chapter 6 Triggering rules on page 251 To enable the collection of data with older timestamps 1 On the computer on which the vFoglight Management Server is installed locate the lt vfoglight_home
455. sword For more information about different data types you can use see Creating Registry Variables on page 195 Registry Variable Reference This value references another registry variable When you select this option the Global Default area refreshes allowing you to select from available registry variables whose data type matches the data type of the registry variable that you are editing For example if the data type is Long clicking the box in the Global Default area shows a list containing the registry variables of the Long type that exist in your configuration 204 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Edit Registry Variable MyRegistrWariable oe Registry Variable Name MyRegistryVariable Cartridge Name No Cartridge Registry Value Type ong Description omments Sove pe M a C Static Value Registry Reference Global Defaut Default Value Pe 2DE maxSize OBSMon MaxDatabaseSize Scredde DBSMon WemingFreeTablespaceSize OBSMon FatalFreeTablespaceSize DBSMon CriticaiF ree TablespaceSize Note The value that you specify in this field applies to all topology types and objects other than those that you specify in the Registry Values table as described in Scoping variables to topology types or object instances on page 206 It is effective at all times except at the times set in the schedules added to the Default Value Performance Calendar as described in Using p
456. t When you find out the hierarchy of the topology type whose retention policies you want to edit you can proceed to Editing Retention Policies on page 386 For additional complete information about the Schema Browser dashboard see the vFoglight User Guide Editing Retention Policies The Manage Retention Policies dashboard allows you to edit an existing retention policy period The following example shows how you can edit the super type TopologyOb ject to change the default retention policies for all observations in your system Note Ifthe retention policy is inherited from another policy you have to click the topology type to invoke the Edit Retention Policy Period dialog Use the mouse to roll over the period listings to see if the policy is inherited and from which Topology Type the policy is inherited Working with Data 387 Managing Retention Policies To edit the default retention policy period Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Retention Policies Dashboard on page 378 1 In the Manage Retention Policies dashboard locate the TopologyOb ject type 2 Review the default retention policies for the TopologyOb ject type Expand the TopologyObject node to see the default policy periods A set of policies appears under the TopologyObject node O fm fe OO fmn ee 3 Edit the age of a retention policy period Choose a period and click its Age column The Edit Retention Policy
457. t Schedule view appears in the Manage Schedules dashboard Manege Viheduler Age JO DOA PISA A EDT Ede Schedule Copy of End of Oxy sete heme ETEEN A schechde that rune at the ond of the day This scheckie is used to Eriga an activity As a renk k does not have a sgrdicart duration Description Comments E Wed Age 30 2008 17 0000 EDT Daly No End Ewery 1 sayta IT A 2 If required edit the newly copied schedule For more information see Viewing and Editing Schedules on page 406 404 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Deleting Schedules Use the Delete Selected button on the Manage Schedules dashboard to delete a schedule as outlined below Note When a schedule is deleted all references to that schedule are removed as well any performance calendars that are based on that schedule are removed and the deleted schedule is removed from the list of effective and blackout schedules for rules To delete a schedule Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Manage Schedules Dashboard on page 397 1 In the Manage Schedules dashboard select the row containing the schedule that you want to delete 2 Click the Delete Selected button at the bottom The Schedule Delete Confirmation dialog box appears Schedule Delete Confirmation x Are you sure you want to delete the Following schedules End of Day 3 In the Schedule Delete Confirmation dialog box click OK
458. t bundle content 498 derived metrics 341 license capabilities 73 rule definitions 245 rule schedules 240 rule summary 242 schedule definitions 405 schedules 407 server support bundle content 80 thresholds 360 values of registry variables 209 variable definitions 194 J JVM view 60 L License 74 75 License Confirmation dialog box 74 75 License Information view 48 licenses deleting 74 installing 70 managing 69 accessing Manage Licenses dashboard 69 viewing capabilities 72 M Mail Global Settings view 61 62 280 Manage 353 Manage Derived Metrics dashboard 39 248 333 334 335 336 339 341 342 343 accessing 333 Index 521 Add Role Permission dialog box 337 Add User Permission dialog box 337 adding calculations to derived metrics 344 Copy Derivation dialog box 339 340 copying derived metrics 339 creating derived metrics 342 defining derived metrics 344 Delete Derivation dialog box 341 deleting derived metrics 341 Edit Derived Metric view 342 Edit Role Permission dialog box 338 Edit User Permission dialog box 338 editing derived metric definitions 341 editing derived metric permissions 335 Expression Editor dialog box 482 483 484 485 487 488 491 getting started with defining derived metrics 344 Scoping Query Editor dialog box 475 476 477 478 479 setting derived metric value types 350 triggering derived metrics 348 viewing derived metric definitions 341 Manage Derived Metrics node in navigation
459. t entries when editing a secondary property Note This pane is initially blank Select an agent adapter In the Agent Properties dashboard in the Adapter pane click an agent adapter The Types pane refreshes showing the agent types that use the selected agent adapter to communicate with the vFoglight Management Server 170 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Agent Properties Ad 10 2008 5 102 OM COT m q cm FgIAM ApacheSvr AppMonitor Windows_System Logf ilter NetMonitor SNMP WebMonitor 4 Select an agent type In the Agent Properties dashboard in the Type pane click an agent type The Agent pane refreshes showing the agent properties for the selected agent type Aquat Propertie dd 90 2008 NINI OM EDT Agent Properties Foam ApacheSer Sample Frequency vecem s 300 AppMenitor Use Quick Check C True False Windows _System Quick Check Time EO Log fiter Database Metwenitor Page Data atter Eda Core SNE Process List WebMenitor AppticateaPrecess List AppUsiFie 3 EdE Ciena 5 Observe agent properties A list based property has the Edit and Clone buttons to its right Managing Agents 171 Managing Agent Properties by Type Application Process List AppListFile v List property A primary property appears as a box or an option Sample Frequency seconds 300 Use Quick Check True False Primary properties Quick Check Time 60
460. t exist in the specified cartridge Example If you have the OS Cartridge installed and you want to look up the retention policy for the Windows_System_Top_CPU_Table use the agent name OS Windows_System as the filter The list of topology types refreshes showing the tables that come with the selected agent including the Windows_System_Top_CPU_Table Manage Retention Policies Working with Data Managing Retention Policies Manage Retention Policies Filtered by Cartridge OS Windows_System o O Arna Gs LOS Windows Systom Showing topologies 1 16 of 16 Show 30_ topologios per page A C a a S TA S A S a S A Cc S AA ie Wntoe Syn Sowctaoe TP endo Sram sweetie TT Cc S Widen Speen ToPCowector S CRRA E FE ie Wndoe Srom torecre TT E enso O o CR S T S Delete Selected From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures Deleting Retention Policies on page 381 Editing Retention Policies on page 386 Creating Retention Policies on page 388 Deleting Retention Policies Use the Delete Selected button on the Manage Retention Policies dashboard to delete the retention policy associated with a particular topology object as outlined below Oa 17 2008 124106 PM EOT 381 Viewing the Hierarchy of Topology Types in the Database Schema on page 383 382 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide To delete a retention policy
461. ta Driven Scoping the rule Having set the basic rule properties you scope the rule to the specific topology object that you want to monitor First you select WebLogicEJBInstance from the Topology Type box and then click the Append button A to the right of the menu to insert the name of this topology type into the Rule Scope box After inserting the name of the topology type you must manually type a space in the Rule Scope box followed by the word where followed by another space Next you specify the EJB instance and application in this box using the query language Since you want this rule to apply to a specific EJB instance EJB_Instancel you specify it by name in the Rule Scope box To do so you select the topology type property name from the Property drop down menu You then place the cursor in the Rule Scope box where you want your selection to be inserted and click the Append button A to the right of the Property menu After inserting the property name you manually specify the value for the property as follows name EJB_Instancel You want to specify another property after the instance name so you manually type a space in the Rule Scope box followed by the word and followed by another space after name EJB_Instancel You then specify the application name in the Rule Scope box using the following syntax ejb application name MyApplication When you finish editing the information in this bo
462. taae mtstge Same One ram seee thee Same aee mee ee Coama AA me At as es e From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures e Editing permissions of derived metrics on page 335 e Copying derived metrics on page 339 e Deleting derived metrics on page 341 e Viewing and editing derived metrics on page 341 Editing permissions of derived metrics vFoglight allows you to control access to derived metrics For each derived metric you can grant or deny read write or control access to roles or users For more information about security concepts in vFoglight see Chapter 3 Managing Users and Security on page 105 vFoglight employs the following behavior when it comes to permissions of derived metrics e If no one has a permission to the derived metric everyone has a permission 336 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide e If one has a permission to the derived metric others with undefined permission do not have any permission e Final permission is based on a combination of the role user and derived metric defined on the server side Use the Edit Permissions button on the Manage Derived Metrics dashboard to navigate to the Edit Permissions for Derived Metric area that allows you to add or edit permissions to roles and users as outlined below The Edit Permissions for Derived Metric area contains two tables that show the permissions for each vFoglight user or role
463. ter the list of variables using filters At the top of the Manage Registry Variables dashboard in the Filter By Variable Name box type mail The Manage Registry Variables dashboard refreshes showing only the registry variables that start with the mail prefix Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 281 Working with Rules Massage Regiitry Variables Sap 17 2008 20057 PM EDT Showing 1 8 of 8 registry variables as of Sep 17 2008 12 02 31 Refresh E iter by Verne aa ol j ea v D Barit Bx teal Deft m v Dy Cartridge _ Clee Fihers Vertahte Mame a Twe Uhobul Def wat Heoped Sefealt Teak datos Boolean false wha amp akrom String N A NJA S matheas String NJA WA 1 Q cat peisward Passwordvalue N A WA nok port String N A NA C 3 Gat roceent String N A NJA J DAL OROL AAOC String N A WA j String N NJA 43 Zi Add Variable Delete Solect d ete All selest Hene Set the global default values of the following mail variables mail from The default email address used by the vFoglight Management Server from which emails are sent mail host The default email host used by the vFoglight Management Server from which emails are sent mail password The default password for logging into the email server mail port The default port number of the email server used by the vFoglight Management Server from which emails are sent mail receipient The default email address used by the vFoglight Management Server to which emai
464. that will live indefinitely until a purge in generation 1 2 or 3 How vFoglight populates database generations Moving data from memory to the database The data service periodically writes data from the short term memory cache to generation 1 The frequency by which data are written is defined in the first retention policy for more information see How retention policies interact with database generations on page 375 This interval should not exceed 15 minutes to prevent the vFoglight Management Server memory from growing too large Database roll ups A nightly roll up job aggregates data and writes those data to generations 2 and 3 The roll up is only done once daily according to the time set in the Daily Database Maintenance schedule For more information about schedules in vFoglight see Chapter 8 Using Schedules Working with Data 375 Managing Retention Policies How retention policies interact with database generations Both mechanisms for populating the repository from memory to the database database roll ups use the retention policies defined in the Retention Policies Dashboard as the guidelines for how they store data A retention policy is the set of definitions for a given object that indicate how data is stored Each definition within a policy contains two parameters e Age Specifies the age at which the data is eligible for a roll up e Roll up period Specifies the period of time over which the data
465. the cartridges that are included in the license mar Cartridge Installation v at a High Awatlability v stio Partarmance Cakeaders V Configuration Manegement Y ss E LDAP istagration O taadi Request Trace Ansty Y E Data Archiving Tranding Y Cartridge Liceese Meme Licensed cartridges License capabilities In the Licensed Capability Summary area an icon appears to the right of each capability indicating if the capability is enabled or disabled 2 enabled Capability is enabled M amp disabled Capability is disabled Cartridge License Name lists those cartridges that are licensed with the selected vFoglight license 2 Additionally in the license list under the Licensed Capability Summary area the Capabilities column shows icons of those capabilities for which each license is enabled DERASESeae e To find out which vFoglight cartridges are licensed for a license point to the Cartridge Installation icon A tooltip appears indicating the cartridges that are covered by the selected license 74 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Cartridge Installation All For information on how to install a cartridge see Chapter 4 Managing Cartridges on page 147 e Ifa license includes a license for one or more agents it shows agent icons 3 When you point your mouse over that icon a tooltip appears showing the agent name along with the number of licensed agents Deleting Licenses The licens
466. the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time without notice Quest does not make any commitment to update the information contained in this document License Credits and Third Party Information To view license credit information click the License Credits link on the Welcome to vFoglight online help page Administration and Configuration Guide March 2009 Version 5 2 4 Table of Contents Introduction to this Guide ssssssssssssccsscessocssccsccesecessoesecessieeeceeaceenceesceesoeesueesecesnceeacesaieesaceseeeeesiesnieenreeniien 9 ADOUEVFOQNONt tects Asccniitas cated iri nd ia aia dain i A AE RA Aha ead Mona auabes About this Guiden kiiin naaa i a aia iian VF oglight Documentation Suite ou ssessesssesseessesssesssssssssneessssssessessussnessuesscssessscssssscssscsussssssssesnsessssnsesssnesneesnesneesneeseesees Core Documentation Set 4 Cartridge Documentation Sets Feedback ori the Documentations icrai a ita aaah 13 TOXECONVENUONS anna a eter d weit tendered aan a hima ania a a 14 About Vizioncore SING scisadcsec es cases uacecd ctseares istivs a E nein ded ias tek Ma nasa Aide A EO a 14 Contacting Dellic isis hu Sew an dahil eiinti aed data te Sadek aia aaa Dead ad hadi aa is 16 About the Administration Module sssini 29 About Models and S Cope VEOIIQN nainn 30 Getting Started with the Administration Module sssssssssessscsessessessecssessscss
467. the navigation panel click the right facing arrow F on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Data gt Manage Retention Policies The Manage Retention Policies dashboard appears in the display area 380 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Manage Retention Policies Apr 29 2008 3 50 18 PM EDT Manage Retention Policies Filtered by Cartridge Core By Cartridge Filter Core lat Showing topologies 1 10 of 140 SSS Tee ee SE ENSE Show 10 topologies per page Topology Type Property Name lt Age Roll up Period mAgent AgentHealthState AgentState i i ol AggregateModelInstance AlarmChangeType AlarmSeverity H ApplicationTier ApplicationTopology hiana a El ApplicationTopologyModel Delete Selected 3 To sort the list of retention policies by the topology type to which they apply click the Topology Type Property Name column heading as required Optional Filter the retention policies by the subset of topology types for any installed cartridges in your monitoring environment Use this filter to search for isolate and apply policies on the basis of each individual case In the Filter area click By Cartridge and select the cartridge from the list that appears The Manage Retention Policies dashboard refreshes showing only those topology types tha
468. the number of its children in the topology model To find out more about the federation configuration click an entry in the Federation view The vFoglight Server Topology view appears in the display area 50 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Administration Home gt Foglight Server Topology tor012991 prod quest corp Type Child Standalone Status MP Connected Version 5 20 Last Disconnect Time n a HTTP Link http tor012991 prod quest corp 8080 HTTPs Link https tor012991 prod quest corp 8443 To return to the Administration dashboard click Administration in the breadcrumb trail 8 Inthe Administration dashboard observe the Audited Activities view The Audited Activities view lists log entries that show information about operations performed on the vFoglight Management Server For example this list includes information about agent activation agent package deployment user authentication and other types of tasks From here you can proceed to configuring vFoglight as required by your business needs To find out about the features that are offered by the Administration module see Looking at Administration Tasks on page 50 Looking at Administration Tasks If you have the required roles you can use the vFoglight Administration module to carry out any of the tasks listed in the table below Note For more information about roles and security in vFoglight see Chapter 3 Managing Users
469. the purpose of this example the Processor Load rule is scoped to the Processor topology type that monitors the utilization of all Processor objects instances in the topology model and fires when the utilization for a processor reaches 90 in a 24 hour period For instructions on how to create this rule see To scope a rule to the Processor type on page 316 Unlike the Processor Load rule that monitors all instances of the Processor type the Host Processor Load rule is scoped to the Host type that monitors all of the Processor instances for a particular Host object and fires if all of the Processor objects for the scoped Host object reach the utilization of 90 For instructions on how to create this tule see To scope a rule to the Host type on page 322 316 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide The following diagram illustrates the scope of each of the rules that you are about to create from the topology model perspective J Host A Host B PatcentiserTine T a Rule Host Processor Load _ ll Rule Processor Load 7 To scope a rule to the Processor type 1 Create a simple data driven rule with the Processor scope a Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow on the left b On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Rules amp Notifications gt Create
470. their password from the one you set in the Create User dialog box e If the user belongs to group that has a Security role which allows them to access to the Manage Users dashboard you can instruct the user to change the password using the Change Password button on the Manage Users dashboard For instructions see Changing Passwords on page 114 e If the user has no access to the Manage Users dashboard you can force a password change the first time the user attempts to log into vFoglight For instructions on how to force a password change see Forcing Password Changes on page 115 Adding Users to Groups Use the Edit Groups button on the Manage Users dashboard to add a user to one or more groups as outlined in the procedure below Alternatively you can use the Manage Groups dashboard to assign users or roles to one or more groups For information see Editing Users in Groups on page 123 and Assigning Roles to a Group on page 124 Alternatively you can assign groups to users using the security assigngroup command that comes with the fglemd interface For more information see the Command Line Reference Guide Managing Users and Security 113 Managing Users To add a user to groups Note This procedure continues from Creating Users on page 111 1 Inthe Manage Users dashboard select the row containing the user account whose groups you want to edit 2 Click the Edit Groups button in the lower ri
471. this chapter to find out how to gather vFoglight diagnostic data during run time view port numbers that are used by vFoglight or manage and install vFoglight licenses or support bundles using the Setup amp Support dashboards Chapter 3 Managing Users and Security Explains the security concepts and their entities used in vFoglight such as users groups and roles It contains step by step instructions on how to use these entities in order to effectively manage security in vFoglight using the Users amp Security dashboards Chapter 4 Managing Cartridges Contains information on how to install and manage cartridges and download agent packages Use this chapter to learn about Introduction to this Guide 11 Aboutthis Guide cartridge related concepts in vFoglight and to find out how to install and manage cartridges using the Cartridges dashboards Chapter 5 Managing Agents Includes conceptual and hands on information about collection agents and explains their purpose in vFoglight It contains instructions on how to edit agent properties when required using the Agents dashboards Chapter 6 Working with Rules and Registry Discusses the concepts of rules and registry variables and their relations with the topology model in vFoglight It includes step by step instructions on how to efficiently create edit and manage vFoglight rules and registry variables using the Rules amp Registry dashboards It also contains several real life exam
472. time range Registry Value Period Begin Time Period End Time Registry Value Bo 10 15 08 3 05 PM 10 18 08 12 00 AM pete xyz com 10 18 08 12 00 AM 10 20 08 12 00 AM ron xyz com 10 20 08 12 00 AM 10 21 08 3 43 PM pete xyz com 11 View the logic that determines a registry value that appears in the list Click a row containing a registry value The Registry Lookup Path dialog box appears showing the variable name scoped topology type and object if applicable and the time period during which the selected value is valid 216 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Registry Lookup Path x Variable Name SYSADMIN Topology Type Name Host Topology Object tor013008 prod quest corp Period 10 15 08 3 05 PM 10 18 08 12 00 4M topology type object Host tor013008 prod quest corp Example Assigning Multiple Values to a Registry Variable You have several groups of servers in your monitored environment You want an email to be sent to the system administrator if one of the servers becomes unavailable but a different administrator is responsible for each group Instead of creating a different rule with a different email action for each group you create a registry variable called Administrator and then assign it a different value the email address of the appropriate administrator for each group of servers You then create a single simple rule that fires if any of the servers become unavailable and which uses the Admi
473. tion If a schedule only includes one schedule item then that item is the schedule If a schedule includes multiple schedule items then they collectively form the schedule For example if you wanted a schedule to run indefinitely from 10 00 am to 11 00 am daily and on the first day of the month from 8 00 am to 6 00 pm but also every Saturday from 11 00 am to 4 00 pm in May add a schedule item for each of these time spans to the schedule You can create new schedules and manage the existing ones using the dashboards that come with the Administration module For complete information see the following sections e Managing Schedules on page 397 e Creating Schedules on page 407 Using Schedules 397 Managing Schedules Managing Schedules The Manage Schedules dashboard allows you to manage existing schedules assign permissions to schedules and other features For complete information see the following sections e Accessing the Manage Schedules Dashboard on page 397 e Editing Schedule Permissions on page 399 e Copying Schedules on page 402 e Deleting Schedules on page 404 e Viewing Schedule Definitions on page 405 e Viewing and Editing Schedules on page 406 Accessing the Manage Schedules Dashboard The Manage Schedules dashboard includes a list of the schedules that exist in your monitoring environment and includes an interface for adding and deleting schedules To access the Mana
474. tion directory Setting Up vF oglight 91 Backing Up Upgrading and Restoring vFoglight vFoglight Management Server on Windows with Oracle on a remote computer Option Use Oracle tools to back up the database Tip To restore the database after choosing this backup method use Oracle tools e Stop the vFoglight Management Server e Use backup tools from your Windows environment to back up the vFoglight installation directory The procedures below contain detailed information on how to back up the vFoglight installation directory and the database without backing up the file system or the Windows registry To back up vFoglight on a Windows system 1 Select Stop vFoglight from the Start menu to shut down the vFoglight Management Server If you are running vFoglight as a Windows service stop the service by choosing Start gt Programs gt Administrative Tools gt Services and stopping the vFoglight Management Server service Important If you are using an external database and intend to upgrade vFoglight after backing it up you should leave the database running Doing so allows the installer to successfully upgrade the database Note Failing to shut down the vFoglight Management Server correctly may result in errors Verify that the vFoglight Management Server is stopped a Press Ctrl Alt Delete on your keyboard then click Task Manager The Windows Task Manager opens b Select the Processes tab to inspect the list
475. tion for the Critical Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 299 Working with Rules severity and the conditions for the Fatal and Warning levels have already been defined the list shows two options Fatal and Warning as illustrated below Fatal Warning Caution Attempting to copy a condition for a rule that has no conditions defined results in error b Select the severity level whose condition you want to copy The Condition tab refreshes 3 Verify the settings of the newly copied severity level variables and actions in the Severity Level Variables and Action tabs 4 Optional Edit the newly copied severity level variables and actions if required For instructions see one of the following sections e Adding severity level variables on page 256 e Defining actions on page 278 5 Save your changes to the rule condition by clicking the Save button above the Condition tab From here you can proceed to Defining actions on page 278 Associating Rules with Schedules Once you have defined one or more conditions for a rule you can associate the rule with a schedule either as an effective period or as a blackout period An effective period is a schedule during which you want a rule to be evaluated For example you might want to set your company s hours of operation as the effective period for a rule You can also set blackout periods for a rule A blackout is a schedule during which evaluation of the r
476. tion from the secondary property The property from which you removed the secondary list appears red indicating unsaved edits Purge Data after AppMonitor_PurgeDays_List v 4 Save your changes to the agent properties In the Agent pane in the lower right corner click the Save button The Agent pane refreshes Managing Agents 179 Assigning Blackouts to Agent Instances Assigning Blackouts to Agent Instances A schedule defines a period of time during which an action occurs Blackout schedules prevent agents from collecting data You can use an existing schedule or create another one if required For more information about schedules see Chapter 8 Using Schedules on page 395 An agent blackout is a scheduled event during which the agent does not collect data for set intervals For example you might want to set the times when regularly scheduled maintenance is performed on a server as the blackout period for the agents that run on that server Use the Agent Blackouts dashboard to manage agent blackouts To manage agent blackouts Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open the navigation panel click the right facing arrow iF on the left 2 On the navigation panel under Dashboards choose Administration gt Agents gt Agent Blackouts The Agent Blackouts dashboard appears in the display area listing
477. to 400 employees Preferred Accounts Division Sales over 400 employees Public Sales government agencies educational institutions and medical institutions Global Segment Japan Individual User Individual User Online Sales Individual User Real Site Sales Switchboard support jp dell com toll free 0120 198 26 81 44 520 1435 toll free 0120 198 433 81 44 556 3894 toll free 0120 198 498 81 44 556 4162 toll free 0120 98 1 690 81 44 556 3468 044 556 3490 044 556 3801 044 556 4240 044 556 1465 044 556 3433 044 556 5963 044 556 3469 044 556 1657 044 556 2203 044 556 4649 044 556 4300 Korea Seoul International Access Web Address Technical Support Customer Service Technical Support Dimension PDA Electronics Support ap dell com toll free 080 200 3800 toll free 080 200 3801 Code 001 Country Code 82 and Accessories City Code 2 Sales toll free 080 200 3600 i Fax 2194 6202 Switchboard 2194 6000 Latin America Customer Technical Support Austin Texas 512 728 4093 U S A Customer Service Austin Texas U S A 512 728 3619 Fax Technical Support and Customer Service 512 728 3883 Austin Texas U S A Sales Austin Texas U S A 512 728 4397 SalesFax Austin Texas U S A 512 728 4600 or 512 728 3772 Luxemborg Web Address Support euro dell com International Access Support 3420808075 Code 00 Home Small Business Sales 32 0 2 713 15 96 Corporate Sales 26 25 77 81 C
478. to multiple agents A primary property appears as a box or an option Sample Frequency seconds 300 Use Quick Check O True False Primary properties Quick Check Time 60 2 Edit the property as required Note All text boxes on the Agent Properties dashboard have a limit of 64 characters The name and value of the edited property appears red on the Agent pane to indicate the change Additionally a Save button appears in the lower right corner of the Agent pane Managing Agents 173 Managing Agent Properties by Type Collection Rate Sample Frequency secomds o Use Quick Check True amp False Quick Check Time 5 Database Purge Data after AppMonitor PurgeDeys_List Ede Gone Process List Apptkation Process List pouse Ea Clone Detail Process Info True C false e 3 Click the Save button The Agent pane refreshes Cloning lists in secondary properties Each secondary property can have one or more lists to which it can be set Cloning a list allows you to create multiple instances of the same list and assign them to different agent instances as required This type of configuration creates potentially instance specific lists overriding the default behavior of lists in which they are shared amongst agent instances When you clone a list its selection of rows and fields remains unchanged You can alter it if required at a later time For more information see Editing lists in secondary properties
479. tored host In the Agent Type box click script agent type whose package you deployed in Deploying Script Agent Packages on page 454 For example MyScriptAgent MyScriptA gent Specify the name of the agent instance that you are about to create e To assign a specific name to the agent instance in the Instance Name box type that name For example MyAgent e To assign a generic name select the Generate Name check box Click Create The Create Agent dialog box closes and the Create Agent Results dialog box appears showing the status of the operation 460 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Status After a few moments in the Create Agent Results dialog box in the Status column of the Progress table a green check mark appears indicating a success of the operation Working with vF oglight Tooling 461 Building Script Agents Create Agent Results Task Creating agentis Progress Message Status Creating MyScriptA4gent MyScript4gent_on_tor01 2991 prodaues op nN The Agent Status dashboard refreshes showing the newly created agent instance tor012991 prod quest c MyScriptagent MyScrip SPI MyScriptAgent 1 2 0 x 6 Activate the newly added script agent instance a In the Agent Status area select the row containing the script agent instance and click Activate The Agent Operation dialog box appears showing the status of the activation process 462 vF oglight
480. tric The Create Derived Metric dashboard appears in the display area tome Daneo Meme le inten im sa z TS vha type i l eroro s 344 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide From here you can proceed to Defining Derived Metrics on page 344 Defining Derived Metrics Derived metrics are calculated from one or more raw or derived metrics They must be scoped to a topology type and can optionally be scoped to specific objects of that type If a rule or derived metric is not scoped to specific objects it applies to all objects of that type Many derived metrics are included with vFoglight and its cartridges You can also create customized derived metrics from within the Administration module For instructions see the following sections e Getting started with derived metric definitions on page 344 e Adding calculations to derived metrics on page 344 e Triggering derived metrics on page 348 e Setting the value type on page 350 Getting started with derived metric definitions Once you create a derived metric you can add name it and proceed to edit its settings as required To get started with derived metric definitions Note This procedure continues from Creating Derived Metrics on page 342 e Provide a descriptive name for the derived metric In the Create Derived Metric dashboard in the Derived Metric Name box type the name that you want to assign to the
481. tring Desc raptionAC comments E mail address for global system administrator Save Static Value C Registry Reference Global Defaut Delu Vaks Performance Calendars Schosse Nare vae Schedule Hame Fazeri teu J cedd Static Value C Registry Reference Value o Topotogy Ctyect Name scoped Defea Add Ragisry Value Copy Registy Variable Got Ragety Venable List Oolee This Variable 5 Assign an email address to each monitored host by adding two host specific values to the SYSADMIN variable To add a topology scoped value to the registry variable complete the following steps a At the bottom of the Edit Registry Variable view click Add Registry Value The Manage Registry Variables dashboard refreshes showing the Create Registry Value Step 1 view 220 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Manage Registry Yariables Sep 19 2008 11 39 28 AM EDT Select Topology and Default Value Add Performance Calendars Create Registry Value for SYSADMIN Step 1 Select Topology and Default Value Registry Variable Name SYSADMIN Registry Value Type String Topology Type Select Type x Topology Object All Objects Static Value C Registry Reference ne c Cancel Default Value Set the scope of the SYSADMIN variable to the Host type In the Create Registry Value Step 1 view on the right of Topology Type click Select Type In the list that appears u
482. ts showing 1 1 of 1 Hosts as of Jal 16 2008 12 56 16 terea terOt 2991 pred quest corp 5 2 windows 51 an About the Administration Module 45 Viewing the Administration Dashboard To return to the Administration dashboard click Administration in the breadcrumb trail In the Administration dashboard observe the Current Statistics view The Current Statistic view shows the number of cartridges rules and users in your monitoring environment and shows the version of the vFoglight Management Server and its OS version e To find out more about the agents that are collecting data from monitored hosts in your environment in the Current Statistic view click Active Agents The Agent Status dashboard appears in the display area Admmeninon Moma gt Agaat tates Leake OM EL Agent Status showing 1 2 of 2 agents as of RA 16 2008 11 19 15 teteh Her bystatene ot om Mamere e I show actboe Cady Clear Fitters Da Dtetnane Agentitune Namespace Type Version Build Tags O totiz prod A SPietwork 5 2 3 23200897164 toeOt2991 prod MyAgent z Windows_Syste 5 2 3 523 20099716 x Deploy Agent Package J Select All Crate Agent J J J nn Sect rome To return to the Administration dashboard click Administration in the breadcrumb trail e To find out more about the cartridges that are installed on the vFoglight Management Server in the Current Statistic view click Installed Cartridges The Cartridge Inventory dash
483. tton in the lower left comer The Create Role dialog box appears 132 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Create Role Name 2 Specify the name of the role that you want to create a Inthe Create Role dialog box in the Name box type the user name For example test b Click Create The Create Role dialog box closes and the Manage Roles dashboard refreshes to show the newly created role test Internal When you create roles their type appears as Internal on the listing Editing Groups for a Role Use the Edit Groups button on the Manage Roles dashboard to quickly edit one or more groups for a role Alternatively if you need to edit multiple roles for a single group use the Manage Groups dashboard For information see Assigning Roles to a Group on page 124 To edit groups for a role Note This procedure continues from Creating Roles on page 131 1 In the Manage Roles dashboard select the row containing the role whose groups you want to edit 2 Click the Edit Groups button in the bottom of the Manage Roles dashboard The Edit Groups dialog box appears Managing Users and Security 133 Managing Roles _ Edit Groups test Cartridge Developers Foglight Administrators aaa Foglight Operators oF Foglight Security Administrators Save Cancel Note The dialog box lists existing vFoglight groups If you previously added any groups they also appear in the dialog For information
484. turns the averane of latest aneneSize metrics of all Insert Close 4 Specify the function arguments as required using one or more Arg boxes The first argument represents the object on which the function will be performed such as a metric specified using the format met ric or a topology object within the rule or derived metric scope specified as scope See Using Functions with Conditions and Expressions on page 491 for more information Tip Hover the cursor over the question mark icon next to one of the argument fields to make a tooltip appear This tooltip states which type of parameter is expected for that field 5 Click the Insert button The dialog box closes and the Condition rules or Expression derived metrics box refreshes showing the newly added function From here you can proceed to Validating conditions or expressions on page 490T 490 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Validating conditions or expressions When you have finished editing the rule condition or derived metric expression you can validate its syntax To validate a condition or expression Note This procedure continues from Editing conditions and expressions on page 482 e Click the Validate button EA above the Condition rules or Expression derived metrics box If the syntax is correct a success message appears above the Condition rules or Expression derived metrics box Exa
485. u database_name p P database_port_number FOGLIGHT gt backupfile_name sql Where Setting Up vF oglight 95 Backing Up Upgrading and Restoring vFoglight e database_name is the database name as configured by the foglight database name parameter in lt vfoglight_home gt config foglight config e database_port_number is the database port number as configured by the foglight database port parameter in lt vfoglight_home gt config foglight config e backupfile_name is the name of the backup SQL file 3 After the backup SQL file is created stop the MySQL database by issuing the shutdownDb bat command from the lt vfoglight_home gt bin directory 4 Verify that the database is down by verifying that the database process mysqld exe is no longer running using the Task Manager The backup of the MySQL database is now complete Note vFoglight Management Server ships with the InnoDB Hot Backup tool You can use this tool to back up an embedded MySQL database as an alternative to the above procedure For information on how to use this tool see To back up an embedded MySQL database using the InnoDB Hot Backup tool on page 95 To back up an embedded MySQL database using the InnoDB Hot Backup tool 1 Create a directory structure that will contain the backup files You can create a master directory with two subdirectories one that stores configuration files that will be used by the InnoDB Hot Backup tool and another
486. uble String Integer Integer Integer String Integer Integer Integer Global Default 85 0 iad 70 0 95 0 95 0 2 0 95 98 90 http TORO1 2991 prod quest c 80 90 70 IMJ From here you can proceed to any of the following procedures e Inserting registry variables on page 483 e Inserting metrics and topology object properties on page 484 e Inserting Groovy functions on page 487 Inserting registry variables Caution Although you can insert a registry variable into a derived metric expression it is not recommended that you do so Using a registry variable in a derived metric expression could lead to unpredictable and confusing results since the resulting metric might change its definition at different points in time The Registry Variable tab in the Condition Editor rules and Expression Editor derived metrics dialog box lists the registry variables that are available based on the rule or 484 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide derived metric scope Each registry variable s type and global default value also appear in this table Note The list of registry variables displayed in this table is based on the list shown on the Manage Registry Variables dashboard Administration gt Rules amp Notifications gt Manage Registry Variables This table is empty if no registry variables are available for the associated topology type To insert a registr
487. ue is var3 A CPU Bottleneck is being detected on varl Check the top processes using the Top_CPU_Table to determine which processes are the greatest contributors to CPU Loads or follow the vFoglight online help to find out if the system is CPU constrained Please use the following URL to obtain alarm details foglight_rule_alarm_link Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 257 Working with Rules In the above example the Text and Subject variables make use of the expression type variables var1 var2 and var3 Furthermore the Text and Subject variables can be used in an alarm message in an email action that sends that information to a specified recipient when the rule generates an alarm If you are defining a simple severity rule you can add one set of severity level variables Multiple severity rules allow you to add one set of variables to each severity level that you want to define Additionally you can create rule level variables and reference them in expressions defined in different severity levels within the same rule For more information see Defining Rule Level Variables on page 303 For details on vFoglight registry variables see Working with vFoglight Registry Variables on page 184 To add a severity level variable Note This procedure continues from Defining the rule scope on page 253 1 Open the Conditions Alarms and Actions tab multiple severity rules or Conditions and Act
488. ule is suspended for set intervals For example you might want to set the times when regularly scheduled maintenance is performed on a server as the blackout period for a rule If a rule has no schedules associated with it then it is always active If you only add effective schedules to a rule then it is automatically inactive at all times other than those specified by the effective schedules Conversely if you only add blackout schedules to a 300 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide rule then it is automatically active at all times other than those specified by the blackout schedules If you add both effective and blackout schedules to a rule then it will be active only at the times specified by the effective schedules minus the times specified by the blackout schedules This is because blackout schedules take precedence over effective schedules For example suppose you add two schedules to a rule an effective schedule that runs Monday to Friday 9 am to 5 pm and a blackout schedule that runs every Tuesday from 10am to llam The rule will be active every Monday Wednesday Thursday and Friday from 9 am to 5 pm but will only be active from 9am to 10am and from 11am to 5pm on Tuesdays To associate a rule with schedules Note This procedure continues from Defining conditions for data driven and time driven rules on page 263 1 Open the Schedules tab The Schedules tab opens in the display area Arad
489. ult functions available with vFoglight cause calculations to be performed on metrics In addition the functions alarmCount changeSummary descendents findObservationEntries getContainedObjects and getObservationTrend cause values to be returned for topology objects based on a specified scope In most cases you specify scope as the parameter for one of these functions using the scope variable causes the function to be performed on the topology objects included in the rule or derived metric scope However there may be situations in which you want to specify an alternate scope See Advanced scripting example on page 495 for more information The following functions are supported by vFoglight for use with rule conditions and expressions and derived metric expressions e alarmCount Returns the current number of alarms for each topology object referenced by this function s scope parameter e avg Calculates an average arithmetic mean from metric values If you are calculating an average for multiple topology objects vFoglight will calculate an average from the metric values for each object then calculate a second average from the averages for the objects 492 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide changeSummary Returns the list of topology property changes for each topology object referenced by this function s scope parameter over the specified time period supplied in milliseconds checkObservationAlar
490. uns user defined actions when the condition for that rule is met Simple rules do not create alarms and unlike multiple severity rules see below they don t have severity levels A simple rule is logic that is triggered by data See Defining rule types on page 250 for more information Multiple Severity Rule A multiple severity rule is a more complex type of rule that can include up to five levels of severity These levels are described in more detail in Defining rule types on page 250 This type of rule always creates an alarm when the condition associated with one of its severity levels is met Severity State A severity state is the highest severity condition of a multiple severity rule that evaluated to true Fire Prevention A group of settings that prevent actions and alarms from firing repeatedly for a rule Effective Period A scheduled period during which a rule is active Blackout Period A scheduled period during which a rule is inactive Monitoring Data Data that has been collected from your monitored environment by the agents and transformed into a standard format for use by the vFoglight Management Server Monitoring data includes both metrics and topology object properties Function Rule conditions and expressions are matched against monitoring data Functions cause calculations to be performed on the data specified in conditions and expressions allowing the data to be modified before it is matched 224 v
491. uration Guide Threshold Bounds Level Type Inc Info Runnin so metric availablePagingSpace num_std 105 To bind a threshold level to a registry variable Note This procedure continues from Selecting metrics and threshold levels on page 363 or Viewing and editing thresholds on page 360 1 Select the severity type of the threshold level Click Level and select a severity level from the list that appears 2 Select the Registry Variable Threshold Bound option The Registry Variable Name box appears below the Bound Type options allowing you to specify the registry variable to which you want to bind the severity level O gt mete ic Threshold Bound Bound Type Registry Variable Threshold Bound O constant Threshold Bound Registry ariable Name Citnclusive 3 Click Registry Variable Name and select a variable from the list that appears 4 If you want vFoglight to acknowledge that the threshold is reached when the threshold level exceeds the value of the binding registry variable ensure that the Inclusive check box is cleared If you want vFoglight to acknowledge that the threshold is reached when the threshold level reaches the value of the binding registry variable check the Inclusive check box 5 Click the Add button on the right of the Bound Type options Working with Data 369 Working with Thresholds The newly created registry variable threshold bound appears in the Threshold Bounds table Th
492. use the calendar controls that appear to specify the start date Tip The Day box accepts the values between 1 and 31 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 31 negative values are not accepted 420 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide August 2008 29 30 31 e oF 12 13 14 19 20 24 2 27 28 SESE 2007 2008 2003 Ok Cancel b Use the Start Time hh mm boxes to specify the hour and minute of the start time Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 23 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 23 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted c Use the Duration hh mm boxes to specify the hour and minute of the start time Tip The Hour box accepts any positive values The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted 3 Specify the recurrence pattern In the Recurrence Pattern area use the Every hh mm boxes to specify the hour and minute of the start time Important The recurrence period must be longer than the duration specified in step 2 For example if the duration of the schedule item is three hours the recurrence periods should occur at intervals that are longer than thr
493. using agent properties For more information see Building Script Agents on page 448 and Example Type 1 Script on page 466 Use the Agent Status area in the Build Script Agent dashboard to begin editing agent properties To edit the properties of a script agent Note This procedure continues from Deploying Script Agent Packages on page 454 1 On the Build Script Agent dashboard in the Agent Status area select the row containing the script agent whose properties you want to edit 2 Click the Edit Properties button at the bottom The Build Script Agent dashboard refreshes showing the properties of the selected script agent instance Working with vF oglight Tooling 465 Building Script Agents Agent Status Sep 30 2008 11 41 09 AM EDT Selected Agents Agent Name Hostname Type Tags MyScriptAgentMyScriptAgent_on_tor012991 prod que tor012991 prod quest corp MyScriptAgent This agent is currently using properties for MyScriptAgent agents a Modify these properties for this agent only a Modify the properties for all MyScriptAgent agents MyScript amp gent Properties Platforms_supported iiinNiT 4 0 Windows2000 Windows2003 WindowsXP Linuxe4 Linux2 6 agentName Esec cmdLine pS mpage purgeDays feo purgeTime Das sts C S xi Back To Agent Status Note The type and range of script agent properties depends on the script that you used to build the agent 3 Click Modify thes
494. utes any data older than one minute is eligible to be aggregated into the five minute roll up period Caution The first period in the retention policy specifies the aggregation that is performed before the raw data is persisted Therefore the Age determines how long raw samples remain in memory before being persisted In order to constrain the server s memory usage the Age specified for the first roll up period should not be too large Settings larger than 30 minutes should be carefully considered Caution The Roll up Period of the first retention policy period determines the amount of the initial aggregation If you do not want any aggregation to be performed this can be set to 0 ms If not set to zero this setting should not be too small as it increases the amount of processing performed by the server A setting smaller than 30 seconds should be carefully considered For metrics the aggregation retains the count minimum maximum sum average and standard deviation of the aggregated values For other observation types aggregation is a sampling process that retains the latest value per time slice The default roll up period is 15 minutes therefore any raw data older than 15 minutes is rolled up to the next period To access the Manage Retention Policies dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigation panel is open To open
495. vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Setting Active Directory Sun Java Systems Novell Directory Server eDirectory OpenLDAP Parentgroup memberOf attribute ID Group member uniqueMember member attribute for nested group searching Maximum 15 level of group nesting LDAP search 10000 timeout milliseconds Mode of direct indirect direct group searching Account is false anonymous Java Authentication and Authorization Service 2 Do not change this setting 3Do not change this setting To edit directory settings Note This procedure continues from Accessing the Configure Directory Services Dashboard on page 140 1 Obtain all of the service account information required to edit the settings on the Configure Directory Services dashboard 2 Obtain the correct configurations for each setting Managing Users and Security 145 Configuring Directory Services 3 In the Configure Directory Services dashboard click the Edit button in the lower left corner The Configure Directory Services dashboard refreshes showing a box to the right of each setting Configure Directory Services Apr 18 2008 8 20 37 AM EDT Configure Directory Services ci Nearest LDAP server dap ldapsvr mycompany com 389 Secondary LDAP server URL idap backupldapsvr mycompany com 389 Distinguished name of the service account Password Confirm Password LDAP query
496. ved Metrics dashboard appears in the display area 334 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide sera Pae be Neem tantea tae Seed ee Hees entor Same Cheer fers berms tee Some emed etre tape os ih ed oe ete A ttt See 3 To sort the list of derived metrics by their name or scope click the Derived Metric Name or Derived Metric Scope column headings as required 4 Optional Filter the list of derived metrics To show only the derived metrics whose name matches a particular text pattern in the Derived Metric Name box at the top type the text pattern The Manage Derived Metrics dashboard refreshes showing only the derived metrics whose name matches the specified text pattern To show only the derived metrics whose scope matches a particular text pattern in the Derived Metric Scope box at the top type the text pattern The Manage Derived Metrics dashboard refreshes showing only the derived metrics whose scope matches the specified text pattern To show only the derived metrics that belong to a particular cartridges in the Cartridge Name box at the top type the cartridge name The Manage Derived Metrics dashboard refreshes showing only the rules that come with the specified cartridge To clear the filters click Clear Filters Working with Data 335 Working with Derived Metrics The Manage Derived Metrics dashboard refreshes showing the list of all variables o mnt tens ba teemad ee ee meme ee
497. ver machine 2 Ensure that PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH amp ORACLE_HOME are all set correctly On Windows systems a Open a Windows Explorer window and right click on My Computer b Select Properties The System Properties window is displayed Setting Up vF oglight 93 Backing Up Upgrading and Restoring vFoglight c Click the Advanced tab and click Environment Variables The Environment Variables window is displayed 94 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Lnvironment Variables q x M User variables for kupas TEMP CADoomens and Settings WUlupasiLoc ime Co Doouments and Settings LLupesiLox ton e oe varisble LE U Comspec CAWINDOW SAs ystemIzimd exe FR_NO_HIOST_C NO NUMBER OF P 2 oO Windows NT Path CAWINDOWS system32 C WINDOWS xl m e ow Ce je d Visually inspect the values associated with the PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH amp ORACLE_HOME variables 3 Export the Oracle database Use the following syntax in the Oracle command shell cd SORACLE_HOME bin exp lt db_usr gt lt db_pwd gt lt ORACLE_SID gt file lt export_filename gt dbdump A dbdump file is created The backup of the Oracle database is now complete To back up a MySQL database using MySQL commands 1 Log in to the MySQL server machine 2 Export the MySQL database Use the following syntax in the MySQL command shell mysqldump
498. verity Level Variables Condition D Emone AA c Click the Condition Editor button The Condition Editor dialog box appears Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry Working with Rules Expression Editor amp Registry Variable Name AvailabilityCritical AvailabilityFatal AvailabilityTarget Availability VYarning BaselineF actor BSM URL CapacityCritical CapacityFatal CapacityVVarning CATALYST_URL CPUCritical CPUFatal CPUYVarning Type Double Double Double Double Double String Integer Integer Integer String Integer Integer Integer Global Default 85 0 70 0 95 0 95 0 2 0 95 98 90 http TORO1 2991 prod quest c 80 30 70 d Inthe Condition Editor dialog box open the Metric Property tab 319 320 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide Cone Condition Editor z E Registry Variable se Metric Property Choose Metric or Property a gt Scoping Topology Processor Child Topology Windows_Processor Other Topology Agent AgentHeatthState AgentState AggregateModelinstance AggregateModelRoot AlarmChangeType AlarmRuleBased View Insert Close e On the Metric Property tab in the left pane in the Scoping Topology area click Processor Tip The Scoping Topology area shows the rule scope Processor that you defined in step 1 f The pane on the right refreshes showing the instances and metrics for the selected
499. ween 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted e Select the Duration hh mm option and specify the hour and minute of the duration time Note The End Time hh mm boxes appear disabled when you specify the Duration hh mm option Start Date 14 Augus z 2008 EJ C End Timefhh mm f D Start Timefhhimm N4 0 F Whole Day g Dwrationfjhh mm 0 0 Tip The Hour box accepts the values between 0 and 24 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 24 negative values are not accepted The Minute box accepts the values between 0 and 59 Any positive values outside that range are automatically adjusted to 59 negative values are not accepted If you want the schedule to occur for the entire day select the Whole Day check box The Start Time hh mm End Time hh mm and Duration hh mm boxes appear disabled Schedule Name My Schedule Description Comments Start Date 14 2008 End Timefhh mn i F z Duration hh mm i 0 Start Time hh mm fi Whole Day 444 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide 4 Specify the recurrence pattern e To have the schedule occurring on a specified day of the month at the rate of one or more months in the Recurrence Pattern area ensure that the By Date option is selected and then specify the day of the month and the rate at which it occurs Tip The
500. with schedule definitions 409 Schedule Confirmation dialog box 414 Step 1 Create Schedule Schedule Name and Description view 408 Step 2 Create Schedule Details of Schedule view 410 411 Step 3 Create Schedule Schedule Added view 411 Create Schedule node in navigation panel 408 Create Threshold dashboard 42 361 362 363 364 adding bounds to metric threshold levels 364 creating thresholds 361 defining thresholds 362 selecting metrics and levels in thresholds 363 Create Threshold node in navigation panel 362 Current Statistics view 45 46 47 Currently Licensed Capabilities view 48 514 vF oglight Administration and Configuration Guide D dashboards Add Topology Type 40 42 329 330 331 Administration 39 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Agent Adapters 502 Agent Blackouts 179 180 182 Selected Agents dialog box 181 182 Agent Hosts 44 Agent Properties 44 168 169 170 171 172 173 175 177 501 Agent Status 38 45 161 461 502 Agent Operation dialog box 461 462 463 Create Agent dialog box 459 Create Agent Results dialog box 459 460 Build ScriptAgent 41 449 451 452 453 454 455 457 458 464 466 Build Script Agent dialog box 453 454 Create Agent dialog box 458 Deploy Agent Package dialog box 455 456 457 Cartridge Inventory 39 45 46 150 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 Cartridge Confirmation dialog box 159 160 161 View Cartridge Details view 152 Check Registry Value 209 Show colum
501. with vFoglight Rules and Registry 303 Working with Rules Defining Rule Level Variables In addition to vFoglight registry variables and severity level variables you can define rule level variables If you are creating or editing a multiple severity rule you can define a rule level variable and reference it in expressions of different severities in the rule definition There are two types of rule level variables e Expressions An expression is used to retrieve data It can contain a registry variable or a function e Messages A message is typically a text string that can include other severity level variables displaying dynamically supplied data about your monitored system For example Severity Level Variables Name Value Type varl scope get agent host name Expression var2 CPU_Utilization Expression var3 Run_Queue_Length Expression Text varl CPU Utilization Message Subject CPU Utilization is at var2 and the number Message of process in the run queue is var3 A CPU Bottleneck is being detected on varl Check the top processes using the Top_CPU_Table to determine which processes are the greatest contributors to CPU Loads or follow the vFoglight online help to find out if the system is CPU constrained Please use the following URL to obtain alarm details foglight_rule_alarm_link For more information about vFoglight registry variables see Working with vFoglight Registry Variables on pag
502. words must contain both alphabetic and numeric characters e 3 Passwords must contain at least one upper case letter lower case letter and numeric character as well as at least one character that is not alphanumeric Type a security level into the User password complexity level and Administrator password complexity level boxes as required By default the complexity level for internal users passwords is 2 The default complexity level for the users with the Security role is set to 3 Note Administrators passwords cannot be set to complexity level 1 To restore the default values click Restore Defaults 4 Click Save The Configure Password Settings dashboard refreshes and a message appears in the upper left indicating that your changes have been saved Configure Password Settings Modifications saved Changing Database Credentials If you are using an external database you may experience a situation where the database password for the vFoglight database account has changed for example in case password policies change You can reconfigure vFoglight to start up with a new password by changing the configuration file foglight config and restarting the process foglight database password updated password here Managing Users and Security 139 Configuring Directory Services To avoid compromising the password users must insert an updated encrypted password To change the vFoglight database password 1 Delet
503. x the rule scope is specified as follows WebLogicEJBInstance where name EJB_Instancel and ejb application name MyApplication Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 313 Working with Rules You click the Validate Scope button Y to ensure that the topology type is valid and that you used the correct syntax in the Rule Scope box The rule scope is successfully validated so you click Next to navigate to the Condition Alarms amp Actions tab Specifying conditions After scoping the rule to EJB_Instancel in MyApplication you specify the conditions for the rule on the Condition Alarms amp Actions tab To start the process of setting the condition for the Fatal severity level you click the header for this level on the Condition Alarms amp Actions tab You had previously created a derived metric called transact ionRollbackRate you derived this metric from the raw metric transactionsRolledBackTotalCount so that it returns a rate the total number of transactions that are rolled back per minute On the Condition sub tab for the Fatal level you click the Condition Editor button A to launch the Condition Editor You switch to the Metric Property tab select transactionRollbackRate from the Choose Metric Value list and click Select to insert it into the Condition box You then type gt 10 in this box after the metric name When you finish editing the information in the Condition box the condition is specifi
504. x appears Bundles indicating that a server support bundle is Fully Created Support Bundle Go to Manage Support Bundle dashboard Configure created as illustrated below For more information see Managing Support Bundles on page 75 lick the Following link to go to Support Bundle Page or click on the close icon to stay in Administration Home About the Administration Module 43 Viewing the Administration Dashboard Entry Dashboard Use it to or View Directory Configure View or edit directory services Services Directory For more information see Configuring Services Directory Services on page 139 Password Configure View or edit password settings Settings Password For more information see Configuring Services Password Settings on page 135 e Current Statistics Contains information about the installed cartridges active agents rules users and the vFoglight Management Server configuration e Currently Licensed Capabilities Lists available licenses and their status enabled or disabled e License Information Contains information about one or more installed licenses e Federation Contains information about the server federation e Audited Activities Lists the operations that are invoked on the vFoglight Management Server To view the Administration dashboard Note This procedure continues from Getting Started with the Administration Module on page 32 1 Ensure that the navigati
505. y Code Anguilla Web Address WwWw Dell com ai E Mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales la techsupport dell com toll free 800 335 0031 Antigua and Barbuda Web Address E Mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales www Dell com ag la techsupport dell com 1 800 805 5924 Aomen Technical Support Dell Dimension Dell Inspirion Dell Optiplex Dell Lattitude and Dell os TM Precision Servers and Storage 0800 105 0800 105 Argentina Buenos Aires Web Address Intemational Access E Mail Address for Desktop Portable Computers Code 00 E Mail Address for Servers and EMC Storage Country Code 54 Products City Code 11 Customer Service Technical Support Technical Support Services Sales Aruba e TESS E Mail Address Technical Support Customer Service Sales www dell com ar la techsupport dell com la_enterprise dell com toll free 0 800 444 0730 toll free 0 800 444 0733 toll free 0 800 444 0724 0 800 444 3355 Www Dell com aw la techsupport dell com toll free 800 1578 Australia Sydney Web Address ere Contact Dell Web Address International Access Code 0011 Technical Support Customer Service Sales Country Code 61 City Code 2 support ap dell com support ap dell com contactus 13DELL 133355 Austria Vienna International Access Web Address E Mail Address Support euro dell com Tech_support_central_eur
506. y variable into the rule condition or derived metric expression Note This procedure continues from Editing conditions and expressions on page 482 1 In the display area place the cursor in the Condition box rules or Expression box derived metrics where you want to insert the variable 2 Inthe Condition Editor rules or Expression Editor derived metrics dialog box ensure that the Registry Variable tab is open 3 In the Registry Variable tab select a variable from the list and click Insert The dialog box closes and the Condition rules or Expression derived metrics box refreshes showing the newly added variable From here you can proceed to Validating conditions or expressions on page 490 Inserting metrics and topology object properties The Metric Property tab in the Condition Editor rules and Expression Editor derived metrics dialog box lists the metrics and topology object properties that are available based on the scope of the rule or derived metric This tab allows you to navigate through lists of topologies metrics and instances associated with the rule The initial view of this tab lists three groups of topology types Scoping Topology Shows a single scoping topology type included in this category If the rule or derived metric is not scoped this area is empty e Child Topology Lists the descendents of the scoped topology type e Other Topology Lists the following topology types
507. yHost 0 MS Client Name MS Appendix vFoglight Client Reference 507 Command Line Interface Agent Types Client ID MyHost SPI MyHost 0 Client Name SPI MyHost 0 Agent Types Windows_System WebMonitor AppMonitor LogFilter Installer IDs Installer IDs help deploy new agent packages to remote hosts Installer IDs identify agent managers that are capable of installing agent packages on a remote machine It is possible to have several such installers within one vFoglight Agent Manager so installer IDs are more complex than vFoglight Agent Manager IDs The vFoglight Agent Manager installer ID uses the following syntax HostName SP1I HostName 0 SpilInstaller admin In general each remote installer is capable of handling an agent package of one type The type of agent package is specified in the respective cartridge manifest file but is not visible directly through the command line interface However agent package types affect the results of the agent packages command Given a vFoglight Agent Manager ID as a parameter the agent packages command checks the installers that are available on the vFoglight Agent Manager and returns IDs for all agent packages that can be handled by at least one installer on the vFoglight Agent Manager C Vizioncore vFoglight bin gt fglemd usr foglight pwd foglight cmd agent packages clientid tor012991 prod quest corp cf238d96 3a56 45d6 a33e b88bb7d4f 55 Client ID tor01299
508. your script to the lt vfoglight_home gt scripts directory on the vFoglight Management Server Working with vFoglight Rules and Registry 315 Working with Rules 2 Open the rule for editing and navigate to the Action tab of the severity level for which you want to define the actions 3 Add an entering ScriptAction and edit its parameters a If your script has one or more arguments use the Argument 1 10 parameters to specify the arguments value b If you want the script to run against a particular topology object use the Script object id parameter to specify the object s ID c Use the Script name parameter to specify the script name 4 Return to the Action tab 5 Add an entering Remote Command Action that is to be executed on a monitored host and edit its parameters a Use the HostName parameter to specify the name of the monitored host machine b Use the RemoteWorkingDir parameter to specify the absolute path on the remote host in which you want the command to run c Use the COMMAND_LINE parameter to specify the command that you want to run remotely along with any options or arguments if applicable 6 Return to the Action tab and save your changes to the rule When the rule enters the severity state that includes newly defined actions it executes those actions as specified Example Creating Rules with Different Topology Types In this example you will create two rules Processor Load and Host Processor Load For

Dell Vizioncore Configuration manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents